HANDBOOK

ON
INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS
PART 1

BUREAU
MANAK

f3HAAiF9
&!!t:sHAH
NkW DELHI 110002

STANDARDS
ZAFAR

MARG

SP 29 (Part

FIRST
FIRST

1):1985

PUBLISHED
MARCH
1987
REPRINT
MARCH
1992

@BUREAU

OF INDIAN

UDC

621.88(021)

ISBN

81-7061-003-6

PRICE

STANDARDS

Rs 500.00

PRINTED
IN INDIA
AT KAPOOR
ART PRESS, A-38/3 MAYAPURI,
NEW DELHI
AND PUBLISHED
BY
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS,
NEW DELHI 110002

110064

PREFACE
The Indian Standards
Institution
(ISI) is the national standards
body working
on
standardization
;n the country. Set up in 1947, its object is to promote the development
and adoption of standards on national and international
basis with a view to facilitate
national
and international
exchange
of goods and services.
The standards
play an
important role in ensuring human safety and health, to safeguard consumers
interests
and also have significant
bearing on the national
and world economy.
To make available
the benefits of Indian
introduced
its certification
marks
scheme
(Certification
Marks) Act 7952, as amended
this Act quality goods conforming
to Indian
This mark is the third party guarantee
for
granted to the manufacturers
using reliable
subject to overall supervision
by ISI.

standards
to the common
man, ISI has
under
the Indian
Standard
Institution
by the Amendment
Act, 7967. According to
Standards
carry the ISI Certification
Mark.
quality of the marked goods. Licences are
methods of production
and quality control

At international
level, ISI represents
India on the International
Organization
for
Standardization
( ISO) and the International
Electrotechnical
Commission
( IEC). ISI
participates
in most of the technical committees
of IS0 and all the technical committees
of IEC.
While continuing
with the task of standardization,
which is a dynamic process, ISI has
already published
national standards
totalling over 11 000 on wide range of subjects.
Indian standards
are generally
published
in booklet form in A-4 and A-5 sizes for any
specific product/aspect.
A large cross-section
of the users of these standards have often
expressed
their desire to have Indian
Standards
in certain
areas
in the form of
comprehensive
handbooks.
It is felt that these handbooks will provide easy reference
and also make Indian Standards
more easily accessible to a larger public. Further, the

handbooks shall also help the user in understanding the provisions

which will enable them to put the standards to better use.

of the standards

In view of the above, Indian Standards Institution is bringing out a series of handbooks
in certain specific areas and the Handbook on Industrial Fasteners is one of this series.

(iii)

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

INTRODUCTION
A fasteners
is a mechanical
device used for holding two or more bodies in definite
positions with respect to each other. The fasteners assume great importance as most of
the engineering
equipments
and machinery
are, today, made up of many assemblies,
which
use fasteners to hold various components
together.
Based on the application
intended,
fastener
receives
varying
degree
of built-in
precision
and engineering
capability.
This has been adequately
covered
in the various
national
standards
on
fasteners.
Although,
fasteners
are low cost items in the assemblies
when
compared
with the total cost of equipment,
their importance
cannot be under-estimated
because of
the functional
role they play. The fasteners
have a wide application
in the entire gamut
of industry.
No wonder,
it is said that a fastener
is a connective
tissue of the industrial
copus. A large cross-section
of the users of the standards
have often expressed
their
desire
to have Indian
Standards
available
in a comprehensive
form and hence, this
Handbook
on Industrial
Fasteners.
The Handbook
on Industrial
Fasteners
is one of the series of handbooks
to be brought
out by Indian Standards
Institution.
Once published,
this handbook
shall fulfil the long
felt need for availability
of Indian
Standards
on fasteners
and related
subjects
in
comprehensive
form.
The Handbook
on Industrial
Fasteners
is being published
in three parts. Part 1 covers
standards
on basic features
of fasteners,
technical
supply conditions
and raw materials
for fasteners.
However,
the standards
on general
engineering
materials
in use in the
fasteners
industry
have not been covered.
Besides,
Part 1 also covers
few general
engineering
standards
and other
standards
in the related
field.
Part

2 covers

the

product

Part 3 covers standards

set-collars,
etc.
The national
three
Sectional
EDC 27 -

standards

on rivets,

on

pins,

standards
on fasteners
Committees
:
Bolts,

Nuts

and

EDC 70 -Screw

Threads

EDC 71 -Rivets

(since

bolts,

nails,
have

Fasteners

merged

with

screws

studs,

keys and key-ways,

been

formulated

nuts

totters,

mainly

1 Engineering

EDC 1 I

Machine

EDC 12

Hand

EDC

EDC 20

Drawings

Tools

Tools

Rolling

EDC 43

Engineering

Meterology

EDC 44

Transmission

Devices

Bearings

EDC 50

Mining

EDC 61

Conveyors,

EDC 74

Aircraft

EDC 15

Builders

MCPD

19

and

1 Metal

SMDC

5 Wrought

Space

Hoists

and

Vehicles

Hardware

Packaging

SMDC

Vertical

of

Engineering

Standards
Steel

Products

circlips

by the

and

following

27)

Standards

EDC 39

washers.

Accessories

As an aid to understanding
and application
of the work of the above
Committees
as well as to cover other standards
on fasteners,
standards
included
from the work of the following
Sectional
Committees:
EDC

and

Goods

Bucket

Elevators

three
have

Sectional
also been

SMDC

IO

Lrgnt

Metals

SMDC

11

Copper

SMDC

17

Foundry

SMDC

19 Alloy

and

Steels

and

Their

Copper

and

Alloys

Alloys

Special

Steels

The Handbook
is a compilation
of the national
standards
in the field of industrial
fasteners.
Wherever
practicable,
corrections
and amendments
to the standards
have
been incorporated
in the text.
The A-4 size standards
have been reproduced
as it is, whereas
A-5 size standards
have been recomposed
to match the style and format of A-4 size standards in order to
have uniform
presentation.
The Handbook has been divided into different sections each one covering a group of
standards
on a specific type or aspect of fasteners.
The standards
in each section are
arranged
in numerical
order.The keyword (descriptors)
index is provided at the end for
easy location of a standard
if the subject is known to the user. Numerical
index is
provided for the Handbook for easy location of a specific standard,
number of which is
known to the user.
This
Handbook
contains
standards
published
up to March
1987.
However,
standardization
being a dynamic and continuous
process, users of the Handbook should
take into account the fact that published standards are subject to review and possible
revision.
It is pointed out that only latest available
edition is the valid standard.

(vi)

CONTENTS
SECTION

GENERAL

IS : 2-1960

Rules

ENGINEERING

for Rounding

STANDARDS

off Numerical

Values

(revised)

IS : 2102( Part 1 )-1980

General Tolerances
for Dimensions
and Form
and Position:
Part 1 General Tolerances
for Linear Angular
Dimensions
(second revision )
IS : 3403-1981

Dimensions

for

Knurls

(first

11

revision)

IS : 3406( Part 1 )-1986

Dimensions
for Countersinks
Part 1 Countersinks
(second revision)

and Counterbores:

18

IS : 3406( Part 2)-1986

Part 2 Counterbores

and Counterbores.

23

IS : 3457-1987
( first revision
IS : 8000( Part

Dimensions
for
(second revision)

Radii for

Rounding

Countersinks

for General

Engineering

Purposes

1 )-1985

Drawings:
Part
and Appropriate

Geometrical

1 Tolerancing
Geometrical

Tolerancing

of Form,
Definitions

IS : 8000( Part 3)-1985

Part 3 Dimensioning

for Technical

Geometrical
Tolerancing
for Technical
Drawings:
and Tolerancing
of Profile (first revision)

60

Drawings:

IS : 8536-1977

Dimensioning

of fasteners

IS : 8537-1977

Nomenclature

and Terminology

for

SCREW THREADS

IS : 2186-1967
IS : 2334-1975
( first revision

Dimensions
Gauging

Features

AND

of Fasteners

GAUGING

for External
Practice

for

75
85

Metric

121

PRACTICE

Interference

IS0

96

of Fasteners

Fit Threads

Screw

123

Threads

128

IS : 4218( Part 1 )-1976

Design Profiles ( first

Screw

Threads:

IS : 4218( Part 2)-1976

IS0 Metric Screw
Pitch Combinations
(first revision )

Threads

IS0 Metric
revision )

IS : 4218( Part 3)1976

IS0 Metric Screw Threads
Dimensions
for Design Profiles (first revision)
IS : 4218( Part 4)-1976
System ( first revision
IS : 4218( Part 5)-1979
( first rkvision )
IS : 4218( Part 6)-1978
for Commercial
Bolts
( first revision )
976

65

73

TERMINOLOGY
Terminology

IS : 8141-l

Run-Out,
54

IS : 8535-1977

SECTION

and

Drawings:

IS : 8000( Part 4)-1976

Geometrical
Tolerancing
for Technical
Part 4 Practical Examples of Indications
on Drawings.
8

29

for Technical

Orientation,
Location
(first revision)

IS : 8000( Part 2)-1976

Geometrical
Tolerancing
Part 2 Maximum
Material
Principle

SECTION

27

Part

1 Basic

and

147

: Part 2 Diameter

153

: Part 3 Basic

157

IS0

Metric

Screw

Threads:

Part 4 Tolerancing

165

IS0

Metric

Screw

Threads:

Part 5 Tolerances

180

IS0 Metric Screw Threads:

and Nuts (Diameter
Range

Tolerances

for Screw

Threads
(vii)

Used

Part 6 Limits of Sizes

1 to 52 mm)
in Aeronautics

192

200

SECTION

SUPPLY

TECHNICAL

Supply

IS : 451-l 972
Technical
( second revision )
IS : 1367( Part 1 )-1980
Steel Fasteners:
Part
(second revision )

(THREADED

CONDITIONS
Conditions

for

Wood

FASTENERS

203
205

Screws

Technical
Supply
Conditions
for Threaded
1 Introduction
and General
Information

207

IS : 1367( Part 2)-l 979

Technical
Supply Conditions
for Threaded
Steel Fasteners:
Part 2 Product Grades and Tolerances
(second revision)

210

IS : 1367( Part 3)-1979

Technical
Supply Conditions
for Threaded
Steel Fasteners:
Part 3 Mechanical
Properties
and Test Methods
for Bolts, Screws
and Studs with Full Loadability
(second
revision)

229

IS : 1367( Part 5 )-1980

Technical
Supply Conditions
for Threaded
Steel Fasteners:
Part 5 Mechanical
Properties
and Test Methods
for
Set Screws
and Similar
Threaded
Fasteners
not Under Tensile
Stresses

242

IS : 1367( Part 6)-1980

Technical
Supply Conditions
for Threaded
Steel Fasteners:
Part 6 Mechanical
Properties
and Test Methods
Nuts with Specified
Proof Loads (second
revision )

248
for

IS : 1367( Part 7)-1980

Technical
Supply Conditions
for Threaded
Steel Fasteners:
Part 7 Mechanical
Properties
and Test Methods for Nuts
Without
Specified
Proof-Loads
(second
revision)

255

IS : 1367( Part 9)-l 979

Technical
Steel Fasteners:
Part 9 Surface
Studs (second
revision )

257

Supply Conditions
for Threaded
Dicontinuities
on Bolts, Screws

and

IS : 1367( Part 10)-l 979

Technical
Supply Conditions
For Threaded
Steel Fasteners:
Part 10 Surface Discontinuities
on Nuts (second revision)

266

IS : 1367( Part 12)-1981

Steel Fasteners:
Part
(second revision 1

275

12

Technical
Supply Conditions
for Threaded
Phosphate
Coatings
on Threaded
Fasteners

IS : 1367(Part
13)-1983
Technical
Steel Fasteners:
Part 13 Hot-dip
Fasteners
(second
revision )

279

Supply Conditions
for Threaded
Galvanized
Coatings on Threaded

283

IS : 1367( Part 16)-l 979

Technical
Supply Conditions
for Threaded
Steel Fasteners:
Part 16 Designation
System and Symbols
(second revision )
IS : 1367( Part 18)-1979
Steel Fasteners:
Part
IS : 7178-1982
( first revision
SECTION

Technical
18 Marking

Technical

Supply

Supply Conditions
for Threaded
and Mode of Delivery (second revision
Conditions

IS : 1368-1987
( third revision

Dimensions

for

Ends

297
of Bolts

and

Screws

299

)
of Screw

IS : 1821-1987
( third revision

for

Dimensions

Thread

Clearance

Runouts

Holes

for

the

Head

and
Bolts

Undercuts
and

Screws

302
308

)
Dimensions

for Radii

Under

of Bolts and Screws

310

IS : 4206-1987
Dimensions
for Nominal
Lengths
for Bolts, Screws
and Studs (first revision)
Dimensions

for

Depth

of Holes

IS : 9519-1980
Dimensions
Bolts and Nuts

for

Width

Across

IS : 9549-1980
Dimensions
Slots for Bolts.

for

Split

IS : 11362-1985
Screws

292

OF FASTENERS

IS : 1369-1982
Dimensions
( second revision )

IS : 4499-1968

Screws

FEATURES

IS : 4172-1987
( first revision

for Tapping

288

Head

Configuration

Pin
and

for
Flats

Holes,
Gauging

(viii)

and

Thread

Lengths

315

Studs
for

Wire

Hexagon
Holes

312

and

of Countersink

Head

317

Head

320

Head

323

SECTION

RAW

327

MATERIALS

IS : 740-1977
Specification
for
Alloy
Rivet Stock for General
(second
revision
)

Wrought
Aluminium
and
Engineering
Purposes

IS : 1148-1982
Specification
( up to 40 mm Diameter)

for Hot-rolled
for Structural

IS : 1149-1982
Specification
Structural
Purposes
(third

for High
revision)

IS : 1284-1975
Specification
Screw
Stock (for General
( second revision )

for Wrought
Engineering

IS : 1673-1984
Specification
(second revision )
IS : 1812-1982
ture of Wood
IS : 1990-1973
Boilers
(first

for

for

IS : 2255-1977
Specification
Manufacture
of Machine
(second
revision
)
IS : 2591-l
(second

IS : 3577-1967
Alloys,
Rivet,
IS : 4882-1979
for Use in

for

Specification
revision
)

for

Mild

333

Steel

Specification
Bearing
Industry

Steel

Hot-rolled

IS : 7557 1982
Specification
for
the Manufacture
of Cold-forged
G RAW MATERIALS
FOR AIRCRAFTS

Cold

Wire
and

Bars

Steel

for

and

341

Quality

346

Manufac-

348

for

352

the

for

Rivet

Threaded
Bars

356

and

Steel

Copper

GENERAL

359
362

Aluminium

366

Wire

and

Components
Ship

for

for

Copper

Steel Wire ( up to 20
Rivets
(firsf
revision)
AND

Bolt

Bars

337

for

Heading

Stay

Aluminium

Wrought

Bars

Wire Rod for the

Heading
Process)

for Low Carbon

(first
revision)
for

Rivet
Alloy

Wire,

Rivet

Mild

Steel

Aluminium
Purposes)

Steel

Diameters
of Wrought
Bolt and Screw
Stock

IS : 5053-1969
Dimensions
Rods for Fasteners

SECTION
RIVETS

Steel Rivet Bars

Purposes
(third
revision)

for Mild Steel

Screws
(by Cold

982
Dimensions
revision
)

IS :_3298-1981
Building
(first

329

Tensile

Specification
for Carbon
Screws
(second
revision)
Specification
revision
)

Aluminium

mm)

Rivets

368

Alloy

372

for

373

REQUIREMENTS

FOR

377

IS : 8513-1977
Specification
Rivets for Aircraft
Purposes

for Alumrnrum
(Alloy
55000

Alloy

Wire

for

Cold

Forged

379

IS : 8514-1977
Specification
Rivets for Aircraft
Purposes

for Aluminium
(Alloy
24 530

Alloy

Wire

for

Cold

Forged

381

IS : 8515-1977
Specification
Rivets for Aircraft
Purposes

for Aluminium
(Alloy
19 500

Alloy

Wire

for

Cold

Forged

384

IS : 8936-1978
Specification
Rivets for Aircraft
Purposes

for Aluminium
(Alloy
24 350

Alloy

Wire

for

Cold

Forged

386

IS : 8937-1978
Specification
Rivets for Aircraft
Purposes

for Aluminium
(Alloy
22 500

Alloy

Wire

for

Cold

Forged

389

IS : 8938-1978
Specification
Rivets for Aircraft
Purposes

for Aluminium
Alloy
(Alloy
24 345)

Wire

for

Cold

Forged

392

IS : 9089-1979
Aluminium

General
Requirements
for
Wrought
Alloys
for Aircraft.

SECTION

SAMPLING,

IS : 1387-1967
General
Materials
( first revision
IS : 2614-1969

Method

IS : 6821-l

Methods

973

INSPECTIONS
Requirements

Rivets

AND
for

the

of Aluminium

and

SUPPLY
Supply

395

401
of

Metallurgical

403

revision)

405

)
for
for

Sampling
Sampling

of

Fasteners

Non-threaded

WI

(first

Fasteners

414

IS : 8474-1977
Procedure for Inspection and Testing of Aluminium
and Aluminium Alloy Wires (for Rivets) for Aircraft Purposes

421

IS : 9141-l

425

SECTION

979
J

Code of Practice for Packaging

429

MISCELLANEOUS

IS : 4072-1975
Specification
( first revision )

for Steel for Spring Washers

IS : 5369-1975
General Requirements
Washers ( first revision )
IS : 5957-1970
Dimensions
Tapping Screws
Nomenclature
IS : 6293-1981
Screws ( first revision )
IS : 7478-l

of Fasteners

985

Dimensions

IS : 7479-1985
Specification
( first revision )
IS : 7800-1975
Dimensions
Cutting Tapping Screws

and Lock

434

Forming

438

Tools for Nuts and

439

for Plain Washers

for Screw Threads

of the Assembly
for Cross Recesses

for Thread

(first

for Recess Penetration

for Screw Threads

revision)
Gauges

and Ends for Thread

IS : 8563-1977
Specification for Half Round Mild
the Manufacture
of Split Pins
SUBJECT

Steel Wire for

INDEX

NUMERICAL

431

INDEX

LIST OF IS0 STANDARDS ON BASIC FEATURES AND

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS OF FASTENERS

451
453
456
459
463
465
466

SECTION
GENERAL

ENGINEERING

A
STANDARDS

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS : 2-1960

Indian

Standard

RULES FOR ROUNDING OFF

NUMERICAL VALUES
( Revised )

Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard (Revised) was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 27 July 1960, after the
draft finalized by the Engineering Standards Sectional Committee had been approved by the Engineering
Division Council.
0.2 To round off a value is to retain a certain number of figures, counted from the left, and Wop the others so
as to give a more rational form to the value. As the result of a test or of a calculation is generally rounded off
for the purpose of reporting or for drafting specifications, it is necessary to prescribe rules for rounding off
numerical values as also for deciding on the number of figures to be retained.
0.3This standard was originally issued in 1949 with a view to promoting the adoption of a uniform procedure
in rounding off numerical values. However, the rules given referred only to unit fineness of rounding (see 2.3)
and in course of years the need was felt to prescribe rules for rounding off numerical values to fineness of
rounding other than unity. Moreover, it was also felt that the discussion on the number of flgures to be retained as given in the earlier version required further elucidation. The present revision is expected to fulfil these
needs.
0.4 In preparing this standard, reference has been made to the following:
IS : 787-1956 GUIDE FOR INTER-CONVERSIONOF VALUES FROM ONE SYSTEMOF UNITS TO ANOTHER. Indian
Standards

Institution.

: 1953 PRESENTATIONOF NUMERICALVALUES ( FINENESSOF DEPRESSION;RoUNDlNGOFF NUMBERS).

BS1957
British Standards Institution.
AMERICAN STANDARD Z 251.1940
Association.

RULES FOR ROUNDING OFF NUMERICAL VALUES. American

Standards

ASTM DESIGNATION: E 29-50 RECOMMENDEDPRACTICEFOR DESIGNATINGSIGNIFICANT PLACESIN SPECIFIED

VALUES.American Society tar Testing and Materials.
JAMESW. SCARBOROUGH.Numerical

Mathematical

Analysis. Baltimore. The John Hopkins Press, 1955.

1. Scope

1.1 This standard prescribes rules for rounding off numerical values for the purpose of reporting results of a
test, an analysis, a measurement or a calculation, and thus assisting in drafting specifications. It alsomakes
recommendations as to the number of figures that should be retained in course of computation.
2. Terminology
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following

definitions

shall apply.

2.1 Number of Decimal Places-A

value is said to have as many decimal places as there are number of

figures in the value, counting from the first figure after the decimal point and ending with the last figure on
the right.

Examples
Value
0.029 50
21.029 5
2 000.000 001
291 .oo
10.32 X lo3
(see Note 1)

Decimal Places
5
4
6
;

Note l-For
the purpose of thisstandard, the expression 10.32 x lo3 StiT3uldbe taken to consist of two parts, the
value proper which is 10.32 and the unit of expression for the value, 103. ,

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2-1960
2.2 Number
significant
right-most

of Significanf Figures-A value is said to have as many significant figures as there are number of
digits ( see Note 2 ) in the value, counting from the left-most non-zero digit and ending with the
digit

in the value.

Examples

Significant Figures
5

Value
0.029 500
0.029 5

:
10

10.029 5

2 000.000 001
5 677.0
567 700
56.77 x lo2
0 056.770
3 900
( see Note 3 )

5
6
4

Note l-Any of the digits, 1,2,3,.........9 occurring in a value shall be a significant digit(s); and zero shall be a significant digit Only when it is preceded by someotherdigit
(exceptingzeroes)on
its left. When appearing in the power of 10
toindicatethemagnitudeoftheunit
in theexpressionofavalue,zeroshallnot
beasignificantdigit.
Note 3-With
a view to removing any ambiguity
regarding the significance
of the zeroes at the end in a value like
3 900, it would be always desirable to write the value in the power-of-ten
notation. For example, 3 900 may be written
as 3.9x 10 3, 3.90x10 3 or 3.900x10 3 depending
upon the last figure(s) in the value to which it is desired to impart
significance.

2.3 Fineness of Rounding-The

unit to which a value is rounded off.

For example, a value may be rounded to the nearest 0.000 01, 0.000
0.07, 1, 2.5, 10, 20, 50, 100 or any other unit depending on the fineness

2,O.OOO 5,0.001,0.002
desired.

5,0.005,0.01,

3. Rules for Rounding

3.0 The rule usually followed in rounding off a value to unit fineness of rounding is to keep unchanged the
last figure retained when the figure next beyond is less than 5 and to increase by 1 the last figure retained
when the figure next beyond is more than 5. There is diversity of practice when the figure next beyond the
last figure retained is 5. In such cases, some computers round up, that is, increase by I, the last figure retained; others round down, that is, discard everything
beyond the last figure retained. Obviously, if the retained value is always rounded up or always rounded down, the sum and the average of a series of values
so rounded will be larger or smaller than the corresponding
sum or average of the unrounded
values.
However, if rounding off is carried out in accordance
with the rules stated in 3.1 in one step ( see 3.3 ), the
sum and the average of the rounded values would be more nearly correct than in the previous cases ( see
Appendix A).
3.1 Rounding Off to Unit Fineness-In
following
rules shall be followed:

case the fineness

of rounding

Rule /-When

the figure next beyond the last figuie

in the last place retained shall be left unchanged.

figure

is unity in the last place retained,

or place

to be retained

the

is less than 5, the

Rule //-When
followed

the figure next beyond the last figure or place to be retained is more than 5 or is 5
by any figures other than zeroes, the figure in the last place retained shall be increased by 1.

Rule ///-When
the figure next beyond the last figure or place to be retained is 5 alone or 5 followed byzeroes only, the figure in the last place retained shall be (a) increased by I if it is odd and (b) left unchanged if even (zero would be regarded as an even number for this purpose).
Some examples

illustrating

the application

TABLE 1 EXAMPLES

Value

8.725
19.205
0.549 9
0.650 1
0.049 50

OFF VALUES TO UNIT FINENESS

a.1

1
r

3.455
13.545 001

OF ROUNDING

1.

Fineness of Rounding
A

7.260 4
14.725

of Rules I to iii are give in Table

0.001

0.01

Rounded
Value
7
15
3
14
9
19
1
1
0

Zr
I
II

Rounded
Value
7.3
14.7

Rule
ii
I

<Rounded
Value

Rule

7.26
14.72

I
Ill(b)

Rounded
Value
7.260
14.725

Ill(a)
II

3.455
13.545

Ill(b)

8.725

Rule7
I
-

3.5
13.5
8.7

II

3.46

II
II

I
I

13.55
8.72

I
II
II

19.2
0.5
0.7

19.20

I
II

0.55
0.65

Ill(b)
II
I

19.205
0.550
0.650

II
I

0.0

0.05

II

0.050

Ill(a)

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRlAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS

I 2-1960

3.1.1 The rules for rounding laid down in 3.1 may be extended to apply when the fineness of rounding is
0.10, 10,100, 1 000, etc. For example, 2.43 when rounded to fineness 0.10 becomes 2.40. Similarly, 712 and
715 when rounded to the fineness 10 become 710 and 720 respectively.
3.2 Rounding Off to fineness Other than Unity-In
n, the given value shall be rounded off according

case the fineness of rounding is not unity, but, say, it is

to the following rule:

Rule IV-When rounding to a fineness n, other than unity, the given value shall be divided by n. The
quotient shall be rounded off to the nearest whole number in accordance with the rules laid down in
3.1 for unit fineness of rounding. The number so obtained, that is, the rounded quotient, shall then be
multiplied by n to get the final rounded value.
Some examples illustrating

the application

of Rule IV are given in Table 2.

Note cl--The rules for rounding off a value to any fineness of rounding, n, may also be stated in line with those for
unit fineness of rounding (see 3.1) as follows:
Divide the given value by n so that an integral quotient and a remainder are obtained. Round off the value in the
following manner.
a) If the remainder is less than nR, the value shall be rounded down such that the rounded value is an integral
multiple of n.

b) If the remainder is greater than ni2, the value shall be rounded up such that the rounded value is an integral
multiple of n.
c) If the remainder Is exactly equal to n/2, that rounded value shall be chosen which is an integral multiple of 2 n.

TABLE 2 EXAMPLES OF ROUNDING OFF VALUES TO FINENESS

OTHER THAN UNIT
Value

(1)
1.647 6
2.70
2.496 8
1.75
0.687 21
0.875
325
1 025

Fineness of
Rounding, n

Ouotient

Rounded
Ouotient

Final Rounded
Value

(2)

(3) = 0 I/(2)
6.239
13.5
8.322 7
3.5
9.817 3
12.5
6.5
20.5

(4)
6
14
8
4
10
12
6
20

(5) = (2)x(4)
1.6
2.6
2.4
2.0
0.70
0.84
3x102
10x1@

o-2
o-2
o-3
0.5
0.07
0.07
50
50

3.2.1 Fineness of rounding other than 2 and 5 is seldom called for in practice. For these cases, the rules
for rounding may be stated in simpler form as follows:
a) Rounding off to fineness 50,5,0.5, 0.05,0.005, etc.
Rule V-When rounding to 5 units, the given value shall be doubled and rounded off to twice the
required fineness of rounding in accordance with 3.1.1. The value thus obtained shall be halved to get
the final rounded value.
For example, in rounding off 975 to the nearest 50,975 is doubled giving 1 950 which becomes 2 000
when rounded off to the nearest 100; when 2 000 is divided by 2, the resulting number 1 000 is the rounded
value of 975.
b) Rounding off to fineness 20,2,0.2,0.02,0.002,

etc.

Rule VI-When rounding to 2 units, the given value shall be halved and rounded off to half the required fineness of rounding in accordance with 3.1. The value thus obtained shall then be doubled to
get the final rounded value.
For example, in rounding off 2.70 to the nearest 0.2,2.70 is halved giving 1.35 which becomes 1.4 when
rounded off to the nearest 0.1; when 1.4 is doubled, the resulting number 2.8 is the rounded value.
3.3 Successive Rounding-The
final rounded value shall be obtained from the most precise value available
in one step only and not from a series of successive roundings. For example, the value 0.549 9, when rounded to one significant figure, shall be written as 0.5 and not as 0.6 which is obtained as a result of successive
roundings to 0.550,0.55, and 0.6.h is obvious that the most precise value available is nearer to 0.5 and not to
0.6 and that the error involved is less in the former case. Similarly, 0.650 1 shall be rounded off to 0.7 in One
step and not successively to 0.6590.65 and 0.6, since the most precise value available here is nearer to 0.7
than to 0.6 (see also Table 1 ).

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2-1960

Note 5- In those cases where a final rounded value terminates with 5 and it is intended to use it in further computation, it may be helpful to use a + or - sign after the final 5 to indicate whether a subsequent
rounding should
be up or down. Thus 3.214 7 may be written as X215--when
rounded to a fineness of rounding 0.001. If further rounding to 3 significant
figures is desired, this number would be rounded down and written as 3.21 which is in error by
less than half a unit in the last place; otherwise, rounding of 3.215 would have yielded 3.22 which is in error by more
than half a unit in the last place. Similarly, 3.205 4 could be written as 3.205+ when rounded to 4 significant
figures.
Further rounding to 3 significant
figures would yield the value as 3.21.
In case the final 5 is obtained exactly, it would be indicated by leaving the 5 as such without
subsequent rounding the 5 would then be treated in accordance with Rule Ill.

using

+ or - sign. In

4. Number of Figures to be Retained

4.0 Pertinent to the application
of the rules for rounding off is the underlying
decision as to the number of
figures that should be retained in a given problem. The original values requiring to be rounded off may arise
as a result of a test, an analysis or a measurement,
in other words, experimental
results, or they may arise
from computations
involving several steps.
4.1 Experimental
Results-The
number of figures to be retained in an experimental
result, either for the purpose of reporting
or for guiding the formulation
of specifications
will depend on the significance
of the
figures in the value. This aspect has been discussed in detail under 4 of IS: 787-1956 to which reference may
be made for obtaining helpful guidance.
4.2 Computarions-In
computations
involving values of different accuracies,
the problem as to how many
figures should be retained at various steps assumes a special significance
as it would affect the accuracy
of the final result. The rounding off error will, in fact, be injected into computation
every time an arithmetical
operation
is performed.
It is, therefore, necessary to carry out the computation
in such a manner as would
obtain accurate results consistent
with the accuracy of the data in hand.
4.2.1 While it is not possible to prescribe details which may be followed in computations
of various types,
certain basic rules may be recommended
for single arithmetical
operations
which, when followed, will save
labour and at the same time enable accuracy
of original
data to be normally
maintained
in the final
answers.
4.2.2 As a guide to the number of places or figures to be retained in the calculations
involving
operations with rounded or approximate
values, the following
procedures are recommended:

arithmetical

a)

Addifion-The
more accurate values shall be rounded off so as to retain one more place than,the
last significant
figure in the least accurate value. The resulting sum shall then be rounded off to
the last significant
place in the least accurate value.

b)

Subtraction-The
more accurate value (of the two given values) shall be rounded off, before subtraction, to the same place as the last significant
figure in less accurate value; and the result shall
be reported as such ( see also Note 6 ).

c)

Multiplication
and division-The
number of significant
figures retained
in the more accurate
values shall be kept one more than that in the least accurate value. The result shall then be rouhded off to the same number of significant
figures as in the least accurate value.

d)

When a long computation

is carried
rounded at the end of each step so
It is recommended
that, at the end
is required under (a), (b) and (c) ( see

out in several steps, the intermediate

results shall be properly
as to avoid the accumulation
of rounding errors in such cases.
of each step, one more significant
figure may be retained than
a/so Note 7 ).

Nota B-The loss of the significant figures in the subtraction of two nearly equal values is the greatest source of inaccuracy in most computations,
and it forms the weakest link in a chain computation
where it occurs. Thus, if the
values 0.169 52 and 0.166 71 are each correct to 5 significant
figures, their difference
0.000 81, which has only 2
significant
figures, is quite likely to Introduce Inaccuracy In subsequent coinputation.
If, however, the difference
of two values is desired to be correct to k significant
figures and if it is known
beforehand that the first m significant
figures at the left will disappear by subtraction,
then the number of significant
figures to be retained in each of the values shall be m + k ( see Example 4 ).
Note ~--TO ensure a greater
possible certain approximation
of sucrose
tional

by volumetric

degree of accuracy in the computations,

it is also desirable to avoid or defer as long as
operations
like that of the division or square root. For example, in the determination

method,

form as 2Ow, (f2 v, 4,

the expression

v2)1w2 vi viwhlch

Z$($L)

may De oetter

would defer thedivision

evaluated

until the last operation

by taking

its calcula-

of thecalculation.

4.2.3 Examples
Example

Required

to find the sum of the rounded

off values 461.32,381.6,76.854

HANDBOOK

ON

and 4.746 2.

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2-1960
Since the least accurate value 381.6 is known only to the first decimal place, all other values
rounded off to one more place, that is, to two decimal places and then added as shown below:

shall be

461.32
381.6
76.85
4.75
924.52
The resulting sum shall then be reported
is, as 924.5.

to the same decimal

place as in the least accurate

value, that

Example 2
Required to find the sum of the values 28 490,894,657.32,39
39 500 is known to the nearest hundred only.
Since one of the values is known only to the nearest
to the nearest ten and then added as shown below:
2849x
89x
66x
3950x
7694x

500 and 76 939, assuming

hundred,

the other values

shall

that the value

be rounded

off

10
10
10
10
10

14 648 x 10
The sum shall then be reported

to the nearest

hundred

as 1465 x 100 or even as 1.465 x 105.

Example 3
Required to find the difference
figure but no farther.

of 679.8 and 76.365, assuming

that each number

is known

to its last

Since one of the values is known to the first decimal place only, the other value shall also be rounded
off to the first decimal place and then the difference shall be found.
679.8
76.4
603.4
The difference,

603.4, shall be reported

as such.

Example 4
Required

to evaluate

Since@=

e-

@correct

to five significant

figures.

1.587 450 79

L/%&

1.577 973 38

and three significant

figures at the left will disappear
on subtraction,
figures retained in each value shall be 8 as shown below:

the number

of significant

1.587 450 8
1.577 973 4
0.009 477 4
The result, 0.009 477 4, shall be reported

as such (or as 9.477 4 x 10 -3 ).

Example 5
Required

to evaluate

35.21 flgiven

that the numerator

Since the numerator

here is correct
as fi=
1.414. Then,

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

to three

FASTENERS-PART

is correct

significant

to its last figure.

figures,

the denominator

shall

be taken

IS : 2-1960
35.2
___

1.414

and the result shall be reported

Example

= 24.89

as 24.9.

Required

to evaluate

3.781t15.6, assuming

that the denominator

Since the denominator

here is correct to two significant
be taken up to three significant
figures. Thus,

3.78 x 3.14
--

figures,

is true to only two significant

each number

in the numerator

figures.
would

= 2.08.

5.7
The result

shall,

however,

be reported

as 2.1.

APPENDIX
A
( Clause 3.0 )
VALIDITY OF RULES
A-l. The validity of the rules for rounding off numerical values, as given in 3.1, may be seen from the fact that
to every number that is to be rounded down in accordance
with Rule I, there corresponds
a number that is
to be rounded up in accordance
with Rule II. Thus, these two rules establish a balance between rounding
down and up for all numbers other than those that fall exactly midway between two alternatives.
In the latter case, since the figure to be dropped is exactly 5, Rule III, which specifies that the value should be rounded to its nearest even number, implies that rounding shall be up when the preceding figures are 1,3,5, 7,9
and down when they are 0, 2, 4,6,8. Rule III hence advocates a similar balance between rounding up and
down ( see a/so Note 8). This implies that if the above rules are followed in a large.group of values in which
random distribution
of figures occurs, the number rounded up and the number rounded down will be nearly equal. Therefore, the sum and the average of the rounded values will be more nearly correct than would be
the case if all were rounded in the same direction, that is, either all up or all down.
Nota 8- From purely logical considerations, a given value could have as well been rounded to an odd number (and
not an even number as in Rule III) when the discarded figures fall exactly midway between two alternatives. But there
is a practical aspect to the matter. The roundin off a value to an even number facilitates the division of the rounded
value by 2 and the result of such division gives t ! e correct rounding off half the origlnal unrounded value. Besides, the
( rounded ) even values may generally be exactly divisible by many more numbers, even as well as odd, than are the
( rounded ) odd values.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2102(Part

l)-1980

Indian Standard

GENERAL TOLERANCES FOR

DIMENSIONS AND FORM AND POSITION
PART 1 GENERAL TOLERANCES FOR LINEAR AND
ANGULAR DIMENSIONS
(

1. Scope-Specifies
tolerance indications.

the permissible

machining

Second Revision )

variations

in linear

and angular

dimensions

without

1.1 This standard is applicable for all machining processes with chips like turning, milling, etc, and without
chips like drawing, printing, embossing, pipe bending, etc, and is not applicable for productionmethods
like
casting, forging, processing, welding, flame cutting, etc.

111
Tw

2. Terminology-For
the purpose of this specification, the definitions of various terms shall be as given in IS
: 919 ( Part I )-1963 Recommendations for limits and fits for engineering: Part I General engineering (first
revision).
3. Deviations

3.1 Linear Dimensions-Shall

be as given in Table 1.

TABLE l DEVIATIONS FOR LINEAR DIMENSIONS

All dimenslons

Range of Nominal Dlmenslons

Class
of
Devlatlon

Fine
Medium
Coarse
Extra

in millimetres.

coarse

30

120

315

1 000

2 000

120

315

1 000

2 000

4000

8 000

12 000
-

12 000

16 000

f005

zko.05

f0~1

*to15

At-2

f0.3

f0~5

zkO.8

&to1

f0.1

*0*3

*0*5

f0.6

Al.2

*2

f3

zt4

rto2

f0.5

zkO.8

Al.2

f2

&3

*4

f5

h6

&2

f3

&4

f6

fa

*0*5

3.2RadiiandChamfer-Shall

0.2

&I

beasgiven

&I.5

l 5
*7

10

fl2

inTable2.

TABLE 2 DEVIATIONS FOR RADII AND CHAMFERS

All dimensions

Class of
Deviations

Range of Nominal Dimensions

I
-

Above

30

120

30

120

315

*1

*2

*4

*2

zt4

f6

Fine and
medium

Coarse and
extra coarse

ho.2

ON INDUSTRIAL

0.5

Up to and
Including

HANDBOOK

in millimetres.

FASTENERS-PART

0.2

f
fl

0.5

IS :21 OS(Part I)-1980

3.3AngularDimensions-Shall

beasgiven

TABLE 3

inTable3.

DEVIATIONS

FOR ANGULAR

All dimensions

Permissible

Class of
Deviation

on Length of Shorter Side of Angle.

Over 10 to 50

mm per
100 mm

Degiee

in millimetres.

Variations

up to 10

DIMENSIONS

Degree

Over 50 to 120

mm per
100 mm

Degree

Over 120
mm per
100 mm

Degree

mm per
100 mm

Fine and medium

lo

1.8

* 30

o-9

20

0.6

10

0.3

Coarse

l30

2.6

50

l-5

25

0.7

15

0.4

5.2

2O

3.5

fl

l-8

* 30

0.9

Extra

coarse

I
4. Indications in Drawings-In
indications are suggested:

the space provided for the purpose of drawings or otherwise, two methods of

a)

Class of deviation required shall be indicated, for example, Medium IS : 2102, Coarse IS : 2102, etc.

b)

The values of the permissible

tolerance indications.

variations

EXPLANATORY

to be shown in general note for dimensions

without

NOTE

IS : 2102 Allowable deviations for dimensions without specified tolerance ( first revision ) was first
published in 1962 and subsequently revised in 1969, to include the deviation for extra coarse class of accuracy and an appendix covering the applicability and non-applicability of the standard.
At the time of its periodic review, the committee responsible for its preparation, felt it necessary to
revise the specification to be in line with the current international practices. In the present revision the title
has been reworded as the General tolerances for dimensions and form and position and is being issued in
two Darts, namely, Part 1 covering general tolerances for linear and angular dimensions, and Part 2.covering
general tolerances for form and position. The deviations for angular dimension have been altered. The alignment deviation for circular and prismatic components have been covered in Part II. The appendix covering
the applicability and non-applicability
of the standard and also the alignment deviation for prism shaped
with common Iineof symmetry have been excluded.
Indications of the tolerances on drawings have been specified in IS : 8000-1976 Tolerances of form and
of position forengineering drawmgs.
This revision is in conformity with IS0 2768-1973 Permissible machining variations in dimensions
without tolerance indication, however, the values of radii and chamfer given in Table 2 have been derived
from DIN 7168 (Part h-1970 Permissible variation for dimensions without tolerance indication: Part I Variations on length measurements, radii of curvature and chamfers, angular dimensions.

10

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3403-1981

Indian Standard

1
m

DIMENSIONS FOR KNURLS

(First Revision)

1.Scope- Specifies the types and dimensions

2TypesShall be of the following types:
Type RAA-Knurl
with grooves parallel
Type RBL-Left-hand
knurl

for knurls.

to axis

Type RBR-Right-hand
knurl
Type RGE-Left-hand/right-hand
knurl, points raised
Type RGV-Left-hand/right-hand
knurl, points indented
Type RKE-Cross-knurl,
points raised
Type RKV-Cross-knurl,
points indented
2.1 Representation

of Types
Representation

Type

Knurling with grooves parallel to axis

RAA

LQ

RKPIECE

SECTION

AA

--I
A

OETAIL

Left-hand knurling

RBL

SECTION88

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

11

IS : 3403-1981

.*

Type

Representation

<!

Right-hand knurling

RBR
SECTION CC

OETAIL V

Left-hand/Right-hand

knurling, points raised

RGE

SECTIONEE
SECTION DD

Left-hand/Right-h

RGV

SECtrON 00
Cross-knurling,

points raised

RKE

SECTIOHHH

12

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Is : 3403-1981

Representation

Type
Cross-knurling,

points indented

RKV

SECTION

LL

3. Dimensions
3.1 Profile Angle-Profile

angle 01 =90.

3.2 Pitch-P.
0.5, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6 mm.
3.3 Nominal Diameter ~4 -The nominal diameter c& stated in the workshop drawing shall be the outside
diameter of the finished knurl; this dimension is a function of the design
3.4 initial Diameter &-The
initial diameter d2 of the workpiece prior to knurling shall be smaller than the
nominal diameter 4, because the initial diameter undergoes enlargement through displacement of the
material during the knurling operation.
The initial diameter 4 for knurls with profile angle Q = 90 can be calculated
following table, depending on the type of knurl and the size of pitch:

Initial

Type of Knurl

from the formulae in the

Diameter
4

RAA

Knurl with grooves parallel to axis

RBL

Left-hand knurl

RBR

Right-hand knurl

RGE

Left-hand/right-hand

knurl, points raised

RGV

Left-hand/right-hand

knurl, points indented

RKE

Cross-knurl,

points raised

a4-0.67

RKV

Cross-knurl,

points indented

dl-0.33

dl-0.5

dl-0.67

d, -0.33

The factors in the formulae, however, do not take into account the rounding of the grooves resulting
from the knurling operation or the specific properties of the materials to be knurled.
4. Designation-A
cross-knurl, points indented ( Type RKV ) with pitch P = 0.8 mm and conforming
standard shall be designated as:

to this

Knurl RKV 08 IS : 3403

5. Manufacture-In
order to facilitate the selection of knurling wheels according to IS : 6776-1980 Specification for knurling wheels ( first revision )I, the manufacturing methods suitable for each type of knurl are indicated in Appendix A.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

13

IS : 3403-1981

APPENDIX
( Clause

MANUFACTURING

METHODS

Type

A
5 )

USING Knurling Wheel to IS : 6776

Manufacturing Method
Knurl with grooves parallel to axis

KNURL

RAA

f-

RLING WHEEL

AA

RAA
KNURL

RAA
---I

ORKPI

WORKPI

IL_-

KNURLING WHEEL
SWIVELLED
30

Bi_

WHEEL
30

BR

RLING WHEEL
SWIVEL LED 30

AA

SWIVELLEO

Left-hand knurl
KNURL

RBL

RBL
WORKPI

KNURLING WHEEL

14

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Right-hand

knurl

KNURL

: 3403-1981

RBR

RLING WHEEL

BL
ING WHEEL AA

KNURLING

Left-hand/right-hand

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

WHEEL

knurl,

FASTENERS-PART

points

LING WHEEL

GV

LING WHEEL

AA

indented

15

IS : 3403-1981

16

Cross-knurl,

points

raised

Cross-knurl,

points

indented

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :3403-1981
EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard was first issued in 1966. The present revision has been undertaken to take into consideration the latest changes in the corresponding foreign standards. In this revision, the standard
nomenclature knurl has been adopted for all types, since the previous names diamond knurling and
negative diamond knurling were not used consistently, and hence difficulties arose in the choice of tools.
Some types of knurls have been given shorter names, such as left-hand knurl, right-hand knurl, lefthand/right-hand knurl.
The letter symbols assigned to the various types provide both for better differentiation and also yield a
code designation for use in electronic data processing. The letter R differentiates the knurls from the knurling wheels ( see IS : 6776-1980 ), the second letter A, 6, G and K designates the basic type, whilst the third
letter ( A-Parallel
to axis, L-left-hand,
R-right-hand,
E-raised,
V-indented
) marks the direction and
form of the grooves.
The helix angle of Types BR, GE and GV is fixed at a standard value of 30. The profile angle is normally
a=90.
The pitch P= 2 mm has been discontinued because it is scarcely used in practice. Similarly, no attempt
has been made to correlate pitch with workpiece diameter, since recommendations made earlier have not
proved suitable in all fields of application and hence their adoption in actual practice has been limited.
Formulae for calculating the initial diameter of the workpiece as a function of the type of knurl and of
the outside diameter of the finished knurl, which counts as the nominal diameter, are given. The results obtained are only reference values, however, since the specific properties of the materials have not been taken
into account.
In the preparation of this standard, assistance
Deutsches lnstitut fur Normung.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

has been derived from DIN 82-1973 Knurls issued by

17

IS : 3406(Part

1 )-I 986

Indian

Standard

DIMENSIONS
FOR
COUNTERSINKS
AND COUNTERBORES
PART

1 COUNTERSINKS

(Second

1. Scope-Covers

dimensions

for

countersinks

for

Revision)

screws.

2. Type
2.1

Type

A-

For

screws

i) IS : 1365-l
978
diameter
range
ii) IS : 7485-l
985
in the diameter
iii)

in accordance

Specification
for slotted
1 to 20 mm.
Specification
range
2.5

IS : 7486-1985
Specification
revision
), in the diameter

iv) IS : 891 l-l 978

range
1 to 20

to

for
range

Specification
mm.

Type

C-

For

screws

ii) IS : 7170-1974
Specification
size range
10 to 16 mm.
2.4 Type E - For the bolts
sunk head bolts for steel
Note-Type

18

A covers

fine

medium

screws

countersunk

head

raised

countersunk

head

revision),

screws

(first

head

screws,

in the

revision),

screws

(first

in the diameter

for countersunk

head

with:

for
mm.

slotted

raised

for

slotted

countersunk

series

(third

countersunk

with IS : 6761-l
972 Specification
diameter
range
3 to 24 mm.

in accordance
with
structures,
in the
and

head

cross recessed
raised
2.5 to 10 mm.

for slotted

in accordance

i) IS : 7169-l
974 Specification
in the size range
0 to 16

countersunk

for cross recessed

10 mm.

2.2 Type B - For screws

in accordance
screws
with
hexagon
socket,
in the
2.3

with:

for

countersunk
(flat)

IS : 8412-l
977
diameter
range
precision

and

(oval)

general

HANDBOOK

head

head
tapping

tapping
screws,

Specification
for slotted
0 to 24 mm.
engineering

ON

application,

INDUSTRIAL

screws,
in the
counter-

respectively.

FASTENERS-PART

3.

Dimensions

3.1

Type A

3.1.1

and

Designation

Dimensions

---i+d,
Medium

)
All

Note

1 -Size

shown

Note 2 - Clearance
for bolts and screws

3.1.2
nominal

in brackets

Designationsize 10 shall
Countersink

HANDBOOK

ON

are

hole d, according
(second
revision)

INDUSTRIAL

dimensions

of second
to medium

A countersink
be designated
A f IO-

kFine

Type
as:

(f )

in millimetres

preference.
and fine

A with

series

of IS :1821-1982Dimensions

clearance

hole

of fine

for clearance

(f)

series

and

holes

having

IS : 3406

FASTENERS-PART

19

IS : 3406(Part

3.2

Type

3.2.1

1 )-I 986

B
Dimensions

--/

Ode
Fine ( f )

All

are
Note

2 -Clearance

3.2.2
nominal

hole

3.3

of second

di according

to fine

Designation
-A
countersink
size 10 shall
be designated
Countersink

dimensions

preference.

series

Type
as:

in mlllimetres

of IS

B with

1821-1982.

clearance

hole

of fine

(f) series

and

having

IS : 3406

B f 10 -

Type C

3.3.1

Dimensions

All

For Screw
Size No.

(0)

(1)

dimensions

In millimetres.

(3)

(5)

(7)

3.7

4.2

4.5

5.1

5.8

6.7

8.4

10

(12)

14

(16)

d, HI2

1.6

2.4

2.8

3.1

3.5

d, HI2

3.1

3.8

4.6

5.2

5.9

6.6

7.2

8.1

8.7

10.1

1 1.4

13.2

16.6

1, =

0.9

1.1

1.3

1.5

1.7

1.9

2.1

2.3

2.6

3.4

3.9

4.9

Note

20

Sizes

given

in brackets

are

of second

preference.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS--PART

IS : 3406(Part

3.3.2
3.4

Designation-A
Countersink
Type

3 -4.1

countersink
Type
C 2 - IS : 3406

C for

screw

size

2 shall

be

designated

1)-l

986

as:

Dimensions

All

dimensions

in millimetres
,

10

12

16

20

22

24

d, H12

10.5

13

17

21

23

25

dz H13

19

24

31

34

37

40

11.5

12

13

Size

For Nominal

(Yk

10

75

Note -

3.4.2
4.
4.1

5.5

2, =

Clearance

hole

Designation-A
Countersink

Methods

of

Countersinks
Example

d, according

to fine

60
series

countersink
type
E IOIS : 3406.

Representation
shall

be

1 : When

of IS

E, for

1821-1982.

nominal

in Drawings

identified

using

code

either

by

code

designation

size

10

2(a)

HANDBOOK

2 : When

When

ON

using

indicating

INDUSTRIAL

dimension
the

diameter

FASTENERS-PART

be designated

t
I

designation

or

(n-

ExamDIe

shall

using

dimension

as:

entries

15:3cO6

entries
of

countersink:

21

IS : 3406( Part

1)-l 986

2(b) When

indicating

I--+2(c)

In case

the

depth

6&.5

of countersink:

H13

of components

s < tI

with:

$8.6

H13 t
S
I

connecting

the

pieces

shall,

if necessary,

be

countersunk

EXPLANATORY

subsequently.

NOTE

This standard
was originally
published
in 1966
screws
Ml.6
to M20 and counterbores
for cheese
according
to IS : 1365-1962
and IS : 1366-l
962,

to cover the dimensions

of countersink
for
head and socket head screws
Ml .6 to M26
respectively.

It was first revised

in 1975 and published
in two parts; Part 1 covered
the dimensions
for countersinks
of two types -Type
A for screws
according
IS : 1365-1968
Specification
for slotted
countersunk
head and slotted
raised countersunk
head screws (second
revision)
in the diameter
range 1.6 to 20 mm, and Type B for screws according
to IS : 5308-l
969 Specification
for slotted
countersunk
head screws, small head series (dia 1.6 to 6 mm). In the revision
care was also taken
to conform
the dimensions
specified
in IS : 1821-l
982
Dimensions
for clearance
holes for bolts
and screws (second revision);
IS : 5693-l
970 Specification
for countersunk
with parallel
shanks,
and IS : 5703-1970
Specification
for countersunks
with
morse
taper
sh.anks.
This second revision
and other
developments
The

main

incorporates
a number
in this field.

modifications

of changes

of Types

d) Methods
Part

22

of

2 of this

in preparation
sinks

for

C and

representation
standard
of this

countersunk

experience

gained

by IS : 6761-l

969
on

covers

standard,
head

the dimensions
974, IS : 7485-l

for screws and bolts according

to
985, IS : 7486-l
985, IS : 8412-

E.

of IS : 5308-I

c) Replacement

of further

are:

a) Inclusion
of more number
of tables to cover
IS : 6761-I
972, IS : 7169-l
974, IS : 7170-l
1977 and IS : 8911-I
978.
b) Addition

as a result

in Type

B and

covering

only

fine

series.

drawings

the

dimensions

assistance

screws

972

issued

of

has been
by

counterbores.
derived

Deusches

from

lnstitut

HANDBOOK

DIN 74 Part
Fur

Normung,

ON INDUSTRIAL

l-l

980

Counter-

Berlin.

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3406(Part

Indian

1
m

Standard

DIMENSIONS
FOR COUNTERSINKS
AND COUNTERBORES

1. Scope-Covers

2)-1986

PART

2 COUNTERBORES

(Second
dimensions

for

counterbores

for

Revision)

screws.

2. Type

2.1

Type H-for

screws

in accordance

with:

a) IS : 1366-l
982 Specification
meter
range
1.6 to 10 mm.

for

slotted

b) IS : 6101-1982
range
1.6 to

for

slotted

10

Specification
mm.

c) IS : 7483-l
985 Specification
for cross
meter
range
2.5 to 10 mm).

cheese
pan

head
head

recessed

screws

screws

pan head

(second
(first

screws

revision)

revision)
(first

in the

in the

revision)

dia-

diameter

(in the dia-

2.1.1
Type H 1 -for
Specification
for single
revision ).

screws referred
coil rectangular

to in 2.1
section

with washers
in accordance
with IS : 3063-l
spring washers
for bolts, nuts and screws

972
first

2.1.2
Type H 2 -for
Specification
for plain

screws referred
washers
(first

to in 2.1
revision).

with

967

2.1.3
Type H 3 -for
screws referred
Specification
for spring
washers
for
2.2 Type K-for
head cap screws
2.2.1

washers

in accordance

with

IS : 2016-

to in 2.1 with washers

screws
with
cylindrical

in accordance
head.

with

IS : 6$35-

screws
in accordance
with IS : 2269-1981
(second
revision)
in the diameter
range

Type K 1 -

for screw

referred

to in 2.2

with

washers

Specification

1.6 to 36
in accordance

for
mm.
with

hexagonal

socket

IS : 3063-1972.

2.2.2
1967.

Type

K 2 -for

screws

referred

to

in 2.2

with

washers

in accordance

with

IS : 2016-

2.2.3
1972.

Type

K 3 -for

screws

referred

to

in 2.2

with

washers

in accordance

with

IS : 6735-

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

23

IS : 3406(Part

2)-l

3.

and

Dimensions

3,l

986

Designation

Dimensions

All dimensions

For Nominal
d,

medium

(m)

Size
H13

1.2

I
fine (f) H12
&

H13

dl

Tvw

TV Type K
Tolerance
Type Hl,
d,

1.4

1.4

1.6
1.8

1.6

1.8

2.5

(3.5)

3.9
1 2.1 / 2.4
2.9
3.4
I
I
I
I
I

1.1

1.3

1.5

1.7

2.2

2.5

2.8

3.3

3.8

_I_

0.8

0.9

1.2

1.5

1.6

1.8

1 2.2

1 3.7

2.7

3.2

6.5

1.6

2.

2.4

2.9

2.3

2.9

3.4

4.3

tO.l
0

i-O.2
0

Kl

5.5

6.5

Type H2, K2

6.5

2.2

2.7

3.3

3.8

Type H3, K3
Tvpe Hl.

H2, H3

r? Type Kl,

K2, K3

Tolerance

24

1.2

in millimetres.

-I

HANDBOOK

4.3
+0.2

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3406(Part

For Nominal

Fine

d:

10

12

(14)

16

18

20

22

24

27

30

33

36

11

13.5

15.5

17.5

20

22

24

26

30

33

36

39

10.5

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

18

20

24

26

30

33

36

40

43

48

53

57

15.5

17.5

19.5

22

24

26

28

33

36

39

42

Size

medium
H13

d,

(m)

(f) H13

H13

di

ti

2)-1986

Type

ff

105

11.5

12.5

13.5

14.5

Type

11

13

15

17.5

19.5

21.5

23.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

38

36

40

43

46

53

57

61

Tolerance

+0.4
0

I
Type

Hl.

Kl

20

26

24

30

33

Tvpe

H2.

K2

24

26

30

33

36

40

43

46

53

61

63

71

Type

H3,

K3

18

20

24

26

30

33

36

40

43

48

53

57

Type

Hl .H2,H3

9.5

11

12.5

14

15

16.5

17.5

19.5

Type

Kl,K2.K3

13.5

16

18.5

21

23

25.5

27.5

30.5

33.5

38

41

44

\
Tolerance

I
Note

1 -

Sizes

shown

Note 2 - Clearance
or bolts and screws

In brackets

Note 3 - 90 counterbore
nominal size less than 12

3.2 Designation-A
nominal
size 10

shall

4.

Methods

of

Example

in case

preference.
and fine

of nominal

counterbore
type H with
be designated
as:
H m IO -

Representation

Counterbores

of second

to medium

or radtused
mm.

Counterbore

4.1

are

hole d, according
(second
revision).

shall

series
size

of IS

1821-1982

Dimensions

12 mm and above.

clearance

It should

hole of medium

for clearance

be deburred

(ml

holes

in case

of

series and having

IS : 3406

in Drawings

be identified

either

by code

designation

or using

dimension

entries.

When

using

Hm

IO -

IS : 3406

as code

H m 10 - IS :3LO6

HANDBOOK

Ob6

+0.4
0

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

designation

H m 10 - IS :3LO6

2s

IS : 3406(Part

2)-1986

Example

When

using

dimension

entries

+a+-011

H13

EXPLANATORY
The standard
was originally
M 1.6 to M 20 and counterbores
to IS : 1365-l
962 Specification
IS : 1366-1962
Specification

NOTE

published
in 1966 to cover the dimensions
of countersink
screws
for cheese head and socket head screws M 1.6 to M 26 according
for slotted countersunk
head machine
screws ( 1.6 to 20 mm) and
for slotted
cheese
head screws
(1.6 to 20 mm)
respectively.

It was first revised

in 1975 and published
in two parts:
Part 2 covered
the dimensions
of
counterbores
of two types, Type A for screws in accordance
with IS : 1366-l 968 Specification
for
slotted
cheese
head screws
(first revision)
in the diameter
range 1.6 to 20 mm, and Type B for
screws
in accordance
with IS : 2269-1967
Specification
for hexagonal
socket head cap screws
(first revision)
in the diameter
range 3 to 52 mm. In that revision,
care was taken to conform
the
dimensions
specified
in IS : 1821-1967,
IS ; 5704-1970
Specification
for counterbores
with
parallel
shanks
and IS : 5710-1970
Specification
for counterbores
with
morse taper shanks.
This second revision
and other
developments
The

main

a) Type

incorporates
a number
in this field.

modification
A and

of changes

as a result

of further

experience

gained

are:

B redesignated

as type

b) Additionally

covers

IS : 6101-1982

C) Dimensions

limited

up to

diameter

H and
and
36

K.

IS : 7483-1974
mm

under

in accordance

with

Type

l-l.

IS : 2269-1982.

d) Incorporation
of sub-types,
such as HI, H2, H3, and Kl, K2, K3 to cover the dimensions
with
washers
in accordance
with IS : 3063-I 972, IS : 2016-l
967 and IS : 6735-l
972 respectively.
e) Methods
Part

of

1 of this

representation
standard

ln the preparation
tersinks
for cheese

26

on

covers

of this standard
head screws

drawings.

the

dimensions

assistance
issued
by

for

countersinks.

has been
Deutsches

derived
lnstitut

HANDBOOK

ON

from DIN 74 Part 2-l 980

fur Normung,
Berlin.

INDUSTRIAL

COun-

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3457-1987

Indian

RADII
FOR GENERAL

Standard

FOR ROUNDING
ENGINEERING
PURPOSES
( First

1. Scope2.

Specifies

the

radii

for

rounding

sharp

Revision

edges

or corners.

Dimensions

2.1 Dimensions

shall

be according

to Table

1 read

with

Fig.

1 to 7.

2.2 Dimensional
Deviations
for Untoleranced
Dimensions
- Medium
class in accordance
with
IS 2102 (Part I)-1980
General tolerances
for dimensions
and form and position: Part 1 General
tolerances
for linear and angular
dimensions
(second revision).

TABLE

1 DIMENSIONS
(Clause

2.1

All dimensions
0.2
(0.3)
0.4

Note -

Dimensions

given within

FOR

standard

The

main

originally

modifications

a) non-preferred
b) chamfer

was

50

(6)

(56)

10

63

brackets are of second choice

published

in this

dimensions,

in millimetres

EXPLANATORY
This

RADII

NOTE

in 1966.

revision

are

deletion

of:

and

dimensions.

The dimensions
conform
to the preferred
number
series R5, RIO and RI20
according
to
IS : 1076( Part 1 )-I 985 Preferred
numbers: Part 1 Sereis of preferred
numbers.
Some of the
values have been taken from corresponding
round value series R5, R10 and RlO. Radii (see
Fig. 1 to 7).
In preparation
Rounding
radii

HANDBOOK

ON

of the standard,
considerable
issued by Deutsches
lnstitut

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

assistance
has been
fur Normung.

derived

from

DIN 250-1972

27

IS :3457-1987

28

HANDBOOK

ON

FASTENERS-PART

--I

x
-I

INDUSTRIAL

IS : 8000(Part
IS0

Indian

1 )-I 9

110-l-1983

Standard

GEOMETRICAL
TOLERANCING
ON TECHNICAL
DRAWINGS
1

PART 1 TOLERANCING
OF FORM,
ORIENTATION,
LOCATION
AND RUN-OUT,
AND APPROPRIATE
GEOMETRICAL
DEFINITIONS

(First
(IS0

Title : Technical
Location

National

Drawings-Geometrical
Run-out-Generalities,

and

Revision

Tolerancing-Tolerancing
of Form, Orientation,
Definitions,
Symbols,
Indications
on Drawings)

Foreword

This Indian Standard

which is identical with IS0 1 101-l 983 Technical drawings -Geometrical
location
and run-out-Generalities,
definitions,
tolerancing-lolerancing
of form, orientation,
symbols, indications
on drawings
issued by International
Organization
for Standardization
(IS0 1
was adopted by the Indian Stahdards
Institution
on the recommendation
of Drawings
Sectional
Committee
as approved
by the Mechanical
Engineering
Division
Council.
The original version of this standard, IS : SOOO( Part 1)-l 976 Tolerances
of form and of position
for engineering
drawings:
Part 1 Generalities,
symbols, indications
on drawings
was based on
ISO/R
1101-1969
Tolerances
of form and of position: Generalities,
symbols,
indications
on
drawings
issued by ISO. Harmonization
of the standard with International
Standard
has been
made by the adoption
of IS0 1101-l 983.
Wherever
the words International
read as Indian Standard.

Cross

Standard

appear,

referring

to this standard,

should

be

Reference

International
IS0

Standard

128-l

Corresponding

Indian

Standard

IS : 10714-1983
General
drawings
(Identical)

982

principles

of

presentation

ISO/R-129-1955

IS : 696-l 972 Code of practice for general

revision)
(Technically
equivalent)

IS0

1660-l

IS : 8000 (Part 3)-1985

Geometrical
tolerancing
Part 3 Dimensioning
and tolerancing
of
(Identical)

IS0

2692-

IS0

5459-l

981

IS : 10721-l
983
on technical

IS0

7083-l

983

IS :

982

There

is no Indian

Additional

Standard

Datum and datum systems

drawings
(Identical)

technical

drawings

(second

for technical
drawings:
piofiles
(first revision)

for geometrical

tolerancing

Proportions
and dimensions
of symbols for geometrical
tolerused in technical drawings, [Dot : EDC 20(4277)]
(Identical)

corresponding

to IS0

8015

to which

reference

is made in 2.

Information

This Indian Standard is in several parts, each technically

Standards
indicated
within
the tiracket:
IS : 8000
Part 1 (IS0

1101)

Tolerancing
geometrical

Part 2 (IS0

1101/2)

Maximum

Part 3 (IS0

1660)

Dimensioning

Part 4 (ISO/R

ON

engineering

on

IS : 8000 (Part 2)-1976

Geometrical
tolerancing
for technical drawings:
Part 2 Maximum
material
principles
(Technically
equivalent)

ancing

HANDBOOK

they

1661)

INDUSTRIAL

Practical

equivalent

of form, orientation,
location
definitions
(first revision)

material

FASTENERS-PART

and run-out,and

principles

and tolerancing

examples

with the corresponding

of profiles

of indications

(first

on drawings.

revision)

IS0

appropriate

IS - 8000(Part
IS0

II-1985

1101-1983

0 Introduction
For

uniformity

all figures

in this

International

Standard

It should be understood
that the third angle
without
prejudice
to the principles
established.

projection

For the
tolerancing,

and

definitive
see IS0

Scope

and field

presentation
7083.

(proportions

are

in first

could

angle

equally

dimensions)

of

projection.

well

have

symbols

for

been

used

geometrical

of application

1 .l This International
Standard gives the principles
drawings
of tolerances
of form, orientation,
location
geometrical
definitions.
Hence the term geometrical
synonymous
with these groups of tolerances.

of symbolization
and indication
on technical
and run-out, and establishes
the appropriate
tolerances
will be used in this document as

1.2 Geometrical
tolerances
shall be specified only where they are essential, that is, in the light of
functional
requirements,
interchangeability
and probable
manufacturing
circumstances.
1.3 Indicating
of production,

geometrical
tolerances
does not necessarily
measurement
or gauging.

imply the use of any particular

method

2 References

IS0

128,

Technical

drawings

General

principles

IS0
129, Engineering
drawinos - D(mensioning
execution,
and special indications.
IS0

1660,

Technical

drawings

Dimensioning

IS0

2992,

Technical

drawings

Geometrical

IS0
5459,
Technical
drawings
geometrical
tolerances.
IS0
7083,
dimensions.
IS0

8015.

Technical
Technical

drawings
drawings

General

and

.principles,

tolerancing

tolerancing-

Geometrical
-

of presentation.

for

Fundamental

material

Datums

geometrical

tolerancing

methods

of

of profiles.

Maximum

tolerancing

Symbols

definitions,

and

principal.2

datum

tolerancing

systems

Proportions

for
and

principle.

3 General

3.1 A geometrical
tolerance
applied to a feature
defines the tolerance
zone within
feature
(surface,
axis, or median
plane) is to be contained
(see 3.7 and 3.8).
3.2 According
to the characteristic
which
is to be toleranced
dimensioned,
the tolerance
zone is one of the following:

the

area

within

the

area

between

two

concentric

circles;

the

area

between

two

equidistant

lines

the

space

within

the

space

between

two

coaxial

the

space

between

two

equidistant

the

space

within

1) At

present

at the

2) At

present

3) At

present

30

and

the

manner

which

in which

the
it is

a circle;

or two

parallel

straight

lines;

a cylinder;
cylinders;
planes

or two

parallel

planes;

a parallelepiped.

stage

of draft.

(Revision

of ISO/R

at the

stage

of draft.

(Revision

of IS0

at the

stage

of draft.

129-1959.)
1101/2-1974.)

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000(Part
IS0 1101-1983
3.3
more

The toleranced
feature
restrictive
indication

may be of any form or orientation

within
is given, for example
by an explanatory

3.4 Unless otherwise

specified as in clauses
or surface
of the considered
feature.
3.5 The datum feature
(see IS0 5459).

is a real feature

9 and 11, the tolerance

of a part, which

1)-l 985

this tolerance zone, unless a

note (see figures 8 and 9).
applies

is used to establish

to the whole

the location

length

of a datum

3.6 Geometrical
tolerances
which are assigned to features
related to a datum do not limit the
form deviations
of the datum feature
itself. The form of a datum feature
shall be sufficiently
accurate
for its purpose and it may therefore
be necessary to specify tolerances
of form for the
datum features.
3.7 The straightness
or flatness of a single toleranced
feature is deemed to be correct when the
distance of its individual points from a superimposed
surface of ideal geometrical
form is equal to
or less than the value of the specified tolerance. The orientation
of the ideal line or surface shall be
chosen so that the maximum
distance between
it and the actual surface of the feature concerned
is the least possible value.

Example

Figure

Possible

orientations

Corresponding
In the

case

of the

line

or surface:

Al--B,

distances:
of figure

h,

3.8 For the definition

of circularity
coaxial cylinders
shall be chosen

<

h2
is A, -

h3

<

h3

B,. The distance

hl is to be

and cylindricity,
the location of the two concentric
so that the radial distance
between
them is the

circles or
minimum.

Figure

HANDBOOK

4-C

hz

h,

1:

Therefore
the correct orientation
of the ideal line or surface
equal to or less than the specified
tolerance.

Example

AZ--~

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

31

IS : 8000(Part
IS0 1101-1983
Possible
cylinders

l)-1985

location of the centres of the two

and their minimal
radial distance.

Centre

(C,) of A,

concentric

circles

or the

axes of the two

locates

two

concentric

circles

or two

coaxial

cylinders.

Centre (C,) of A2 locates

distance.

two

concentric

circles

or two

coaxial

cylinders

Corresponding
In the

radial

distance:

case of figure

minimal

radial

Ar2

Arl

2:

with

coaxial

Ar2

<

Ar,

Therefore the correct location of the two concentric circles or the two coaxial cylinders
designated AZ. The radial distance Arz should then be equal to or less than the specified

is the one
tolerance.

4 Symbols
TABLE

I-

Features

1 -SYMBOLS

and tolerances

FOR TOLERANCED

Toleranced

CHARACTERISTICS

characteristics

Symbols

Subclauses

Straightness
Single features

Flatness

Circularity
Form tolerances

14.2

14.3

Cylindricity
Profile of any line

Single or related
features

14.4

Profile of any surface

14.5

I
1

I
I

14.6

14.12

Parallelism
Orientation
tolerances

Related

features
Locatton tolerance

Concentricity

and coaxiality

Symmetry

Circular
Run-out

I
I

14.13

run-out

tolerance

Total run-out

32

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000IPart
IS0

1)-l

985

1101-1983

5.4 If it is necessary to specify more than one tolerance characteristic

for a feature, the tolerance
specifications
are given in tolerance
frames
one under the other (see figure 10).

Figure 10

6 Toleranced

features

The tolerance
arrow in the

frame is connected
following
way :

to the toleranced

on the outline of the feature on an extension

dimension
line) when the tolerance
refers to the

feature

by a leader

line terminating

with

of the outline (but clearly separated

from the
line or surface itself (see figures 11 and 12).

Figure 12

Figure 11

- as an extension of a dimension
line when the tolerance
refers
defined
by the feature
so dimensioned
(see figures
13 to 15).

to the axis or median

that

on the axis when the tolerance

refers to the axis or median
axis or median
plane (see figures
16, 17 and 18).

Figure 16

Note
median

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

plane

of all features

Figure 17

-Whether
a tolerance
should be apphed to the contour of a cylindrical
plane respectively
depends
on the functional
requirements.

FASTENERS-PART

plane

Figure 15

Figure 14

Figure 13

an

Common

to

Figure 16

or symmetrical

feature

or to its axis or

33

IS : 8000(
IS0

Part

1)-l

985

1101-1983

7 Tolerance

zones

7.1 The width of the tolerance

zone is in the direction of the arrow of the leader line joining the
tolerance
frame to the feature which is toleranced,
unless the tolerance value is preceded by the
sign C$ (see figures
19 and 20).

Figure

Figure 19

7.2 In general, the direction of the width

of the part (see figures
21 and 22).

of the tolerance

zone is normal

Figure 21

Zgsre

7.3 The direction of the width of the tolerance

zone shall be indicated
to the specified geometry of the part (see figures 23 and 24).

Figure 23

34

Figure

HANDBOOK

ON

to the specified

geometry

iQ

when

desired

not normal

24

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000(Part
IS0 1101-1983
7.4

Individual
tolerances
zones of the
specified
as shown
in figures
25 and

same
26.

value

applied

to several

separate

features

l)-1985

can

be

Figure 26

Figure 25
7.5 Where
a common
tolerance
zone is aoplied
indicated
by the words
common
zone
above

to several
seoarate
features,
the reauirement
the tolerance
frame
(see figures
27 and

is
28).

3XA
c3mmonzone

Figure 28

Figure n

8 Datums

8.1
same

When a toleranced
feature
is related to a datum,
letter
which
defines
the datum
is repeated

To identify
the datum,
a capital
letter
triangle
(see figures
29 and 30).

>,
//

.+,

,,,,/

in a frame

The

datum

triangle

with

the

on the outline
of the feature
dimension
line), when
the datum

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

to a solid

letters.

or blank

The

datum

,,/,.,

Figure 30

Figure 29
8.2

is connected

shown by datum
frame.

I,

,,,

enclosed

this is generally
in the tolerance

datum

letter

or an extension
feature
is the

FASTENERS-PART

is placed:
of the outline
(but clearly
separated
from
line or surface
itself (see figure
31).

the

35

IS : 8000(Part
IS0 1101-1983
(see

1 )-I 985

as an extension
of the
figures
32 to 34).

Note and 34).

It there

is insufficient

dimension
space

on the

when

for two arrows.

i!J
Figure

line

or

b) the

common

feature

may be replaced

is the

axis

by the datum

or median

triangle

or median
median
axis

plane

plane
or

when

the

of a single

plane

formed

plane

(see figures

33

I
Figure 33

axis

axis

datum

one of them

32

a) the

the

Figure

datum

feature

by two

34

is:
(for

example

features

(see

a cylinder);
figure

35).

Figure 35

8.3 If the tolerance

datum
letter
may

frame can be directly

connected
be omitted
(see figures
36 and

Figure

8.4

A single

datum

with
37).

the datum

Figure

is identified

A common
datum formed
hyphen
(see figure
39).

feature

by two

by a capital
datum

features

letter

(see

figure

is identified

by a leader

line,

the

37

38).

by two

datum

letters

separated

by a

If the sequence
of two or more datum
features
is important
the datum
letters
are placed
different
compartments
(see figure 40), where the sequence
from left to right shows the order
priority.

in
of

If the sequence
of two or more datum features
the same compartment
(see figure 41).

in

[jAi
Figure

36

; i
38

Figure

;A-3;
39

is not important

---

the datum

:
1
l&a

Figure

HANDBOOK

- --__

letters

c:

40

ON INDUSTRIAL

are indicated

: i

--Y-=-J

Figure

41

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000(Part
Iso
1101-1983
9.

Restrictive

1)-l

985

specifications

9.1 If the tolerance

be added after the

is applied
tolerance

to a restricted
length,
value
and separated

lying anywhere,
from
it by an

In the case of a surface,

the same indication
is used. This means
lines of the restricted
length
in any position
and any direction

the value of this

oblique
stroke.

that the tolerance

(see figure
42).

length
applies

shall
to all

Figure 42

9.2 If a smaller
tolerance
restricted
over
a limited
compartment
(see figure

of the same
length,
the
43).

type is added to the

restrictive
tolerance

tolerance
on the whole
feature,
but
shall
be indicated
in the
lower

Figure 43

9.3 If the tolerance

is applied
shown
in figure
44.

to a restricted

part

of the feature

only,

this

shall

be dimensioned

as

Figure 44

9.4 If the datum

is applied
as shown
in figure
45.

9.5

Restrictions

HANDBOOK

ON

to

the

INDUSTRIAL

to a restricted

form

of the

FASTENERS

part of the datum

feature

PART

within

the

feature

tolerance

only,

zone

this shall

are

be dimensioned

shown

in

5.3.

37

IS : 8000(Part

1 )-I 985

IS0

1101-1983

10.

Theoretically

exact

dimensions

the dimensions
of position or of profile or of angularity
are prescribed for a feature,
shall not be toleranced.
the theoretically
exact position,
profile
or angle respectively,

If tolerances
determining

These dimensions
are enclosed,
for example].
are subject
only to the position
tolerance,
profile
the tolerance
frame
(see figures
46 and 47).

The corresponding
actual dimensions
of the part
tolerance
or angularity
tolerance
specified
within

8~015H?

Figure 47

Figure 46
11

Projected

tolerance

zone

In some cases the tolerances

of orientation
the external
projection
of it. Such projected
(see figure
48).

and location
shall apply not to the feature
itself but to
tolerance
zones are to be indicated
by the symbol@

@Fq

I
---

ci

Figure 48
12

Maximum

material

The indication
that
symbol @I placed
-

the

tolerance

the

datum

or

according
toleranced

both

the tolerance
after:
value

letter

(see

figure

(see

(see

value
figure

figure

49

applies

at the maximum

material

condition

is shown

by the

49);

50);

51);

to whether
the maximum
feature,
the datum
feature

Figure

38

condition

material
or both.

Figure

principle

is

to

50

HANDBOOK

be

applied

respectively

Figure

ON

INDUSTRIAL

to

the

51

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000(Part
IS0
1101-1983
13

Definitions

of tolerances

13.1
The various
pages. In all the
definitions
deal.

geometrical
illustrations

tolerances
are defined
of the definitions
only

with
those

their tolerance
deviations
are

zones
shown

1)-l

985

in the following
with which
the

13.2
Where
required
for functional
reasons,
one or more characteristics
will be toleranced
to
define
the geometrical
accuracy
of a feature.
When
the geometrical
accuracy
of a feature
is
defined
by a certain
type of tolerance,
other deviations
of this feature
in some cases will be
controlled
by this tolerance
(for example,
straightness
deviation
is limited by parallelism
tolerance).
Thus
it would
rarely
be necessary
to symbolize
all of these
characteristics,
since the other
deviations
are included
on the zone of tolerance
defined
by the symbol
specified.
However,
straightness
13.3
there

certain
other
types
of tolerances
do not control
other
tolerance
does not control
deviation
of parallelism).

For some tolerance

are two possible

zones (for example,

for straightness
methods
of graphical
representation:

by two

parallel

planes

by two

parallel

straight

Figure

52

shows

t apart

a distance
lines

a three-dimensional

(see

t apart

a distance

representation,

figure
(see
figure

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

example,

of a line or axis in one direction

only)

52);
figure
53

53).
its

There is no difference
in the meaning
of the two representations
(such
the deviation
in any direction
perpendicular
to the arrow). The simpler
53 is normally
used in this International
Standard.

ON

(for

projection

in a plane.

Figure 53

Figure 52

HANDBOOK

deviations

a tolerance
does not restrict
method
as shown
in figure

39

14

Detailed

definitions

iym bol

of tolerances
Definition

14.1

Straightness

of the

Values
tolerance

Indication

zone

and

in millimetres

interpretation

tolerance
Any line on the upper surface parallel to
the plane
of projection
in which
the
indication
is shown
shall be contained
between
two parallel
straight
lines 0.1
apart.

The tolerance
zone when projected
in a
plane is limited by two parallel straight
1ine.s a distance
1 apart.
+

rGl=

Figure 65

Figure 54
Any
portion
of lengths
200
of any
generator
of the
cylindrical
surface
indicated by the arrow shall be contained
between
two parallel
straight lines 0.1
apart in a plane containing
the axis.

-0g

._ _-

--.

El

.o-

Figure 56
The
tolerance
zone
is limited
by a
parallelepiped
of section
tl X f2 if the
tolerance
is specified
in two directions
perpendicular
to each other.

The axis of the bar shall be contained

within
a parallelepipedic
zone of width
0.1
in the
vertical
and 0.2
in the

Figure !i7
Figure 58

The
tolerance
zone
is limited
by a
cylinder
of diameter
t if the tolerance
value is preceded
by the sign C#L

yfii$gL+.

&
Figure 59

14.2

Flatness

The tolerance
parallel
planes

The axis of the cylinder to which

the
tolerance
frame
is connected
shall be
diam;ter
contained o.ds.
in a cylindrical
zone
of

Figure 60

tolerance
zone is limited
by, two
a distance
t apart.

+*

{Em,

r-7
Figure 61

Figure 62

The
two

surface
parallel

shall be contained
between
planes 0.08 apart.

z
1

OW. .

Values
Symbol

Definition
14.3

Circularity

of the

tolerance

zone

(continued)

indication

and interpretation

in millimetres

(continued)

tolerance

The tolerance
zone in the considered
plane is limited by two concentric circles
a distance
t apart.
@

The circumference
of each cross-section
of the outer diameter
shall be contained
between two co-planar concentric circles
0.03 apart.

1-g

Figure 63

Figure 64

The circumference
of each cross-section
shall
be contained
between
two
coplanar concentric
circles 0.1 apart.
+I!?@)

Figure 65
14.4

IO

Cylindricity

tolerance

The tolerance
zone is limited
by two
coaxial cylinders
a distance
I apart.

&@

*eTI

r\

Profile

tolerance

of any

surface
shall
be
two coaxial cylinders

Figure 67

F<ure 66

14.5

The
considered
contained
between
0.1 apart.

line

The tolerance zone is limited by two lines

enveloping
circles
of diameter
t, the
centres of which are situated on a line
having the true geometrical
form.

fid

&

Figure66

Figure 69

In each section parallel to the plane of

projection the considered
profile shall be
contained
between
two lines enveloping
circles of diameter
0.04, the centres of
which are situated on a line having the
true geometrical
profile.

Values
Symbol I

Definition
14.6

Profile

of the

tolerance

tolerance

of

any

zone

(continued)

Indication

and interpretation

in millimetres

G _

(continued)

0:

surface
1

The tolerance
zone is limited
by two
surfaces enveloping
spheres of diameter
t, the centres of which are situated on a
surface having the true geometrical
form.

The
considered
surface
shall
be
contained
between
two
surfaces
enveloping
spheres of diameter 0.02, the
centres
of which
are situated
on a
surface having the true geometrical
form.

n
Figure 70

14.7
14.7.1

Parallelism
Parallelism

tolerance
tolerance

of a line with

reference

to

a dati urn line

The toleranced
axis shall be containec
between
two straight
lines 0.1 apart
which are parallel to the datum axis A
and lie in the vertical direction (see figure
73 or 74).

The tolerance
zone when projected
in a
plane is limited by two parallel straight
lines a distance r apart and parallel to the
datum
line,
if the
tolerance
is only
specifieci in one direction.

Figure 72
Figure 74
The toleranced
axis shall be contained
between
two straight
lines 0.1 apart,
which are parallel to the datum axis A
and lie in the horizontal
direction.

Figure 75

Figure 76

.-E
=
.E
.-C

$
3
m
>

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000( Part 1)-l 985

IS0 1101-1983

43

,!

I
;!

,,

.,
ml
i

IS : 8000(Part
1S0 1101-1983
L

a)

UY

G
E
,
=
,-

u)

.+

-a
>

..
AA

1 )-1 985

-1!

!!5=

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERSPART

(auII

Luruep)

s!xe aq] 01 Jein~!PLJ~dJ~d PUQ ~Jede 800

saueld
lalleJed
OM1 uaahvaq
pau!ewo3
aq Ileqs aoa!d aq] JO aoe4 paoueJalo]
aql

&=

.f/p~

aUIl

ulniep

aLII

01 Jelno!p

-uadJad pue lJede j aouers!p

e saueld
-e~ed OM1 Aq pal!w!l
SI auoz a3ueJalol
a~l~ti~~p

P ra;uaJa4aJ

ql!M

a3e4Jns

JO a3ueJalol-Al!Je[

n3!puadJad

lall
aql

:8t7

~ aJn6!-J
~

/]
-/ Y

T
10

ut31s

aql

Jaq~o
/

Lun]ep

*
z(jaJnf3!3

--j%

y+--;r.

uo!leHJdJaw!

q3ea

01 Jeln31puadJad
SUOl13aJlp
OM1 U! pa!j!~
-ads SI aoue.ialo}
aql }! aueld ~nleP
aql o~
Jeln2!puadJad
pue 1 x 1 uo!loas
+o pad!d
-lalieJed
e Aq pal!wll
SI auoz aWeJalol
aql

16 aJn6!4

,@

.. .

!_,-

~l!M

au!l e JO amJeJalOl

-i

.L

e 01 aauaJa4aJ

ql!m

Al! Jelno!puadJad

au!l

$0

~WMWKM) auoz

pue uo!pea!pui

zg~

Lunlep

aql

01

Jeln3!puadJad
pue upde 1 a~uels!p
e sau!l
lqfi!edls
lalleJed
oh~ Aq pal!~!l
s! aueld
e UI paKIa[oJd
uaLIM aLIoz aMJeJalol
aql
e

au!l

amJeJalo}

Al! Jelna!puadJad

aoue~alol

u!

Aq paPa~

aql 4! aueld ~nlep

-aJd S! an}eA a2ueJalol
aql 01 JelnmpuadJad
1 Jala Ue!P
Jo lap
-u!lAo e Aq pa]!w!l
SI auoz aXJeJalol
aql

&6 fM16!~
aoepns

aql 01 Jeln3!puadJad
s! L431qM ZO x 10 jo
auoz aweJalol
3!pad!dalalleJed
e u! pau
-!e~uoo aq IIeqs JapU!lA3
aw 40 s!xe aw

,---1
\
4

3 e o~ aouaJaJaJ

-t_

11-

yu
=

uo!~oaJ!p
auo u! AIUO pa!}!oads
SI aweJalol
aw
4! aueld
~nleP
aql ol
Jeln21puadJad
pue lJede 1 awels!p
e sau!l
]q6!eJ]s
lalleJed
OMl Aq Pal!~ll
s! aueld
e u! pa13a[oJtl
uaqM
auoz a3ueJalol
aql

.. /-
/ -

a3ejJns

~Jede
wn]ep
aq]
01 Jeln~!puad
Jad
lelleJed
oMl
Uf39MRq
P3u!el
I.L? saueld
-uoo aq Ileqs paloauuoo
s! awedj aweJa
-101 aql q3!qM 01 JaPU!lA~
aw 40 s!xe aw

(au!l
Lunlep)
v aloq leluoztJoq
aql 40 S!xe aql 01 Jeln3!puadJad
pue lJede
900 sau,eld Ial[eJed
OM1 UaeMlaq
paU!dl
-u03 aq Ileqs aloq pau!lou!
aw 40 s!xe aql

&I! I umep

~anuwoo)
sa.uaw!ll!w

awewol

1.8ti

Al! Jeln3!puadJad

aw

lo

8bl

loqLuA:

uo!wwaa

sanleA

46

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Values
Definition

iymbol
14.9.2

Angularity

The tolerance
zone
plane
is limited
by
lines a distance
t
the specified
angle

of the

tolerance

tolerance

zone

(continued)
_reference

of a line with

Indication
to a datum

and interpretation

in

millimetres

(continued)

surface
The axis of the hole shall be contained
between
two parallel
planes 0.08 apart
which
are inclined
at 60 to the surface
A (datum
surface)

when projected
in a
two parallel
straight
apart and inclined
at
to the datum surface.

L?
Figure 106

Figure lO!!
14.9.3

Angularity

tolerance

of

a surface

The tolerance
zone
is limited
by two
parallel
planes
a distance
t apart
and
inclined
at the specified
angle
to the
datum
line.

with

reference

to a datum

line

The inclined
surface
shall be contained
between
two
parallel
planes
0.1 apart
which
are inclined
at 75 to the axis A
(datum
line).

i $:$?@

&

Figure 107

Figure 108

_/

14.9.4

Angularity

tolerance

of a surface

The tolerance
zone
is limited
by two
parallel
planes
a distance
t apart
and
inclined
at the specified
angle
to the
datum
surface.

with

reference

to a datum

surface

The inclined
surface
shall be contained
between
two parallel
planes 0.08 apart
which
are inclined
at 40 to the surface
A (datum
surface!.

Fg

Figure 109

Figure 110

Values
Symbol

Definition
14.10
14.10.1

Positional
Positional

of the

tolerance

zone.(continued)

Indication

and interpretation

Position

tolerance

of

a point

tolerance

The actual point of intersection

shall lie
inside a circle of 0.3 diameter, the centre
of which coincides with the theoretically
exact position of the considered
point of
intersection.

of a line

The tolerance zone is limited by two parallel straight

lines a distance t apart and
disposed
symmetrically
with respect to
the theoretically
exact position
of the
considered
line if the tolerance
is specified only in one direction.

3s
-+&$q

_~~!!@+_

Fig;;ze;14

Figure 113

Each of the line shall be contained

between
two
parallel
straight
lines 0.05
apart which
are symmetrically
disposed
about the theoretically
exact position of
the considered
line, with reference to the
surface
A (datum plane).
Each of the axes of the eight holes shall
be contained
within
a parallelepipedic
zone of width 0.05 in the horizontal and
0.2 in the vertical direction and the axis
of which
is in the theoretically
exact
position of the considered
hole.

The tolerance zone is limited by a parallelepiped of section tl X t2 the axis of which

is in the theoretically
exact position of the
considered
line if the tolerance
is specified in two directions
perpendicular
to
each other.
Figure

(continued)

tolerance

The tolerance
zone is limited by a circle
of diameter
t, the centre of which is in
the theoretically
exact position
of the
considered
point.

14.10.2

in millimetres

The axis of the hole shall be contained

within a cylindrical zone of diameter 0.08
the axis of which is in the theoretically
exact position of the considered line, with
reference to the surfaces A and B (datum
planes).

116

The tolerance
zone is limited by a cylinder of diameter
t the axis of which is in
the theoretically
exact position
of the
considered
line if the tolerance
value is
preceded
by the sign 4.

Figure 118

Figure

117

theoretically
dered hole.

exact

position

of the consi-

w6L-(

6*

8861-1011

L Ued)O008

(3SI

: S1

L lMVdSWN31SV4

lVlkllSfICINl

NO )IOOH(INVH

IS : 8000(Part
IS0 1101-1983

1)-l 985

HANDBOOK

ON

c
-

al

u-Q)
nr .-.-

INDUSTRIAL

3E

&LCD
.A2 0

cu

FASTENERS-PART

&86 L-Lo LL 0s1

S86 L-( L lJed)OO08
: S1

ii

L lWd-SH3N31SVd

LJ

lVltUSnCINl

NO YOW(3NVH

Values
Definition

Symbo
14.13.3

Circular

of the
run-out

tolerance
tolerance

zone

Indication

(continued)

in any

and interpretation

in millimetres

(continued)

direction

The tolerance
zone is limited within any
cone of measurement,
the axis of which
coincides with the datum axis by two circles a distance
t apart.

The run-out in the direction indicated by

the arrow shall not be greater than 0.1 in
any cone of measurement
during one revolution about the datum axis C.

Unless otherwise
specified the measuring
direction
is normal to the surface.

!Ll
Figure 139

bff
\.

.-It

The run-out in the direction perpendicular to the tangent

of a curved surface
shall not be greater than 0.1 in any cone
of measurement
during one revolution
about the datum axis C.

--

Figure 138

Figure 140

14.13.4

Circular

run-out

tolerance

in a specified

The tolerance
zone is limited within any
cone of measurement
of the specified
angle, the axis of which coincides
with
the datum axis by two circules a distance
t apart.

direction

{ml

&
__ ._ . ~. L-l

Figure 141

OI

The run-out
in the specified
direction
shall not be greater than 0.1 in any cone
of measurement
during
one revolution
about the datum axis C.

G G
7

0..

Values
Symbol

Definition
14.14
14.14.1

Total

of the

run-out
Total

tolerance

zone

(continued)

Indication

radial

run-out

tolerance

Figure 143

Figure 142

Total

axial

(continued)

tolerance

The tolerance zone is limited by two

coaxial cylinders a distance t apart, the
axes of which coincide with the datum
axis.

14.14.2

and interpretation

in millimetres

run-out

The total radial run-out shall not be

greater than 0.1 at any point on the
specified
surface
during
several
revolutions about the datum axis A-B,
and with
relative
axial
movement
between part and measuring instrument.
With relative movement the measuring
instrument
or the workpiece shall be
guided
along
a line
having
the
theoretically perfect form of the contour
and being in correct position to the datum
axis.

tolerance

The tolerance zone is limited by two

parallel planes a distance t apart and
perpendicular to the datum axis.
t

Figure 144

The total axial run-out

shall not be
,Q (1.1LI greater than 0.1 at any point on the
surface
during
specified
several
revolutions about the datum axis D and
.with relative radial movement between
the measuring instrument and the part.
With relative movement the measuring
D
instrument
or the workpiece shall be
guided along a line having the theoretiFigure 145
cally perfect form of the contour and
being in correct position to the datum
axis.

3=ll-==

-.

IS : 8000(Part

2)-1976

Indian Standard

1
m

GEOMETRICAL
TOLERANCING
TECHNICAL
DRAWINGS

PART 2 MAXIMUM

1. Scope-Describes

MATERIAL

ON

PRINCIPLE

the maximum material principle and specifies its application

to different tolerances.

2. Maximum Material Principle

2.1 The free assembly of components depends on the combined effect of the actual finished sizes and the
errors of form or position of the mating features. The minimum clearance for assembly occurs when the
features are in their maximum material conditions of size and the most disadvantageous permissible errors
of form or position are present.
2.1.1 Assembly may be carried out even under the most unfavourable conditions permitted by the dimensional tolerances and those of form and positioh if the difference of the sizes of the two elements, both of
which are considered to be of maximum material, is at least equal to the total tolerance of position (see a/so
3.4 ).
2.1.2 However, more clearance of assembly will be present if the actual sizes of the mating features are
away from the maximum material limits of size, and if the actual errors of form or position are less than the
maximum. It follows, therefore, that if the actual sizes of the mating features are away from the maximum
material limits of size, the specified tolerance of form or position may be exceeded without endangering the
possibility of assembly.
2.2 This increase of tolerance, which is applicable to size tolerances ( see a/so 3.4.5 ) as well as to
tolerances of position and to certain tolerances of form, is advantageous for manufacture, but may not
always be permissible from the functional point of view. For instance, in positional tolerancing the increase
of tolerance may generally be permitted on the centre distance of such features as bolt holes, studs, etc, but
it may not be permissible in kinematic linkages, gear centres, etc. In all cases the designer shall decide
whether or not-the application of maximum material principle may be permitted and if it can be, the symbol
@shall be added to the tolerance in question see 4.8 of IS : 8000 (Part l)-1976 Tolerances of form and of
position for engineering drawings: Part 1 Generalities, symbols, indications on drawings.
2.2.1 This symbol indicates that the tolerance with which it is ass0ciate.d has been specified in relation to
the maximum material limits of size of the feature or features concerned, and that if the actual size of the
feature is away from its maximum material limit of size, the specified tolerance of form or position may be
increased as permitted by the difference between the actual size of the feature and its maximum material
limit of size. Obviously the amount of this increase can never exceed the amount of the size tolerance on the
feature.
2.3 It is important to note that the increase of form or position tolerance referred in 2.2.1 can be applied to
one part of an assembly without reference to the mating part. Assembly will always be possible, even if the
mating part is finished on the extreme limits of the tolerances in the directions most unfavourable for
assembly, because the combined total of errors of size and of form or position specified for the one part is
not exceeded.
2.4 When a tolerance of form or of position is applied to a feature which is related to a datum feature having
limits of size, it may be possible to apply the maximum material principle to the datum feature as well as to
the feature which is toleranced, and thereby to obtain full advantage ( see also 3.5 and 3.6 ). In such cases,
the symbol @I shall also be added to the datum letter.
2.4.1 The indication

of maximum material condition

is therefore shown by the symbol @j placed after:

a) the tolerance value (see Fig. l),

b) the datum letter (see Fig. 2), or
c) both after tolerance value and datum letter (see Fig. 3),
according to whether the maximum material condition
or both.

54

is to be applied to the toleranced feature, the datum,

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000(Part

FIG. 1

2)-l 985

FIG. 3

FIG. 2

The frame is connected to the toleranced feature (see 4.2 and 4.3 of IS : 8000 (Part l)-1976).
Note-It
should be clearly understood that if the maximum material principle is not (or may not be) applied to
tolerances of form or of position, these tolerances should be observed regardless of the actual finished sizes of the
features concerned. This means that the errors of form or of position should be checked independently by measurement.
If the maximum material principle is applied then the errors of form or position maybe checked by appropriately designed gauges.

3. Application of the Maximum Material Principle

3.1 Perpendicularity-The

application

of the maximum material principle

to perpendicularity

is shown in

Fig. 4.
3.1.1 The axis of the spigot should be contained
in a cylindrical
tolerance
datum plane A; the diameter of this zone varies from 0.04 to 0.06 as the actual
16 ( maximum material ) to 15.98 ( minimum material ).

zone, perpendicular
to the
spigot diameter varies from

Note 1-The gauge shown in Fig. 4C and 4D checks the combined effect of perpendicularity
the spigot should be checked independently to ensure that the limits of size are not exceeded.
Note 2-In

this example the positional accuracy (that is, its relationship

4A Assembly

and size. The size of

to another feature) is not In question.

4B Detail Drawing

,__;

0 16.04
LERANCE ZONE

0.06 PERPENDICULAR
0AfuM PLANE

PLANE

PLANE

4C Material of the Maximum Diameter

(16.00) Shown in Gauge-Effective
Perpendicularity Tolerance:@ 0.04

4D

Material of the Minimum Diameter

(15.98) Shown in Gauge-Effective
Perpendicularity Tolerance:+ 0.06

FIG. 4

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

55

IS : 8000(Part

2)-1976

3.2 Straightness-The

application

of the maximum material principle to straightness

is shown in Fig. 5.

3.2.1 The axis of the pin should be contained in a cylindrical tolerance zone of diameter varying from 0.01
to 0.03 as the actual pin diameter varies from 10.0 ( maximum material ) to 9.98 (mimmum material).
Note l-The
gauge shown in Fig.% and 5D checks the combined effect of straightness
pin should be checked independently to ensure that the limits of size are not exceeded.

and size. The size of the

Note 2-If it is necessary that the pin remains on the whole length within the imaginary cylinder of the maximum
diameter permitted by the diameter tolerance (Taylor principle). the straightness tolerance has to be indicated on the
generating line instead of the axisrsee 4.2 of IS : 8000 (Part 1)-1974

PlN

5B Detail of Pin
FIG. 5A Assembly

TOLERANCE
ZONE$ 0.03

0 9.98

GAUGE
_1
5C

5D

Maximum Material Pin (@lo)

Shown in Gauge-Effective Straightness Tolerance : $01)1

Minimum Material Pin ($9.98)

Shown in Gauge-Effective Straightness Tolerance 4 0.03

FIG. 5
3.3 Perpendicularity with Zero Form Tolerance-Where
it is necessary to specify that any errors of orientation are to be contained within the maximum material limits of a feature, this shall be indicated as shown in
Fig. 6. This indication means that if the feature is finished everywhere on its maximum limits of size it
should be perfect in form. Errors of form are permissible if the feature is finished away from the maximum
material limits of size in the direction of minimum material, provided that the minimum limits of size are
everywhere observed.

FIG. 6

3.3.1 It should be noted that zero form tolerances may only be associated with the maximum material condition as to do otherwise would be to demand perfection.

56

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000(Part

2)-1985

3.4 Centre Distance (see also 2.1.1 )-Figure 7 shows a simple case of linear tolerancing of centre distance,
and shows two components which will assemble even under the worst possible conditions permitted by the
centre distance tolerances and size tolerances, that is;
upper component-centre
lower component-centre

distance and pin diameter at maximum

distance and hole diameter at minimum

or

upper component-centre
lower component-centre

distance at minimum diameter of pins at maximum

distance at maximum diameter of holes at minimum

3.4.1 Figure 8 shows the extreme cases of the lower component shown in Fig. 7

50.1

FIG. 8
3.4.2Assembly will be possible provided that the following two conditions are fulfilled:
a) Distance between the outer sides of the pins in the upper component does not exceed 59.9, and
b) Distance between the inner sides of the pins is not less than 40.1.
Hence, if the pin diameters are at their minimum material condition, that is 9.7, their centre distance
could vary between:
59.9-9.7 = 50.2 and 40.1 + 9.7 = 49.8
Which is equivalent to a tolerance of f 0.2, as compared to the drawing requirement of f 0.1.
3.4.3 Advantage may be taken of this increase in manufacturing freedom by specifying
material concept applies to the centre distance of the pins of the upper component.

that the maximum

3.4.4 The maximum material principle could also be specified for the lower component of Fig. 7, with corresponding advantage,
3.4.5 When the maximum material principle is used, it should be specified:
a) according to Fig. 9, which shows the lower component; the symbol (3 follows the centre distance
tolerance (see a/so 2.2); and
b) according to Fig. 10, which shows the same component; the symbol 1% follows the hole position
tolerance, signifying that the tolerance zones are circular for the hole centres.
The only difference between the requirements
tolerance zones for the hole centres

of Fig. 9 and 10 is that Fig. 10 specifies

l0.1

2 HOLES,0 10+?

J
k

2 HOLES,$10 o

50?0.1 @

I -++j

00.1

01

3
t

t5

_I

FIG. 9

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

circular

FIG. 10
57

IS : 8000(Part

2)-l 976

3.5 Positional Tolerances ( see also 2.4 )-Figure

11 shows a further example of position tolerancing, and
shows a case where the maximum material principle is applied both to the holes which are toleranced and
to the datum feature. When the holes and the datum cylinder are in the maximum material condition, the
axes of the holes should be contained in cylindrical tolerance zones of 0.2 diameter, the axes of which are in
the true position. Variations from the maximum material size of the eight holes and of the datum cylinder
will allow additional tolerance of position on the holes.

3.5.1 The actual hole diameters as compared with their maximum material size will determine the additional tolerance on the positions of the holes in relation to one another. The variation of the datum cylinder
from its maximum material size allows a further increase of the position tolerance for all the holes relative
to the datum cylinder but not in relation to each other.
3.6 Coaxiality ( see also 2.4 )-The application of the maximum material principle to coaxiality is shown in
Fig. 12. The axis of the head of the pin should be contained in a cylindrical tolerance zone, the axis of which
coincides with that of the shank of the pin and the diameter of which varies from 0.05 to 0.165 as the actual
diameters of the head and the shank vary from the maximum to the minimum material limits of size ( see
Fig. 13 and 14).

,-

-r

FIG. 12

ECCENTRICITY

AXIS

OF

0.

ECCE

MS
OF
GAUGE

AXIS
TOTAL

ECCENTRIC

FIG. 13

58

FIG. 14
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000(Part
EXPLANATORY

3)-1985

NOTE

A section on tolerances of form and of position was included in IS : 696-1960 Code of practice for
general engineering drawings ( first revision ) which was based on the work in progress at that time by
ISOITC 10 Technical Drawings. The relevant documents have now been published by IS0 as Recommendations. In view of the detailed text and comprehensive scope of these recommendations, the Sectional Committee decided to exclude this subject from the second revision of IS : 696 published in 1972 and to be
covered fullv in separate Indian Standards. Accordingly, this Indian Standard is based on and is in conformity with IS0 1101111-1974Technical drawings-Tolerances
of form and of position-Part
II: Maximum
material principle issued by the International Organization for Standardization. Other standards in this
series are:
IS : 6000 (Part 1) .1976 Tolerances of form and of position
Generalities, symbols, indications on drawings

for engineering

IS : 6000 ( Part 3 )-1976 Tolerances of form and of position

Dimensioning and tolerancing of profile

for engineering

IS : 6000 ( Part 4 )-1976 Tolerances

Practical examples of indications

of form and of position

on drawings

for engineering

drawings
drawings
drawings

: Part 1
: Part 3
: Part

SP: 13-1976 Guide to the principles of geometrical tolerancing

SP : 13 mentioned above covers the main principles for the indication of tolerances of form and of
position in a simplified form which have been extracted from IS : 8000 ( Parts I and II ). It is
intended to serve as a ready guide for day-to-day working in drawing offices and shop floors.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

59

IS : 8000(Part
31-1985
IS0
1660-l
982

Indian

Standard

GEOMETRICAL
TOLERANCING
TECHNICAL
DRAWINGS
PART

DIMENSIONING

AND

( First
(IS0

National

Title

: Technical

Drawings

TOLERANCING

Revision

ON
OF

PROFILES

Dimensioning

and

Tolerancing

of Profiles)

Foreword

This Indian Standard,

which is identical with IS0 1660-l 982 Technical
drawings - Dimensioninq and tolerancing
of profiles issued by the International
Organization
for Standardization
(l.SO ),
was adopted by the Indian Standards
Institution on the recommendation
of the Drawmgs Sectional
Committee
and approval of the Mechanical
Engineering
Division Council.
The original version of this standard, IS : 8000 (Part 3)- 1976 Tolerances of form and of position
for engineering
drawings:
Part 3 Dimensioning
and tolerancing
of profile was based on IS0 16601971
Technical drawings-Tolerances
of form and of position issued by ISO. Consequent
to the
revision of the International
Standard,
harmonization
of the Indian Standard has been made by the
adoption
of IS0 1660-1982.
Wherever
the words
as Indian Standard.
Cross

International

Stardard

IS0

to this standard,

Corresponding

Standard

128-l

982

IS

10714_1g83 General
drawings

they should

read

985

Indian

principles

Standard
of presentation

on technical

(Identical)

IS0

129-I

IS0

1101-1983

IS : 8000
(Part
1 )-I 985 Geometrical
tolerancing
on technical
drawings:
Part 1 Tolerancing
of form, orientation,
location
and run-out,
and appropriate
geometrical
definitions
(first
revision) (Identical)

IS0

2692

IS : 8000
(Part 2)-1976
Geometrical
tolerancing
on technical
drawings:
Part 2 Maximum
material
principle
(Technically
equivalent)

IS0

5459-l

Additional

IS : 1 1669-l 986
cal drawings

General
principles
of dimensioning
(Technically
equivalent)

IS : 10721-I
983 Datum
ancing on technical
(Identical)

981

and datum
drawings

system

on techni-

for geometrical

Indian Standard
(IS : 8000)
is issued in several parts, each identical/technically
the corresponding
IS0 Standards
indicated
within
parentheses:
Geometrical

toler-

~,

Information

IS : 8000

60

referring

Reference

International

This
with

appear,

tolerancing

on technical

drawings:

Part

1 (IS0

1101)

Tolerancing
of form, orientation,
priate geometrical
definitions

Part

2 (IS0

1101/2)

Maximum

Part

3 (IS0

1660)

Dimensioning

Part

4 (ISO/R

1661 )

Practical

material
and

examples

equivalent

locatron and run-out,

(first revision)

and appro-

principle
tolerancing

of profiles

(first

of indications

on drawings

HANDBOOK

INDUSTRIAL

ON

revision)

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000( Part 3)- 1985

1660- 1982

IS0
1 Scope

and field

of application

This International
Standard
describes two methods of dimensioning
and tolerancing
profiles, i.e.
of any line, of
outlines
in one plane only. It is related to sub-clause
14.5, Profile tolerance
IS0 1101.

2 References

IS0

128,

Technical

drawings

General

IS0

129,

Technical

drawings

Dimensioning.

principles

IS0
1101,
Technical
drawings - Geometrical
location
and run out - Generalities,
definitions,
IS0

2692,

Technical

IS0
5459,
geometrical

Technical
tolerances.

drawings
drawings

Geometrical
-

of presentation.

tolerancing
symbols,
tolerancing

Geometrical

tolerancing

- Tolerancing
of form,
indication
on drawings.
-

Maximum
-

Datums

material
and

orientation,

principle.2

datum

systems

for

locate

the

3 Dimensioning
Profiles

may

be dimensioned

by either

3.1 By giving the successive

corresponding
elements
of the

radii
curve

of the

following

of curvature
and
(see figure
1).

methods
sufficient

:
dimensions

to

Figure 1

1) At present at the stage of draft. (Revision

2) At present at the stage of draft. (Revision

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

of ISO/R 129-1959.)
of IS0 1101/2-1974.)

FASTENERS-PART

61

IS : 8000(Part
IS0

31-1985

1660-l 982

3.2 By giving linear or polar coordinates

figures 2 and 3).

of a series of points through

which

the profile

passes (see

Figure 2

3.3
the

With either method it may be necessary

dimension
L should then be indicated

1 O'= 1 20
L

50

1 52.5

to give the dimensions

on the drawing
(see

1 40

1 60'= / 80"

1 1OO0 ! 120to 210

57

63.5

70

1 230 /

260

74.5

76

75

70

in association
figure 3).

280
65

300"

j 59 5

with a follower;

320"

340"

55

52

Figure 3

4 Indication

of tolerances

The profile dimensions

may be toleranced
must be contained
within
the specified

4.1

Method

by either
tolerance

of the methods
zone.

given below.

The actual

profile

The tolerance zone is defined with respect to the true profile which is itself defined by theoretically
exact dimensions.
The tolerance
zone is equally disposed
on either side of the true profile.

62

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000(Part
IS0 1660-1982

3)-l 985

The width of the tolerance zone is uniform when measured normal to the true profile at any point
(see figures 4 and 5).

a)

b)

Drawing information

Drawing interpretation

Figure 4

The tolerance zone may be related to datum features to which the maximum
may be applied when -required.

material principle

Sl3t1.5

a)

b)

Drawing information

Drawing interpretation

Figure 5

4.2

Method

II

The ordinates along one axis are enclosed in frames to show that they are theoretically exact
dimensions and the ordinates along the other axis are directly toleranced (see figures 6 and 7).

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

03

IS : 8000(Part
31-1985
IS0 1660-l 982
When measured
the contour

a)

normal

to the true profile the width

of the tolerance

Drawing information

b)

zone thus created

varies with

Drawing interpretation

Figure 6
I9

20

40

50

52,5

57

230

260

280
I

L
1

75
I

60

80

100

120 to 2100

63.5

70

74.5

76

300
/

320
/

340
I

1 70 1 65 j %L5 1 55 / 52
I
I
I
1

a)

Drawing information

Tolerance

b)

ZOtW

Drawing interpretation
Figure 7

Nc$ - If it is expedient and permissible to specify that a profile must fit a gauge or another component, this should be
speclfled on the drawing.

64

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000(Part

Indian

4)-1985

Standard

GEOMETRICAL
TOLERANCING
TECHNICAL
DRAWINGS

ON

PART 4 PRACTICAL EXAMPLES OF INDICATIONS ON DRAWINGS

1. Scope-Shows
practical examples of indications on drawings of tolerance of form and of position according to IS: 8000 (Part l)-1976 Tolerances of form and of position for engineering drawings: Part 1
Generalities, symbols, indications on drawings.
1.1 The figures in this standard show only the principle of indications of drawings. The technical correctness of the drawings depends on the functional conditions which apply to the represented parts.
1.2 The drawings are not fully dimensioned; only those dimensions
the tolerances of form and of position are shown.

having some relation to the indication

of

2. Selection of Datum System

2.1 Datum System on a Crankshaft ( See Fig. 1 )-The primary datum consists of two equal status diameter
datums on the two most widely spaced iournals. As each journal has length, form and positional errors may
be present, therefore the datums A and 6 have been specifically located along the journals, and the remaining portions of each have been given their own form and position errors. This enables the crankshaft to be
rotated with knife edged rollers at two specific points to create a common axis of rotation.
2.1.1 The secondary datum is obvious and is the functional

axial location of the crankshaft.

2.1.2 The tertiary datum is the orientation or timing location. No. 1 journal was chosen for function, and
where position relative to this datum has been prescribed, maximum material condition has been allowed
on both primary and tertiary datums. ( The secondary datum is a plane surface and therefore maximum
material condition is not applicable).
2.1.3 Where rotational geometrical checks have been prescribed the primary datum has been chosen on a
regardless of feature size basis because of the knife edged roller principle.
2.1.4 The collective datum principle has been used for features which may be based on three
mutually square and perpendicular to each other for both function and manufacturing capability.
planes may be deemed to exist not on the part itself, but in the precisely made fixture which would
the two part primary datum A and
B the secondary plane datum
C and the tertiary
D undermaximum material conditions where applicable.

planes
These
locate
datum

2.1.5 All geometry prescribed has been oriented to either specific datum or the collective one according to
function ( and capability ).

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

66

ALL OIL HOLES

No.1

t-J

No. 2

5 BEARINGS

No.3
3 BEARINGS MARKED Y
pjqq

2 BEARINGS MARKED Z;
p/izqq

No.1.2.3
, . I

AND 4 JOURNALS v
-

RNALS

12 HOLE PATTERN MAY VARY

-LY
CIRCUMFERENTIALIV

ANY TOOTH

HOLES

+(+O.O2@(A@

FIG. 1

/ijqGr5

B@{cl

IS : 8000(Part

4)-1985

3. Examples
3.1 Packing

Ring of a Pump ( See Fig. 2 )

FIG. 2
3.2 Fricfion

Wheel ( See Fig. 3 )

FIG. 3
3.3 Arbor for Miling

Cutter

( See Fig. 4 )

6
VIEW

FIG. 4
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

67

IS : 8000(Part

4)-1976

3.4 Roller ( See Fig. 5 )

3.5 Bearing

Housing

FIG. 5

( See Fig. 6 )
X
t1251

/ _m_
I -

I
I

I
I
I

I
I

i
I
I
I
I
I

I
I

d.,:::,A]
3.6 Ball Bearing

l---j=

FIG.6

SECTION xx

Inner Ring ( See Fig. 7 )

FIG. 7
66

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

co
ci
ii
8
co
t
b
4
rc
c-3

86fZ
IOS2

-3

8
d

El

IS : 8000(Part

4)-1976

3.10 Disc ( See Fig. 11 )

SECTION

XX

FIG. 11

3.11 Drilling

Jig ( See Fig. 12 )

FIG. 12

70

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8000(Part
3.12 Drawing

in Which Dimensions

are Shown in Tabular

Part Number

8h8

lOh8

10

15h9

15o1

25h9

30

12

+
3

Tc,lerances

Form ( See Fig. 13 )

Dimensions
b

4)-l 985

3.12.1 In drawings in which dimensions are shown in tabular

should be designated
by lower case letters in the second
tolerance values should be indicated
in the table.

EXPLANATORY

form, the tolerances

of form and of position
compartment
of the tolerance
frame. The

NOTE

A section on tolerances
of form and of position was included in IS : 696-1960 Code of practice for
general engineering
drawings ( first revision ) which was based on the work in progress at that trme by
lSO/TC IO Technical
drawings. The relevant documents
have now been published by IS0 as Recommendations. In view of the detailed text and comprehensive
scope of these recommendations,
the Sectional Committee decided to exclude this subject from the second revision of IS : 696 published
in 1972 and to be
covered fully in separate Indian Standards. Accordingly,
this Indian Standard is based on and is in conformity with ISOlR 1661-1971 Technical
drawings-Tolerances
of form and of position-Part
4 Practical
examples of indications
on drawings issued by the International
Organization
for Standardization.
Other standards in this series are:
IS : 8000 (Part
Generalities,

I )-1976 Tolerances
symbols, indications

of form and of position

on drawings

for engineering

IS : 8000 ( Part III )-1976 Tolerances

of form and of position
Dimensioning
and tolerancing
of profile

for engineering

IS : 8000 ( Part IV )-I976 Tolerances

Practical examples of indications
SP : 13-1976 Guide to the principles

of form and of position

on drawings
of geometrical

for engineering

drawings
drawings
drawings

: Part I
: Part III
: Part IV

tolerancing

SP : 13 mentioned above covers the main principles for the indication

of tolerances
of form and of
position in a simplified
form which have been extracted
from IS : 8000 ( Parts 1 and 2). It is
intended to serve as a ready guide for day to day working in drawing offices and shop floors.
Assistance
has also been derived from BS 308 Engineering
tolerancing,
issued bythe BritishStandards
Institution.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

drawing

practice,

Part 3: 1972 Geometrical

71

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

SECTION
TERMINOLOGY

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS : 8535-1977

Indian Standard

[Jsr]
1. Scope-Covers

TERMINOLOGY FOR
FEATURES OF FASTENERS

the terminology

for features

of fasteners.

Note-Where
a terminology is given in parentheses,
would be that which is given first.

it is done so only for information

and the correct terminology

2. Forms of Screw Thread

Figure

NO.

Designation

Indian Standarc

1
--_-

2.1

Screw thread

IS : 4218

Tapered screw thread

2.3

Tapping screw thread

2.4

Wood screw thread

IS : 5957
IS: 7800

IS0 metric thread

IS : 4218

Pipe thread

IS : 2643

2.5

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

75

IS : 8535-1977
No.

Designation

Figure

Indian Standard

IS : 1369

Runout of thread (machined

thread)

k-b

Runout of thread (rolled)

9.7
(SCant

lS

shank)

: 1369

Runout of thread (rolled)

IS

(full size)

Undercut

: 1369

(groove at runout of

End for self-tapping

End of self-tapping

screw

screw (flat)

3. Shape of Heads

No.

3.1

Figure

_@_

No reference
76

Designation

standards

are available.

Hexagon

These features

are specified

head

in the respective

HANDBOOK

Indian Standard

ON

product

standards.

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8535-1977

No.

3.2

3.4

Figure

_@_

Designation

BT$

@_

@-i

Indian Standarld

Hexagon

head with washer face

Hexagon

head with plain collar

Hexagon

hea:;;;

chamfered

Square head

3.6

,@_

3.7

@_

3.8

-@

@T

Square head with collar

~~

Triangle

head withcollar

Octagon

head

&-

Bihexagon

head (12 point head

or double hexagonal)

* No reference

tiANDBOOK

standards

are available.

ON INDUSTRIAL

These features

FASTENERS-PART

are specified

in the respective

product

standards.

77

IS : 8535-1977

No.

Figure

Designation

3.10.

T-head (hammer

3.11

3.12)

-&$-

-@q

-&3

Indian

Standard

head)

Round head

Mushroom

Cheese

head (truss head)

head

Raised cheese

head (fillister

head)

3.15

-@-

@-

&A

s.16

Pan head

Countersunk

head (fiat)

Raised countersunk

head (oval)

.17

I
*No
78

reference

standards

are available.

These features

are specified

in the respective

HANDBOOK

ON

product

standards

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8535-1977

No.

Designation

Figure

3.18

Binding

Indian

Standard

head

Countersunk

head shouldered

3.19
(undercut

Raised

countersunk

3.20

shouldered

3.21

Countersunk

B=-

3.22

flat head)

Spherical

head

(undercut

hexagon

hexagon

oval head)

head

head

4. Forms of Shank

No.

Designation

Figure

-El==
-E+

4.1

4.2

Indian

shank diameter = Thread

(full size shank)

Shank

diameter

diameter

diamete r

w effective
(scant

Note-Features
* No reference

MANDBOOK

ON

described
standards

INDUSTRIAL

are those
are available.

covered

by thick

These features

FASTENERS--PART

pitchh

shank)

Shank diameter < core diamete r

(waisted shank)

4.3

Standard

lines.
are specified,in

the respective

product

standards.

79

IS : 8535-1977
Indian Standard

Designation

Figure

No.
-

4.4

Shank diameter

> thread

diameter

Hexagon

4.5

shoulder screw

Cup head square neck (cup

square head)

4.6

Cup head square

shank)

4.7

neck (scant

Square

4.8

head, square

neck

5. Screw and Bolt Ends

No.

Designation

Figure

Indian Standard

5.1

Rolled end

IS : 1366

5.2

Rounded

IS : 1368

Note-Features
* No reference

80

described
standards

are those
are available.

covered

by thick

These features

end

lines.
are specified

in the respective

HANDBOOK

ON

oroduct

standards.

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :8535-1977

No.

Designation

Figure

Chamfered

5.3

Indian Standard

IS

end

: 1368

?t--tt

5.4

Cone point

5.5

Truncated

cone point

NORMAL
CUP POINT

Cup point

5.6

W CUP

POINT

5.7

Half dog Point

5.8

Full dog point

5.9

Half dog point

with rounded

end

EB

Half dog point with truncated

cone end

5.10

Note-Features
HANDBOOK

ON

described
INDUSTRIAL

are those covered

FASTENERS-PART

by thick
1

lines
81

IS : 8535-1977
6. Drlvlng Features
No.

Designation

Figure

6.2

6.3

-@q

6.4

B-

Square

Triangle

Octagon.

Hexagon

Triangular

Note-Features
*No

82

reference

described
standards

are those
are available.

covered

by thick

These features

Standard

Hexagon

Bihexagon

6.5

Indian

(12 point)

socket

socket

lines.
are specified

in the respective

HANDBOOK

ON

product

INDUSTRIAL

standards.

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8535-1977

Six-spline

Bihexagon

socket

socket

(12 point

Cross recess (Phillips

Cross

*No

reference

HANDBOOK

ON

standards

are available.

INDUSTRIAL

These features

FASTENERS-PART

are specified

type)

recess (Pozidriv)

in the respective

product

standards.
83

IS : 8535-1977

No.

Figure

Designation

6.15

6.17

Indian Standard

Tommy

Straight knurl

Diamond knurl

Cross hole (capstan screw)

6.19

_Bq

*No reference standards are available.

These features are specified in the respective product standards.

EXPLANATORY

General terminologyforfeatures

Pentagon

of fasteners

are included

NOTE

in this standard.

The dimensioning
of features of fasteners as well as the nomenclature
and terminology
of fasteners are
covered in separate Indian Standards. Indian Standards, where available on the features of fasteners are given
in the last columnof thetable.
In the preparation
of this standard
considerable
assistance
has been derived from ISOlDlS 1891.2
Fasteners-Bolts,
screws, nuts and accessories-Terminology
and nomenclature
issued by the internationalOrganizationforStandardization.

84

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8536-1977

Indian Standard

DIMENSIONING

1. Scope-Covers
Note-The

methods

of dimensioning

terms given in parentheses

of features

are for information

of fasteners.
only and their use is not recommended.

EXPLANATORY
This standard lays down the method
dards available on dimensions
of features
Terminology
dards.

of fasteners

OF FASTENERS

NOTE

of dimensioning
of the features of fasteners. The reference
of fasteners are included in the last column of the table.

and terminology

for features

of fasteners

are covered

in separate

stan-

Indian Stan-

In the preparation
of this standard,
considerable
assistance
has been derived from ISOlDlS 1891.2
Fasteners-Bolts,
screws, nuts and accessories-Terminology
and nomenclature
issued by the international Organization
for Standardization.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

85

IS :8536-1977
2. Dimensioning

of Fasteners

No.

Indian Standard

IS

2.2

Nominal

length

2.3

Diameter

of split pin hole

*No reference
86

Designation

Figure

standards

are available.

These features

are specified

in the respective
HANDBOOK

product
ON

: 4206

standards.

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS--PART

IS : 8536-1977

No.

Designation

Figure

Indian Standard

Distance between split pin

hole and extreme end of shank

2.4

2.5

Height of head

*No reference standards are available. These features are specified in the respective product standards.
HANDBOOK

ON INOUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

87

IS : 8536-1977

No.

Figure

Indian

Designation

26

Standard

Width across flats

*No

88

reference

standards

are available.

These features

are specified

in the respective

HANDBOOK

ON

product

standards.

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

8536-1977

IS

No.

Indian Standard

Designation

Figure

16;

+
Width

2.7

across

corners

lsbt

X
66
2.8

Radius

under head

Length

of elliptical

IS

: 4172

Et5

DETAIL

X
X

6
2.9

fillet

aI3

DETAIL

Angle of chamfer

*No reference

HANDBOOK

standards

ON

are available.

INDUSTRIAL

These features

FASTENERS-PART

are specified

in the respective

product

standards.

89

IS : 8536-1977

No.

Figure

Indian

Designation

Standard

*2.11

Diameter

of washer

face

Q@

DETAIL

2.12

Height

of washer

Thread

length

Length

of runout

face

2.13

-=j-

2.14

2.15

2.16

2.17

Lz+

*No
90

~+-k

reference

standards

Shank

of thread

length

features

are specified

IS

: 1369

in the respective

HANDBOOK

: 4206

Grip length

are available.These

IS

ON

product

standards.

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8535-1977

No.

Figure

Designation

2.18
1

_I

Length
end

of chamfered

Radius

of rounded

Indian Standard

or rounded

IS

: 1388

IS

: 1388

IS

: 1388

I
---

2.19

Angle of chamfered

Depth of hexagon

end

end

socket

(key engagement)

Head diameter

2.23

Diameter

2.24

Height

of collar

of collar

*Nb reference standards are available. These features are specified in the respective product standards.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

91

IS : 8536-1977

No.

Figure

2.25

Designatlon

Indian Standard

Diameter of chamfered collar

2.26

Height of chamfered collar

2.27

Width of slot

@-

Diameter of cross recess

Width of cross recess

*No reference standards are available. These features are specified in the respective product standards.
92

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8536-1977

Ilo.

Designation

Flgure

Indian Standard

IS : 7478

!.31

Depth of cross recess

!.32

Angle of countersunk head (flat)

height of raised portion

Radius of raised protion

Length of flat cone point

Angle of flat cone point

I
1

!.33

!.34

2.35

+zB--

!.36

2.37

Diameter of flat cone point

2.38

Diameter of dog point

*No reference standards are available. These features are specified In the respective product standards.
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

93

IS : 8536-1977

No.

Designation

Figure

Indian Standard

Length of half dog point

2.39

2.40

cs

Length of full dog point

Diameter of cup point

Angle of cup point

NORMAL
CUP POINT

2.41
W-CUP
POINT

NORMAL
CUP POINT

2.42
W-CUP
POINT

Nominal length

2.43

2.44

- flxm

Nominal diameter

*No refereqce standards are available. These features are specified in the respective product standards.
94

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8536-1977

No.

Indian Standard

Designation

Figure

BR
Thickness

of nut

2.46

Diameter

of castle

2.47

Wrenching

2.45

IHE?

*No

reference

HANDBOOK

ON

standards

are available.

INDUSTRIAL

These features

FASTENERS-PART

are specified

height

in the respective

product

standards.

95

IS : 8537-1977

Indian Standard

NOMENCLATURE AND TERMINOLOGY OF

FASTENERS

1. Scope-Covers
Note-The
2. Hexagon

the nomenclature

and terminology

of fasteners.

terms given in parentheses, are for informationonly

and their use is not recommended.

Bolts and Screws

*
Figure

No.

*.,

2.2

Designation

Indian Standard

e-3

Hexagon bolt

IS: 1363
IS: 3136

--$=I=$-

Hexagon bolt with washer face

IS: 1364
IS : 2389

Hexagon screw

IS: 1363
IS : 1364
IS : 2389

2.3

Hexagon screw with scant

2.4

12.6

2.6

96

@=

shank (shank diameter

diameter)

pitch

IS : 1363
IS : 1364
IS : 2389

Hexagon bolt with hexagon nut

IS
IS
IS
IS

Hexagon fit bolt (shoulder bolt)

1S : 3640

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

: 1363
: 1364
: 3138
: 6639

FASTENERS-PART

IS :8537-1977

No.

Hexagon

set screw with full dog

Hexagpn

set screw with full dog

Point and truncated

Hexagon
*

&-

!.ll

.@-+

bolt with waisted

Hexagon

bolt with collar

Hexagon
filleted

bolt with
collar

Spherical

!.15

Hexagon
3.1

IS

: 3757

Hexagon

Countersunk

!.14

cone end

bolt with large head

(heavy series)

1.12

HANDBOOK

Indian Standard

Designation

Figure

hexagon

hexagon

bolt

socket screw

bolt

shank

IS : 2269

(cap screw)

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

97

IS : 8537-1977

No

Figure

3.2

Designation

Hexagon

Indian Standard

socket

countersunk

socket

shoulder

flat

IS

: 6761

IS

: 2585

screw

Hexagon

screw

4. Square Head Bolts

Square head bolt

4.1

fat==

4.2

Square head bolt with collar

Square head bolt with collar and

4.3

half dog

5. Triangle Head Bolts

5.1

Triangle

head bolt with collar

Octagon

bolt

6. Octagon Bolts

8.1

f$

-IF+

7. Bi-hexagon Bolts

98

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8537-1977
8. T-Bolts
Designation

T-bolt (hammer

9. Round-Head

Indian Standard

head bolt)

T-bolt with square

neck

T-Bolt with double

nib

Bolts

Cup head square

1
1

9.2

-j=l=J+

9.3

neck bolt

IS: 2609

Cup head nib bolt (cup nib bolt)

Mushroom

head nib bolt

(cup nib bolt)

Fish bolt (cup oval neck bolt)

Bolt for railway

(cup

square

ties
neck bob)
L

lO..Flat

Countersunk

Bolts

Flat countersunk

square

neck

IS : 2609
IS : 8352

bolt
1

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

99

IS : 8537-1977

No.

Designation

Flgure

Flat countersunk

10.4

1
1
1

IS : 6353

nib bolt

Deep flat countersunk

Indian Standard

bolt

Flat square countersunk

bolt

11. Slotted Head Screws

11.1

Slotted cheese head screw

IS: 1366

11.2

Slotted pan head screw

IS : 6101

11.3

Slotted counternsunk

(flat)

IS: 1365

head screw

11.4

Slotted raised countersunk (oval)

IS: 1365

head screw

11.5

Slotted capstan screw (tommy

IS : 6070

bolt)

11.6

Slotted flat mushrmoom head

screw, small

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8537-1977

Figure

No.

Indian Standard

Designation

Slotted flat mushroom head

screw, large (binding screw)

Slotted flat mushroom head

screw with full dog point

Slotted flat mushroom head fit

bolt (shoulder bolt)

11.10

Slotted raised countersunk

_&

head

screw with full dog poinr

Slotted countersunk

head screw

with full dog point

Countersunk head screw with

forged slot

Slotted round head screw

1
-I

11.14

head screw

Slotted raised countersunk (oval

11.18

trim) head screw

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8412

Slotted rasied cheese (fillister)

head screw

Slotted countersunk (flat trim)

HANDBOOK

IS : 5308

IS : 5308

101

IS : 8537-1977
12. Cross Recessed Screws
No.

Flaure

Designation

Indian Standard

Recessed raised cheese (fillister)

head screw

Recessed pan head screw

IS : 7483

Recessed countersunk (flat)

12.3

BE+

IS : 7485

head screw

Recessed raised countersunk

12.4

(oval) head screw

Is : 7486

13. Bolts with Captive Components

13.1

13.2

13.3

%I=

J-texagon screw with captive

plain washer

Hexagon bolt with captive spring

and plain washer

Recessed raised cheese head bolt

with captive spring washer

Slotted raised countersunk

13.4

head

bolt with captive countersunk

serrated lock washer

102

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8537-1977
14. Miscellaneous

Bolts and Screws

No.

Designation

Figure

14.3

IS

Lifting

IS: 4190

eye bolt

Knurled

Indented

HANDBOOK

slotted

FASTENERS-PART

screw

head screw

foundation

U-bolt (stirrup

ON INDUSTRIAL

: 3727

Wing screw

Knurled. thumb

14.8

Indian Standard

bolt)

bolt

103

IS : 8537-1977

Indian

Designation

Figure

NO.

Eyelet bolt

14.10

-I
1

Threaded

--

14.11

Standard

pin

Flat leaf screw

I!!+=

14.12

Mushroom

head anchor

bolt

4J

14.13

14.14

Flat head anchor

Belting

bolt

bolt

Clip bolt

104

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8537-1977

Indian Standard

Hexagon domed cap head bolt

15. Screwed Plugs

15.1

Hexagon head screw plug

15.2

Hexagon socket screw plug

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

105

IS : 8537-1977

No.

Designation

Indian Standard

15.3

Hexagon socket pipe screw plug

15.4

Hexagon head pipe screw plug

15.5

Square socket screw plug

Square head screw plug

Figure

L
c

15.6

1&Studs

IS: 1662

16.1

Stud

16.2

Stud with rolled threads

16.3 j

Stud with undercut (groove)

16.4

Waisted stud

16.5

Stud with reduced shank

(scant shank)

106

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8537-19?7
17. Double End Studs
No.

Figure

Designation

Double end stud with full shank

17.1

Double end stud with reduced

17.2

shank (waisted stud)

Stud bolt

17.3

18. Headless

Indian Standard

Screws

Slotted headless screw with flat

chamfered end

Hexagon socket headless screw

with flat chamfered end

Hexagon socket headless screw

18.3

with cone point

Hexagon socket headless screw

18.4

with full dog point

Hexagon socket headless screw

18.5

with cup point

19. Slotted and Hexagon Socket Set Screws

Slotted set (grub) screw with flat

chamfered end

IS : 2388

Hexagon socket set (grub) screw

19.2

with flat point

IS : 6094

Slotted set (grub) screw with full

dog point

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :2368

107

IS : 8537-1977

No.

Figure

Indian Standard

Designation

Slotted

set (grub) screw with cup.

point

Slotted

Hexagon

socket

IS

: 2388

set (grub) screw

IS: 6094

with full dog point

Hexagon
19.7

: 2388

set (grub) screw with

cone point

19.6

IS

socket

set (grub) screw

IS : 6094

with cup point

Hexagon

socket

set (grub) screw

IS : 6094

with cone point

20. Self-Tapping

Screws

Hexagon

20.3

head tapping

scre

Slotted

pan head tapping

Slotted

countersunk

tapping

Slotted

screw

raised

countersunk

tapping

Recessed
20.6

108

screw

countersunk

(flat) head

screw

raised

countersunk

(oval) head screw

HANDBOOK

IS

: 7170

IS

: 7169

(oval)

20.4

Recessed

: 7173

(flat) head

screw

head tapping

IS

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :8537-1977
21. Wood Screws

Coach

screw (hexagon

head

Square

head wood screw

Slotted

round head wood screw

Slotted

raised countersunk

(oval)

head wood screw

Slotted

countersunk

wood screw

21.6

21.7

Recessed

pan head wood screw

Recessed

raised

countersunk

(oval head) wood screw

Recessed
21.8

countersunk

(flat) head

wood screw

Slotted

21.9

round head drive screw

Slotted countersunk
21.10

HANDBOOK

(flat) head
IS:6760

21.5

(flat) head

drive screw

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

109

IS : 8537-1977
22. Self-Tapping Screws (Thread Cutting Type)

No.

Figure

22.,

Designation

[E

H;;exm

Slotted

head self cutting

cheese

cutting

Slotted

Indian Standard

head self

screw

countersunk

head self cutting

(flat)
screw

Recessed

pan head self

Recessed

countersunk

head self cutting

Recessed

raised

(flat)

screw

countersunk

23. Self-Tapping Screws (Thread Formed by Deformation)

231

110

e-

Thread rolling screws (thread

formed by deformation)

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8537-1977
No.

Figure

Designation

23.2

Indian

Standard

IS: 7519

Hammer

drive screws

!4.1

Hexagon

nuts

IS : 1363, IS : 1364
IS : 3138, IS : 2389

!4.2

Hexagon

lock nut

IS : 1363, IS
IS : 2389

24. Hexagon

Nuts

Collar
!4.3

nut with
IS : 7795

flange)

14.4

Hexagonal

__
Et

4.6

4.7

ON

INDUSTRIAL

nut with chamfered

IS : 7795

collar

14.5

HANDBOOK

nut (hexagon

FASTENERS-PART

: 1364

Hexagon

nut with washer

Hexagon

nut, heavy series

Hexagon

weld nut

face

IS: 1364

IS

: 6623

IS : 8537-1977

No.

Figure

Designation

Hexagon nut, self-retaining

24.8

25. Square Nuts

25.1

25.2

+
-Ef
4+
+
I*
-

Indian Standard

Square nut

IS : 2585

Square pressed nut

IS : 730

Special foundation

25.4

Square nut with collar

Square weld nut

25.5

nut

25.3

ii

26. Triangle Nuts

28.1

Triangle nut with collar

112

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8537-1977
27. Octagon
No.

Nuts and Pentagon

Nuts

+
I@

Designation

Figure

27.2

Octagon

Indian Sunday

nut

Pentagon

nut

Hexagon

slotted

Hexagon

thin castle

nut

IS: 2232

Hexagon

thin Castle

nut

IS : 5368

28. Bi-Hexagon

Nut

29. Slotted and Castle Nuts

29.1

nut

IS : 2232

B
B

29.2

29.3

30. Cap Nuts

Domed cap nut

IS : 7790

Cap nut

IS : 2687

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

113

IS : 8537-1977
31. Round Nuts

No.

31.2

Figure

Designation

Indian Standard

Knurled nut with collar

IS

: 3460

Knurled

IS

: 3460

nut

Slotted

round nut

Slotted

round nut for hook-

IS

spanner

: 6731

Round nut with set pin holes

-

in side

11.6

Round nut with drilled

holes in

one face

114

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8537-1977
32. Miscellaneous Nuts

=
B
+
@cltl

No.

Figure

Designation

Wing

32.1

32.2

IS : 2636

IS : 4178

Lifting eye nut

II

nut

Indian Standard

II

32.3

Turnbuckle nut

32.4

Lifting nut

32.5

Lifting nut

32.6

Self-centering

nut

33. Washers

33.2

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Plain washer

IS : 2016

Chamfered plain washer

IS : 2016

115

IS : 8537-1977
No.

Designation

Figure

+
D-,A-

Indian Standard
3

33.3

+
w+

33.4

HB

33.5

Square

washer

Round washer

Square

with round hole

with square

hole

taper washer

is+

IS : 8033

IS : 5372
IS : 5374

I sections)

(for U and

IS : 5373

33.6

Self-centering

washer

34. Spring Washers

-+

34.1

Single Coil spring

washer with
squareends

IS : 3063
IS : 6735

Single coil spring washer

with

34.2
deflected

34.3

j#

IS : 3063

ends

Double toll spring washer

Curved spring washer

116

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

IS : 6755

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8537-1977

Crinkle

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

washer

Countersunk

washer

Lock washer

external

Lock washer

internal

tooth

Countersunk

toothed

lock washer

Serrated

HANDBOOK

spring

lock washer

tooth

external

IS :8537-1977
C

No.

34.11

Designation

Figure

Serrated

lock washer

Indian

internal

Standard

IS : 5556

teeth

Countersunk

34.12

serrated

toothed

lock washer

IS

: 5556

IS

: 8068

IS

: 8068

35. Tab Washers

35.1

35.2

Tab washer

with

long tab

Tab washer

with long tab and

wing

35.3

External

tab washer

IS: 5554

35.4

I nternal

tab washer

36. Split Pins

36.1

118

Split

pin

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8537-1977

Figure

Indian Standard

Designation

Flat split totters

36.2

IS: 2638

37. Pins

37.1

e-

37.2

Grooved

taper

pin

Grooved

knuckle

pin

Grooved

straight

pin with

IS : 7368

IS: 7383

IS : 7384
guide end

Grooved

dowel

Grooved

socket

EXPLANATORY

pin.

IS : 7385

pin

IS : 7386

NOTE

This standard
lays down the nomenclature
and terminology
of fasteners.
At present, not all the
fasteners
and accessories
listed are covered by Indian Standards.
Also included are certain types of
fasteners, which would be termed as absolescent
types (those being used up from stock) in order that their
terminology
may be standardized
at the same time.
The drawings
are essentially
diagrammatic,
special characteristics
covered in 13 and 14.
.Terminology
Standards.

for features

of fasteners

particularly

and dimensioning

those

showing

of fasteners

bolts

are covered

and screws

having

in separate

Indian

In the preparation
of this standard considerable
assistance
has been derived from ISOlDlS 1891.2
Fasteners-Bolts,
screws, nuts and accessories-Terminology
and nomenclature
issued by International
Organization
for Standardization.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

119

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

SECTION
SCREW

THREADS

AND

GAUGING

PRACTICE

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS : 2186-1967

lndian Standard

1
m
I

DIMENSIONS FOR EXTERNAL

INTERFERENCE FIT THREADS

0. Foreword

0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 24 August 1967, after the draft
finalized by the Screw Threads and Fasteners Sectional Committee had been approved by the MechanicaJ
Engineering Division Council.
0.2 In the preparation of this standard, assistance has been derived from DIN 13 and 14, Supplement 14
Metrisches Gewinde, Gewinde fur Festsitz, nichtdichte Verbindung ( Einschraubende v. Stiftschrauben )
( Metric screw threads, screw threads for interference fit fastenings without sealing action ) ( for inserted
ends of studs ), issued by the Deutscher Normenausschuss.
0.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS :
The number of significant places retained in the
2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values(revised).
rounded Off Value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
0.4 The external interference fit threads covered in this standard are for use with the 6H class of internal
threads covered in IS: 4218-1967 ISOMetricscrewthreads.

1. Scope

1.1 This standard covers the dimensions

mm.

for external interference

fit threads in the diameter range 1 to 150

2. Symbols
2.1 The various symbols used in this standard shall denote the quantities

given below against each:

d = major diameter of external threads;

d2 = pitch diameter of external threads;
d3= minor diameter of external threads;
P = pitch; and
Td, Td, and Td3 for tolerances ford, d2 and dJ.
3. Fundamental Deviations
3.1 The values of the fundamental deviations for various diameters of external interference
coarse and fine pitches shall be as given in Tables 1 and 4 respectively.

fit threads of

4. Dimensions
4.1 The limits of dimensions
in Tables 2,3 and 5.

for external interference fit threads of coarse and fine pitches shall be as given

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

123

IS : 2186-1967
TABLE 1 FUNDAMENTAL DEVIATIONS FOR EXTERNAL
INTERFERENCE FIT THREADS (COARSE SERIES)
(Clause 3.1 )

(Values of deviations In mlcrometres)

Thread Nominal
Diameter
mm

(22.2),2.5

0.45
0.4

(44.5)

0.5
0.6
0.75
0.7

.5

0.8

6, (7)
8
10

1
1.25
1.5

;:4),16
(18),20,(22)
24,(27)
30, (33)
36, (39)
42, (45)
48, (52)
56;(60)
64to 80
(85)to

150

Note-

Minor Diameter
-

36

11

45

56

10

50

17

63

80

56

15

71

22

90

112

80

20

100

35

125

160

300
315
335
355
375

112

28

140

34

180

224

375

160

40

200

65

250

315

Major Diameter

mm

0.25
0.3
0.35

Deviations

Pitch

1, ( 1.1 ),1.2
(1.4)
1.6,(1.8 )

( 3.5)

1.75
2
2.5
3
3.5

Pitch Diameter
-

Td

42
48
53

42
48
53

28

60
63
67
80
90
90
95

60
63
67
80
90
90
95

40

112
132
150

112
132
150

170
180
212

170
180
212

236
265

236
265

4
4.5
5
5.5
6

300
315
335
355
375

375

Tdz

Td3

Diameters given in br ckets are second preferences.

5. Designation

5.1A screw thread designation

shall consist

of size designation

and number of this standard.

Example:

124

1) A thread of nominal

diameter

2) A thread of nominal

diameter

6 mm with coarse pitch shall be designated

as:
M6-IS
: 2186
8 mm with fine pitch shall be designated as:
MB x l-IS
: 2186
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2186-1967

TABLE2LlMlTSOFDlMENSlONSFOREXTERNAL
lNTERFERENCEFITTHREADS(COARSESERlES)
(Diameter Range 1 to 33 mm)
(Clause 4.1)

d3
f

Thread
Nominal
Diameter

Major Dlameterd

Pitch
P

Max

mm

Pitch Diameterdp

Min

Tol

zz6

4m

mm
::

Max

Min

mm

Minor Diameterda
Tol

Max

mm

mm

Min

Tot

(:.I )

0.25

1.100
1.000

1.056

42

0.966
0.666

0.930
0.630

36

0.704
0.604

0.746
!:6

56
;

t:::,

0.3
0.25

1.400
1.200

1.352
1.156

42
46

1.233
1.066

1.197
1.030

36

0.904
1.043

0.967
0.646

56

(::;,

0.35

1.600

1.747
1.547

53

1.601
1.401

1.565
1.365

36

1.362
1.162

1.326
1.126

56

$2)
2.5

0.4
0.45
0.45

2.000
2.200
2.500

2.137
1.940
2.437

60
63
63

1.946
1.760
2.246

1.696
1.730
2.196

50
50

1.665
1.526
1.965

1.565
1.446
1.665

60
60

(33.5)

0.5
0.6

3.500
3.000

3.420
2.933

60
67

3.150
2.715

3.100
2.665

50

2.404
2.761

2.324
2.701

60

(i.5)
5
6
7
6
10

0.75
0.7
0.6
1
1
1.25
1.5

4.000
4.500
5.000
6.000
7.000
6.000
10.000

4.410
3.910
4.905
5.666
6.666
7.666
9.650

90
95
112
112
132
150

4.053
3.565
4.520
5.406
6.406
7.244
9.062

4.003
3.535
4.470
5.335
6.335
7.173
9.011

50
50
71

3.597
3.156
4.036
4.795
5.795

71

6.466
6.162

3.076
3.517
3.956
4.663
5.663
6.376
6.070

60
60
112
112
112
112

7:4,

2
1.75

14.000
12.000

13.620
11.630

160
170

10.943
12.761

12.661
10.643

100

11.561
9.666

11.421
9.726

160

2Y6,

2.5
2

16.000

17.766
15.620

212
160

16.456
14.761

16.356
14.661

100

14.966
13.561

14.606
13.421

160

;:2,
f427,

2.5
3

20.000
22.000
27.000
24.000

21.766
19.766
26.764
23.764

212
236

20.456
16.456
25.131
22.131

20.356
16.356
25.031
22.031

100
100

16.966
20.354
23.354

16.606
23.194
20.194

160
160

;:3,

3.5

33.000
30.000

32.735
29.735

265

27.607
30.607

30.707
27.707

100

26.741
25.741

25.561
26.561

160

Note-Diameters

HANDBOOK

ON

given in brackets

INDUSTRIAL

are second

FASTENERS-PART

71
71

preferences.

125

IS : 2186-1967

TABLE 3 LIMITS OF DIMENSIONS FOR EXTERNAL

INTERFERENCE
FIT THREADS ( COARSE SERIES

(Diameter Range 36to 150 mm)

(Clause 4.1 I

Thread
Nomlnal
Dlameter

Major Diameter d

Pitch
P
Max

Min

Tol

Max

Min

mm
4

3:zoo

3zoo

3;

3El4

3z74

'ii)

4
4.5

42.000
39.000.

41.685
38.700

300
315

39.189
36.514

$)

5
4.5

48.000
45.000

47.665
44.685

335
315

(;6$)

5.5
5

56.000
52.000

55.645
51.665

(it)

( ;; )

6
5.5
:

64.000
60.000
68.000
72.000

w&)

w;)
'z!
(105)
110
(115)

zrn

Minor Diameter d3

Tot

Tol

Max

Min

14"

3YY37

3%l3

22m

39.049
36.374

140

36.523
34.137

36.299
33.913

224

44.864
42.189

42.049
44.724

140

41.910
39.523

41.686
39.299

224

355
335

52.540
48.864

52.400
48.724

140

45.910
49296

45.686
49.072

224

63.625
59.645
67.625
71.625

375
355
375
375

60215
56.540
64.215
68.215

60.075
56.400
64.075
68.075

140
140
140

56.683
53.296
60.683
62.683

56.459
53.072
60.459
62.459

224
224
224

80.000
76.000

79.625
75.625

375

76.215
72.215

76.075
72.075

140

68.683
72.683

68.459
72.459

224

:
6
6

90.000
85.000
100.000
95.000

89.625
84.625
94.625
99.625

86.263
81.263
96.263
91.263

81.063
86.063
91.063
96.063

200
200

82.704
77.704
92.704
87.704

82.389
77.389
92.389
87.389

315
315

105.000
110.000
115.000
120.000
125000
130.000
140.000
150.000

104.625
109.625
114.625
119.625
124.625
129.625
139.625
149.625

375
375
375
375
375
375
375
375
375
375
375

97.704
97.389
102.704 102.389
107.704 107.389
112.704 112.389
117.704 117.389
122.704 122.389
132.704 132.389
142.704 142.389

315
315
315
315
315
315
315
315

(120)

:
:

125
(130)
140
(150)

6
6
6

Note-Diametersgiveninbracketsaresecond

126

Pitch Diameter d2

101.263 101.063
106.263 106.063
111.263 111.063
116.263 116.063
121.263 121.063
126.263 126.063
136.263 136.063
146.263 146.063

200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200

preferences.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2186-l 967

TABLE 4 FUNDAMENTAL
DEVIATIONS FOR EXTERNAL
INTERFERENCE
FIT THREADS ( FINE SERIES )

( Diameter Range 9 to 39 mm )
( Clause 3.7 )
Size

Deviations

Pitch

Minor Diameter

Pitch Diameter

Major Diameter

M8xl

Ml0 x 1.25
Ml2 x 1.25
(M14x1.5)
Ml6 x 1.5
(M18x1.5)
M20 x 1.5
(M22 x 1.5)
M24x2
(M27x2)
M30x2
(M33x2)

mm

Td

112

112

1.25

132

132

1.5

150

150

180

180

M36x3
(M39x3)

NOTE-Sizesin

236

bracketsaresecond

Toi

56

15

71

22

90

100

35

125

80

20

I
!

Td3

12

160

236

preferences.

TABLE 5 LIMITS OF DIMENSIONS

FOR EXTERNAL
INTERFERENCE
FIT THREADS ( FINE SERIES )
(Diameter Range 8to 39 mm)
( Clause 4.1 )
Size

Pitch
P

Major Diameter d
Tol

Min

Max

mm

mm

mm

M8xl

8.000

mm

Ml0 x 1.25

1.25

Ml2 x 1.25

1.25

(M14x

Minor Diameter d3

Pitch Diameter dp

Max
mm
7.406

Min
mm
7.335

Tol
m
71

Max
mm
6.795

Min
mm
6.683

Tol
m
112

7.888

112

10.000

9.868

132

9.244

9.173

71

8.488

8.376

112

12.000

11.868

132

11.244

11.173

71

10.488

10.376

112

1.5

14.000

13.850

150

13.082

13.011

71

12.182

12.070

112

Ml6 x 1.5

1.5

16.000

15.850

150

15.082

15.011

71

14.182

14.070

112

(M18x

112

1.5)

1.5

18.000

17.850

150

17.082

17.011

71

16.182

16.070

M20 x 1.5

1.5

20.000

19.850

150

19.082

19.011

71

18.182

18.070

112

(M22x1.5)

1.5

22.000

21.850

150

21.082

21.011

71

20.182

20.070

112

M24x2

24.000

23.820

180

22.781

22.681

100

21.581

21.421

160

(M27x2)

27.000

26.820

180

25.781

25.681

100

24.581

24.421

160

M30x2

30.000

29.820

180

28.781

28.681

100

27.581

27.421

160

(M33x2)

33.000

32.820

180

31.781

31.681

100

30.581

30.421

160

M36x3

36.000

35.764

236

34.131

34.031

100

32.354

32.194

160

(M39x3)

39.000

38.764

236

37.131

37.031

100

35.354

35.194

160

Note-

HANDBOOK

1.5)

Sizesin bracketsaresecond

ON

INDUSTRIAL

preferences.

FASTENERS-PART

127

IS : 2334-1975

Indian Standard

1
m
I

GAUGING

PRACTICE FOR IS0 METRIC

SCREW THREADS
(First Revision)

CONTENTS
Page
1.

Scope

2.

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

129

Principles of Gauging

..

..

..

..

..

129

3.

Reference Temperature

..

..

..

..

..

129

4.

Types of Gauges

..

..

..

..

129

..

129

..

4.1 Gauges for Workpiece External Threads and Their Check Plugs and Setting Plugs
4.2 Gauges for Workpiece Internal Threads

..

..

..

129

Gauging or Workpieces

..

..

..

..

..

129

5.1 Gauging of External Threads

..

..

..

..

..

129

5.2 Gauging of Intern81 Threads

..

..

..

..

..

130

..

..

..

..

..

130

..

..

..

..

..

131

..

..

..

5.

5.3 Inspection Gauging

..

6.

Symbols and Explanations

7.

Function, Checking and Use of Gauges

..

132

..

132

..

..

134

..

..

135

7.1 Gauges for Workpiece External Threads and Their Check Plugs and Setting Plugs
7.2 Gauges for Workpiece Internal Threads
8.

..

..

Tolerance Zones for Pitch Diameter or Screw Gauges

8.1 Gauges for External Thread

..

..

..

..

..

135

8.2 Gauges for internal Thread

..

..

..

..

..

135

..

..

..

..

137

9.
10.

Tolerance Zones for Plain Gauges

Thread Profiles for Gauges

10.2 Profiles With Truncated Flanks

..

11.

General Features of Screw Gauges

11.1 Basic of Design

..

..

..

138

..

..

..

..

138

..

..

..

..

139

..

..

..

..

141

..

10.1 Profiles With Complete Flanks

..

..

..

..

141

11.2 Gauges for Workpiece External Th.reads

..

..

..

..

141

11.3 Gauges for Workpiece Internal Threads

..

..

..

..

142

..

11.4 Blunt Start of Thread

..

..

..

..

..

..

142

12.

Tolerances and Permissible Wear for Gauges

..

..

..

..

..

142

13.

Formulae for Calculation

..

..

..

..

..

143

..

..

..

..

..

143

.I

..

..

..

..

146

of Gauge Limits

13.1 Screw Gauges and Plain Gauges for External Threads

13.2 Screw Gauges and Plain Gauges for Internal Threads

128

*.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2334-1975
1. Scope-Deals
2. Principles

with the gauging

practice

of IS0 metric

screw threads

of diameter

1 mm and above.

of Gauging

2.1 The purpose

between

of this standard is to ensure interchangeability

of workpiece threads and to avoid dispute
manufacturer
and purchaser. Accordingly,
the following
principles
shall be applied.

2.1.1 The manufacturer

shall not deliver any workpiece thread, the actual
and the virtual pitch diameter) of which lies outside the specified limits.
2.1.2 The purchaser shall not reject any workpiece thread, the actual
the virtual pitch diameter) of which lies within the specified limits.

size (for example,

size (for example,

pitch diameter

pitch diameter

and

2.2 Apart from checking a workpiece thread with gauges, other methods of checking, such as measurement
with indicating
instruments,
are recommended,
but checking with gauges in accordance
with this standard
is always decisive.
3. Reference Temperature

3.1 The dimensions of both the gauges and the workpieces are related
in IS : 196-1966 Atmospheric
conditions
for testing (revised),

to the temperature

20C as specified

3.2 If the workpieces

and the gauges have the same coefficient
of linear expansion,
the checking
temperature
may deviate from 20C without detriment to the result, provided that the temperature
of both the
gauges and workpieces
always remain the same at the time of gauging.
3.3 If the workpieces
and the gauges have different coefficient
of linear expansion, the temperature
of both
shall be 20 f 2C at the time of gauging. Otherwise the difference of the thermal expansion of the workpiece
and that of the gauge shall be taken into consideration.
4. Types of Gauges

4.0 Following
internal

are the types of gauges which are recommended

for the checking of workpiece
screw threads and for the setting and checking of some of the screw gauges.

4.1 Gauges

external

and

for Workpiece External Threads and Their Check blugs and Setting Plugs:

a) Solid GO screw ring gauge,

b) Adjustable
GO screw ring gauge,
c) Check plugs (GO and NO GO) for new solid GO screw ring gauge,
d) Setting plug for adjustable
GO screw ring guage,
e) Wear check plug for solid or adjustable
GO screw ring gauge,
f) GO screw calliper gauge,
g) Setting plug for GO screw calliper gauge,
h) NO GO screw calliper gauge,
j) Setting plug for NO GO screw calliper gauge,
k) Solid NO GO screw ring gauge,
m) Adjustable
NO GO screw ring gauge,
n) Check plugs (GO and NO GO) for new solid NO GO screw ring gauge,
p) Setting plug for adjustable
NO GO screw ring gauge,
q) Wear check plug for solid or adjustable
NO GO screw ring gauge, and
r) Plain gauges for major diameter (ring or calliper gauges).
4.2 Gauges for Workpiece Internal Threads:

a) GO screw plug gauge,

b) NO GO screw plug gauge, and
c) Plain gauges for minor diameter (plug gauges).
5. Gauging of Workpieces
5.0 It is not necessary

to use all the gauges mentioned

in 4 in the workshop or inspection
department.
However, in gauging the limits (checking that the tolerances
have been respected), it is essential that a GO
and NO GO gauging always be carried out with one of the GO screw gauges and one of the NO GO screw
gauges referred to above.

GO screw ring gauge should preferably be used for

5.1 Gauging of External Threads- A solid or adjustable
gauging an external thread. To save time, for convenience
in checking, or in cases where the GO screw ring
gauge is not applicable,
a GO screw calliper gauge may be employed.
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

129

IS : 2334-1975
5.1.1 It is, however, recommended that gauging with GO screw calliper gauges should be supplemented
by random sampling with the GO screw ring gauge, so that when a large number of parts is checked with a
GO screw calliper gauge, a certain percentage receives an additional check with a GO screw ring guage,
thus giving greater assurance of interchangeability
between the workpiece threads.
51.2 The GO screw calliper gauge should not be used if the manufacturing process is likely to cause
deviations in the workpiece thread, which this gauge is not certain to detect, for example, local pitch error in
milled threads or burrs at the start of the thread. Further, the GO screw calliper gauge is not suitable for
checking non-rigid parts, for example, thin-walled parts which would be deformed by this gauge. In these
cases, checking should be carried out with a GO screw ring gauge.
5.1.3The NO GO screw calliper
thread on the NO GO side.

gauge is used for checking the simple pitch diameter of the external

5.1.4The solid or adjustable NO GO screw ring gauge should only be used for non-rigid workpieces, for example, thin-walled parts, which would be deformed by checking with NO GO screw calliper gauge.
5.1.5 For gauging the major diameter of the workpiece external thread the plain GO and NO GO gauges
are used. Whether a calliper or ring gauge will be used is determined by the form and rigidity of the
workpiece. Ring gauges should be used for non-rigid parts.
5.2 Gauging of internal Threads-For
the gauging of workpiece internal thread the GO screw plug gauge
and NO GO screw plug gauge are used.
5.2.1 For gauging the minor diameter of the workpiece internal thread the GO plain plug gauge and NO GO
plain plug gauge are used.
5.3 Inspection Gauging
5.3.1 By the manufacturer-Generally
speaking, the inspection department that checks the threads made
in the workshop may use the same kind of gauges as are used in the workshop.
5.3.1.1 Disagreement between manufacturing
the limits of sizes aregauged.

and inspection

units may occur when products close to

5.3.1.2 When disputes do arise, it is recommended that the product shall be accepted if it is shown to be
satisfactory by any of the gauges of the type concerned known to be within the requirements of this standard (taking into consideration the admissible wear).
5.3.1.3 In case of dispute, checking of the ring gauges by check plugs is decisive, if there is no other
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
Note-The possibility of disputes can be reduced to a minimum by grading the gauges so that those used by the
manufacturer provide a more stringent check than those used by the inspection unit. Generally, this can be achieved
by issuing to the workshops new or only slightly worn GO gauges and slightly worn NO GO gauges. The inspection
unit should use GO gauges which are approaching the condition of maximum permissible wear and new NO GO
gauges.

5.3.2 By t/repurchaser-There
are three possible procedures, as listed below, for inspection of workpiece
threads on behalf of the purchaser by an inspector who does not belong to the manufacturing plant concerned.
a)

The inspector gauges the workpiece threads with the manufacturers gauges. In that case, he may
check the accuracy of the gauges employed by means of check plugs and setting plugs which
belong either to the manufacturing plant (manufacturer) or to the inspector (purchaser) or as far as
screw plugs are concerned by direct measurement.

b)

The inspector uses his own gauges for gauging workpiece threads. In cases of dispute it is recommended that the product shall be accepted if it is shown to be satisfactory by any gauge of the type
concerned known to be within the requirements of this standard (taking into consideration the admissible wear).

c)

The inspector uses his own inspection gauges for gauging the workpiece threads. The position of
the tolerance zone for these gauges should be such as to ensure that the purchaser does not reject
threads the actual size of which lies within the limits specified for the workpiece.

5.3.3 This standard does not specify as to which of the gauges are to be used by the inspector; it only
recommends that the purchaser informs the manufacturer when ordering what procedure should be
employed for the inspection of the workpiece threads. Worn out gauges should not be used for sample inspect ion.
130

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2334-1975

6. Symbols and Explanation-h

and

the following

list the symbols mentioned in this standard

are summarized

explained:

Explanation
Width of the clearance

groove at the major diameter

of the thread

profile

with complete

flanks

Width of the clearance

groove at the minor diameter

of the thread

profile

with complete

flanks

Width of the clearance groove at the major and minor diameters,

file with truncated
flanks

F2

Ii

of the workpiece

Basic minor diameter

of the internal

workpiece

Basic pitch diameter

of the workpiece

thread

Fundamental
deviation of the external
tion es is equal to zero)

thread

(for tolerance

position

h, the fundamental

__devia-

Fundamental
deviation of the internal
tion El is equal to zero)

thread

(for tolerance

position

H, the fundamental

devialine

For thread profiles with truncated

flanks the radial distance between the.pitch
and the end of the straight part of the flank in the direction of the root
____
Height of the triangle of the thread profile

diameter

line

for plain plug gauges

HP

Tolerance

for reference

Distance between
GO check plug

Pitch

______

gauges

gauges

the middle

and plain ring gauges

for plain calliper

of the tolerance

gauges

zones T, of the screw ring gauge and T,,

Displacement
of the clearance groove with truncated flanks
___________._~_~~_____~___
Tolerance for the half flank angle of profiles with complete flanks
___
Tolerance for the half flank angle of profiles with truncated
flanks

Tal
h2
TCP

__
Td

__-thread

diameter

for plain calliper

thread

For thread profiles with truncated

flanks the radial distance between the pitch
and the end of the straight part of the flank in the direction of the crest

Tolerance

I==
_._

Tolerance for the pitch diameter

and setting plugs
____~______~_
Tolerance for the major diameter

of GO and NO GO screw

Tolerance

of the workpiece

for the pitch diameter

T Dl

Tolerance

for the minor diameter

T 02

Tolerance

for the pitch

TP

T PL

of the thread pro-

Basic major diameter

Tolerance

H,

respectively,

diameter

__~
of the workpiece

of the workpiece
of the workpiece

__external
external
internal
internal

check

plugs

thread

thread
thread

Tolerance

for the pitch of the gauge thread

for the pitch diameter

of GO and NO GO screw plug gauges

Tolerance

for the pitch diameter

of GO and NO GO screw ring gauge

amount

-. __
plugs

thread

Tolerance

Average

__
and wear check

of the

available

for the permissible

wear of GO screw plug gauge and GO screw ring

Average amount available

screw ring gauge

for the permissible

wear of the NO GO screw plug gauge and NO Go

gauge

Distance between the middle of the tolerance

of the workpiece minor diameter

zone 14, of the GO plug gauge and the lower limit

Distance between the middle of the tolerance zone H, of the GO calliper

gauge and the upper limit of the workpiece major diameter

I
I

Distance between the middle of the tolerance

lower limit of the workpiece thread.

ZPL

Distance between the middle of the tolerance

per limit of the workpiece thread

ZR

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

zone T,,

gauge or the GO ring

of the GO screw-plug

gauge and the

zone T, of the GO screw ring gauge and the up-

131

IS : 2334-1975
7. Function, Checking and Use of Gauges
7.1 Gauges for Workpiece External Threads and Their Check Plugs and Setting Plugs
7.1.1 Solid or adjustable

GO screw ring gauge

7.1.1.1 The GO screw ring gauge checks the virtual size of the external thread on the GO side (gauging
the virtual pitch diameter), that is, it checks the maximum material limit of the pitch diameter, taking into
account deviations of form (departures from roundness, lack of straightness of the thread axis over the
gauge length) and pitch errors, helix variations, errors in the flank angles, which produce an apparent
enlargement of the pitch diameter (virtual pitch diameter) of the workpiece. In addition, this gauge checks
whether the length of the straight flank is adequate, that is, that the rounding at the root of the profile does
not encroach too far upon the flank of the thread. The major diameter of the external threads is not checked
by this gauge.
Checking with the GO screw ring gauge is essentially

in accordance with the Taylor principle.

7.1.1.2 The solid GO screw ring gauge manufactured according to the prescribed sizes is checked by
the GO and NO GO screw check plugs and should regularly be controlled with the wear check plug.
If the NO GO check plug is not used, other provisions must be made so as to ensure that the maximum size of the pitch diameter of the GO screw ring gauge is not exceeded.
The adjustable GO screw ring gauge is set to its setting plug and should regularly be controlled with
the wear check plug.
7.1.1.3 The GO screw ring gauge screwed by hand, without using excessive force, should pass over the
whole length of the workpiece thread. If this is not possible, the workpiece thread does not comply with the
specifications.
7.1.2 Screw check plugs for new solid GO screw ring gauge
7.1.2.1 These screw check plugs (GO and NO GO) aYe used to check the limits of the pitch dlameter of
the new solid GO screw ring gauge. The GO screw check plug checks the GO limit of the total profile of the
appropriate new solid GO screw ring gauge.
7.1.2.2 The GO screw check plug screwed by hand, without using excessive force, should pass through
the new solid GO screw ring gauge.
The NO GO screw check plug screwed by hand, without using excessive force, may enter into both
ends of the new solid GO screw ring gauge, but not more than one turn of thread*.
7.1.3 Setting plug for adjustable

GO screw ring gauge

7.1.3.1 The setting plug which contains two successive portions, one with complete flanks and the
other with truncated flanks, is used to set the adjustable GO screw ring gauge to the specified pitch
diameter.
It is not essential to use a double length setting plug if the GO screw ring gauge is checked with a NO
GO screw check plug (7.1.2) after it has been adjusted.
7.1.3.2 The GO screw ring gauge is set on the portion of the setting plug with complete flanks.
7.1.3.3 The portion with complete flanks screwed by hand, without using excessive force, should pass
through the GO screw ring gauge.
When the portion with truncated flanks of the setting plug is screwed through the screw ring gauge, no
perceptible clearance is permissible between the plug and the ring. If there is a clearance, the ring gauge
should be lapped and adjusted to correct form and size.
7.1.4 Wear check plug for solid or adjustable GO screw ring gauge
7.1.4.1 The wear check plug is used to ascertain that the pitch diameter of the GO screw ring gauges
has not exceeded the wear limit. It embodies the pitch diameter of the GO screw ring gauge at the prescribed limit of wear.
7.1.4.2 The wear check plug screwed by hand, without using excessive force, may enter into both ends
of the GO screw ring gauge, but not more than one turn of thread*.
If it can be screwed in more than one turn of thread, the GO screw ring gauge no longer meets the
specifications.
*The one turn of thread

132

is determined

when withdrawing

the check

HANDBOOK

plug.

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2334-1975
7.1.5GO screw calliper

gauge

7.1.5.1This gauge checks the maximum limit of the pitch diameter in an axial plane, as apparently
increased by errors of pitch and flank angle in the workpiece. Furthermore
it checks whether the length of the
straight flank is adequate, for example, that the rounding off the root of the profile does not encroach too
far upon the flank of the thread. The major diameter of the external thread, however, is not checked.
With regard to the embodiment
of the virtual pitch diameter, the GO screw calliper gauge seriously
violates the Taylor principle (periodic errors of pitch and deviations
of form, such as departures from roundness are not detected).
7.1.5.2 The GO screw calliper

gauge

should

be set with the setting

plug specified.

7.1.5.3. Workpiece threads are generally checked by the GO screw calliper gauge under its own weight
or in accordance
with a fixed working load to correspond
with the method of adjustment
of the gauge.
The GO screw calliper gauge should accept the workpiece thread at least at three positions, evenly
distributed
over the whole circumference
of the thread. If this is not possible, the workpiece thread does not
comply with the specification.
When put on the workpiece
the GO screw calliper gauge may be moved
cumferehtial
direction
in order to minimize the effects of friction.
In cases of dispute,
7.1.6 Setting

gauging

with the GO screw

plug for GO screw calliper

7.1.6.1 With this setting

ring gauge,

preferably

slightly

solid

to and fro in a cir-

type, is decisive.

gauge

plug the anvils

of the GO calliper

gauge

are set.

7.1.6.2 The GO screw calliper gauge should pass over the setting plug under its own weight or under a
fixed working load. If this is not possible or if there is a clearance, the anvils of the GO screw calliper are to
be adjusted.
When put on the setting
cumferential
direction.

plug, the GO screw calliper

7.1.7 NO GO screw calliper

gauge

may be moved slightly

to and fro in a cir-

gauge

7.1.7.1 The NO GO screw calliper gauge checks

very largely in accordance
with the Taylor principle.
7.1.7.2 The NO GO screw calliper

gauge

should

the minimum

limit

of the pitch diameter.

be set with the setting

It operates

plug specified.

7.1.7.3 The NO GO screw calliper gauge should not pass over the workpiece,
except for the first two
threads of the workpiece thread. The checking should be carried out under the same conditions
as the adjusfment by means of the setting plug; it should take place in at least three positions,
evenly distributed
over the circumference.
If the gauge corresponds
one pitch to the other.
7.1.6 Setting

to Fig. 10B each gauging

plug for NO GO screw calliper

7.1.6.1 With this setting

plug the anvils

should

be repeated

by displacing

the gauge from

gauge
of the NO GO calliper

gauge

are set.

7.1.6.2 The NO GO screw calliper gauge should pass over the setting plug under its own weight or under
a fixed load. If it is not possible or if there is a clearance, the NO GO screw calliper gauge anvils are to be
adjusted.
When put on the setting
circumferential
direction.
7.1.9 Solid or adjustable

plug, the NO GO screw calliper

gauge may be moved slightly

to and fro in a

NO GO screw ring gauge

7.1.9.1The NO GO screw ring gauge is intended

specified
principle
principle

to check whether the actual pitch diameter exceeds the

minimum size. The checking with the NO GO screw ring gauge doesnot
correspond
to the Taylor
when checking rigid workpieces.
In cases of non-rigid workpieces,
the departure from the Taylor
is of less importance
because of the flexibility
of the workpieces.

7.1.9.2The solid
checked

NO GO screw ring gauge manufactured

by the GO and NO GO screw check plugs and should

according
to the prescribed
sizes will be
regularly be controlled
with the wear check

plug.
limit

If the NO GO check plug is not used, other provisions

must be made to ensure
of the pitch diameter of the new NO GO screw ring gauge is not exceeded.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

that the maximum

133

IS :,2334-1975

The adjustable
NO GO screw ring gauge should
controlled
with the wear check plug.

be set with the setting

plug specified

and regUlarlY

7.1.9.3 The NO GO screw ring gauge, screwed by hand without using excessive force on the workpiece
thread, may enter on both sides but not more than two turns of thread*. If the gauge can be screwed on the
workpiece by more than two turns of thread, the thread does not comply with the specifications.
The NO GO
screw ring gauge should not pass completely
over a workpiece having a length of thread of three threads or
less.
7.1.10 Screw check plugs

for new solid

NO GO screw ring gauge

7.1.10.1 The check plugs (GO and NO GO) are used to check the pitch diameter limits of the new solid
NO GO screw ring gauge. The GO screw check plug makes sure that the clearing diameter of the NO GO
solid screw ring gauge is not too small.
If a wear check plug for the NO GO screw ring gauge is provided,
necessary.
7.1.10.2 The GO screw check plug screwed by hand, without
the corresponditig
new solid NO GO screw ring gauge.
solid

the NO GO check plug may not be

using excessive

force, should

Th NO GO check plug gauge screwed by hand, without using excessive force,

NO GO screw ring gauge at both ends but not more than one turn of thread i-.
7.1.11 Setting

plug for adjustable

pass through

may enter

the new

NO GO screw ring gauge

7.1.11.1 The setting plug which contains two successive

portions, one with complete flanks and the
other with truncated
flanks, is used to set the adjustable
NO GO screw ring gauge to the specified pitch
diameter.
It is not essential to use a double length setting plug if the NO GO screw ring gauge is checked
NO GO screw check plug described in 7.1.10 after it has been adjusted.
7.1.11.2 The NO GO screw

ring gauge

7.1.11.3 The portion with complete

through the screw ring gauge.

is set on the portion

flanks

screwed

of the setting

by hand without

plug with complete

using excessive

with a

flanks.

force, should

pass

When the portion with truncated

flanks of the setting plug is screwed through the ring gauge, no
perceptible
clearance is permissible
between the plug and the ring. If there is a clearance the ring gauge
should be lapped and adjusted to correct form and size.
7.1.12 Wear check plug for solid

or adjustable

NO GO screw ring gauge

7.1.12.1 The wear check plug checks whether the pitch diameter of the NO GO screw ring gauge has exceeded the wear limit. It embodies the pitch diameter of the NO GO screw ring gauge at the prescribed limit of
wear.
If a NO GO check plug for the NO GO screw ring gauge is provided,
necessary.
7.1.12.2 The wear check plug screwed by hand, without using excessive
of the NO GO screw ring gauge but not more than one turn of thread -f-.
If it can be screwed
specification.
7.1.13 Gauges

in more than one turn of thread,

for the major

the wear check plug may notbe

force, may enter into both ends

the NO GO screw ring gauge no longer meets the

diameter

7.1.13.1 The major diameter

of the workpiece
thread is gauged by means of plain GO and NO GO
calliper gauges or ring gauges. For checking the GO limit of no-rigid workpieces
preference should be given
to the use of a ring gauge (Taylor principle); the calliper gauges are recommended
only if the workpieces
have been manufactured
by methods which do not involve the risk of errors of circularity.
7.1.13.2 The GO plain calliper gauge should pass over the workpieces
thread under its own weight or
under an agreed load; the NO GO plain calliper gauge should not pass over the thread. Otherwise
the
workpiece
thread does not comply with the specifications.
7.2 Gauges for Workpiece

Internal

Threads

The two turns of thread are determined when withdrawing the gauge.
+The one turn of thread is determined when withdrawing the check plug.

134

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2334-1975
7.2.1 GO screw plug gauge
7.2.1.1 The Go screw plug gauge checks the virtual size of the internal thread on the GO side (gauging
the virtual pitch diameter). This is effected by checking the minimum limit of the pitch diameter, taking into
account pitch errors, errors in the flank angles, helix variations and deviations of form (departures from
roundness and lack of straightness of the thread axis over the gauge length) which produce an apparent
reduction of the pitch diameter of the workpiece (virtual pitch diameter). In addition it checks the minimum
limit of the major diameter and also whether the length of straight flank is sufficient that is, that the rounding at the root of the profile does not encroach too far upon the flank of the thread. It does not check the
minor diameter of the internal thread.
Checking with the GO screw plug gauges is essentially

in accordance with the Taylor PrinCiPle.

7.2.1.2 It is recommended that the GO screw plug gauge be checked regularly for wear.
The admissible

wear of the GO screw plug gauge is found by measuring.

Instead of measuring, a wear check gauge (calliper gauge) with its setting plug may be used. However,
in cases of dispute, sizes obtained by means of properly performed measurements are decisive.
7.2.1.3 The GO screw plug gauge screwed by hand, without using excessive force, should pass over the
whole length of the workpiece thread. If this is not possible, the workpiece thread does not comply with the
specifications.
7.2.2 NO GO screw plug gauge
7.2.2.1 The NO GO screw plug gauge checks whether the actual pitch diameter exceeds the specified
maximum size. The NO GO screw plug gauge checks approximately on the Taylor principle.
7.2.2.2 It is recommended, that the NO GO screw plug gauge be checked regularly for wear.
7.2.2.3 The NO GO screw plug gauge screwed by hand, without using excessive force, may enter into
both ends of the threaded part, but not more than two turns of thread*. If it can be screwed in more than two
turns of thread, the workpiece thread does not comply with the specifications. The NO GO screw plug gauge
should not pass completely through a workpiece with a length of thread of three threads or less.
7.2.3 Gauges for the minor diameter
7.2.3.1 The minor diameter of the threads is checked by means of plain cylindrical
plug gauges. The use of spherical ended gauges and rod gauges is not permissible.

GO and NO GO

7.2.3.2 The GO plain plug gauge introduced by hand, without using excessive force, should pass
through the workpiece thread. The NO GO plain plug gauge may enter at either end of the workpiece thread
but not more than one pitch of thread.
8. Tolerance Zones for Pitch Diameter or Screw Gauges (See Fig, 1 and 2)
8.1 Gauges for External Thread-A GO or NO GO screw rlng gauge that has errors of pitch and/or flank
angle, the permissible amounts of which are given in 11, has a virtual pitch diameter which is smaller than
the simple pitch diameter. It can only be screwed on to a perfect GO screw check plug if the simple pitch
diameter of the latter is also smaller by a certain amount (the sum of the diameteral equivalents of the pitch
errors and flank angle errors of the screw thread concerned) than the simple pitch diameter of the screw ring
gauge. If the GO screw check plug also has errors of pitch and/or flank angle, opposite in sign to those of the
gauge, its simple pitch diameter must be smaller by yet another amount to enable the screw ring gauge to
screw on to the check plug. (The purchaser and the manufacturer shall agree whether the screw ring gauge
should be measured or inspected by screw check plugs.)
8.2 Gauges for internal Thread-The simple pitch diameter of screw ring gauges may be measured directly,
rather than inspected by screw check plugs. In order to ensure as far as practicable that a screw ring gauge
accepted as satisfactory by direct measurement is also acceptable as satisfactory by the GO screw check
plug, it is necessary for the simple pitch diameter tolerance zone of the GO check plug to be displaced
downwards by an amount m In relation to the simple pitch diameter tolerance zone of the screw ring gauge
(see Fig. 1). The values of m given in Table 3 correspond to the sum of the diametral equivalents of the
average errors to be expected in the pitch and flank angles of the check plug and the screw ring gauge in
relation to the specified tolerances on these elements.
8.3 In the same way the simple pitch diameter of a workpiece external thread, the thread of which has errors
of pitch and/or flank angle, must be smaller than the simple pitch diameter of the ring gauge, in order that
the external thread can be screwed into this gauge.
*The two turns of thread are determined when withdrawing

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

the gauge.

136

2334-1975

GO
(UPPER LIMIT OF
WORKPIECE1

SOLD Go SCREW RING

GAUGE

FIG. 1 TOLERANCE ZONES FOR PITCH DIAMETER OF GAUGES FOR EXTERNAL THREADS

(UPPER

LIMIT OF

FIG. 2 TOLERANCE ZONES FOR PITCH DIAMETER OF GAUGES FOR INTERNAL THREADS
8.4 For the screwing of the GO screw plug gauge into the workpiece internal thread, the same considerations are valid as mentioned for the screwing of the GO screw ring gauge to the workpiece external thread.
Deviations of pitch and flank angle cause virtual pitch diameters which require in each case that a difference (equivalent) exists between the simple pitch diameter of the screwed parts.
136

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2334-1975
9. Tolerance Zones for Plain Gauges
9.1 Figures 3 and 4 illustrate

the tolerance zones for plain gauges for major diameter of external threads and
minor diameter for internal threads respectively.
Tolerances for plain gauges for major diameter of external
threads and minor diameters of internal threads are given in Fig. 3 and 4 respectively.
I WEAR LIMIT FOR I

NO GO REFERENCE

All dimensions in micrometres.

Workpiece Tolerance Td for
the Major Diameter
Over

Upto

140
335
850

85
140
335
850
950

FIG. 3 TOLERANCE

H2

HP

-T-

z2

1
1.5

8
20
38
54
60

8
15
21

ZONES FOR PLAIN GAUGES

FOR MAJOR DIAMETER

OF EXTERNAL

THREADS

NO GO
(UPPER
LIMIT Of
WORKPIECE )

All dimensions in micrometres.

Workpiece Tolerance
T,,, for
the Minor Diameter

FIG. 4 TOLERANCE
HANDBOOK

ON

Over

up to

38
100
180

100
180
375

710
375

1,250
710

Hi
1

4
8
23
13

ZONES FOR PLAIN GAUGES FOR MINOR DIAMETER

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Zl

9
22
38
::
OF INTERNALTHREADS
137

IS : 2334-1975

10. Thread Profiles for Gauges

lo.1 Profiles With Complete Flanks (see Fig. 5 and 6)
10.1.1 The following

gauges shall have profiles in accordance with Fig. 5.

a) GO check plug for solid GO screw ring gauge;

b) GO check plug for solid NO GO screw ring gauge;
c) GO screw plug gauge;
d) Setting plug for adjustable GO screw ring gauge (one portion);
e) Setting plug for adjustable NO GO screw ring gauge (one portion);
f) Setting plug for adjustable GO screw calliper gauge;
g) NO GO screw check plug for solid NO GO screw ring gauge;
h) Setting plug for NO GO screw calliper gauge;
j) Wear check plug for solid or adjustable NO GO screw ring gauge.

I
PITCH

I
l

MAJOR
DlAMETER

CLEARING
DIAMETER

r2

max: 0.144 P

DETAILW

See Notes in TableG.

FIG. 5 PROFILE WITH COMPLETE FLANKS

10.1.1.1 The profile with complete flanks according to Fig. 5 can be made with a radius of maximum r2
(see Table l), which contacts tangentially the straight part of the flank or with a clearance groove of maximum b, (see Table 1). The form of the clearance groove is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.
10.1.2 The following gauges shall have profiles in accordance with Fig 6:
a) GO screw ring gauge;
b) Anvils of GO screw calliper gauge.

r, max.=
DIAMETER

EXIST ON ANVILS
SCREW CALLIPER

0.072P

DETAIL X

FOR GO
GAUGES

See Notes in Table 6.

FIG. 6 PROFILE

WITH COMPLETE

FLANKS

10.1.2.1 The profile with complete flanks according to Fig. 6 can be made with a radius of maximum (fi see
Table l), which contacts tangentially the straight part of the flank, or with a clearance groove of maXhUm
b, (see Table 1). The form of the clearance groove is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.
138

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2334-1975

TABLE 1 VALUES FOR PROFILES

(Clauses

10.1.1

and 10.1.2,

All dimension

Pitch
P

b, Max=;

r0 Max = O_OMP

FLANKS

and Fig. 5 and 6)

in millimetres.

6, Max = P

= -!!
12

r2 Max = 0.144P = :

L!
24

0.029
0.036
0.043

0.007
0.009
0.011

0.014
0.018
0.022

0.2
0.25
0.3

WITH COMPLETE

0.025

with

0.032
0.029

maximum

0.5
0.6
0.7

0.036
0.043
0.050

0.75
0.8
1

0.35

with

radius

::15

maximum

of
f,

radius

0.012

of
::%Z
0.065

0.014
0.016

0.15
0.17

0.072
0.086
0.10

0.018
0.022
0.025

0.054
0.058
0.072

0.19
0.20
0.25

0.11
0.11
0.14

0.027
0.029
0.036

r2

1.25
1.5
1.75

0.15
0.19
0.22

0.090
0.108
0.126

0.31
0.37
0.44

0.18
0.21
0.25

0.045
0.054
0.063

2
2.5
3

0.25
0.32
0.4

0.144

0.180
0.217

0.5
0.61
0.75

0.29
0.36
0.43

0.072
0.090
0.108

3.5
4
4.5

0.48
0.5
0.55

0.253
0.288
0.325

0.88
1
1.10

0.5
0.58
0.65

0.126
0.144
0.162

655.5

0.6
0.8
0.7

0.433
0.397
0.361

1.4
1.5
1.25

0.79
0.72
0.86

0.217
0.198
0.180

10.2 Profiles With Truncated Flanks (see Fig. 7 and 8)

10.2.1 The following

gauges shall have profiles in accordance with Fig.-/:

a) NO GO screw checking plug for solid GO screw ring gauge;

b) Setting plug for adjustable GO screw ring gauge (one portion);
c) Setting plug for adjustable NO GO screw ring gague (one portion);
d) Wear check plug for solid or adjustable GO screw ring gawge;
e) NO GO screw plug gauge.

PITCH
DIAMETER

CLEARING
DIAMETER

bp f - 2*F?.tan

30

DETAIL Y
SeeNotesinTableG.

FIG. 7 PROFILE

WITH

TRUNCATED

FLANKS

10.2.1.1 The profile with truncated flanks according to Fig. 7 shall be made for screw threads up to P= 1
mm with a radius of maximum r, (see Table 1) which contacts tangentially the strai ht part of he flank and
for screw threads with P= 1.25 mm and larger with a clearance groove of b3(see lgable 2). Th I? form of the
clearance groove is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

139

IS : 2334-1975
10.2.1.2 For reasons of manufacturing facilities the form and the sizes of the clearance groove for the
portion with truncated flanks of the setting plugs can be the same as for that protion having compiete
flanks.
10.2.2 The following gauges shall have profiles in accordance with Fig. 8:
a) NO GO screw ring gauge, and
b) Anvils of NO GO screw calliper gauge.
a.

NOT EXIST ON ANVILS

FOR NO GO SCREW

*See Notes in Table6.

FIG. 8 PROFILEWITH TRUNCATED FLANKS

10.2.2.1 The profile with truncated flanks according to Fig. 8 shall be made for screw threads up to P= 1
mm with a radius of maximum r, (see Table 1) which contacts tangentially the straight part of the flank, and
for screw threads with P= 1.25 mm and larger, with a clearance groove of b3 (see Table2).Theformof
the
clearance groove is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.
10.2.3 Displacement
of the clearance groove for the profile-The
clearance groove may be displaced in
relation to the centre of the profile of the centre of the thread by an amount s (see Fig. 9) which is equal to
the permissible deviation of b, (see Table 2).
TABLE 2 VALUES
(Clauses

FOR PROFILES

All dimensions

Pitch

WITH TRUNCATED

in millimetres.
b,

F2

F,-O.lP

P
0.2 P

0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35

0.02
0.025
0.03

0.035
0.04

::t5

0.045

0.5
0.6
0.7

0.05

0.06
0.07

0.75
0.8

0.075
0.08

0.1

1.25

0.15 F

0.1 P

Nominal

Deviation

Size

(2)

with

ITIaXimJm

radius

of

ry and r2

0.125
0.15
0.175

0.25
0.3
0.35

0.3
0.4
0.45

0.04

0.4

0.375
0.45

0.2
0.25
0.3

0.5
0.8
1.0

0.05
0.05
0.08

3.5
4
4.5

0.35
0.4
0.45

0.525
0.6
-

0.45

1.1
1.3
1.7

0.08
n.1
0.1

5
5.5
6

0.5
0.55
0.6

0.5
0.55
0.6

1.9
2.1
2.3

0.1
0.1
0.1

1.5
1.75
2
2.5

140

FLANKS

10.2.1.1, 10.2.2.1 and 10.2.3, and Fig. 7 and 8)

HANDBOOK

respectively

ON

INDUSTRIAL

0.04
0.05

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2334-1975
10.2.3.1 The deviation for b, can be increased, if the real displacement is smallerthan the permitted
displacement s, by an amount which is double the difference between permitted and real displacement.

FIG. 9 DISPLACEMENTOF THE CLEARANCE GROOVE FOR THE PROFILE WITH TRUNCATED

FLANKS

11. General Features of Screw Gauges

11.1 Basis of Design-All
gauges should be designed to conform to the Taylor principle as far as possible.
This aoolies not only to the gauges for checking workpiece threads but also to the gauges intended for
checkiig or setting ihose ga;ges. Exceptions are only permissible where there is justification
for them.
Note-The
Taylor principle is a statement to the effect that the maximum material limits of as many related elements
or dimensions
as practical should be incorporated
in the GO gauge; whereas the mainimum material limit of each
such related element or dimension
may be gauged only by individual
minimum material limit gauges or gauging
methods.

11.2 Gauges for Workpiece

External

Threads

11.2.1 Solid or adjustable

GO screw ring gauge-The
length of thread on the GO screw ring gauge should
be at least 80 percent of the length of engagement of the workpiece thread (thread length of the nut).

length setting plug with a thread length

11.2.2 Setting plug for adjustable GO screw ring gauge -Adouble
twice the GO screw ring gauge length is required for adjustable GO screw ring gauges. One half of this setting plug has a thread profile with truncated flanks and the other half has a profile with complete ihis.
11.2.3 GO screw callipergauge-On
the anvils of the GO screw calliper gauge for fine pitches (about up to
0.5 mm) alternate thread profiles may be omitted.
11.2.4 Setting plug for Go screw calliper gauge-The
length of thread on the setting plug for GO screw
calliper gauges corresponds to that of the anvil of the GO screw calliper gauge.
11.2.5 NO GO screw callipergauge-Each
anvil of the NO GO screw calliper gauge should be so designed
that it contacts the workpiece thread on no more than two flanks (see Fig. 10A). On fine pitch gauges these
flanks should be situated not more than three pitches apart.
If the gauge corresponds to Fig. 106 each gauging should be repeated by displacing
one pitch to the other.

1OB

10A
FIG. 10 NO GO SCREW CALLIPER

11.2.6 Setting plug for NO GO screw calliper

thread*.
11.2.7 Solid or adjustable
three turns of thread.

the gauge from

gauge-This

NO GO screw ring gauge-This

tiAUGE

setting plug should have at least three turns of

gauge should have a length of thread of at least

*The complete threads are to be counted. Three threads are necessary

in order to use the measuring

method

with three

wires.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

141

IS : 2334-1975
11.2.8 Setting plug for adjustable
turns of thread

NO GO screw ring gauge-This

setting

plug should

have at least six

11.3 Gauges for Workpiece Internal Threads

11.3.1 Go screw plug gauge-The

cent of the length

of engagement

11.3.2 NO GO screwplug
three turns of thread*.

length of thread on the GO screw lug gauge should

of the workpiece thread (thread length ot the nut).

gauge-The

NO GO screw plug gauge shquld

be at least 80 per-

have a length of thread

of at least

11.4 Blunt Start of Thread-Incomplete

threads, even when they are chamfered,
are still sharp enough to
break. It is therefore recommended
that, so as not to prejudice checking, the part of the thread that is incompletely
formed should be removed (see Fig. 11) or, if not possible, a 30 chamfer provided (see Fig. 12).
START OF COMPLETE

30"

dr
FIG. 12 CHAMFER

FIG. 11 START OF COMPLETE THREAD

OF START OF THREAD

12. Tolerances and Permissible Wear for Gauges

12.1 The tolerances and permissible wear, for the pitch diameter of the gauges, are given in Tables 3 and 4
respectively.
The tolerances
for the half flank angle and pitch tolerances
are given in Table 5 and 6 respectively.
TABLE

3 TOLERANCES AND VALUES FOR PITCH DIAMETER

(Clauses 8.2, 12.1 and 12.2, and Fig. 1 and 2)
All dimensions
in micrometres.

TR

1 PL

r CP.

Z PL

24
50
80

50
80
125

8
10
14

6
7
9

6
7
8

10
12
15

-4
-2
2

125
200
315

200
315
500

18
23
30

11
14
18

9
12
15

18
22
27

8
12
20

12
16
24

500

670

38

22

18

33

28

32

These are maximum values.

+ The values for Z, are to be inserted into Table 9 taking into consideration
the sign, that is, the use of the minus values
in the formula aiven in Table 9 results in plus values. The minus value for Za means that Ze is situated outside of the
tolerance Tdd2.
(see Fig., 1 )
TABLE 4 CALCULATED

VALUES FOR AVERAGE PERMISSIBLE

(Clause 12.1)
All dimensions
in micrometred.

Tds and TDZ

Respectively

w,o

wrvo

Ring Gauge

GO Screw
Plug Gauge

NO GO
Screw Ring
Gauge

GO Screw

up to

NO GO
Screw Plug
Gauge

24
50
80

50
80
125

10
12
16

8
9.5
12.5

7
9
12

125
200

200
315

21
25.5

17.5
21

15
19.5

3.15

500

33

27

25

11.5
15
19

500

670

41

33

31

23

*The complete
142

WEAR

threads

are tobe

6
7.5
9.5

counted.
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2334-1975
12.2 In order to limit the number of GO gauges for one and the same size of screw thread, for economical
_-----IL- ~~11~~~~:~~
___I_-1 ___r______ ?_ ____--_--I--I_
reasons,

me r011ow1ny rule WI prerererir;e

IS rewrrir~ieriueu;

a) For screw threads with workpiece tolerances of Grade 6 and coarser the values in Table 3 should be
chosen according to Grade 6.
b) For screw threads with workpiece tolerances finer than Grade 6, the values in Table 3 should be
chosen according to the lowest grade recommended in IS : 4216-1967 IS0 metric screw threads.
TABLE 5 TOLERANCES FOR HALF FLANK ANGLE
( Clause 12.1 )

Pitch

T113

TiCI
--I-

.-+

,.-

mm

60

60

0.25

40

48

0.3

40

40

0.35
0.4

35
31

35

0.45

26

26

0.5

25

25

0.6

21

21

0.7

18

18

0.75

ii

17

0.8

16

16

15

16

31

1.25

13

16

1.5

12

16

1.75

11

16

10

14

'0
9

13

3.5

12

11

4.5

11

ii

5.5

10

IO

minutes

minutes
0.2

2.5

14

TABLE 6 PITCH TOLERANCES

(Clause
All dimensions

12.1)
in micrometres.

TP

For Gauges With Thread Lengths

Up to 32 mm

over 32 mm
Up to 50

Over 50 mm

mm

Up to 60 mm

Note l-The
pitch tolerance T~applies to any number
The actual deviation may be situated plus or minus.

of threads,

situated

within

the thread

length

of the gauge.

Note l-For
a double-length
setting plug, the thread length used when determining
the pitch deviation is one half
the overall thread length of the setting plug, and the pitch tolerance is the maximum permissible deviation between any
two threads

spaced

apart by not more than one half the overall

thread

length

of the setting

plug.

13. Formulae for Calculation of Gauge Limits

13.1 Screw Gauges and Plain Gauges for External Threads-The various formulae used in this standard
for
calculating the gauge limits of thread gauges for external threads are given in Table 7, and that for plain
gauges, in Table 8.
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

143

TABLE

FORMULAE

FOR

SCREW

GAUGES

FOR

EXTERNAL

THREADS

(C/ause 13.1)

Type of Gauge
Ns:.

Thread
Profile
Aocording to
Figura

Limits for tht

Tolerance

1
T

Solid GO straw
ring gauge
GO screw check
plug for rrbw
solid GO screw
ring gauge

T
T

NO GO screw
check plug for
new solid GO
screw ring
gauge

Mirr size= des+

{ + TPL

d-es

+Tm$

Theoretical size

Tolerance

+:*

d,esZa*

with clearance groove bl or radius

5

Theoretical size

Diameter

Minor Diameter or Clearing

Pitch Diameter

Major Diametar or Clearing Diameter

Theoretical size

Gauge Thread

Tolerarice

T.
-+ ~

D, es
Max aize=D1esZ=m

daesZ.m
T

with clearance

groove b, or radius

*?

Adjustable
GO
screw ring
gauge

Setting plug for

adjudable GO
screw ring
gauge

5
7

d,es-Z=

+ ~

+2F,

~+Tm
in ize=des+12
with clearanca groove Al or r adius
des
daesZs$

Max size= D1as~;

T
+ T

d,esZB+$

*t

with

+ T,. $
+2F1

T
+;

Max size= D1esz

*+

T
*+

- ~H

groove ba or radius

D1es

clearance

with

d,aszn~

7.

-~

clearance groove b,

or

radiua

7
8

wear check plug

for solid or,
adjustable GO
screw ring
gauga
GO sorew calliper gauge
setting plug for
&rc&c?al-

d*esZa+

Tm

WOo+2F1

d,asZB+

*T

WOO

Max size= D1as

+

,.

,,

groove b, or radius

~
6

des

* T?. $

d,asZ=-m

T
*?

.,
Y
L

with clearance

T= H
~ ~

Max size= D1esZ*m8

with cleerance groove b, or radius

SL6 I.-b&&z

: SI

H:-i

Cn

L lklVd-S133N31SV4

co

lVl141StlClNl

-(n

NO YOOSCINVH

IS : 2334-lW5

TABLE

FORMULAE

FOR

PLAIN

GAUGES

FOR

MAJOR

DIAMETERS

(Clew3 13.1)

Note-Wear

Plain GO ring gauge or plain GO

calliper gauge

d-es-@,

Plain NO GO calliper gauge or

plain NO GO ring gauge

d-es-

TABLE
Thread
Profile
According
to Figure

FORMULAE

HI
*T
H*

Td

f3

for Internal
Threads -The
various formulae
used in the standard for
gauges for internal
threads are given in Table 9, and that for plain

FOR

SCREW

GAUGES

FOR

INTERNAL

THREADS

Limits of Gauge Thread

Pitch Diameter

Major Diameter

1 Tolerance I Theoretical size 1 Tolerance

Theoretical size

screw

GO

1 Tolerance

Size

limit for GO gauges is the upper limit of the workpiece diameter.

13.2
Screw Gauges and Plain Gauges
calculating
the gauge limits of thread
gauges,
in Table 10.

Type of
Gauges

1 Theoretical

Type of Gauge

D+N+&

D,-WtZ,,

f TpL

** 2

plw3 cw3e

Max size=D,+El-{
with clearance groove
b, or radius

NO GO screw
plug gauge

D,+N+T.,+~+ZF,

TPL

D,+E/+T,;+%

fT,

*Y

Max size= D,+ El-K

with clearance groove

b, or radius

Note 1 -Wear
Note 2 -

Minor Diameter
or Clearing Dibmeter

limit for the pitch diameter of the GO screw plug gauge

: D,+ E/+Z,-W,,.
: D.+E/+T.,+~-

Wear limit for the pitch diameter of the NO GO screw plug gauge

TABLE

10

FORMULAE

FOR

PLAIN

GAUGES

FOR

MINOR

W,,.

DIAMETERS

(Cbuse 13,2!
Type of Gauge

Theoretical

Size

Tolerance

PI&in GO plug gauge

Plain NO GO plug gauge

Note -

Wear limit for GO gauges is the lower limit of the workpiece diameter.

EXPLANATORY

N-OTE

This standard was first published

in September
1969. Due to certain modification
in text and formulae,
it
became necessary to revise this standard. This standard is based on ISO/R
1502-l 970 IS0 General purpose
metric screw threads - Gauging,
issued by International
Organization
for Standardization.
IS0

146

metric

screw

threads

are

covered

in IS

: 4218-1976.

HANOBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

Indian

I)-1976

Standard

IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS

PART 1 BASIC AND DESIGN PROFILES

( First Revision )

1. Scope-Deals
2. Symbols-The
against each:
D
d
D2
d2
D,

=
=
=
=
=

d3

H =
H, =
h3 =
P =
R =
Rc =
ei, El =
es, ES =

with basic and design profiles for IS0 metric screw threads.
various symbols

used in this standard

shall denote the quantities

mentioned

below

major diameter of internal threads,

major diameter of external threads,
pitch diameter of internal threads,
pitch diameter of external threads,
minor diameter of internal threads,
minor diameter of external threads,
height of fundamental triangle,
maximum depth of engagement,
basic depth of external threads,
pitch,
root radius of external threads,
crest radius of external threads,
iower deviations, and
upper deviations.

3. Form of the Screw Threads

3.1 Basic Profile-The
theoretical profile, associated with the basic sizes of the major, pitch, and minor
diameters of the thread is shown in Fig. 1. The deviations are applied to these basic sizes.
-F-----i
-

5--

= 312P = 0.866 025 P

5H 18= 0.541 266 P

3HI8 = 0.324 760P
H/4 = 0.216 506 P
H/8

=0.108253 P

FIG. 1 BASIC PROFILE

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

147

IS : 4218(Part

l)-1976

3.2 Design

Profiles
for External
and Internal
Threads-The
design profiles of external and internal threads
in maximum material conditions are shown in Fig, 2. These are the profiles to which the deviations are applied todefine the limits of sizes.

IN PRACTICE THE ROOT IS ROUNDED

ND CLEARED BEYOND A WIDTH P/B
H

INTERNAL
THREAD
DIAMETERS

EXTERNAL
THREAD
DIAMETERS
d2

D,

=dz-2(H12-H/4)=d-2H,

d3 = dz -2(Hf2H,

Note-The
D or D + El.

profile

of thread

major diameter

Fig. 2 DESIGN

=d-108253P
H/6) = d-

= (D-D1)12=5H/8=

h3 = d(d-d3)12
R=

= 0.613

87 P
P
43 P

of the nut is opttonal.

3.2.1 Design profile of nut without allowance

1.226

0.54127
= 17H124

H/6=0.14434

PROFILES

d-314H = d-O.64952

D2

OF EXTERNAL

However,

the flank

AND INTERNAL

and bolt with allowance

profile

of thread

major diameter

up to diameter

THREADS

is shown in Fig. 3.

EXTERNAL
THREAD
DIAMETERS

INTERNAL
THREAD
DIAMETERS
Note-The
DorD +El

must be straight

of the nut is optional.

However,

the flank must be straight

up to diameter

FIG. 3 DESlGN PROFILE OF NUT WITHOUT ALLOWANCE AND BOLT WITH ALLOWANCE

148

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Pati

3.2.2 Design profile

of nut with allowance

is shown in Fig.4.

INTERNAl
THREAI

and bolt with allowance

l)-1976

0, +El

INTERNAL
THREAD
DIAMETERS
Note-The
diameter

EXTERNAL
THREAD
DIAMETERS

profile of the thread major diameter of the nut is optional.

D or D + El.

FIG. 4 DESIGN

PROFILE OF NUT WITH ALLOWANCE

However, the flank must be straight

up to

AND BOLT WITH ALLOWANCE

3.3 Design Profile of External

Threads-The
condition
is the same as the basic profile

design profile of an external thread in its maximum

material
except that the root of the thread is rounded to a theoretical
P
radius equal to 0.144 34P below the flat of width 4

3.4 Design Profile of internal Threads-The

design profile of an internal thread in its maximum material condition is the same as the basic profile. In practice, in order to avoid sharp corners at the root of threads
(major diameter),

the roots are rounded

and cleared

beyond

3.5 Basic Numerical

Thread Data-The
basic numerical
metric screw threads are given in Table 1.

a width of$s

shown

in Fig. 2.

thread data for the various

standard

pitches

Table 1 BASIC NUMERICAL THREAD DATA FOR IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS
All dimensions in millimetres.
f
H
H
H
+i
ZH
!
P
H
4
-ii8
-ii-

5,

Pitch
P

0.866.03~

of IS0

$I

1.324 76f

I.541 27~

I.613 43~

3.649 52\

0.043 3
0.054 1
0.065 0
0.075 8

0.065 0
0.081 2
0.097 4
0.113 7

0.108 3
0.135 3
0.162 4
0.189 4

0.122 7
0.153 4
0.184 0
0.214 7

0.129 9
0.162 4
0.194 9
0.227 3

0.129 9
0.146 1
0.162 4

0.216 5
0.243 6
0.270 6

0.245 4
0.276 0

0.259 8

0.306 7

0.324 8
0.389 7
0.454 7
0.487 1

0.108 25~ 0.144 34F , I.216 51~

0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35

0.025 0
0.031 2
0.037 5
0.043 8

0.050 0
0.062.5
0.075 0
0.087 5

0.173 2
0.216 5
0.259 8
0.303 1

0.021 6
0.027 1
0.032 5
0.037 9

0.4
0.45
0.5

0.050 0
0.056 2
0.062 5

0.100 0
0.112 5
0.125 0

0.346 4
0.389 7
0.433 0

0.043 3
0.048 7
0.054 1

0.072 2

0.086 6
0.0974
0.108 3

0.6
0.7
0.75

0.075 0
0.087 5
0.093 8

0.150 0
0.175 0
0.187 5

0.519 6
0.606 2
0.649 5

0.065 0
0.075 8
0.081 2

0.086 6
0.101 0
0.108 3

0.129 9
0.151 6
0.162 4

0.194 9
0.227 3
0.243 6

0.324 8
0.378 9
0.406 0

0.368 1
0.429 4
0.460 1

0.8
1
1.25

0.100 0
0.125 0
0.156 2

0.200 0
0.250 0
0.312 5

0.692 8
0.866 0
1.0825

0.086 6
0.108 2
0.135 3

0.115 5
0.144 3
0.180 4

0.173 2
0.216 5
0.270 6

0.259 8
0.324 8
0.406 0

0.433 0
0.541 3
0.676 6

0.490 7
0.613 4
0.766 8

0.519 6
0.649 5
0.811 9

1.5
1.75
2

0.187 5
0.218 8
0.250 0

0.375 0
0.437 5
0.500 0

1.2990
1.5156
1.732 1

0.162 4
0.189 4
0.216 5

0.216 5
0.252 6
0.288 7

0.324 8
0.378 9
0.433 0

0.487 1
0.568 3
0.649 5

0.811 9
0.947 2
1.0825

0.920 1
1.0735
1.2289

0.974 3
1.1367
1.2990

2.5
3
3.5

0.312 5
0.375 0
0.437 5

0.625 0
0.750 0
0.875 0

2.165 1
2.598 1
3.031 1

0.270 6
0.324 8
0.378 9

0.360 8
0.433 0
0.505 2

0.541 3
0.649 5
0.757 8

0.811 9
0.974 3
1.1367

1.3532
1.6238
1.8944

1.5336
1.8403
2.147 0

1.6238
1.9486
2.273 3

4
4.5
5

0.500 0
0.562 5
0.625 0

1.0000
1.1250
1.2500

3.464 1
3.897 1
4.330 2

0.433 0
0.487 1
0.541 2

0.577 4
0.649 5

0.866 0
0.974 3

1.2990
1.4614

2.453 7
2.760 4

2.598 1
2.922 8

0.721 7

1.0826

1.6238

2.165 1
2.435 7
2.706 4

3.067 2

3.247 6

5.5
6

0.687 5
0.750 0

1.3750
1.5000

4.763 2
5.196 2

0.595 4
0.649 5

0.793 9
0.866 0

1.1908
1.299 1

1.7862
1.9486

2.977 0
3.247 6

3.373 9
3.680 6

3.572 4
3.897 1

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

0.028 9
0.036 1
0.043 3
0.050 5
0.057 7

0.0650

149

IS : 4218(Part

lb1976

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This part covers the basic and design profiles of IS0 metric screw threads. While revising this part of
the standard which was first published in 1967, the following changes have been made:
Design profiles of screw thread with allowance have been added. in Table 1, thevalues for 1 114H and 1
5112H which are redundant have been eliminated. Notes on design profile and production of external
threads have now been brought under Appendix A, as they do not form a part of the standard.
This part is one of a series of parts on IS0 metric screw threads. The different parts are as under:
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
Part 6

Basic and design profiles

Diameter pitch combinations
Basic dimensions for design profiles
Tolerancing system
Tolerances.

In the formulation

of this standard, assistance has been derived from the following

IS0 68 IS0 general purpose screw threads-Basic

dization.

profiles.

International

publications:

Organization

DIN 13 Sheet 19 Metrisches

ISO-Gewinde; Grundprofil
und Fertigungsprofile
threads-Basic
profile and production profiles). Deutsches lnstitut fur Normung.

APPENDIX

for Standar(IS0

metric

NOTES ON DESIGN PROFILE AND PRODUCTION OF EXTERNAL THREADS

A.1. Notes on Design Profile

A.l.l Maximum
Depth
Fig. 2, are such that if
is assembled, contact
the maximum depth of
A.1.2 Roots of External

of Engagement-The
design profiles of external and internal threads as shown in
a pair of screw threads of the same basic size (each in maximum material condition)
between the two threads will be at the flanks over the radial depth of 518 H which is
engagement.
and Internal

Threads

A.1.2.1 To provide resistance to fatigue and shock loads, the roots of the external threads shall be rounded off within the limiting profile and cleared beyond a flat of width P/4 at the minor diameter of the internal
thread. The root of the internal thread shall be rounded off and cleared beyond a flat of width P18 at the major diameter of the external thread.
A.1.2.2 The crests of the threads of GO screw ring and plug gauges are made flat and of P/4 and P/8 width
respectively. They may not, threfore, be used to inspect the form of the rounding at the roots of external and
internal threads. Optical methods may, however, be used to inspect them.
A.l.3

Crests of External

Threads

A.l.3.1 The basic and design profiles of IS0 metric external thread (see Fig. 1 and 2) show the crest as flat
but modern methods of manufacture result in large quantities of external threads with crests partially or
even completely rounded. The departure from flat crest is not detrimental. While the limiting profiles within
which the form of the crests of external threads should lie are represented by two full lines shown in Fig. 5,
the minimum limiting profile shall, in practice, be taken as rounded at the crest as shown by the dotted arc.
A.1.3.2 The actual form of any rounding of the crests of external threads is not checked by GO screw ring
gauge, since the roots of the threads of these gauges are cleared to accept maximum material threads with
flat crests of width PA.
A.1.3.3 In some cases, the external thread may be required to have rounded crest. This should be stated
following the appropriate designation. The normal radius of such rounding is 0.108 25P.
A.2. Notes on the Production of External Threads
A.2.1 The actual profile of the crest of an IS0 metric external thread depends on the method of manufacture.
150

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

max.

l)-1976

MAJOR
DIA
min.

I
FIG. 5 LIMITING PROFILES AT CRESTS
OF EXTERNAL THREADS
A.2.1.1 The limiting profiles permit the use of a new form tool having a minimum crest radius of 0.108 2%.
This tool may be retained in service until its crest radius wears to 0.144 34P. However, if due care is taken of
the tool wear, the rounded crest should rarely reach the dotted profile shown in Fig. 5.
A.2.1.2 A single ribbed grinding wheel or a single point cutting tool produces a flat crest as shown
6, whereas a crushed milti-ribbed
wheel produces a crest profile as shown in Fig. 7.

FIG. 6 CREST PRODUCED

BY GRINDING
WI,IH
A
SINGLE
RIBBED
WHEEL
OR CUTTING
WITH
A
SINGLE POINT TOOL

in Fig.

FIG. 7 CREST PRODUCED

BY GRINDING
WITH
A
CRUSHED
MULTI-RIBBED
WHEEL

A.2.1.3 The crest profile produced by the thread rolling process is shown in Fig. 8. The crests of external
threads resulting from this process will normally fall above the minimum limiting profile shown in Fig. 5.

FIG. 8 CREST
BY THREAD

PRODUCED
ROLLING

A-2.1.4 A thread cutting die having root radius of 0.108 25P produces a crest as shown in Fig. 9. With a correctly formed tool there will be no serious loss of straight flank even when it cuts a thread of minimum pitch
diameter as shown in Fig. 9.
A.2.2 The following

advantages

are associated

with external

threads

with rounded

a) External threads with rounded crests are less susceptible

to damage
transport than those having flat crests, which result in sharp or semi-sharp
of the external threads.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

crests:

by burring in handling
and
edges at the major diameter

151

IS : 4218(Part

l)-1976

b)

Troubles associated with plating are far less serious if the crests of the external threads are rounded. In
the plating of external threads by the usual barrel plating process. the burring of flat-crested
threads
may be quite serious and in still-vat process the plating tends to build up round the two edges at the major diameter and encroaches upon the flanks.

c)

The threads on thread rolling dies are stronger,

roots are rounded rather than sharp-cornered.

less subject

to fatigue

failure

are easier to grind if their

ITING PROFILE, max.

ITING PROFILE, min.

FIG. 9 CREST PRODUCED

152

BY THREAD CUTTING DIE

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

2)-1976

Indian Standard

IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS

PART 2 DIAMETER

PITCH COMBINATIONS

( First Revision )

1. Scope-Specifies
a series
diameter range 1 to 300 mm.

of diameter

and pitch

combinations

for IS0 metric

screw

threads

in the

2. Choice of Diameter and Pitch

2.1 The diameters

and the.associated

2.2 Choose, for preference,

pitches

diameters

2.2.1 Diameter 35 mm and pitch

dicated in the footnotes.
2.3 The words coarse and fine
however, be associated
with these
2.3.1 It shall be understood

shall be as given in Table 1.

in co11 and, if necessary,

1.25 mm of diameter
are given

in order

in co12 and then in co13 of Table 1.

14 mm shall be used only for the special

to conform

to usage.

No concept

cases in-

of quality

shall,

Words.

that coarse

pitches

are the largest

2.4 For the diameter (or the diameter range) selected,

line (or lines) avoiding pitches in brackets.

metric

pitches

choose one of the pitches

2.5 If screw threads finer than those given in Table 1 are found necessary,
in mm) shall be used:

used in current

practice.

shown on the corresponding

only the following

pitches

(given

3, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.75, 0.5, 0.35, 0.25 and 0.2.

difficulty
in complying
When selecting such pitches,,take
into account the fact that there is increasin
with tolerances
as the diameter
IS increased
for a given pitch. It is suggested,
Bor the time being, that
diameters larger than the following should generally not be used with the pitches indicated:

Pitch

Maximum Diameter

mm

mm

0.5

22

0.75

33

80

1.5

150

200

300

2.6 In cases where it would be necessary to use a thread with a pitch larger than 6 mm, in the diameter
150 to 300 mm, the pitch 8 mm should be used for preference.

range

3. Designation
3.1 A screw thread in conformity
with this standard shall be designated
by the letter M followed
by the
.
values of the nommal diameter and of the pitch, expressed in millimetres
and separated by the sign x.
Example : M6 x 0.75
3.2 The absence of the indication
of pitch means that a coarse pitch is specified.
Example : M6

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

153

IS : 4218(Part

2)-1976

TABLE 1 DIAMETER PITCH COMBINATIONS

(Clauses

2.1, 2.2 and 2.5)

All dimensions

in millimetres.

Nominal Dlameters
Cal. 1

Cal. 2
Second
Choice

First
Choice

Cal. 3
Third
Choice

Pitches
Fine

Coarse
4

1 .5

1 ,25

0.75

0.25
1 ,l

0.25

14

g
0 35
0 35
0.4

18
2

3.5
4.5

1 ,25
1 25

8
10
11
12

.-

1 -5
15
1 -75

--

:
--

1.5

1 .25

1.5
1.5
i .5

1.25*

18

25
25

22

25
3

--

1
:

--

3
28

-1 ,5
1.5
1.5

35

30
32

_.

3.5

33
35)

36

-I---i---

26

27

--

25

---

_ ---

24

-.-

17

20

I-

0.75
0.76
0.75

1 .25

_.

0.75

--

--

15
16

--

8:;

14

--

0.5
0.5
--

--

1
7

0.25
--

0.35

5.5
6

--

0.35
0.35

--

0.8

0.2
0.2
0.2

0.25

0.6
0.7
0.75

0.2

._ --

.-

0.45
0.45
0.5

2.5
3

0.2

0.2
0.2
--

2.2

0.25
-_--

_ _-_-

--

-.
1.6

o-35

- .--

-1 .2

0.5

-_--

38

:
1

1.5
1.5
1 ,5

_ ~

1.6

39
40

42

;:z

--

--

45
48
50

. .

52

--

55

56
58
l

Only for locking nuts for bearings.

Note-Pitches
shown in brackets are to be avoided,

154

Only for spark plugs for engines.

as far as possible.

HANDBOOK

( Conrinued )

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

TA6t.E

DIAMETER

PITCH

COMBINATIONS-Contd

Nominal Diameters

Pitches

Cal. 2

C;I;:

%zdd

Choice

Fine

%rdY
Choice

Coarse
6

60

1.5

t
4

E
3

z
2

::;
1.5

4
t

2
:

i:i

5.5
62

64
65
68

72

2)-1976

E
3

70

75

6
6

t
4

:
3

2
s

::;
1.5

2
z

1.5

:
3

;
2

76
78
80
82
85
90

4
:

:
6

96

-_100
110

105

6
6

4
t

3
:

;
2

116
120

6
6
6

4
4
4

:
3

2
2
2

6
:

4
t

:
3

z
2

4
:

2
2

125
130

135

140
145
150

:
6

155

160

166
170

-176

185

180

t6

:
6

:
4

:
3

216

8
6

t
4

:
3

230
225

:6

4
t

235

245

4
4
4

-190

3
3
3

195

200

--

205
210

220

240
250

255
--

260

;;L$

280
zii
295
300

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

155

IS : 4218(Part

2)-l 976

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This part convering the basic dimensions for design profiles for IS0 metric screw threads was first
published in 1967. In view of the revision of Part 2, all the existing and additional sizes have been brought
in line with IS0 261-1973 IS.0 general purpose metric screw threads-General
plan. All dimensions have
been rounded to three decimal places.
This part is one of a series of parts on IS0 Metrk Screw Threads. The different parts are as under:
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part

1
2
3
4
5

Basic and design profiles

Diameter pitch combinations
Basic dimensions for design
Tolerancing
system
Tolerances

profiles

In the formulation of this standard, assistance has been derived from IS0 261-1973 IS0 general purpose metric screw threads-General
plan issued by International Organization for Standardization.

156

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTE#RS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

3)-1976

Indian Standard

IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS

PART 3 BASIC DIMENSIONS

I
ml

FOR DESIGN PROFILES

( First Revision

1. Scope-Gives
to 300mm.

basic dimensions

for design profiles for IS0 metric screw threads in the diameter range 1

2. Design Profiles-The
design profiles along with the various symbols that denote the quantities
against each are given in Fig. 1.

shown

IN PRACTICE THE ROOT IS ROUNDED

CLEARED BEYOND A WIDTH P/8
H

INTERNAL
THREAD
DIAMETERS

EXTERNAL
THREAD
DIAMETERS
D = major diameter of internal thread
D, = minor diameter of internal thread
D2 = pitch diameter of internal thread

d = major diameter of external thread

d3 = minor diameter of external thread
d2 = pitch diameter of external thread
H = height of fundamental triangle
H, = maximum depth of engagement
h3 = basic depth of external thread
P = pitch
FIG. 1 DESIGN PROFILES OF INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL THREADS
3. Formulae-The

values given in this standard have been calculated

D2 = D-2x
dL = d-2x

+ H = d-0.650P
;H=D-1.063P

dJ=d-2x

;stress

H=d-1.227P
area = ;

4. Basic Dimensions-The
Table 1.

HANDBOOK

ON

formulae:

5 H = D-0.65OP

D, =D-2x

Tensile

from the following

INDUSTRIAL

dp +da
(7)

basic dimensions

FASTENERS-PART

for design profiles of IS0 metric screw threads are given in

157

IS : 4218(Part

3)-1976

TABLE1BASlCDlMENSlONSFORDESlGNPROFlLESOFISOMETRlC

SCREWTHREADS

(Clause 4)
All dimensions in millimetres.

Nominal
Diameter

-XGijiF-

Pitch
P

Pitch
Dip;ter

Diameter
d=D

External
Threads&

__
1
1 ,1
1.2

0.25
0.2
0.25
0.2

1.200

g5
0.3
0.2

1.6

g5

1.8

0.35
0.2

1.400

__

_
1.600

--

-_
1.800

d_

0.4
0.25

2.2

0.45
0.25

2XuIo

-_

-_

2.200

._

__

2.5

0.45
0.35

2,500

__

-_

0.5
0.35

3,000

-_

-_

3.5

0.6
0.35

0.7
0.5

3,500

_.

--

4.000

*_

--

4.5

4.500

g:;"

-.

-.

0.8
0.5

5.000
--

5.5

0.5

5,500

-_

0.793
0.855

;:g;

1.038

0.893

0.929

I-

1.070

0955

0983

I-

1.205
1.270

1.032
1.155

1,075
1.183

4
2

1.470
1.373

1.355
1.170

1.383
1.221

1.573
1.670

1,370
1.555

1.740
1.838

45:

0.59
0.67

24
24

z:;;

32:

1.27
1.59

1.421
1.583

1':

1.70
2.66

1,509
1,693

1.567
1.729

4
2

2J

1.648
1.893

1.713
1.929

2.208
2.273

1948
2.071

2.013
2.121

23

2.675
2.773

2.387
2571

2.459
2.621

3.110
3.273

2-764
3.071

2.850
3,121

1.908
2.038

3545
3.675

3.141
3.387

3.242
3.459

7.000

A.75

1.25
A.75
-

5.03
5.61

3
1

;:

7.90
6.78

3
2

9.79
8.76

-0

10

1.5
I.25

10~000

L.75
-_

11

1.5

-_

12

1.75
1.5
1.25
1

11.3
12.8

:;

16.1
14.2

3.688
3.959

4.480
4,675

4,019
4.387

j:g

5.175

4.887

4959

5.350
5.513

4,773
5.080

4.917
5,168

;:

20.1
22.0

6.350
6.513

5.773
6,080

5917
6.188

52
6

g:;

7.188
7.350
7.513

6,466
6.773
7.080

6.647
6.917
7.188

z
1

::
49

36.6
39.2
41.8

8.188
8,350
8.513

7.466
7.773
8.080

7.647
7917
8.188

2
2
1

9.026
9,188

8.160
8,466

8.376
8,647

;:$j

9.080
8.773

8.917
9.188

10,026
10.350
10.513

9,160
9.773
10~080

9.976
9.317
IO.188

-_
3
1

..-

.-

10.863
12.000
-

24
11

3.580
3.887

._

.-

11.000

A.75

--

4.013
4.175

9.000

A.75

._
24
18

8,000

1.25

2.07
2.45

45

199

-_

0.46
0.53

6,000

A.75

pin

I-

-.

g:;g

1.100

-_

de9

Tensile
Stress
Area mrr?

27
11

._

__
1.4

internal
Threads DI

0.729
0.783

1.000

-_

Lead Angle at
Basic Pitch Dla

Minor Diameter.

11.026
11.188
11.350

9.853

:::I::
10.773

10,106

:;:g
10.917

z
2
1

47
;r,

48.0
51.0
54.0

58.0

$79
26

61.2
64.5
67.9

t:
18

71.4
79.0
83.0

E
3:

K
92.1
96.1

(Continued)

158

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

TABLE 1 BASIC DIMENSIONS

FOR DESIGN PROFILES

3)-l 976

OF IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS-Contd

Alldimensions in millimetres.
I-

Pitch
P

Nominal
Diameter

Major
Di:Teder

Pitch
"?Z"'
t

Minor Diameter.

External
Threads&

Internal
Threads&

Lead Angle at
Basic Pitch Dia
de9

14

2
1.5
1.25
1

14.000

12.701
13.026
13.188
13.350

11.546
12.160
12.466
12,773

11.835
12,376
12,647
12.917

15

1.5
1

15,000

14.026
14.350

13.160
13.773

13.376
13.917

16

2
1.5
1

16000

14,701
15.026
15,350

13.546
14.160
14.773

13.835
14,376
14,917

2
:

16.026
16.350

15.160
15,773

15.376
15,917

16.376
16,701

14933

15.294
15.835
16.376
16917

1.5
1

17

2.5
2

18

1
1.5
2.5
2
1.5
1

20

25
2
1.5
1

22

17.000

18.000

20.000

22,000

17.350
17-026

15.546
16.773
16,160

18.376
18.701
19.026
19.350

18,160
17546
18,773

20.376
20.701
21,026
21.350

16.933

;
:

min

Tensile Stress
Area mrv?

52
6
24;
~-

1
;
:

115
125
129
134

57
49

145
155

z:
11

157
167
178

43
7

191
203

47

192

"1

;::
229
245
258
272
285

17.294
17.835
18,376
18,917

;;

:
0

:;

19.294
19.835
20.376
20917

20.160
19.546
20.773

:
0

14
46
::

303
318
333
348

18933

24

;
1.5
1

24.000

22.701
22.051
23,026
23,350

20.319
21.546
22.160
22.773

21:835
20.752
22,376
22917

2
:
0

49
39
11
47

384
353
401
418

25

2
1.5
1

25.000

23.701
24.026
24.350

22.546
23,160
23.773

22.835
23.376
23917

1
:,

32
9
45

420
440
454

1.5

26.000

25,026

24,160

24.376

454

25.701
25.051

23.319

24.835
23.752

:;

496
459

3
41

514
533

22
4;

535
554
575

18

:
:

G
57
37

561
581
621
642
663

11
53

713
734

5
46

26

%
27

28

1.5
1

27,000

26,026
26.350

25,160
24.546
25,773

25.376
25917

:
0

2
1.5
1

28.000

26.701
27.026
27.350

25-546
26.160
26,773

25.835
26.376
26917

:
0

27,727

26.211
26.752
27,835
28.376
28,917

3.5
30

;
1.5
1
2
1.5

32

30.000

;;:y;;
29.026
29.350

25.706
26,319
27.546
28.160
28,773

32.000

31.026
30.701

30,160
29.546

29.835
30,376

:,

30.727

28.706

29.211

3.5
33

;
1.5

33000

31.701
31.051
32,026

30.546
29,319
31.160

30.835
29.752
31.376

:
0

5:

694
716
761
785

35

1.5

35.000

34.026

33.160

33.376

48

886

36

:
2
1.5

36,000

33.402
34.701
34,051
35.026

31.093
33,546
32.319
34.160

32.752
31.670
;;:g;

2
:
0

;r,
4;

865
817
915
940

38

1.5

38,000

37,026

36.160

36.376

45

1 050

.-

(Continued)

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

159

IS : 4218(Part

TABLE

31-1976

1 BASIC DIMENSIONS

FOR DESIGN PROFILES

OF IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS-Contd

All dimensions in millimetres.

Pitch

Nominal
Diameter

Major

Pitch
Diameter

D2SSter

d,=- D,

Minor Diameter
External

Thwads &
4

Internal
Threads D,

Lead Angle at
Basic Pitch Dia
de9
2

min

Tensile
Stress
Area mn?

976
1030
1080
1 110

36.402

34.093

37,051
37.701
38.026

35.319
36.546
37,160

33;:;;;
36.835
37.376

:,
0

:"8
43

iI

39

2
1.5

39~000

40

s
1.5

40*000

38.051
38.701
39.026

36,319
37.546
38.160

36.752
37.835
38.376

:,
0

36,479
37,093
38.319
39,546
40,160

37,129

42,000

39,077
39,402
40,051
40.701
41.026

;;:;g
39,835
40.376

:
:

::
52
40

42.077
42.402
43.051
43.701
44.026

39,479
40.093
41,319
42.546
43.160

40.670
40.129
41.752
42,835
43.376

fz

:,
0

ii:
37

1300
1 340
1400
1460
1490

44,752
45.402
46.051
46,701
47.026

41.866
43.093
44.319
45.546
46.160

42.587
43.670
44,752
45 835
46.376

326
11
47
35

1470
1 540
1600
1670
1 710

50.000

48.051
48.701
49.026

46.319
47-546
48.160

46,752
47.835
48,376

:,
0

4:
34

1750
1 820
1 860

52.000

48.752
49.402
50,051
51.026
50.701

47.093
45.866
48.319
49,546
50.160

47,670
46.587
48,752
49.835
50.376

I
:
:

2";

52.402
53.051
53,701
54.026

50-093
51.319.
52.546
53.160

50.670
51,752
52,835
53.376

52.428
53,402
54.051
54.701
55.026

49,252
51,093
52319
53.546
54.160

50.046
51.670
52.752
53.836
54.376

55.402
56,051
56,701
57.026

53.093
54.319
55.546
56.160

53.670
54.752
55.835
56,376

56428
57.402
58.051
58.701
59,026

53.252
55,093
56,319
57 546
58,160

54046
55670
56,752
57.835
58.376

59.402
60.051
60.701
61.026

57.093
58,319
59.546
60.160

;;:;g
59,835
60.376

:,

i:

;;

60.103
61.402
62.051
62.701
63.026

56.639
59.093
60,319
61.546
62.160

57.505
59.670
60.752
61.835
62.376

49

4.5
i
2
1.5

42

1.5
;

45

45.000

I .5
5
4
z

48

48,000

1.5
50

;
1,5

52

:
3
t.5
4
23

55

55,000

1.5
5.5
4
3
2
I .5

56

4
;

58

56-000

58,000

1.5
5.5
i
2
1.5

60

4
2

62

60.000

62.000

1.5
6
64
I

i
2
1.5

64.000

2
:

1085
1 140
1170

26

1120
1150
1 210
I 260
1290

1
1760
830
1900
1 970
2010

4:
32

31
2

i:,

2060
2140
2220
2260

:
:,
0

zz
1
40
30

2 030
2140
2220
2300
2 340

:,

is

00

;:

47
16

0
:

:
0

;::
28

ii
2":

~-

2 310
2 390
2470
2 520
2 360
2490
2 570
2 650
2700
2670
2760
2830
2 890
2 680
2 850
2 940
3030
3080

(Continued

160

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part 3)-l 976

TABLE 1 BASIC DIMENSIONS

FOR DESIGN PROFILES

OF IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS-Contd

All dimensions in millimetres.

Nominal
Diameter

Pitch
P

Major
Dlameter
d=D

4
;

65

68

70

6
4
;

68.000

64-103
65-402
66.051
66.701
67 026

60.639
63093
64-319
65,546
66.160

61 505
63 670
64.752
65 835
66.376

70000

66103
67.402
68051
68-701
69-026

62 639
65-093
66.319
67,546
68-160

63,505
65 670
66.752
67.835
68.376

68.103
69.402
70.051
70.701
71.026

64 639
67.093
68-319
69.546
70.160

65 505
67 670
68.752
69-835
70 376

72.402
73.051
73,701
74.026

70,093
71.319
72.546
7316-O

70-670
71 752
72 835
73376

76,000

72.103
73.402
74.051
74,701
75 026

68.639
71 093
72,319
73,546
74 160

'69 505
71 670
72-752
73 835
74.376

78000

76701

75 546

75835

80 000

76103
77.402
78051
78 701
79 026

72 639
75 093
76.319
77 546
78.160

73 505
75,670
76,752
77,835
78.376

72.000

1.5
4
;

75

75.000

1.5

76

6
4
;

78

80

6
4
;

Internal
Threads 0
60670
61,752
62.835
63.376

1.5

72

External
Threads 6
60093
61.319
62-546
63,160

1.5

6
4
;

d,=l&

Mlnor Diameter

62.407
63.051
63-701
64,026

65 000

1.5
6
4
z

Pitch
Diameter

15

1.5

--

Lead Angle at
Basic Pitch Dia
deg

min

10
:,
0
0
1
1
:
0

E
26
42
570
ii
39

:
0
:
:
:
0

458
32
24
36
3
47
z;

Tenslle
Stress
Area m&

2 950
3040
3120
3180
3 060
3 240
3340
3430
3480
3440
3 540
3640
3 690
3460
3 660
3 760
3 860
3 910

:,

1
45

;:

3 980
4080
4200
4250

1
:,
0
0

31
0
44
29
22

3890
4100
4 210
4 320
4370

28

4550

:,

26
57

:
0

2";
21

4340
4570
4680
4790
4 850

82

82-000

80 701

79 546

79,835

27

5 040

85

:
2

85,000

81.103
82.402
83.701
83.051

77.639
80.093
81,319
82 546

78-505
80.670
82,835
81.752

:,
E

ii
25:

4 950
5190
5
5430
310

90

:
;

90.000

86103
87.402
88
88.701
051

82.639
85.093
86.319
87.546

83.505
85.670
87.835
86.752

:,

16
50
si

5 590
5 840
6100
5
970

91.103
92.402

87,639
90,093

88.505
90.670

:,

12
47

6270
6 540

93,051
93.701

91.319
92,546

91.752
92,835

;:

6 810
6670

100~000

96,103
97.402

92.639
95.093

93,505
95.670

:,

4:

7 000
7 280

98.701
98.051

96.319
97.546

97.835
96.752

9:

7 420
560

105~000

101.103
102.402

97.639
100.093

98.505
100.670

:,

5
43

7760
8050

103,701
103,051

101.319
102.546

102.835
101,752

2":

8350
8200

6
4

95

95.000

z
6
4

100

105

( continued

HAmBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

161

IS : 4218(Part

3)-l 976

TABLE 1 BASIC DIMENSIONS

FOR DESIGN PROFILES OF IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS-Contd

All dimensions in millimetres.

Pitch
Diameter

Major
Diameter

Pitch

Nominal
Diameter

d-0

-.

d,=D,

110~000

-.

-_

-.

115.000

115

-.

-_
6
4

_.

120~000

-.

_125000

125

-.
130

_135

-140

-145

130~000

:
2

135000

140~000

:
2

155

_.
160

_165

_170

__
175

_-

6
4
3
6
4
3

145.000

150~000

__

_155.000

_-

_160-000

.-

..165.000

_-

6
4
3

170~000

_175.000

.-

6
4
3

180

_-

6
4
3

:
3

--

6
4

--

_-

6
4

_-

--

150

__

_:
2

__
180.000

Minor Diameter
External

ThreadsD

106,103
107.402
108,051
108.701

102.639
105.093
106.319
107.546

103,505
105,670
106.752
107.835

111.103
112.402
113.051
113.,701

107.639
110~093
111.319
112,546

116.103
117.402
118.051
118.701

112.639
115.093
116.319
117.546

121.103
122.402
123.051
123,701

117.639
120.093
121.319
122,546

126.103
127.402
128.051
128.701

122,639
125.093
126.319
127.546

131.103
132.402
133.051
133,701

127.639
130.093
131.319
132.546

136.103
137.402
138.051
138,701

132.639
135.093
136,319
137.546

141.103
142.402
143.051
143.701

137.639
140.093
141.319
142.546

146,103
147.402
148.051
148,701

142.639
145.093
146.319
147.546

151.103
152.402
153.051

147.639
150.093
151,319

Internal

Threads&

-.

110

120

-.

-.

-_

-_

__

_-

_-

_-

_-

_-

108.505
110.670
111.752
112.835

118.505
120.670
121.752
122,835
123,505
125.670
126.752
127.835
128.505
130.670
131.752
132,835
133.505
135.670
136.752
137,835
138,505
140,670
141.752
142.835
143,505
145.670
146.752
147,835
148.505
150,670
151,752

161,103
162,402
163,051

157-639
160.093
161.319

166,103
167,402
168.051

162.639
165.093
166,319

163.505
165.670
166.752

171.103
172.402
173.051

167,639
170.093
171.319

168,505
170,670
171.752

176.103
177.402
178.051

172.639
175.093
176,319

.-

1
--

4:
zo"

--

::
29

19

--

:;

28
18

--

152,639
155.093
156.319

--

113,505
115.670
116.752
117.835

156,103
157,402
158,051

--

Tensile
Stress
Area mn?

153.505
155.670
156.752

::

27
18

--

9 020
9180
9400
9720
9890
10100
10300
10600
10800
11 000
11
11
11
11

200
500
700
900

12100
12600
12700
12900

--

13200
13500
13700
13900

--

48
;:
16
--

47
23;
15
--

i:

22
15
--

44
i5;
--

42
;:
--

158.505
160.670
161.752

15200
15700
15900
16100
16400
16800
17000
17200
17500
18000
18200
18700
19200
19400
19900
20400
20600

40
;:

21 200
21 700
22000

40
25
19

22500
23000
23 300

23:

23900
24400
24700

20

--

_-

173,505
175.670
176.752

14200
14600
14800
15000

473
--

18
-

( Continued

162

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

TABLE 1 BASIC DIMENSIONS

FOR DESIGN PROFILES

3)-l 976

OF IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS-Contd

All dimensions in millimetres.

Nominal
Diameter

Pitch
P

Pitch
Diameter

Major
Diameter

d,=D,

d=D

:
3

185

185,000

--

6
190

195

:
3

200

6
4
3

205

6
4
3

190~000

-195.000

.200~000

-205~000

--

6
210

215

6
4
3
6
4
3

220

210~000

-215.000

-220 000

-225.000

-_

6
230

230.000

--

6
235

240

245

235,000

-_

:
3

240.000

:
3

245.000

:
3

250 000

255

6
4

255,000

260 I

265

__
-260000

-) 265.000

-_
270
:
276
:

181.103
182.402
183,051

177.639
180.093
181.319

186,103
187.402
188,051

182.639
185.093
186.319

191.103
192,402
193.051

187.639
190.093
191.319

196.103
197.402
198,051

192.639
195.093
196,319

201.103
202.402
203.051

197,639
200~093
201,319

206.103
207,402
208.051

;g:;;;

211.103
212,402
213.051

206.319

188.505
190.670
191.752

.-

270.000

__

_.

208.505
210.670
211.752

-218.505
220.670
221.752

226.103
227.402
228,051

222.639
225-093
226,319

223.505
225.670
226.752

231.103
232,402
233.051

227.639
230.093
231.319

228.505
230.670
231.752

275,000

238.505
240.670
241.752

._

._

_-___

_.

._

g:;;;

247.639
250.093

256.103
257.402

252,639
255.093

253.505
255,670

261.103
262,402

257.639
260.093

258.506
260,670

;;;:g;

262,639
265.093

263.505
265.670

I 267.639
270,093

I 268,505
270.670

z
17

.-

fG%

.29700
30200
30500

.;:

:
.-

._

248.505
250.670

271.103
272,402

17

.-

__

242.639
245,093
246.319

-.

:
00
.-

26700

.203,505
205,670
206.752

217.639
220.093
221.319

246,103
247.402
248.051

18

;g:;;;

._

221,103
222.402
223.051

241.319

2:

:
0

198.505

212,639
215.093
216,319

fgg

.-

193.505
195.670
196.752

216.103
217.402
218.051

241.103
242.402
243,051

min

183,505
186.670
186.752

dw

178.505
180.670
181.752

-:y;:g;
211.319

Tenslle
Stress
Area m&

Internat

I Threads@
_.

236,103
237,402
238.051

_-

250

External
Threads&

--

Lead Angle at
Basic Pitch Dla

Mlnor Diameter

16

00

zll
15

0
:
0

--

_34400
35000
35300

.-

36100
36700
37 000

%
15

30

:
0

29
19
14

28

1:

:
0

28
18
14

:
0

28
18
14

:
0

27
18
13

37800
38200
38800

_-

39600
40200
40500
41 300
41 8OC
42300

--

45000
45600
46 000

_-

46900
47600
48000

_-

26
:

17

26
17

I
-.

0
0

25
17

:i

48700
49500

-.

50 800
61 600

-.

52800
53600

_.
_, --

24
16

54900
55600
%%8

( Continued

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

163

IS : 4218(Part

3)-1976

TABLE 1 BASIC DIMENSIONS FOR DESIGN PROFILES OF IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS-Contd
All dimensions in millimetres.

Nominal
Diameter

Pitch
P

Major
Diameter
d=D

Pitch
Diameter
d,=D,

Lead Angle at
Basic Pitch Dla

Minor Diameter
p
External
Threads &

Internal
Threads

D,

de9

min

Tenslle
Stress
Area rnri?

280

6
4

280~000

276.103
277.402

272 639
275,093

273.505
275.670

24
16

59 100
59 900

285

6
4

285.000

281 ,103
282.402

277.639
280.093

278,505
280.670

23
15

61 100
62 000

290

6
4

290.000

286,103
287.402

282,639
285-093

283.505
285-670

23
15

63 400
64 500

295

6
4

295,000

291 ,103
292.402

287,639
290 093

288.505
290,670

23
15

65 500
66 500

300

300~000

296.103
297.402

292.639
295,093

293.505
295.670

22
16

68 100
68 900

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This part covering the basic dimensions

for design profiles for IS0 metric
screw threads was first
published in 1967. In view of the revision of Part 2, all the existing and additional
sizes have been brought in
line with IS0 261-1973 IS0 general purpose metric screw threads-General
plan. All dimensions
have been
rounded to three decimal places.
This part is one of a series of parts on IS0 metric screw threads. The different parts are as under:
Part 1 Basic and design profiles
Part 2 Diameter
pitch combinations
Part 3 Basic dimensions
for design profiles
Part 4 Tolerancing
system
Part 5 Tolerances
In the tormulation
of this standard,
assistance
has been derived
from ISO/R 724 IS0 general
purpose
metric
screw
threads--Basic
dimensions,
issued
by international
Organization
for
Standardization.
164

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

4)-1976

Indian Standards
IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS
PART 4 TOLERANCING SYSTEM
(

I. Scope-Specifies
2. Terminology

tolerancing

First Revision )

system for IS0 metric screw threads in the diameter range 1 to 300 mm.

and Symbols

2.1 Terminology-For

the purpose of this standard, the following

2.1.1 Nut thread-This

shall mean to include internal threads.

2.1.2 Bolt thread-This

shall mean to include external threads.

2.1.3 Crest diameter-Crest

bolt threads, major diameter.

definitions

shall apply.

diameter shall mean, in case of nut threads, minor diameter and in case of

2.1.4 Length of thread engagement-

It is the length of thread in operation.

2.1.5 Tolerancegrade-The
tolerance, the value of which is a function of the basic size, is designated by a
number symbol called thegrade.
2.1.6 Tolerance position-The
position of the tolerance zone with respect to the zero line, which is a function of the basic size, is indicated by a letter symbol, a capital letter for nut threads and a small letter for
bolt threads.
2.1.7 Tolerance c/asses-The
tolerance class.

combination

of tolerance grade and tolerance position

2.2 Symbols-The
various symbols used in this standard shall denote the quantities
each (see a/so Fig. 1):

shall constitute

given below against

basic major diameter of nut thread

basic minor diameter (crest diameter) of nut thread
basic pitch diameter of nut thread
basic major diameter (crest diameter) of bolt thread
= basic pitch diameter of bolt thread
d2
--basic minor diameter of bolt thread
d3
P
=pitch of the thread
= radius of the root of bolt thread
R
S
= short length of thread engagement
= normal length of thread engagement
N
= long length of thread engagement
L
T
= tolerance
TD, TD, Td, Td, and Td, = tolerances for D,, D,$ d, d2 and d3
ei, &I = lo wer deviations
es, ES = upper deviations
D
D,
D,
d

=
=
=
=

TOtERANCE

FOR NUT THREAD

ES

El

FIG. 1 TOLERANCE POSITIONWITH RESPECTTO ZERO LINE (BASIC SIZE)

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

165

IS : 4218lPart

4)-7976

3. Designation
3.1 A comoiete screw thread designation
tion.

shall consist of a size designation,

and tolerance class designa-

3.1.1 Size designation--Size

of a screw thread shall be designated by the letter M followed by the
diameter and the pitch, the two being separated by the sign X. Where there is no indication of pitch, it shall
imply coarse pitch.
Examples:
M8Xl
Ml0
3.1.2 Tolerance
class designation-This
tolerance followed by a class designation
consist of:

shall include a class designation for the pitch diameter

for the crest diameter tolerance. Each class designation shall

a) a figure indicating

tolerance grade; and

b) a letter indicating

tolerance position, capital for nuts, small for bolts.

Examples:
M8-5g

6g
TP_

If the two class designations

Class designation
Class designation

for crest diameter tolerance

for pitch diameter tolerance

for a thread are equal, it is not necessary to repeat the symbols.

M20 x 2-6H
Class designation
A fit between threaded parts is indicated
thread tolerance class separated by a stroke.

for pitch and crest diameter tolerance (equal)

by the nut thread tolerance

class followed

by the bolt

Examples:
M6-6W6g
M20 x 2-6H/5g6g
3.1.3 if considered necessary, the designation
to the class designation.

for the group of length of thread engagement may be added

3.1.4 For coated threads the tolerances apply to the parts before coating, unless otherwise stated. After
coating, the actual thread profile shall not in any point transgress the maximum limits for position H or h
as the case may be.
4. Length of Thread Engagement
4.1 The length of thread engagement (length of thread in operation) is divided into three groups as short (S),
normal (N) and long (L). if the length of thread engagement is unknown (as in the manufacture of standard
bolts), group N is recommended.
4.2 For the calculation
have been applied.

of the limits of the normal length of thread engagement in Table 1, the following

rules

4.2.1 For each pitch within a certain diameter range, d has been set equal to the smallest diameter in this
range:
Length of engagemet of thread engagement group N Min = 2.24 fd.*
Length of engagement of thread engagement group N Max = 6.7 Pd.*
where N, P and d are in mm.
5. Structure of the Tolerancing System-The
by tolerance grades and tolerance positions.

166

structure of the tolerancing

HANDBOOK

ON

system gives tolerances defined

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :4218(Part 4)-1976
5.1Tolerance Grades-A

series

of tolerance

grades

are provided

for

each of the five elements as follows:

Minor diameter of nut threads D,

4, 5, 6, 7. 8

Pitch diameter of nut threads D,

(02,01, 0, 1, 2,3) 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

Major diameter of bolt threads d

4, 6, 8

Pitch diameter of bolt threads d2

Minor diameter of bolt threads d3

3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

(01, 0, 1, 2) 3, 4,6, 6, 7, 8, 9

TABLE 1 LENGTHS

OF THREAD

( Clause 4.2

ENGAGEMENT

All dimensions in millimetres.

Bask Major
Diameter
d=D
Over
-0.99

1.4

2.8

5.6

11.2

Length of Thread Engagement

Pitch
P

Up to and
Including

Up to and
Including
14

2.8

5.6

N
Over
0.5
0.6
0.7

L
Up to and
Including

0.2
0.25
0.3

0.7

0.2
0.25
0.35

0.5
0.6
0.8

0.8

;:;

::15

i.3

:*3

z.8

i .5
1.7

8Z5
0.8

i.5
1.7
2
2.2
2.5

0.75

2.4

:.25
1.5

:
5

;:;

z:;

Over

::;
2
1.5

0.35
0.5
0.6

z.5

z.2
2.5

11.2

22.4

3.8
4.5
5.6

:.25
1.5
1 .75

:
10

s.5

;:;
5.6
t
10
4
6.3
8.5

22.4

::
::

1.5

45
56

;t

E.5
6
180

32

3
4
6

180

1::

HANDBOOK

60

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

167

IS : 4218(Part

4)-1976

5.1.1 The bracketed tolerance grades are used for special application
are subject to special agreements.

in light precision engineering

and

5.1.2 In each case, for threads above 1.4 mm the tolerance grade 6 should be used for tolerance class
medium and thread engagement group N normal. The tolerance grades below 6 are intended for tolerance
class fine and/or thread engagement group S short. The tolerance grades above 6 are intended for
tolerance class coarse and, in the case of thread engagement group L long, also for tolerance class
medium. For some tolerance grades values are not stated, partly because there is insufficient thread
overlap and partly because of the requirement that the effective diameter tolerance shall not exceed the outside diameter tolerance.
5.1.3 Tables 2 and 3 contain the recommended tolerance grades for nut and bolt threads in the fine,
medium and coarse tolerance class for thread engagement groups S, N, L.
TABLE 2 TOLERANCE

GRADES

FOR NUT THREADS

(Clause 51.3)

Tolerance CiSSS

TABLE 3 TOLERANCE

GRADES

(Clause
Tolerance
Tolerance

Major

Medium

Coarse

5
-

Minor
dia

I
-

for the Thread

Engagement

Group

Pitch
dia

dia

Fine

for Bolt Thread

Class

Grades

FOR BOLT THREADS

5.1.3)

I
1

5
-

Pitch
die

Major
dia
4

6
6

Minor
dia

Pitch
dia

Minor
dia

I
1

Majar
dia

I
1

I
1

6
8

6. Tolerance Positions-Ta meet the current coating practice and also the requirement
the following tolerance positions are provided (see Fig. 2 to 5):

of easy assembly

G and H for nut threads and a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h for bolt threads.

The tolerance position e is, however, limited to pitches 0.5 and coarser. The tolerance
G and a to g provide for the application of coatings and for easy assembly.

positions

7. Tolerance Classes
7.1 In principle, any of the tolerance grades may be combined with any of the tolerance positions
giving rise to a large number of tolerance classes.

thereby

7.1.1 The recommended tolerance grade in the three commonly used tolerance classes fine, medium
and coarse are correlated with the thread engagement groups short (S), normal (NJ and long (L). The following general rules apply to the selection of tolerance classes:

166

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

4& 1
I

4)-1976

L BASIC PROFILE

401

FIG. 3 NUT THREADS WITH TOLERANCE

POSITION H

F:G. 2 NUT THREADS WITH TOLERANCE

POSITION G
Td

FIG.:

BOLT THREADS WITH TOLERANCE

POSITIONS e AND g

FIG. 5 BOLT THREADS WITH TOLERANCE

POSITION h

a) Tolerance class fine

For precision threads subject to the stipulation that variations

character of the fit shall be of only a minor degree

in the

b) Tolerance class medium

General use

c) Tolerance class coarse

When no special requirements are specified with regards to accuracy

and in cases where production difficulties may arise, for example, in
the case of threads on hot-rolled rods or when threads are cut in deep
blind holes

7.1.1.1 In order to reduce the number of gauges and tools, the tolerance classes should preferably be
chosen from Tables 4 and 5.
7.2 Any of the preferred tolerance classes for nuts may be combined with any of the preferred tolerance
classes for bolts. However, in order to guarantee sufficient overlap, the finised components should
preferably be made to form the fits H/g, H/h or G/h (for P less than 0.5 only H/h is recommended).
Examples:

M6-6H/6g
Ml2 X 1.25--5H14h
M20 X 2-7G16h
7.2.1 For coated threads, the tolerances apply to the parts before coating, unless otherwise stated. After
coating, the actual thread profile shall not in any point exceed the maximum material limits for positions H
or h as the case may be.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

169

IS : 4218(Part

4)-l

TABLE

976

RECOMMENDED

TOLERANCE

CLASSES
(Clause

Tolerance
Class
Bright,

4H$i4H5Hr
5H

Nut

or

4H$

THREAD

ENGAGEMENT

GROUP

7.1.1.1)

Tolerance

Bright or
Phosphated:

FOR

Zones

Phosphated
Electrolytically
Protective

for Surface

or to Take
Deposited
Coatingt

Conditions*

Thin

Bright (with
Large Clearance)
or to
Take Thick Electrolytically
Deposited
Protective
Coating?

4G$

or 5H;

or 5G

Fine
4h

Bolt

4e

49

of

For threads
6H:

above

For threads

of 1 to 1.4 mm diameter:

1 to 1.4 mm diameter

Nut

For threads of 1 to 1.4 mm diameter

5G or 5H:;

For threads
6H$

1.4 mm diameter

For threads above

6G or SHI):

1.4 mm diameter

:
:

Medium

5h:
-

Bolt

6e
For threads

above

1.4 mm diameter

%
-

Nut
Coarse

Bolt

7H:

7G

8g

8e

Threads
with surface protection (including
phosphating ) are allowed to reach, but not pass, the basic profile.
IWhen
the effective diameter
is at minimum for the nut thread and maximum
for the bolt thread, the possible coating
thickness is equal to l/4
of the relevant ba$c allowance.
$Threads made to the h and H tolerance posttion only allow surface protection ( including phosphating ) if the tolerance zone
is not utilized right up to the zero line.
$iOnly for special cases and for threads with pitches up to 0.35 mm.
So far, only tolerance
zones 4H/5H
have been used.
)16H mainly for threads below 3 mm diameter.

TABLE

5 TOLERANCE

CLASSES

BOLTS

AND

(Clause

COMMERCIAL

7.1.1.1)

Tolerance Class
For

FOR

NUTS

Nut

threads of 1 to 1.4 mm dia

Bolt

5H

6h

6H

6g

Medium
For threads over 1.4 mm dia

Coarse

8. Fundamental
for the various

69

Deviations-The
fundamental
deviations
for the nut and bolt threads (see Tables
tolerance
positions
are calculated
on the basis of the following
formulae:

E/(G) = +(15+ 11P)

E/(H) =0
es(e) = - (50 + 11 P) for pitches IO.5 mm
es(g) = -(15+11P)
es(h) = 0
The other basic allowances
have been based on the following
es(f) = -(30+
11P)
es(d) = - (65 + 19P) for pitches up to 2.5 mm
es(c) = -(115+19P)
es(b) = -(185+
19P)
es(a) = - (270 + 19P)
El and es are expressed
170

7H

in micrometres

and P is expressed
HANDBOOK

6 and 7)

formulae:

in millimetres.
ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

TABLE 6

FUNDAMENTAL

DEVIATION

4)-1976

FOR NUT THREADS

(Clause 8)
Values

in pm

0.2
0.25
0.3

+17
+18
+18

0.35

::z

::t5

+20

:fY

;::

+22

0.75
0.8
1

$22
+24
+25

0
0

1.25

$28
+32
t34

0
0

o-7

KS5

E2

z.5

+48

3.5

+53
$60
+63

:
0

z-5

9. Tolerances
9.1 Tolerances for Major Diameter of Bolt Thread (Td)-The

following

formula is used for calculating

the

tolerance Td for grade 6:

Td(6) = 180

Pz

m, and P is in mm.

where Td is in
9.1.1 The tolerances
table given below:

3.15

Td for other grades listed in Table 8 are obtained from Td (6) values according to the

Tolerance Grade

0.63 Td (6)

Td (6)

1.6 Td (6)

1
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

171

IS : 4218(Part

41-1976

TABLE

FUNDAMENTAL

DEVIATIONS
(Clause

FOR BOLT THREADS

8)

Values in pm

Fundamental

Deviations

Pitch
P
mm
a
es

b
es

0.2
0.25
0.3

0.35
0.4
0.45

Z:f
0.7

0.75
Y

d
es

f
es

es

g
es

h
es

45
45
46

-32
-33
-33

-17
-18
-18

:
0

[I=;

iI-j$

46
48
48

-34
-34
-35

-19
-19
-20

x
0

!I;;:;
(-125)

II
(-

;:;
78)

50
53
56

-36
-38

-21
-20
-22

8
0

--200

[-j;-j
-13.6

11
-

85
;;;

56
60

-38
-38
-40

-22
I$:

0
:

1.5
1.25
1.75

-300
-295
-310

-212
-205
-220

-140
-135
-145

- 95
so
-100

67
63
71

-45
-42
-48

-32
-28
-34

8
0

z.5
3

1;:;
-335

-225
-235
-245

-160
-150
-170

-105
-110
-115

71
80
85

-58
-52
-63

-42
-38
-48

x
0

35

-345

-255

-180

-125

so

-70

-53

z.5

-365
-355

-280
-265

-190
-200

-135
-130

--10095

-75
-80

-63
-60

:0

i.5

-395
r;;:

1;;;
-290

-236
-224
-212

-155
-150
-140

-118
-112
-106

-90
-95
-85

-71
r,;

Note

172

-290

es

If the bracketed basic allowances are used, it should be tested to see whether the remaining thread
sufficient for the application concerned.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

overlap is

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

TABLE

8 MAJOR

DIAMETER
(Clause

TOLERANCE

4)-1976

Td

9.1.1)

Values in

m
t

TDq for Tolerance Grade

Pitch
P
mm

9.2 Tolerances

0.2
0.25
0.3

36
42
48

56
67
75

0.35
0.4
0.45

53
60
63

85
95
100

0.5
0.6
0.7

67
80
90

106
125
140

0.75

90

140

0.8
1

95
112

150
180

236
280

1.25
1.5
1.75

132
150
170

212
236
265

335
375
425

2
2.5
3

180
212
236

280
335
375

450
530
600

3.5
4
4.5

265
300
315

425
475
500

670
750
800

5
5.5
6

335
355
375

530
560
600

850
900
950

for Minor Diameter

cording to the following

of Nut Thread (TD,)-The

tolerances

TD, for grade 6 are calculated

ac_

formulae:

a) Pitches for 0.2 to 0.8 mm

TD , (6) = 433 P-190 I22
b) Pitches of 1 mm and coarser
TD, (6) = 230 PO.7
m, and P is in mm.
Where TD, is in
9.2.1 The tolerances TD, for other grades listed in Table 9 are obtained from TD, (6) values according to
the table given below:

Tolerance

HANDBOOK

ON

Grade

0.63 TD,(6)

0.8 TD, (6)

TD, (6)

1.25 TD, (6)

1.6 TD, (6)

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

173

4)-l 976

IS : 4218(Part

TABLE 9 MINOR DIAMETER

(Clause
Values

TD,

in

Td,for Tolerance Grade

Pitch
P

TOLERANCES

9.2.1)

mm

0.2
0.25
0.3

36
45
53

56
67

65

0.35

63

60

100

0.4
0.45

71
60

112
125

90

7
-

-_
-

0.5
0.6
0.7

100
112

140
160
160

160
200
224

0.75
0.6
1

116
125
150

190
200
236

236

250
300

315
375

1.25
1.5
1.75

170
19c
2!2

212
236
265

265
300
335

335
375
425

425
475
530

2
2.5
3

236
260
315

300
355
400

375
450
500

475
560
630

600

3.5
4.
4.5

355
375
425

450
475
530

560
600
670

710
750
650

900
950
1060

5
5.5
6

450
475
500

560
600
630

710
750
600

900
950
1000

1120
1160
1250

710
600

9.3 Tolerances for Pitch Diameters

9.3.1

Tolerances for pitch diameter of bolt threads. (Td,)-The

tolerances
Td, for grade 6 are calculated
to the following
formula where d is equal to the geometrical
mean of the diameters.

according

Td, (6) = 90 P o.4do,

where

Td,

is in

m,

P and dare in mm.

The tolerances Td, for other grades listed in Table 10 are obtained

9.3.1.1
to the table

given

Tolerance
01

0.2Tdz

(6)

0.25Tb(6)

from

Td, (6) values according

below:

1
0.4TW6)

0.315TW6)

Grade
4

0.5Td2

(6)

0.63Td2

(6)

0.8TLIz(6)

Td2(6)

1.25Td2(6)

1.6Td2(6)

2Td2(6)

HANDBOOK

ON

\
174

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

TABLE 10 PITCH DIAMETER

TOLERANCES

4)-1976

T&

( Clause 9.3.1 .l
Values inpm
Nominal Diameter
mm
Over

up to

0.99

14

Pitch
P
mm

rd, for Tolerance

01
----_------

;:;5
0.3

::
22
--_-----

2.8

5.6

11.2

11.2

22.4

45

45

90

::
::

::
63

::45

I
-----------_

%:

t:

:t

:;

56

;:

;;
90

II

z-

0.35

21

26

34

::

;5

:;

i:X
;:;5

-1

;:

:t

::
3:

:2
t

53
::

;:

98:

106
112

0.8

------p--p-

zt

;i

38

48

60

;;

99:

118

150

1%

0.75
:.25

z:

22
3:

40

50
::

100
112
118
132

125
140
150
170

180
190
212

224
236
265

118
132
140
150

150
170
180
190

190
212
224
236

236
265
280
300

80
::

I.5
------------

26

34

:26
38
-

1
1.25
1.5
1.75

zt

z:

::

48
53
_
-

------

_
-.

:::

132
125

170
160
----

212
200

265
250

335
315

a:
-

;:
75
85

106

75

1:x

::
95

112
118

:.5
2
i.5

25
-

32
-

40
-

50
_
-

63
_
-

::
106
125
132

::
132
160
170

125
150
170
22::

160
190
212
250
265

200
236
265
315
335

250
300
335
400
425

z.5

--_--------

-_

150
140

180
190

224
236

300
280

375
355

475
450

1.5
2
3
4
5
5.5
6

_
_
_
_

100
112

125
140
z:
tz

-,
_
_--------_-

z
-

z
-

1
-

5
-

%
160
170
180

224

160
180
212
236
250
265
280

200
224
265
300
315
335
355

250
280
335
375
400
425
450

315
355
425
475
500
530
560

118
140

150
180

190
224

236
280

300
355

375
450

160
190

t::

250
300

315
375

400
475

F%

160
180
200

z
250

250
280
315

315
355
400

400
450
500

500
560
630

:
6

9.3.2 Tolerance

forpifch

---------__-

diameterofnur

from Td;! (6)valuesaccording

threads

I0.335Td,(6)

INDUSTRIAL

I0.425Td,(6)

tolerances

(TDn)-The

tothetablegiven

I0*53Td,(6)

FASTENERS-PART

TDz for grades listed in Table 11 are

below:

Tolerance

ON

32
::

300

HANDBOOK

;Ft
32

180

48
53
56

::
45

;;
25

:
6

01

::

180

90

02

obtained

30
;:

0.2
0.25
0.35

22.5

22.4

24
zx

17
18

-5.6

r
-

--

2.8

1
-p

1.4

Grade

Grade

171

I0_67Td,(6) I0*85Td,(6) I1*06Td,(6) I1*32Td,(6) I 1*7Td,(6)

I2.12Td,(6)

175

IS : 4218(Part

4)-1976

TABLE 11 PITCH DIAMETERTOLERANCESFOR NUT THREADS T&

( Clause9.3.2 )

Values inrm

Nominal Diameter
I

Over

up to

Pitch
P

mm

T& for Tolerance Grade

02

01

:i
38

::

25
0.99

14
3x

1.4

2.8

0.45

80

48

tf
24

;:
76

::

2.8

5.8

8.i5
018

20

6.8

11.2

11.2

!a75
1.25

1.5

i.26

zt
-

22 *4

l:f5

22.4

45

140

it
40

2
-

87

12
125

ip
3:
-

140

34

42

87
-

Z.6

90

90

180

:
g.5
6

300

2G
250
280

It:
180

132

212

140
170
180
190
200

1iz
212
224
236
250

zzx
335
if f
400
212
236
280

x::
355
375

160

2ii
250

180

200

132

:::

f
4
8

Sf
X
280

1.5
45

llsB
:x8
125
160

;;

:
3.5

2:

28

125

x:
100

z.5

:.5

85

!8

;3
:20
-

71

;z
26

7s
-

iii

22:

42

212
236
265

315
375
425
500

;E
315
285
ii:

335
375
425

d%
530

9.3.3 Tolerance forminorciiameter

of bolt thread(Tds)-The
maximum dimension of d3 is set by the basic
profile and the basic allowance. Tolerance Td3 is calculated from the formula given below, and the values are
listed in Table 12:
Td3
= (Td2
+
72P)
where T& T&J are in p m and P is in mm.
This should, however, not be finer than Td3 (3).

-176

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part
TABLE 12 MINOR DIAMETER

TOLERANCE

I Clause 9.3.3

4)-l 976

Tc&

Values inrm
Nominal Diameter
mm

Over

Td3 for Tolerance Grade

Pi:h
up to

mm

36r8
50
-------

z
58

:s
52

;:
78

1
-

1
-

1
-

E
z

48

54

id

f::
:t

1
105

1
-

x
-

58

77
71

88

103

1::

-------

0.99

14

x:235
0.2

1.4

2.8

i$*
045
0.4

------_

2.0

5.8

z5
8.f:

75:
t:

8Z5

1::

0.75
5.8

11.2

j.;6

160

;:

1::

:::

:E!

:::
149
182

1
-

1
-

:z
118
-----_

125
133

144
153

188
178

208

248

117
143

1::

134
182
185
214

:E
;z

179
212
%

26

296

328
373

147

198
187

190

302
282

365
308

220
;$

E!I
x:

32;
E

SE
394
445

!EJ

272

322

;;
587

%
818
877

3::

358

423

!!!

------_
i-25
11.2

22.4

22.4

45

::;5
2
2.5

:z

E!
------

:.s

135
-

2
i.5
t.5

1
I:
-------

1.5
45

90

203
162

172

197

232

250
341

z:
378

fE
418
484

ix!
Gf

474
ZE

Zf
514

580
512

fZ

32
:
i.5

233

515

z::
z!!

::
%

:::
:zt

491
:::
%!

2%
883
760

439
%
880

812
588

608
858

712
&Y

787
731

821
882

9929t

282
358

fE

%;

z:

807

----90

180

32
ff
----

180

300

10. Root Contours-For

transgress
the basic

$6

907

:A:
788
1 032

818

718

-378

418

488

488
832

fE

Et

nut threads as well as bolt threads, the actual

profile
[see IS :4218
(Part l)-19761.

531
i z:

root contours

738
932

1::

should

not at any point

10.1 It is recommended
that the radius R of the bolt root profile should not be made less than 0.1 P ( see
Table 13), which corresponds to a slight truncation
of the HA for the lower limiting profile and a truncation
of
H/6 for upper limiting profile with a radius kax = 0.144 P(see Fig. 6).
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

177

IS : 4218(Part

4)-1976

TABLE 13 MINIMUM ROOT

(Clause 10.1)
Pitch
P
mm

RADII

R
Min
wn

0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35

20
25
30
35

0.4
0.45
0.5

40
45
50

0.6
0.7
0.75

60
70
75

0.8
1
1.25

80
100
125

1.5
1.75
2

150
175
200

2.5
3
3.5

250
300
350

4
4.5
5

400
450
500

5.5
6

550
600

FIG. 6 BOLT ROOT PROFILE

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This part covers the tolerancing system for IS0 metric screw threads. In the revision of this part of
the standard, which was first published in 1967, while retaining all the provisions of IS0 96511 IS0 general
purpose metric screw threads-Tolerances-Principles
and basic data issued by the International
Organization for Standardization, the following additions have been made:
178

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218( Part -4)-l 976

a)
b)
c)
d)

Tolerance
Tolerance
Tolerance
Tolerance

grades 02,0, 1,2, 3, for the basic pitch diameter, D, for nut thread;
grades 01, 0, 1,2 for the basic pitch diameter, d, for bolt thread;
for basic minor diameter, d, for bolt thread;
position*
(basi? allowance)
for bolt thread;

a and b for pitches from

c and d for pitches from
e for pitches from 0.2 to
f for pitches from 0.2 to

1 to 6 mm
0.4 to 6 mm
0.45 mm
6 mm

The newly included basic allowances

for the tolerance positions a, b, c, d, f have been determined
on
the same lines as the basic allowances
of tolerance
positions
e and g according
to 180/965/l. In special
cases they can be used for threads with surface protection
in order to facilitate
manufacture
and specifying
in drawings.
The above additions
have been based on DIN 13 Sheet 14 Metrisches
ISO-Gewinde;
Grundalgen
des Toleranzsystems
fur Gewinde ad 1 mm Durchmesser
(IS0 metric threads-bases
of the tolerance
system for threads of 1 mm diameler and larger) and DIN 13 Sheet 15 Metrisches
ISO-Gewinde;
Grundabm
e und Toleranzen fur Gewinde ab 1 mm Durchmesser
(IS0 metric threads-basic
allowances
and
tolerances
for threads of 1 mm diameter and larger) issued by Deutsches lnstilut fur Normung.
With the requirements
of theading tools in mind, the core of the bolt thread has been specified differently in this standard compared with 180196511,. This thread profile is, however, within the thread profile
recommended
in lSO196511. The maximum dimensions
of the minor diameter according to this standard and
180196511 differ by 2 x H/48 = H/24. The minimum dimension
of the minor diameter is not specified
in IS0
965/l, but only the smallest allowable
root radius, which is given as 0.1 P H/8.
This part is one of a series
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part

1
2
3
4
5

of parts on IS0 metric

Basic and design profiles

Diameter pitch combinations
Basic dimensions
for design
Tolerancing
system
Tolerances

In the formulation

of this standard,

screw threads.

The different

parts are as under:

profiles

assistance

has been derived

from the following

IS0 96511 IS0 general purpose metric screw threads-Tolerances-Principles

International
Organization
for Standardization

publications:
and basic

data.

DIN 13 Sheet 14 Metrisches

ISO-Gewinde;
Grundalgen
des Toleranzsystems
fur Gewinde ab 1 mm
Durchmesser
(IS0 metric threads-bases
of the tolerance system for threads of 1 mm diameter
and larger). Deutsches lnstitut fur Normung.
DIN 13 Sheet 15 Metrisches
ISO-Gewinde;
Durchmesser
(IS0 metric threads-basic
diameter and larger). Deutsches lnstitut

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Grundabma
allowances
fur Normung.

e und Toleranzen
and tolerances

fur Gewinde
for threads

ab 1 mm
of 1 mm

179

IS : 4218(Part

5)-1976

Indian

Standards

IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS

1
[s1

PART 5 TOLERANCES
(

First

Revision

1. Scope-Tabulates
tolerances tor ISO,metric screw threads for the tolerance
the standard, in the diameter range 1 to 300 mm.
2. Designation-The
designation of IS0 metric screw threads
covered in Part 4 of the standard.
3. Tolerances-The
values of deviations for the tolerance
1 to be read in conjunction with Fig 1 to 4.

classes covered in Part, 4 of

and a fit between

nut and bolt threads are

classes for nut and bolt threads are given In Table

3.1 For nut as well as bolt threads, the actual root contour shall not in any point transgress the basic profile.
For coated threads the tolerances apply to the parts before coating, unless otherwise stated. After coating,
the actual thread profile shall not in any point transgress the maximum material limits for position H or h as
the case may be.

NOM

DIA

FIG. 1 NUT THREADS WITH TOLERANCE

NOM

FIG. 2 NUT THREADS WITH TOLERANCE

POSITION H

POSITION G

NOM

DIA

FIG. 3 BOLT THREADS WITH TOLERANCE

NOM DIA

FIG. 4 BOLT THREADS WITH TOLERANCE

POSITION h

180

DIA

POSITION e,g

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

5)-1976

TABLE 1 DEVlATlOiVS FROM BASIC DIMENSIONS

FOR NUT AND BOLT
THREADS OF VARIOUS TOLERANCE CLASSES-Contd

Pitch

II

Nut Threads

Bolt Threads

/Tolerance
Class

Above
Dia
Minor

Major
Dia

Pitch
Dia

Minor
Dia
I

mm

+ 74
+56

1.4

298

5g6g

-0

5h4h
$h6h
6g
;gh
6h

18 -

85

O-42
O-67
- 18 - 85 Oj-481
]- 671
1 0

18

60

18 -

89

0 - 42
0 - 52
0 - 42
0 - 71
18 - 71,- 18 - 89
0 Il-281
531
0
O]--58
I-- 71

- -- -- -El%
4H

t-

+ 18

1+ 42 IO

L-i-

-_
+56
-

0 1 5h4h
1 5h6h

1
[

0 I-421
0 j-671

0 j-45
0 l-45
_

01 - 54
01-74

0,35

0.4

5H
-

+ 67
-

6G
6H

+104
+ 85

4H
5G

+ 56
+ so
+ 71

k 19
0
-

0
+ 19
0
cl31 + 19
+112
0
-

6g
- 19 -114 - 19
0 - 95
0
6h
7g6tr - 19 -114 - 19
0 - 95
0
7h6h

- 86 - 19
- 67
0
-104 - 19
- 85
0

-115
- 96
-115
- 96

( Continued )
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

181

IS : 4218(Part

5)-l 976

TABLE 1 DEVIATIONS FROM BASIC DIMENSIONS FOR NUT AND BOLT

THREADS OF VARIOUS TOLERANCE CLASSES-Contd

Nom
d
Above

mm
1,4

23

II Dia
cl
-up to
and
Including
mm
2.8

Pitch

Nut Threads

Bolt Threads

mm

0,45

5.6

0.5

4H

6H

7G
7H

0.6

4H
5G
5H
-

t-=--f

+ 63 1

4h

I +lOO_I --0 I +140 I 0 I

-

6h

097

20
0

+71
0
+lOO
0
+lll + 21 +146 + 21
+90
0
+125
0
-_

"

I+901

+145 + 20
+125
0

Lm
1

1 "21

i -

j -

+ 211 +181Fmg
-_O l+r/
"

1 -

I -

i -

0 I- 671

-131

0 l-i057

3h4h 1

0 I-TO

I-

-111
-161
-131
-111
1
0 -96
0 -80
0 - 42
3h4h
0 -96
0 -80
0 - 53
4h
Sg6g _ - 21 -146 - 21 - 86 - 21 -149
0 -96
O-80
0 - 67
5h4h
0 -128
0 -125
0 - 67
5h6h
6e
/ 53/-178/- 53 -138 - 53 -181
I
1 - 211--146121 -106 - 21 -149
7z
1
0 1-1251 0 I-- 85
_-, 0_ ,-126
I - 531--178/- 631 -lSSi- 531-

l-

( Continued)

182

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

TABLE 1 DEVIATIONS FROM BASIC DIMENSIONS FOR NUT

THREADS OF VARIOUS TOLERANCE CLASSES-Cantd

Nominal Dia
D
UpK
Above
and
Including
mm
mm

2.8

596

Tolerance
Class

0,75

El

ES

Tolerance
Class

es

El

Pitch
Dia

Major
Dia

es

li

Minor
Dia
8l

08

el

4
-

4H
6G
5H
-

- 0
+118 -+
+75
+117 + 22 +172 + 22
+95
0 +150
0
I1 - 1 5h6ht
1 - I-

0 I-1401

0 I- 711

6H

I +11sl

0 I+1901

0 I

0 l-1401

7H

1 +1501

0 I

7h6h 1

0 l-1401

0 I-1127

5h4h
5h6h
6e

SH

11.2

Minor
Dia

5.6

Bolt Threads

Pitch
Dia
ES

mm

AND BOLT

Nut Threads

Pitch

5)-l 976

EL

I +2351

0 +160
-_-

+lOO
-

6G
6H

_ \
*154 + 22 +212 + 22
0 +1901 0 I
+132

6h

0 l-144 I

I-!

o-95
0 - 75
0 -118
0 -150
0 - 75
0 -153
- 60 -210 - 60 -155 - 60 -213

0,75

6e

6g
6h

- 56 -196 - 56 -156 - 56 -210

- 22 -162 - 22 -122 - 22 -176
0 -140
0 -100
0 -154

l-l-l-l

0 l-11
6e

7G
7H

6g
6h
7e6e

-240

60

-200

we

-206

26

-166

7h6h

-180

-140

a
WI3
3h4h

1,25
4H
5G

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

-306

26

-206

-306

26

-260

-1321

0 I- 601

4h

5g6q

183

IS : 4218(Part

5)-l 976

TABLE 1 DEVIATIONS FROM BASIC DIMENSIONS FOR NUT AND BOLT

THREADS OF VARIOUS TOLERANCE CLASSES-Co/W
Nominal Dla

-e

mm
5.6

1.5

7G
7H

11,2

22.4

0 !-1501

3h4h 1

7e6e

+256 + 32 +'407 + 32
+224
0
+375
0

0 I- 671

0 I-193 1

- 67 -303 - 67 -237 - 32 -268 - 32 -202 0 -236

0 -170

7g6c!
7h6h

I -

I -

26; +4011+ 261

7e6e I- 601-2401- 601-2101-

8g

601-2fi01

1 - 261-3061- 26

-__
1,25

5H

I+1401

0 I+2121

L,5

7H
8G
8H
4H

+224
0
+308 + 28
+280
0
+118
0

1 +265 1

5h4h I

0 1

+335
0
+453 + 28
+425
0
+190
0

6h

7h6h
8g
9g8s
3h4h
4h

o I-1321

l-1061

0 l-175 I

I-1321

j-2121

I-222

0 -212
0 -170
0 -222
- 28 -363 - 28 -240 - 28 -330
- 28 -363 - 28 -293 - 28 -330,
0 -150
0 - 71
0 -198
0 -150
0 -90
0
198

(Continued)

184

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

5)-1976

TABLE 1 DEVIATIONS FROM BASIC DIMENSIONS FOR NUT AND BOLT

THREADS OF VARIOUS TOLERANCE CLASSES-Contd

Noyii$
Above

mm
11.2

Dia

-uapnlp
Including
mm
22,4

(Continued)

HANDBOOK

ON

tNDUSTRlAL

FASTENERS-PART

185

IS : 4218(Part

5)-1976

TABLE 1 DEVIATIONS FROM BASIC DIMENSIONS FOR NUT AND BOLT

THREADS OF VARIOUS TOLERANCE CLASSES-Contd

pi-

TJ
mm
22.4

Including
mm
45

c :7G
7H
8G
8H
195

4H
5G
5H

- L! +238 + 26 1 +326
+
+212
I

0
+300
----L

I -

1
I

1+250
---I

5G

1+2181+

5H

+180

I-I-

I-!
I

0
0

I-1181
)-1181

0 I-203
0 j-258

"2 -268 - 32 -182 - 32 -290

0 -258
0 -236
0 -150
- 67 --303 - 67 -257 - 67 -325
?r&
__
--_.
I-- 32(-268(- 32]-2221-- 321-290
I
5s
0 ) +375( 0 1 7h6h 1 0 j-2361 0 j--190! 0 j-258
8g
I-- 32j--407/--32 l---2681-321-376
9g8g I- 32)-407]- 32 l-3321- 321-376
0 I-250
0 -180
0 l-851
3h4h
-__
0 j-250
0 -180
0 [ -1061
4h
~I
3811 +338(+
:
- 38 -318 - 38 I-1701- 381-352
5g6g
0 1 +300
0
0 -180
0 j-1321 0 j-250
5h4h
_
0 -280
0 )-132) 0 I-314
5h6h
l - 1 - 1 6e l- 711~-3511--71 I--2411--711-385
+ 38 +413 + 38
- 381-3181- 38 I-2081-- 381-352
6g
6h
0
+375
0
-_
7e6e
_

-ii

8G
8H

+355

I-l-l-

6G

1 +313

6H

1 +265

+383 + 48
+335
0
+473 + 48
+425
0

+548

+ 48
0

+500

381-318

0 j-2801

I-

0 i-236

38 I-250

I--

l-212 1

38 I-352

0 I-314

0 I-125) 0 j-341
- 48 i-208 I- 48 i-464

l + 48

(-

seap

+600

3h4h
I+170 I 0 1 +315 1 0 1 4h
1+260 + 48 +448 + 48
We
j+212 1 0 I +4001 0 1 ~5h4h
5h6h

7G
7H
8G
8H

0 j-236)

0
-

+300
-

+3118 I+ 38 1 +513 1 + 38 1 7363

+280
0
i1475
0 1 7h6h
+393 + 38 +638 + 38
8g

601-257

8g

7G
7H

5G
5H

26 (--186/--261323

%!8g

+262
+224
-

4H

60 I-220]--

26[-206(-

7h6h

6G
6H
-

-I

601-240]-

7H

1-

Wi

+A
67-21767-325
..,-- +<A2 II 87!-303-

1
-

7e6e

_
3h4h
0
+125
0
+190
4h
+I92 + 32 +268 + 32
W%
0
+160
0
+236
5h4h
_ 1_I_5h6h 1
!

I/-++&&$

26
0

6e

l-

851-4601- 85 i-285 I- 85 l-501

(-

48 [ -423

6h

7e6e

+678 + 48
0
+630
+848 + 48
0
+800

7tr6g
7h6h
8g
9g8g

I-

j-3751

- 85 -460
- 48 -423
0 -375
- 48 -648
- 48 -648

48 I-248

(-- 48 (-464

j-200

- 85 -335
- 48 -298
0 -250
- 48 -363
- 48 -448

j-416

- 85 -501
- 48 -464
0 -416
- 48 -579
- 48 -579

(Continued)
186

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

5)-1976

1I

TABLE 1 DEVIATIONS FROM BASIC DIMENSIONS

FOR NUT AND BOLT
THREADS OF VARIOUS TOLERANCE CLASSES-Contd

Nom
c
Abovc

mm
22,4

ii-mL

Pitch
P

up to
and
Including
mm

Nut Threads
Tolerance
Class

Bolt Threads

Pitch
Dia

Minor
Dia

Tolerance
Class

Major
Dia
I

o
I

Pitch
Dia
I

Minor
Dia

45

7G
7H

! +280!
I +408
1 +355

_:
+ 53
0

! +560!
+763
+710

0 !

+ 53
0

8G

I +503 + 53 +953 + 53

I +450

6H
7G
7H

1 +300
0
+600
0
-_
1
1 +435 + 60 +810 + 60 1
0 1
( +375
0
+750
I +535 +60 +lOlO + 60
0 1
I +475
0
+950

+900

I -

l-425!

90 I-515

0
I-

7g6g 1 - 531--47811 7h6h 1 0 j-4251

8H

6h
7e6e

8g

! -212!

90 I -355(53 1-3181--

j-464

90 l-554
5+517

0 I-2651
0 (-464 ]
1 - 531-723/- 531-388l-- 53 I-640

9888

1 - 531-7231--

.sh
7e6e
7g6g
7h6h
8g
9g8g

11(
]1-

531-478l--

531-640

8G

8H

0 I-4751 0 I-2241
951-5701-- %I-375/601-5351-- SO]--340 0 I-4751 0 t-280
sol--8lOl--601-415160/-8101-- 601-510]--

0 j-512
961-607
6&-i~2
0 j-512
601-703
601-703

;rT

45

90

(Continued)

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

187

IS : 4218( Part 5)-l 976

TABLE 1 DEVIATIONS FROM BASIC DIMENSIONS FOR NUT AND BOLT

THREADS OF VARIOUS TOLERANCE CLASSES-Contd
Nominal Dia
d

Above

mm

mm

45

5h6h
0 -280
0 -140
0 -324
6e
- 71 -351 - 71 -251 - 71 -395
+274 + 38 +413 + 38
6%
- 38 -318 - 38 -218 - 38 -362
! +2361 0 ( +375 1 0 1 _ 6h 1
0 j--280( 0 I-1801
0 -324
_
7e6e
- 71 -351 - 71 -295 - 71 -395
7G
+338 + 38 +513 + 38
7%6%
- 38 -318 - 38 -262 - 38 -362
7H
+300
0
+475
0
7h6h
0 -280
0 -224
0 -324
__8G
+413 + 38 +638 + 38
8%
- 38 -488 - 38 -318 - 38 -4ti2
8H
+375
0
+600
0 1 9%8% 1 - 38l-488l-- 38 I-393]- 38 -462
~~__..
_~
_-1 3h4h 1
0 j-2361 0 I-1061
0 -348
4H
+180
0
+315
0
4h
0 I-2361 0 I-1321
0 -348
5G
+272_ + 48 +448 + 48
5%6%
- 48 -4231- 48/--218l-- 481-476
+224
0
+400
0
5h4h
_
~--~5H
___
_.
-,-6G]+328/
+
48i
+548i
+
481
6~~2~48l--2601-4
A
..~
6H
+280
0
+500
2
6h
0 -375
0 -212
0 -428
_7eQ
- 85 -460 - 85 -350 - 85 -5l3
7G
+403 + 48 +678 + 48
7%6% +__ 48 -423
- 48 -313 - 48 -476
~
0 -428
0 I-3751 0 j-2651
7H
1 +3551 0 1 +630/ 0 1 7h6h t
8%
9%8%
3h4h
4h
-150
0 -438
5%6%
- 60 -535 - 60. -250 - 60 -584
1 +31OL+ 601 +535 1 + 60
~- 5G
5H
+250
0
+475
0
5h4h
0 -300
0 -190
0 -438
--_
5h6h
0 -475
0 -190.
0 -524
_
6e
95
-570
95
-331
95 -619
___
__-

6G
6H

----%-6is.5M

l-l

+ww

I-I 1 !hzRe I -

5G

I +336i + 711 +6311 + 711

*-

CC

+406
_+ --_
71 +560
+781
+ -0
71

6H
-

*a

7G
__~ 7H

6O1-8101- 601-5351-

601-7231

51~6% I - 7l1-6Ol1- 71
cl
0
5h6h
5h4h
6%
6e

-7l\-601-106
0 -335
-636
-530 -106
0
71 -356
-321---l()6[-7161

6h 1
0 I-5301 0.
7e6e 1 -1061-6361-13

-iQ[
(Continued)

188

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

5)-1976

TABLE 1 DEVIATIONS FROM BASIC DIMENSIONS FOR NUT AND BOl_T

THREADS OF VARIOUS TOLERANCE CLASSES-Contd

Nor

al

A
Above

mm
45

Pitch

Nut Threads

up tc

and
Inclu~
ding
mm

Tolerance
Class

mm

90

595

---

ES

El

+224
+355

6G

+280
-

+430
+355
-

_x!-_

Tolerance
Class

El

5G

Minor
Dia

ES

4H
5H

Bolt Threads

Pitch
Dia

0
+ 75
0
+ 75
0

+415

+675

+ 75

+600
-

0
_

+825

+ 75

es

Pitch
Dia
ei

es

Minor
Dia
ei

es

ei

+750
-

Major
Dia

75 j-4101-

7365

j -

751-635

j-

65
6h

1-

801-680
0 I-600

I-- 80 I--36011 0~~1--280(

751-736

6G
6H
1

90

-180

7G
7H

+455 1+ 80 +880 + 80
+375 1 0 1 +8001
0 1
_
1
+ 80 1
+555 + 80+1080
1 +475 1 0 i+lOOO 1 0 1

8G

+680

8H

+600

+ SO+1330

+ 80

+125 IO 1

0
-

4H

1 +1601

5G

1 +238 ( + 381 +336 1 + 38 1

5H

1 +200

60

0 I +236/

0 1

+30 10 1

4H

80 l-435!-

7h6h

86

I-

80 1-1030 I-

80 l-530

968g

I-

SOI-1030]-

80 I-640]-

7e6e

4h
5969
5h4h

_5h6h
6e
I+288 + 381 +a131 + 381
66
0 1 +375] 0 1
6h

+600

I-1181-718
1- 801--680

/-118

7&l

1 +190
j +284j

+315

+ 481 +448]
801

101
80

+523

8H

+47s

+ 48
0

+848
,

+800

I-600

80[-792
0 j-712

I-4731-118/-830
801-792

i--865rO7--71
I -a

.- 2

I-- 80 I-962
Sol+62

1 3h4h 1

9285

t 3h4h
0 1
4h

0 I-180] 0 I-- 951 0 j-262

1 0 I-1801 0 I-118] 0 I-262
I-- 381--318t 38 l--188)- 38j-372m

j-180

1-

381-488

1
1

0 I-236 1 0
0 I-2361 0

t-

5566
1- 481-423 k
1 5h4h 1 0 j-2361

+ 481

+ 48
0

7h6h
89
9g8g

1-1501

Rj--262

1 0 I-280 [ 0 I-1501
I-- 7+35+
7+261(I-- 38(-318k
38 l-22811 0 1-280 1 0 1-1901~

1
-

38 I--4131-

0 j-334
711-405
381-372
0~1-334

381-482

I-1121
1-1401

0 j-356
0 j-356

48 l-2281-

48)-488

I-1801

0 I-356

0 I-440

0 l-375

1-2801

4828

j-

48

-403

481-619

48

-498

48 -619

-48-648

(Continued)
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

189

IS : 4218(Part

5)-1976

TABLE 1 DEVIATIONS FROM BASIC DIMENSIONS FOR NUT AND BOLT

THREADS OF VARIOUS TOLERANCE CLASSES-Contd
Nomi
d
zz-

mm
IO

Dia

itch

%
ncluding
mm

nm

180
-260

t--t-200

.___

_-

5H

+315
_

.-_

-.

.r

+630
-

5h4h
5h6h
6e

_--1 +ARO[+ R01 +SSOi + 801

+ d+1nsxo1

180

0
0
-118
1 - 80

-375
0
-600
0
-718 -118
b-680 I- 80

-622

-732
-850
I-812 1

I - 80 I-680 I- 80 I-455!- 80 l-812 1

__900

0 i

, ___,+ 48 +548 + 48
1 +A351 0 I +500

-._
1 +5301

5h4h 1

l-2361

~-200~

0 k-376 i

6g
6h

- 48 j-423 I- 48 I--2981- 48 I-514

0 1-375 1 0 1-2501 0 I-466

7h6h

_-, +848 + d
O-1 +8001 0

8g
918s

0 -375
0 -315
0 -466
- 48 -648 - 48 -448 - 48 -664
- 48 -648 - 48 -548 - 48 --(

__- ,
_-

0 1-475 I

I+ ~01+10101 +

190

-236
0
-236
0
-418 -118
i-380/- 80

601

HANDBOOK

I - 60 b810 b

ON

INDUSTRIAL

I-2801

0 i-568 I

60 l-6101- 60 l-7!

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

5)-l 976

TABLE 1 DEVIATIONS FROM BASIC DIMENSIONS FOR NUT AND BOLT

THREADS OF VARIOUS TOLERANCE CLASSES-Contd

Norfza;

Dia

Bolt Threads

Nut Threads

Pitch
Tolerance
Class

ES

mm

Minor
Dia

Pitch
Dia
El

ES

Tolerancel
. Class
es

El

Pitch
Dia

Major
Dia
ci

lS

Minor
Dia
li

es

li

EXPLANATORY
The tolerances

arrived

NOTE

at are based on the tolerancing

system

specified

Where separate tolerance

classes have been specified
for pitch diameter
bolts, the minor diameter deviations
are based on the tolerance class applicable
This part is one of a series

of parts on IS0 metric

Part 1

Basic and design profiles

Part 2

Diameter

Part 3

Basicdimensions

Part 4

Tolerancing

Part 5

Tolerances

Part 6

Limits of sizes for commercial bolts and nuts

screw threads.

in Part 4 of the standard.

and major diameter
for major diameter.

The different

for

parts are as under:

pitch combinations
fordesign

profiles

system

In the preparation
of the standard considerable
assistance
has been derived from DIN 13 Sheet 27
Metrisches
ISO-Gewinde
Regel-und Feringewinde
von 1 bis 355 mm Gewincledurchmesser
AbmaBe ( IS0
metric screw threads from 1 to 300 mm diameter;
deviations
for constructional
threads ), issued by
Deutsches lnstitut fur Normung.
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

191

IS : 4218(Part

6)-1976

Indian Standards

IS0 METRIC SCREW THREADS

PART 6 LIMITS OF SIZES FOR COMMERCIAL
( DIAMETER

1. Scope-Specifies
the limits
commercial
bolts and nuts.
1.1 Unless otherwise
plicable
before the
phosphating,
should
position.

of sizes for IS0 metric

BOLTS AND NUTS

RANGE 1 TO 52 mm )

first

Revision

screw threads

in the diameter

range 1 to 52 mm or

agreed, for threads requiring surface treatment

the limits for thread sizes are apintroduction
of protective
coating.
The threads with surface treatment,
including
not transgress
al any place the thread profile at the GO side of the H or h tolerance

2. Selection of Thread Sizes-Thread

sizes for commercial
bolts and nuts shall be selected
and 2 which give sizes for coarse pilch and fine pitch threads respectively.

TABLE 1 COARSE
All dimensions

Nominal
First Choice

Diameter
Second

Pitch
P
Choice

1.1

1.6
2

1.8

0.35
0.4

24
30

2.2

0.45
0.45

36

3.5

8.:

4-5

0.7
0.75
0.8
1

6
10

1
125
1.5

12

14

1.75
2

16

Diameter
Second

Pitch
P
Choice

16

2.5

22

22:;

27

x
3.5

33

3.5
4
4

20

0.25
0.3

5
6

192

Nominal

1.4

in millimetres

1.2

2.5
3

PITCH THREADS

First Choice
0.25
0.25

from Tables

39

4.5

42
45.

4.5
5

46.

52.

*Limits of sizes for these nominal diameters are given only for coarse tolerance class of bolts and nuts.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

6)-1976

TABLE 2 FINE PITCH THREADS

(Clause
All dimensions

*For the meaning of these additional

pitches,

2 )
in millimetres

see Explanatory

Note.

3. Limits of Sizes

3.1 Nut Threads-Tolerance

class for nut threads referred as medium tolerance class shall be 5H or 6H. Nut
threads for sizes Ml to Ml.4 shall be of tolerance class 5H and for Ml.6 to M39 of tolerance class 6H.
3.1.1 Dimensions
of nut threads of medium tolerance
and for fine pitch threads in Table 4 read with Fig. 1.
3.1.2 Dimensions
of nut threads
given in Table 5 read with Fig. 1.

of tolerance

class,

class for coarse

7H referred

pitch threads

as coarse

tolerance

are given in Table 3

class,

shall

be as

min.

FIG. 1 NUT THREADS

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

WITH TOLERANCE

POSITION

193

IS

: 4218(Part

6)-1976

TABLE 3 LIMITS OF SIZES FOR IS0 METRIC NUT COARSE PITCH THREADS
WITH MEDIUM TOLERANCE CLASS
( Clause X1.1, and Fig. 1 )
Alldimensions
Nominal
Size

Tolerance
Class

Length of Thread
Engagement Normal
From

up to

0.6

::;

8:;
0.7

l-7
2

;:8"

;:;

1
1.3

M2.5
LE.5

in millimetres.
Major
Diameter
Min

Pitch Dia

Minor Diar

-Max

Min

Max

Min

1.000
1.100
1'200
1.400

0,894
0.994
1.094
1.265

0.838
0.938
1.038
1.205

0.785
0.885
0.985
1'142

0.729
0'829
0.929
1.075

1.600
1.800
2.200
2.000

1.458
1.658
2.003
1.830

1.373
1.573
1.908
1.740

1.321
1.521
1,679
1.838

1.3
1.5
1.7

33:;
4.5
5

2.500
3.500
3.000

2.303
2.775
3.222

2.208
3.110
2.675

2.138
2.599
3'010

1.221
1.421
1.567
1,713
PO13
2.459
2.850

K.5

2.2
2

t-7

4.500
4.000

3.663
4.131

3.545
4.013

3.422
3.878

i6"

3
2.5

9
7.5

6'000
5.000

4.605
5.500

4.480
5.350

5,153
4,334

6.500
9.206
7.348

6.350
9.026
7.188

6.153
6.912
8.676

5'917
8.376
6.647

12.000
14.000
16*000

11.063
12.913
14,913

10.863
12.701
14.701

10.441
12.210
14.210

10.106
11.835
13'835

18'000
20*000
22.000
----

16%00
18.600
20.600

16.376
18.376
20'376

15'744
17.744
19'744

15.294
17.294
19'294

--I22.316
25.316
28.007

22.051
25-051
27.727

21.252
24.252
2@771

20.752
23.752
26.211

31.007
33.702
36.702

30.727
33.402
36402

29'771
32.270
35.270

29.211
31.670
34.670

Ml
Ml.1
Ml.2
Ml.4

5H

Ml.6
Ml.8
ii.2

P_

--

6H
M7
EO

5
:

9
::

7,000
10~000
8*000

3'242
3.688
4.134
4.917

-Ml2
Ml4
Ml6
Ml8
M20
M22

194

t
8

E
24

:",

30

$0

ii

M24
M27
M30

::

15

45

24.000
27.000
30'000

M":
M39

15
18
18

45
ii

36mO
33.000
39.000

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

6)-l

976

TABLE 4 LIMITS OF SIZES FOR IS0 METRIC NUT FINE PITCH THREADS
WITH MEDIUM TOLERANCE CLASS
( Clause 3.1.1, and Fig. 1 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

-,

Nominal
Size

Length of Thread
Enaarrement Normal

_I

Pitch Dia

Major
Diameter

to

Minor Dia
___-

Min

Max

Min

iwax

M8 x 1
Ml0 x 1
Ml0 x 1.25

7.500
9.500
9.348

7.350
9350
9.l.88

7.153
9.153
8.912

6.917
8.917
8.647

Ml2 x 1.25
Ml2 x 1.5
Ml4 x 1.5

11.366
11.216
13216

11,188
11.026
13.026

10912
10.676
12.676

10.647
10.376
12.376

15,026
17.026
16.701

14.676
16676
16.210

14.376
16.376
15.835

up

From

--

-16

16.000

;:

18.000

15.216
17.216
16.913

l.6

c
16

20.000
22.000

19.216
18.913
21.216

19,026
18*7Ol.
21.026

18.676
18.210
10.676

18.376
17.835
20.376

24

22.000

88:;

z5

27.000
24.000

20.913
22925
25925

20.701
22.701
25.701

20.216
22.210
25.210

19.835
21835
24.635

x:
::

30.000
33.000
39.000
36.000

28.925
31 a925
34316
37.316

28.701
31.701
34.051
37.051

28210
31.210
33.252
36.252

27.835
30.835
32.752
35.752

5.6
5.6
8

M22 x 2
M24 x 2
M27 x 2

8.5
8.5
12
12

M30 x 2
z:: ; f
M39 x 3

5.6

M20 x 1.5
M20 x 2
M22 x l-5

TABLE 5 LIMITS OF SIZES FOR IS0 METRIC NUT THREADS

COARSE TOLERANCE CLASS
(Clause

Length of Thread
Engagement Normal
From

WITH

in millimetres.

Major
Diameter

up to

3.1.2, and Fig. 1 )

All dimensions
Nominal
Size

Min

Pitch Dia

Min

Max

Minor Dia

Min

Max

Min

-k!:

2.5

7.5
9

5,000
6.000

4.640
5540

5.350
4.480

5.217
4.384

4.917
4,134

M7

7.000

6540

6.350

6.217

5.917

MYO
M12

4
5
6

12
15
18

10~000
8.000
12.000

7.388
9.250
11.113

7188
9.026
10.863

a.751
6.982
10.531

8.376
6.647
10.106

Ml4
Ml6
Ml8

E:

1:

36

14.000
16.000
18.000

12.966
14.966
16.656

12.701
14.701
16.376

12.310
14.310
15.854

11.835
13.835
15,294

M20
M22
M24

10
10
12

30
z

20*000
22.000
24.000
______._~

18.656
20.656
22.386

18.376
20.376
22.051

17.294
19.294
20.752

M27
M30
M33

12
15
15

36
45
45

27.000

25.386
28.082
31.082

25.051
27.727
30.727

17.854
19.854
21.382
_____
24.382
26.921
29.921

M36
M39
M42

18
::

53
53
63

36*000
39.000
42.000

33.777
36.777
39.477

33.402
36402
39077

32.420
35.420
37.979

31.670
34.670
37.129

M45
M48
M52

21
24
24

63
71
71

45.000
48.000
52.000

42.477
45.177
49.177

42.077
44.752
48.752

40979
43487
47,487

40.129
42.587
46.587

$k!$

23.752
26,211
29211

--

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRiAL

FASTENERS-PART

---

195

IS : 4218(Part

6)-1976

3.2 Bolt Threads-Tolerance

class for bolt threads as medium tolerance
class, shall be 6 g or 6h. Bolt
threads of size Ml to Ml.4 shall beof toleranceclass
6h and for size Ml.6 to M39 of tolerance class 6g.
3.2.1 Dimensions
of bolt threads of medium tolerance class for coarse
and for fine pitch threads in Table 7 read with Fig 2 and 3.

I- L-1

FC

pitch threads

are given in Table 6

PROFILE

MAJOR
DIA
max.

t
PITCH
DIA
max.
MtNOR
DIA
min.

max.

FIG. 2 BOLT

THREADS

WITH

TOLERANCE

I,

max.

FIG. 3 BOLTTHREADS

196

- BASIC

WITH TOLERANCE

HANDBOOK

PROFILE

min.

OIA

MINOR
DIP,
min.

POSITION

POSITION g

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4218(Part

TABLE 6 LIMITS OF SIZES FOR IS0 METRIC BOLT COARSE

WITH MEDIUM TOLERANCE CLASS
(Clauses

2.6
2.6
3
3.8
3.8
4.5
5

0.8
0.8
1
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.7
I

Pitch Diameter

6h

Ml.6
Ml.8
M2
M2.2
M2.5
M3
M3.5

Major Diameter

Length of Thread
Engagement Normal

Max

Ml
Ml.1
Ml.2
Ml.4

PITCH THREADS

in millimetres.

I
Tolerance
Class

Min

2
2.2
2.5
3

M7
M8
Ml0

3
4
5

Minor Diameter

Max

Min

1 Max

Min

1.000
1.100
1.200
1.400

0.933
1.033
1.133
1.325

0.838
0.938
1.038
1.205

0.785
0.885
0.985
1.149

0.693
0.793
0.893
1.032

0.622
0.722
0.822
0.954

1.581
1.781
1.981
2.180
2.480
2.980
3.479

1.496
1.696
1.886
2.080
2.380
2.874
3.354

1.354
1.554.
1.721
1.888
2.188
2.655
3.089

1.291
1.491
1.654
1.817
2.117
2.580
3.004

1.151
1.352
1.490
1.628
1.928
2.367
2.743

1.063
1.264
1.394
1.525
1.825
2.256
2.615

I
M4
M4.5
M5
M6

976

3.2 and 3.2.1, and Fig. 2 and 3 )

All dimensions

Nominal
Size

6)-l

6
6.7
7.5
9

3.978
4.478
4.976
5.974

3.838
4.338
4.826
5.794

3.523
3.991
4.456
5.324

3.433
3.901
4.361
5.212

3.119
3.558
3.995
4.747

2.979
3.414
3.842
4.563

9
12
15

6.974
7.972
9.968

6.794
7.760
9.732

6.324
7.160
8.994

6.212
7.042
8.862

5.747
6.438
8.128

5.563
6.230
7.888

18
24
24

11.966
13.962
15.962

11.701
13.682
15.682

10.829
12.663
14.663

10.679
12.503
14.503

9.819
11.508
13.508

9.543
11.204
13.204

30
30
30

17.958
19.958
21.958

6g
6
8
8

Ml2
N14
Ml6

I
10
10
10

Ml8
M20
M22

I
M24
M27
M30

36
36
45

12
12
15

I
M33
M36
M39

15
18
18

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

22.003
25.003
27.674

I
32.947
35.940
38.940

45
53
53

3.2.2 Dimensions of bolt threads of tolerance

given in Table 8 read with Fig. 3.

23.577
26.577
29.522

23.952
26.952
29.947

class

32.522
35.465
38.465

8g referred

30.674
33.342
36.342

as coarse

tolerance

21.803
24.803
27.462

30.462
33.118
36.118

class,

20.271
23.271
25.653

28.653
31.033
34.033

shall

19.855
22.855
25.189

28.189
30.521
33.521

be as

197

IS : 4218(Part

6). 1976

TABLE 7 LIMITS OF SIZES FOR IS0 METRIC BOLT FINE PITCH THREADS
WITH MEDIUM TOLERANCE CLASS
( Clauses 3.2 and 3.2.1, and Fig. 2 and 3
All dimensions
Nominal Size

Length of Thread
Engagement Normal
From

in millimetres.

Major Diameter

Minor Dia

Pitch Dia

up to

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

7.974
9.974
9.972

7.794
9794
9.760

7.324
9.324
9.160

7.212
9.212
9.042

6.747
8.747
8,438

6.563
8.563
8.230

11.760
11.732
13.732

Il.028
10.854
12.854

IO.438
IO.128
12.128

10.216
9.880
11.880
13.880
15.880
15.204
-__
17.880
17.204
19880

M 8x1
MlOxl
MIOX 1.25

12

Ml2x1.25
M12xl.5
Ml4x1.5

5:;

13

5.6

:g

11.972
II.968
13.968

;:
24

15.968
17.968
17962

15.732
17.732
17.682

14.994
16.994
16.663

14.854
16.854
16.503

14.128
16.128
15.508

19.968
19.962
21968
.__21.962
23.962
26.962
--_
29.962
32.962
35952
38.952

19.732
19682
21,732

18.994
18.663
20.994

18.854
18.503
20,854

18.128
17.508
20.128
-__

20,663
22.663
25.663

20,503
22.493
25.483

19508
21.508
24.508

19,204
21.194
24.194

28.663
31.663
34.003
37.003

28.493
31.493
33.803
36.803

27.508
30.608
32.271
35.271

27.194
30.194
31855
34.855

_-

Ml6x1.5
M18xt.5
Ml8x2

5.6
8
___-

M20x1.5
M20x2
M22x1.5
py---_L---M22u2
M24x2
M27x2
-M30x2

5.6
i.6

i.5
8.5

::
25
25

12
;:;
12

M36x3
M33x2
M39x3

::
16

::
36

-~

-.

21,682
23682
26,682
29.682
32.682
35577
38.577

.-

.-

_-

11.160
10.994
12.994

- _-~

-.

-!_

TABLE 8 LIMITS OF SIZES FOR IS0 METRIC BOLT THREADS

WITH COARSE TOLERANCE CLASS
( Clause 3.2.2, and F iu. 3 )
All dimensions
Nominal

198

Size

Length of Thread
IEngagement Normal

in millimetres.

,
Pitch Dia

Major Diameter

Minor Dia

From

up to

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

1:

2.5
3

7.5
9

5.974
4,976

5694
4740

5.324
4.456

4.306
5144

3.995
4.747

4.495
3.787

M7

6.974

6694

6324

6.144

5.747

5.495

::0
Ml2

4
:

::
18

9.968
7.972
Il.966

9.593
7.637
11.541

8.994
7.160
10,829

8.782
6.970
10.593

8.128
6.438
9.819

6,158
7.808
9.457

Ml4
Ml6
Mt8

z:

10

30

13.962
15962
17.958

13.512
15.512
17.428

12.663
14.663
16.334

12.413
14.413
16.069

Il.508
13.508
14.891

Il.114
13,114
14.446

M20
M22
M24

10
10
12

30
30
36

19958
21.958
23952

19.428
21.428
23352

18.334
20,334
22.003

18.069
20.069
21.668

16.891
18.891
20.271

16.446
18.446
19.740

M27
M30
M33

12
15
15

36
tz

26.952
29.947
32947

26.352
29.277
32,277

25.003
27.674
30,674

24,688
27.339
30.339

23.271
25.653
28.653

22.740
25.066
28.066

M36
M39
M42

18

53

::

::

35.940
38.940
41.937

35.190
38.190
41,137

33.342
36.342
39.014

32,987
35.987
38.639

31 a033
34.033
36,416

30.390
33.390
35717

M45
M48
M52

21
24
24

63
71
71

44.937
47.929
51.929

44.137
47.079
51.079

42.014
44,681
48.681

41.639
44.281
48.281

39.416
41.795
45.795

38.717
41.035
45.035

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard was first published in 1967. In the present revision tolerance class 4th for bolts has been
deleted and tolerance class 6h added for sizes Ml to Ml.4 and for these sizes of nut threads 5H has been retained. Sizes M1.1, M2.2 and M45 have been retained as these sizes are extensively
used in the electronic
and telecommunication
industry. It has also been brought in line with the selected sizes of bolt and nut
threads as given in ISOlR 262-1969 Selected sizes for screws, bolts and nuts and ISOlR 9651965 Limits of
sizes for commercial
bolt and nut threads, medium quality with the following changes:
a)

Sizes M42, M45, M48 and M52 have been added as there is a demand for bolts and nuts of these
sizes in the coarse tolerance class. Sizes MlOxl, M12x1.5, M18x2, M20x2 and M22x2 have been
added, which are not given in ISOlR 262, as there is a demand for these sizes in the automobile
and aircraft industry.

b)

The limits

for threads

c)

The limits

for the minor diameter

This standard
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
Part 5
Part6

with coarse tolerance

is being issued in different

class, 7H and 8g have been added

of the bolt lhreads

have been added.

parts as under:

Basic and design profiles

Diameter pitch combinations
Basic dimensions
for design Profiles
Tolerancing
system
Tolerances
Limits of sizes for commercial
bolts and nuts

In the formulation
of this standard, assistance
has beer) derived from DIN 13, Sheet 13 Metrisches
ISOGewinde Gewindeubersicht
fur Schrauben und Muttern von 1 bis 52 mm Gewindedurchmesser
und GrenzmaBe (IS0 metric screw threads; Selected sizes for screws, bolts and nuts from 1 to 52 mm diameter and
limits), issued by Deutsches lnstitut fur Normung.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

199

IS : 8141-1976

Indian Standard

TOLERANCES FOR
SCREW THREADS USED IN AERONAUTICS

1. Scope-Covers
the design profile and tolerances
for IS0 metric screw threads
basic profile is as specified in IS : 4218-1967 IS0 metric screw threads.
2. Symbols-The
against each:

various

symbols

used

in this

standard

shall

denote

used in aeronautics.

the quantities

mentioned

The

below

D = major diameter of internal thread

~7, = minor diameter of internal thread
4 = pitch diameter of internal thread
d = major diameter of external thread
2 = pitch diameter of external thread
= manor diameter of external thread
P =pitch
r, = root radius = 0.1 P, Min
T = tolerance on pitch diameter
r, = 1.25 T, with a minimum value of T+ 30 m
3. Classes

of Screw Threads-Shall

be as given below:

Class II - Coarse
Class Ill -Fine
Class IV - Finest
4. Form of Screw Threads-The
Fig. 1.

basic profile

and design profile

of screw and nut threads

IC PROFILE

shall be as given in

(IS:L218)

INTERNAL THREAD
max.

NUT

CREW

FIG. 1 BASIC AND DESIGN PROFILE OF SCREW AND NUTTHREADS

200

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8141-1976
5. Tolerances
5.1 Tolerances on different
diameter combinations.

classes of screw threads shall be as given in Table 1, alongwith

the pitch-

5.2 The pitch diameter tolerance on the nut is always entirely on the positive side with a lower deviation
zero. Similarly the pitch diameter tolerance on screw is always entirely on negative side with upper deviation zero.

TABLE

1 PITCH

DIAMETER
(Clause

Tolerance

( mm )

Dimension

Pitch

COMBINATION

AND

values are in micrometres.

Tolerance on
B or D2
Class

Diameter
d or D

TOLERANCES

5.1 and Fig. 1 )

Class III

Tolerance
d
Class IV

Class II
Class Ill
-0

on

Tolerance

Class IV
-0

All
Classes
to

1
0.25

+80

-66

56

1.2

0.35

1.6

0.4

0.45

2.5

0.5

40

+I35

0.7

50

t175

0.75

6 to 10

0.8

+100
+115
-90

63

80

50

32

+125

-120

50

7 to 10

100

63

40

11 to 22

1.25

-150
-150

24

125

80

50

-150

100

63

40

-150

10
12 to 18
125

80

+180

-150

-90

-180*

-110

50
- 130
-130
+210
-130
- 130
-160
+ 250

()=

h12

HANDBOOK

()=

ON

INDUSTRIAL

hll

FASTENERS-PART

201

IS : 8141-1976

6. Designation
6.1 Designation shall consist of:
a) Size designation, and
b) Class designation.
6.1.1 Size designation
the pitch.
6.1.2 C/ass designation

- Size of a screw shall be designated by the letter M followed by the diameter and

- To indicate whether the screw thread is Class II, Class III or Class IV.

Example:
A screw thread of diameter 6 mm, pitch 1 mm and conforming to Class II, shall be designated as:
M6 x l-Class

EXPLANATORY

II

NOTE

As the basic profile specified in this standard is the same as that of IS0 metric screw threads covered
in IS : 4218-1987 it is not proposed to formulate a separate Indian Standard on gauging practice for screw
threads used in aeronautics. It is recommended that for gauging practice for these screw threads information given in IS : 2334-1975 Gauging practice for IS0 metric screw threads ( firsf revision ) may be drawn
upon.
In the preparation of this standard, considerable assistance has been derived from NF : L 05-222
Tolerances pour filetages ISO, applications aeronautiques (Tolerances for IS0 screw threads, aeronautical
usage) issued by Bureau De Normalisation De L' Aeronautique.

202

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

SECTION

TECHNICAL
SUPPLY CONDITIONS
(THREADED
FASTENERS)

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS:451-1972

Indian Standard

TECHNICAL SUPPLY
CONDITIONS FOR WOOD SCREWS
( Second Revision )

1. Scope-Deals

with the technical

supply conditions

for wood screws.

2. Terminology
2.1 Purchaser-The
expressly authorized
2.2 Supplier-The
the material.

party purchasing
by the purchaser

party supplying

the material. The term purchaser

to act on his behalf for inspection

the material.

The supplier

shall also cover person or persons

of the material.

may or may not be the actual

manufacturer

of

3. Material
to IS : 1812-1982 Specification

3.1 Wood screws shall be manufactured

from mild steel wire conforming
carbon steel wire for manufacture
of wood screws (secondrevision).

for

3.2 In case of wood screws made of brass, the brass chosen shall be Cu Zn 37 according to IS : 4413-1981
Brass wife for general engineering
purposes ( first revision ) or Cu Zn 40 according to IS : 4170-1967 Brass
rods for general engineering purposes.
4. Dimensions and Tolerances
4.1 The dimensions
and tolerances
dards.

of the wood

4.2 The depth of threads measured at a distance

less than that specified in Table 1.

screws

shall

conform

1.5 to 2 times nominal

to those
diameter

given

in respective

stan-

from the point shall be not

TABLE 1 DEPTH OF THREADS

Depth of Thread,
mm

Screw Number
I (Screw Designation)
0

0 20
0.23
0.25
O-30
033
041
0.46
051
O-56
0.61
0:66
0.76
086
096
104
114
135
155
175

:
3
4
5
6
:
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
28
32
4.3The permissible
5. Finish-The

tolerances

in the nominal

wood screws shall be supplied

Min

length of wood screws shall be is 17.

in the Self Colour

condition.

6. Workmanship

6.1 The screws shall be cleanly finished and the heads shall be true and concentric with the shank. Slots in
the head shall be clear, straight, free from burrs and central with regard to the head.
6.2 The threaded
portion
of the screw
shall be formed
by progressive
reduction
of the root
diameter
to obtain a uniform
taper. The screws
shall be gimlet pointed
and the included
angle of
the gimlet point shall be between
28 to 44 degrees. The thread form throughout
the length of the
screw shall be such that it will give the maximum
bite into the wood when the screw is rotated and
strong
enough
to prevent
distortion
of thread.
6.3 Threads shall be clear and well-defined.
At the end of the threaded portion nearest to the head, the root
of the thread shall runout to the nominal diameter within a distance not exceedmg one-quarter of the length
of the threaded portion.
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

205

IS : 451-l

972

7. Packing
boxes.
7.1 Wood screws shall be coated with a suitable rust preventive and shall be packed in cardboard
Wood screws of 25 mm length and below shall be packed in numbers of 200 per box and all wood screws of
length above 25 mm shall be packed in numbers of 100 per box.
8. Marking -The packets containing
wood screws shall be marked
formations:
a) Manufacturers
name or trade-mark;
b) Type, length, and screw number of wood screw; and
c) Quantity contained in the box.
8.1 IS/ Certification

Marking

- Details

available

with a fable containing

with the Indian Standards

9. Inspection and Acceptance

9.1 Lot-In
any consi nment, all wood screws of the same screw
time shall be grouped 9ogether to constitute
a lot.

the following

in-

Institution.

number

and manufactured

at the same

9.2 Selection of Wood Screws

9.2.1 The number of wood screws to be selected from a lot shall depend upon its size and shall be in accordance with col 1 and 2 of the Table 2.
9.2.2 These wood screws shall be selected at random from at least 10 percent of the boxes subject to a
minimumof
three,equal
numberof screws beingselectedfromeach
box.
9.3 Number of Tests-All
wood screws selected as in 9.2 shall be examined for workmanship(see
8), dimensions ( see 4 ) and finish (see 5). Any wood screw which fails to satisfy the requirements
of any one or more
or the characteristics
shall be considered as a defective wood screw.
9.4 Criterion for Conformity-The
lot shall be considered
as conforming
to the require,ments
of this standard if the number of defective
wood screws among those tested does not exceed the corresponding
number given in col 3 of Table 2; otherwise
it shall be considered
as not conforming
to the requirements
of
this standard.

TABLE 2 SAMPLE SIZE AND CRITERION FOR CONFORMITY

j (Clauses 9.2.1 and 9.4 )
Permissib!e Number
of Defee;r;sWood
Sample Size
Lot Size

(1)

(2)

(3)
1
2
3
5
7
10
14

13
20
22
50
80
125
200

up to 150
151 300
301 500
501 1 000
1 001 3 000
3 001 10 000
10 001 and above

Note-The sampling plan given here is such that lots with 4 percent or less defectives would be accepted most of the
times.

EXPLANATORY
Wood screws were originally
standard, four separate standards
IS
IS
IS
1s

: 451-1972
: 6760-1972
: 6736-1972
: 6739-1972

NOTE

covered in IS : 451 published in 1961. Consequent

are being published as follows:

Technical sup ly
Specification
Por
Specification
for
Specification
for

of this

conditions
for wood screws
slotted countersunk
head wood screws
slotted raised countersunk
head wood screws
slotted round head wood screws

The sizes of wood screws incorporated

in the above standards
Metric dimensions
of these sizes are also given in the individual
covered in the earlier version of the standard have since been deleted
206

on the revision

HANDBOOK

are based on the size of wire gauges.

standards.
The contractual
clauses
in the revised versions.
ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

l)-1980

Indian Standard
TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR
THREADED STEEL FASTENERS
PART 1 INTRODUCTION

AND GENERAL

( Second

Revision

INFORMATION

1. Scope - Covers the technical conditions of delivery of bolts, screws, studs, nuts and similar threaded and
formed parts unless special requirements are laid down in the relevant product standards. The standard may
also be applied to non-standard products for which standards are yet to be formulated.
Note - The products under the purview of the standard
IS0 metric screw threads (first revision).

shall have threads

to IS : 4218 (Part I) 1976 to IS : 4218 Part

1.1 This part is intended to serve as an introduction to the remaining which cover the specific requirements
of fasteners like product grades, mechanical properties, methods of test, etc. The differnt parts are as
under:
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part

1 Introduction and general information

2 Product grades and tolerances
3 Mechanical properties and test methods for bolts, screws and studs with full loadability
4 Mechanical properties and test methods for bolts, screws and studs with reduced loadability
5 Mechanical properties and test methods for set screws not under tensile stresses
6 Mechanical properties and test methods for nuts with specified proof loads
7 Mechanical properties and test methods for nuts without specified proof loads
8 Mechanical properties and test methods for prevailing torque type lock nuts
9 Surfacediscontinuities
on bolts. screws and studs
10 Surfacediscontinuities
on nuts
11 Electroplated coatings on threaded fasteners
12 Phosphatecoatings on threaded fasteners
13 Hot dip galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners
14 Stainless steel threaded fasteners
15 Requirements at subzero and elevated temperatures
16 Designation system and symbols
17 Acceptancecriteria
18 Marking and modeof delivery
19 Axial load fatique testing of bolts, screws and studs

2. General Requirements
2.1 No specific manufacturing method need be adhered to as long as the products exhibit the strength
characteristics
and conform to the relevant product grades along with the dimensional requirements as
stipulated in the product standards.
2.2 No specific appearance of the products is specified.
Note - Fasteners are normally
that have been heat treated aredull

supplied
back.

in either

dull back condition

or finished

bright

2.3 Unless otherwise specified, the products shall be supplied in a well-cleaned

tected against corrosion with a thin film of oil.

on all surfaces.

condition

Fasteners

and sultably pro.

2.4 Unless otherwise specified, centre holes in both, screws and studs in all grades may be allowed to remain.
3. Workmanship
3.1 Fasteners shall be cleanly finished, sound and free from defects which may affect their serviceability,
consistent with the method of manufacture.
Formulation

HANDBOOK

ON

of these parts will await corresponding

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

international

agreement.

207

IS : 1367(Part

l)-1980

3.2 Fasteners shall have full surfaces and edges in keeping with the method of manufacture.
free from burrs, although barely perceptible
thin burrs which result, for example, from slotting
operations,
may be left out.

They shall be
and trimming

3.3 Grade C bolts may have reasonable die seam on the shank, but in no case the shank diameter
seams shall exceed the maximum permissiblediameter.

EXPLANATORY

with such

NOTE

This standard was first published in 1961 and subsequently

revised in 1967. As a result of international
agreemenfs
arising from the work of lSO/TC 2, the IS0 committee
on fasteners, extensive alterations
have
come about, which have necessitated
a thorough revision with substantial
additions to the 1967edition.
For
technical and drafting reasons alike, the standard has been split into various parts, as already spelt out in
the standard.
While specific requirements
of fasteners are covered in the rest of the parts, this part is intended
provide an introduction
to the different parts of the standard and cover requirements
which are general
nature.

to
in

The concept of full and reduced loadability

of externally
threaded fasteners has been introduced in the
present revision although international
agreements
are yet to be reached on screws with reduced loadability. Accordingly
products with different geometry and head configuration
would no longer be called to exhibit uniform loadability
or strength characteristics.
Similarly set screws (grubscrews)
are classified
as a
separate
category
since these type of screws
are not under tensile
stresses.
Thus the strength
characteristic
for set screws would shift from tensile strength to hardness values.
Similar
to the externally
threaded
fasteners,
distinctions
have been made
in the strength
characteristics
of nuts depending
on whether they are hexagon nuts with standard
thread heights, thin
nuts, nuts of special geometry, etc.

One of the important additions

in the present revision has been the limits of surface discontinuities
on
bolts and nuts. The new requirements
on surface flaws which quantify the defects with allowable limits also
include sampling
plans for acceptance
programmes.
The revision also includes
requirements
of electroplated coatings and chemical conversion coatings like phosphating
on threaded fasteners.
A list of related standards
which cover the various parameters
like nominal lengths, thread length,
thread run-out and undercuts, thread ends, dimensions
for radii under the head, etc, is given in Appendix A.
The list also includes standards on raw materials and methods of test on fasteners.

208

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

APPENDIX

1)-l 980

LIST OF RELATED STANDARDS

(The
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS

list does not include

dimensional

standards

on fasteners

: 226-1975 Structural steel (standard quality) (fifth revision)

: 919-1963 Recommendations
for limits and fits for engineering (revised)
: 13681967 Dimensions of ends of bolts and screws (first revision)
: 1369-1975 Dimensions of screw thread run-outs and undercuts (first revision)
: 1499-1959 Method for Charpy impact test (U-notch) for steel
: 1500-1968 Method for Brine11 hardness test for steel (first revision)
: 1501-1968 Method for Vickers hardness test for steel (first revision)
: 1570-1961 Schedules for wrought steels for general engineering purposes
: 1570 Schedules for wrought steels:

( Part
( Part
( Part
( Part
IS
IS
IS
IS

: 1586-1968
: 1608-1972
: 1821-1967
: 2253-1969

IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS

: 2334-1975
: 2591-1969
: 2614-1969
: 4172-1967
: 4206-1967
: 4218-1976
: 8535-1977
: 8536-1977
: 8537-1977

HANDBOOK

1 ) - 1978 Steels specified by tensile and/or yield properties ( first revision )

2 ) -1979 Carbon steels (unalloyed steels) ( first revision )
4 ) -1979 Carbon and carbon-manganese
free cutting steels ( first revision )
5 ) -1972 Stainless and heat-resisting
steels (firstrevision)
Methods for Rockwell hardness test ( B and C scales ) for steel ( first revision )
Methods for tensile testing of steel products (first revision)
Dimensions for clearance holes for metric bolts.( first revision)
Mild steel wire rod or the manufacture
of machine screws (by cold heading process
revision )
Gauging practice for IS0 metric screw threads (first revision)
Hot rolled bars for threaded components
(first revision )
Melhods for sampling of fasteners (first revision)
Dimensions for radii under the head of bolts and screws
Dimensions for nominal lengths and thread lengths for bolts, screws and studs
IS0 metric screw threads (first revision)
Terminology
for features of fasteners
Dimensioning
of fasteners
Nomenclature
and terminology
of fasteners
Dimensions for width across flats for hexagon bolts and nuts
Dimensions for split pin holes, wire holes and head slots for bolts

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

) ( first

IS : 1367(Part

21-1979

Indian Standard

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

THREADED STEEL FASTENERS
PART 2 PRODUCT
(

GRADES

Second

AND TOLERANCES

Revision

1. Scope-Specifies
tolerances for bolts, screws, studs and nuts with thread diameters from 1.6 up to and
including 150 mm and product Grades A, Band C.
1.1 The product grades are specified without any reference to the method of manufacture
are not required to exhibit any particular appearance, such as bright, black, etc.

and the fasteners

1.2 The tolerances on various grades of fasteners shall be as given in subsequent clauses and applied on
the basic sizes given in the relevant dimensional standards. These figures do not necessarily contain
details that aregiven in the relevant dimensional standard.
1.3 Deviations from the tolerances
technical reasons.

in the standard are permitted in the product standards

only for valid

1.4 It is recommended that these tolerances be used for non-standard fasteners as well.

210

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

Feature

2)-l

979

Tolerance for Product Grades

Notes
A

2. Tolerance Level
Shank and bearing

surface

close wide

close

Other features

wide

close

wide

3. Thread
3.1 InternaI(Nuts)
6H

7H

6H

For
dimensions
of
threads
see IS : 4218
(Part 6 )-1978. For exceptions
to
tolerance
classes
mentioned
see
product standards.

For all nuts of heights > 0.8d the minor diameter

within
the specified
tolerances
for a minimum
nominal ( only for sizes > M3).

shall be
of 0.5 m

m
For all nuts of heights>0.5<0.8
d the minor diameter
shall
be within the specified
tolerances
for a minimum
of 0.35 m
nominal.

For prevailing
torque type nuts the minor
the specified
tolerance-for
a maximum
the non-restricted
end.

3.2 External
Studs

(Bolts,

Screws and

6g

6g

89

diameter
may exceed
height of 0.35 d from

*Only nut end of studs.

4. Thread Length

b+2

P
0

+2P
0

+2P
0

+2P
0

+2P
0

+2P
o

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

Is = minimum
length
unthreaded
shank.
/g =maximum
unthreaded
(thread run-out

0OUBl.E EN0 STUD

STUD

P = pitch of thread.
Tolerance+
2 P only for
such bolts where Is andIg
are not fixed in the pro.
duct standard.

bl 1s 17

bl js 16

FASTENERS-PART

bl js 17

of

length of
shank
included )

*Only metal end of studs.

211

IS : 1367(Part

2)-1979

Feature

Tolerance for Product Grades

A

Notes
C

5. Nominal Length

i. Driving Geometries
i.1 External
6.1.1 Widths across flats

Tolerance

<32
>32

h13
hi4

Tolerance
h14
h15
hi6
h17

< 19
>19 Q 60
>60 Q180
>180

212

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part
Tolerance for Product Grades

Feature

2)-1979

Notes

6.1.2 Widths across corners

-_.
7

Cl

-T
Cl

q min >1.13 s min

e, min )1.12s min for flanged products and other cold forged heads
without trimming operation

92

t+ min)1.3smin

=a

33

6.1.3 Height of heads

@=Jj
<M12: h14
>M12<
M18:
> M18: h16

I
&

HANDBOOK

h15

h17

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

213

IS : 1367(Part

2)-1979

*Tolerance

fields

ttolerance
fields
for socket head
cap screws

e min 21.14 s min

214

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

Feature

Tolerance for Product Grades

A

6.2.3 Depth of hexagon

sockets

2)-1979

Notes

C
Tolerance
depends
on the method
of
measurement,
see
product standard.

and slots

7. Head Dimensions of Round

Head Screws
7.1 Diameters

+-#@_

h13*

$fl---+

h14 r

*;g

Ir

*,:;:;I:

7.2 Heights

diameter
and
height for countersunk head screws is
recommended.

3. Shank Diameters

h13

shank diameter

HANDBOOK

h14

+ IT15

Allowance
for
the
swelling
under the
head, see relevant
product standard.

pitch diameter

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

215

IS:1 367(Part

21-1979

Tolerance for Product Grades

Feature
A

N&es
C

g. Bearlng Area
d, min = s min - IT16 for width
across flats <21

hW

tzorwidth

acr;

DETAIL X

jj--$

For product
Grade
C a washer
face

mm

F;:;;;a;;

Min

Min
3and4
~~~p33s6
5and6
8to14

;$

;a

*Form

of

the

runout

,:,~YdK:eutf~~:

Thread diameter

j$j!Jj

&T_

DETAIL Y

16
24
36

10. Other Dimensions

;g;::

16

D min-015
D min-0.8
D min-1
D min-1.2

z:

- *F~$$;:t;:z

03

h14

h15

h76

h14

h15

hf7

h74

h15

h17

m
m

,j

11. Tolerances of Form and Position-The

see 6.1.4
H14

H14

HI5

tolerances of form and position

indicated

necessarily
imply the use of any particular
method of production,
measurement
Some cases guidelines are given for measurement
and gauging under Notes.

in Fig. 1 to 36 do not
or gauging. Nevertheless,
in

In accordance
with the existing system of inspection
the maximum
material
bol @I is used for indication
of concentricity,
symmetry and straightness
tolerances.

principle

with

its sym-

The whole system of tolerance for form and position and also the use of the maximum material principle does not show a new tolerance system but only an interpretation
of old tolerancing
by use of a new symbol. The requirements
are met if the product is accepted when using gauges or measuring
principles as indicated.
As the maximum material principle may not be appropriate
to certain
urkuitability
in regard to acceptance
of such products may be noted.

216

HANDBOOK

features

of certain

ON INDUSTRIAL

product,

ils

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

2)-1979
-

Tolerance t

Tolerance t for Product

Feature

Grades
A

11.1 Concentricity,
and Run-out

Notes

Based on
Dimension

The following
gauge
be used for inspection.

Symmetry

2lT13

2lT14

2lT15

2lT13

2lT14

2lT15

may

similar
gauge
with
a
counterbore
D max + t
may be used for cylindrical
head screws.

*The datum
feature
must
not
be
partly
shank
partly
thread.
If necessary the datum
feature
d should
be placed
at
sufficient
distance
(3P
max ) from the head of the
screw
(to avoid
thread
runout).

Fig. 2

2lT13

21T14

2lT15

Fig. 9

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

217

IS : 1367(Par-t

2)-1979

Feature

T Jolerance t for
Product Grades
A

2lT13

Notes

Tolerance t
Based on
Dimension

@ et@
_
?,
s - -4

_ J
WAYBE CVLIND~IC~L

Od

C
A WEAR RESISTANT
FOR EXAMPLE

d
Fig. 4

2lT13

Fig. 5

It
_-_

2lT12

d-

is also usual
wall
thickness
plane
of the

to

measure
between
hexagon
of

the
the
the

outside surface of the screw head

or set screw ( e.g. with a vernier
caliper).
Fig. 6

2lT12

2lT13

2lT14

2lT12

2lTl3

21T14

Fig. 7

Fig. 8

218

HANDBOOK

or4

INDUSTRIAL

FA~TENER~-PA~~T

IS : 1367(Part

Feature

Tolerance t for
Product Grades
A

2lT12

Notes

Tolerance t
Based on
Dimension

2lT13

2lT14

2)-1979

See page

a.

Fig. 9

The following

gauge may

be used for inspection.

2lT12

2lT13

2lT13

Flg. 10

See Note for Fig. 4 to 6 or

a gauge
similar
to that
of Fig. 10 may be used.

Fig. 11

Fig. 12

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

219

IS : 1367(Part

2)-l

979

I3

Notes

Tolerance t
Based on
Dimension

Tolerance t for
Product Grades

Feature

C
The following gauging assembly
may be used for inspection:

2lT13

2lT14

2lT15

+t

Od

d
Fig. 13
_;q

@dl min.

MEASURING PIN

The following gauge may be used

for inspection:
2lT13

/t
=f!F
I

Led

c-d-l
Fig. 14

21T13

2lT13

2iT14

2lT15

4u

d
Fig. 15

Fig.

16

2lT13

Fig. 17

220

*See page 8.

IS : 1367(Part

Feature

Tolerance t for
Product Grades
A

Tolerance t
Based on
Dimension

2)-197

Notes

**Or length of the GO

for
screw
ring
gauge
tolerance class 6h.
The following
gauge may be
used for inspection:
2lT13

2lT14

2lT15

2lT13

2lT14

Fig. 18

Fig. 19

It is usual

2lT13

2lT14

2lT15

to measure the
wall thickness between the
minor thread diameter and
the flats.

The following
gauge
used for inspection:

Fig. 20

2lT13

2lT14

2lT15

DI = minor

Fig. 21

thread

diameter

The following
gauge
used for inspection:

2lT13

may be

may be

02

Fig. 22
D, = minor

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

thread diameter

221

IS : 13671Part

2)-l 979

*See page 2 17.

measuring circle:
0.8 x width across fiats
or
0.8 x head diameter
1 see page 223.

222

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part 2)-1979

Notes

0.8 x width
across flats
0.8 x head diameter
j Tolerance t calculated from an
angle of 1 for
product Grades

Grade C up to
d= 39mmand
30. or 1 respectively for sizes
over 39 mm (in
accordance
with
common

1.12

0.56

52

Fig. 31

___
we_
@ 9
_a_
__h
I49

L 00.60
Fig. 32

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

223

IS : 1367(Part

2)-l

979

Tolerance t for Product

Grades

Feature

Notes

11.3 Parallelism

rk

0.017x k

0.035 x k

For k and m see 6.15

Fig. 33

0.017 x m!

Fig. 34

0.035 x m

11.4 Straightness

G3

>8

t = 0.002 I + 0.05

t = 0.002 5 I + 0.05

&lb

*Straightness
tolerance
isapplicableonly
for I

Fig. 35

t=

Q8

2 ( 0.002 I?
+ 0.05 )

t=
Fig. 36

2 (0.002 5 If
+ 0.05 )

>8

12. Example for the Application of the Maximum Material Principle -Due
to the indication
in Fig. 1 of 11.1
the concentricity
lolerance 1for a hexagon head screw, for example M20 with product Grade A, may have the
following values:

M 20 ( P =
d nominal
s nominal
t nominal

224

2.5); product Grade A

= 20
= 30
= 2lT13 (based on s nominal)

= 0.660

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :1367(Part

S
h13

Case

2)-1979

dt
69
d,,,,, (204042)

1 smax

30

19.958

2 Snin

dmax 19.958

3 Smax

30

4 Smin

dmin (20-0.377)
19.623

29.670

(0.660

dm,,, 19.623

+ (19.95849.623)
0.995
(0.660

= 0.660

+ 0.335)

+ 0.330 + 0.335)
1.325

5 Sactuat

29.890

to IS : 919-1963.
to !S : 4218 (Part

* According
r According

dactual

19.750

0.660 + =(30-29.890)
0.660 +0.978
0.110
+ (19.958-19.750)
+ 0.208

4).1976.

It is obvious that for practical

inspection
amples in the Table column Notes in 11.

in these cases

13. For ready reference, the values of basic toterawes

further reference, see IS : 919-1963 Recommendations

TABLE

1 TOLERANCES
All dimensions

it may be helpful

Size

as given as ex-

and tolerance zones are given in Tables

for limits and fits for engineering.)

FOR

GRADES

IT12

1 to 3. (For

TO IT17

in millimetres.

Tolerance
Nominal

to use gauges

Grades

Range
IT12

Over 3

IT13

IT14

IT15

IT16

IT17

0.25

0.40

0.60

1 .oo

0.10

0.14

Over 3 to 6

0.12

0.18

0.30

0.48

0.75

1.20

Over 6 to 10

0.15

0.22

0.36

0.58

0.90

1.50

Over

10 to 18

0.18

0.27

0.43

0.70

1.10

1.80

Over

18 to 30

0.21

0.33

0.52

0.84

1.30

2.10

Over 30 to 50

0.25

0.39

0.62

1 .oo

1.60

2.50

Over

030

0.46

0.74

1.20

1.90

3.00

0.35

0.54

0.87

1.40

2.20

3.50

50 to 80

Over 80 to 120
Over

120 to 180

0.40

0.63

1 .oo

1.60

2.50

4.00

Over

180 to 250

0.46

0.72

1.15

1.85

2.90

4.60

Over 250 to 315

0.52

0.81

1.30

2.10

3.20

5.20

Over 315 to 400

0.57

0.89

1.40

2.30

3.60

5.70

Over 400 to 500

0.63

0.97

1.55

2.50

4.00

6.30

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

225

IS : 1367(Part

2)-l 979

TABLE

10

226

18

2 TOLERANCE

ZONES

All

dimensions

G.27

G.43

G.70

FOR

EXTERNAL

DIMENSIONS

in millimetres.

-?.lO

0
- 1.80

f0.215

kO.35

20.55

kO.90

18

30

G.33

-:.52

-:.84

0
-1.30

-:.10

to.26

f0.42

20.65

kO.05

30

50

G.39

-:.62

0
-1.00

-7.60

-;.50

to.31

f0.50

kO.80

tl.25

50

80

-:.46

G.74

0
-1.20

0
-1.90

-:.oo

kO.37

kO.60

40.95

21.50

80

120

G.54

-:.87

0
-1.40

-;.20

-!.50

f0.435

kO.70

kl.10

fl.75

120

180

-:.63

0
-1.00

0
-1.60

0
-2.50

-:.oo

kO.50

LO.80

kl.25

f2.00

180

250

-:.72

-:.15

-1.85
0

-:.90

-:.60

kO.575

-0.925

21.45

22.30

250

315

-:.81

0
-1.30

-:.10

-:.20

0
-5.20

k0.65

?1.05

fl.60

k2.60

kl.15

kl.80

f2.85

22.00

23.15

315

400

-:.89

0
-1.40

G.30

-2.60

-:.70

a.70

400

500

G.97

-7.55

G.50

-:.oo

-:.30

f0.775

HANDBOOK

ON

01.25

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

TABLE

Nominal

Size

Over

Over

3to

3 TOLERANCE

ZONES

All

dimensions

Range

Tolerance

FOR

INTERNAL

DIMENSIONS

in millimetres.

Zone

D9

DlO

Dll

+ 0.045
+ 0.020

+ 0.060
+ 0.020

+ 0.080
+ 0.020

+0.120
+0.020

+ 0.074
+0.014

+0.100
+0.014

to.024
to.010

+ 0.060
+0.030

+ 0.078
+ 0.030

+0.115
t 0.030

+0.150
+0.030

+ 0.095
+ 0.020

to.140
t 0.020

t 0.028
to.014

+0.300
0

t 0.480
0

+0.015

-:.030

to.130
+ 0.040

+0.190
+ 0.040

+0.115
+0.025

to.175
+ 0.025

to.040
+0.018

+0.360
0

to.580
0

+0.018

-:.036

D12

Over

6to

Over

10to

18

+0.200
t 0.050

+ 0.430
0

+0.700

Over

18 to

30

+0.275
+0.065

to.520
0

t 0.840
0

Over

30 to

50

+0.330
t 0.080

+0.620
0

+1.000
0

Over

50 to

80

+ 0.400
+0.100

Over

80 to 120

to 400

+1.400
0

t2.300
0

to 500

+ 1.550
0

+ 2.500
0

10

Over

120

to 180

Over

180

to 250

Over

250

to 315

E
Over

Over

315

400

to.470
+0.120

IS : 1367(Part

2)-l 979

APPENDIX

LIST OF RELATED STANDARDS

IS : 919-1963
IS : 1363-1967
IS : 1364-1983

Recommendations
for limits and fits for engineering
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grades A and B (second revision)
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product of grade C (second revision)
Slotted countersunk head and slotted raised countersunk head screws(dia range 1.6 to20
mm) (secondrevision)
Slotted cheese head screws (dia range 1.6 to 20 mm ) ( first revision )
IS : 1366-l 968
Dimensions of ends of bolts and screws ( second revision )
IS : 1368-1980
Dimensions of screw thread run-outs and undercuts ( second revision )
IS : 1369-1982
Studs (secondrevision)
IS : 1862-1975
Slotted and castle nuts (first revision )
IS : 2232-1967
Hexagon socket head cap screws ( first revision )
IS : 2269-1967
Slotted grub screws ( first revision )
IS : 2388-1971
Black square bolts and nuts ( diameter
range 6 to 39 mm ) and black square screws
IS : 2585-1968
(diameter range 6 to 24 mm ) ( first revision )
Dimensions
for nominal lengths and thread lengths for bolts, screws and studs
IS : 4206-1967
IS0 metric screw threads
IS : 4218-1976
Hexagon socket set screws ( first revision )
IS : 6094-1981
Slotted pan head screws (second revision )
IS : 6101-1982
Countersunk
head screws with hexagon socket
IS : 6761-1972
Prevailing torque type steel hexagon lock nuts
IS : 7002-1973
Cross recessed pan head screws (dia 2.5 to 10 mm )
IS : 7483-1974
Cross recessed countersunk
head screws (dia 2.5 to 10 mm )
IS : 7485-1974
IS : 8000 (Part 2-1976 Tolerances
of form and of position
for engineering
drawings:
Part 2 Maximum
material principle

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

The last revision of this standard was carried out in 1967. In the meantime, as a result of international
agreement arising from the work of ISORC2, the international
committee
on fasteners, extensive alterations
have come about which have necessitated
a thorough revision and substantial
additions to the 1967 version.
For technical and drafting reasons alike the standard has been divided into a number of separate parts. Part I
of this standard gives general information
on the revision of this standard and spells out the various parts.
The product grades covered in this standard refer to the quality of the product and to the size of the
tolerances where Grade A is the most precise and Grade C, the least precise. The above designation
of product grades as A, Band C is a significant
change from designation
of product grades as Precision (P), Semiprecision (S) and Black (B) employed in the 1967 version. The following
table gives the equivalent
product
grades in the old and revised versions:
Product grade in the
1967 edition

Equivalent
present

Precision

Grade A
Grade B

(P)

Semi-precision

(S)

Black (B)

Grade C

The representation
of tolerances
of form and position in the
given in the 1967 version. Examples of gauges to check certain
dance with the maximum material principles have been included.
cluded as a general requirement
but would be included in product
Appendix

A gives a list of related

grade in the
standard

standards

which are either

present standard replaces the old method

tolerances
of form and position in accorRequirements
for surface finish are not instandards, where necessary.
referred

to in this standard

or are related

to it.
In the preparation
of this standard considerable
assistance
has been derived from IS0 4759/l-1978
Tolerances for fasteners-Part
I Bolts, screws and nuts with thread diameters > 1.6<150 mm and product
grades A, Band C issued by the International
Organization
for Standardization.

228

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

Indian

3)-1979

Standard

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

THREADED STEEL FASTENERS
PART 111MECHANICAL
PROPERTIES AND TEST METHODS FOR
BOLTS, SCREWS AND STUDS WITH FULL LOADABILITY

( Second Revision )

1. Scope-Covers

the mechanical

properties,

methods

of testing

and acceptance

of bolts, screws and studs

with full loadability.

1.1 The standard
-with
-of

applies

nominal

to bolts,

diameters

screws

and studs:

up to an including

39 mm,

IS0 metric thread and with diameters and pitches

iPart 6 ) -1978 IS0 metric screw threads, and

-made

of carbon

steel or alloy

1.2 The standard

does not apply

1.3 The standard

does not specify

to IS : 4218 ( Part I )-1976 to IS : 4218

according

steel.

to set screw ( grub screws

requirements

).

for such properties

as:

a) weldability,
b) corrosion
b) ability

resistance,

and

to withstand

Note 1 -The

temperatures

designation

system

Note 2-The

properties

temperatures

specified

+ 300C or below--50C.

of this standard

(that is:s,izes larger than 30 mm) provided

involving

above

may be used for sizes outside

that all mechanical

in the standard

and determined

other than the room temperature

modifying

the property

values as is warranted

but within

the range of f

requirements

classes

are me!.

only at the room temperature

It is expected

for applications

the limits laid down in the scope

of the property

that

and applications

the user will give due consideration

for temperatures

to

above or below the room temperature

300C to-50C.

2. Desigantion System-The
designation
system for property classes of bolts, screws and studs is
shown in Table 1. The abscissae
show the nominal tensile strength values while the ordinates
show
those of the elongation
after fracture.
The designation
a) the first figure

consists
indicates

of two figures:
l/100 of the nominal

b) the second figure indicates

1110 of the ratio,
stress and nominal tensile strength.
The multiplication
2.1 Minimum

HANDBOOK

ON

of these two figures

yield stress and minimum

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

tensile

strength

expressed

in N/mm*;

as a percentage,

will give 1110 of the nominal

tensile

strength

and
between

yield stress

are equal to or greater

nominal

yield

in N/mm*.

than the nominal

values.

229

IS : 1367(Part

3)-1979

TABLE

1 DESIGNATION

SYSTEM

FOR PROPERTY

;
I

I2

MINIMUM ELONGATION
FRACTURE,
As%

5.8
I

CLASSES

8!8

9.at

AFTER

22

4.6

5:6

25
30

RELATION

SECOND

BETWEEN

YIELD

FIGURE

NOMINAL

YIELD

NOMINAL

TENSILE

STRESS

AN0

TENSILE

STRENGTH

OF SYMBOL

60

60

90

STRESS
Xl00

-1.

STRENGTH

Note l-Although
a great number of property classesare
specified in this standard this does not mean that all
classes are appropriate
for all items. Further guidance for application
of the specific property classes is given in the
relevant product standard. For items not covered by product standards,
it-is advisable to follow as closely as possible, the choice already made for similar standard items.

Note 2--Property
to be discouraged.
t applies

class 9.8 is included

for information

only and manufacture

of products

with this property

class is

only to sizes up to 16 mm thread diameter.

3. Material-Steel

for the property

3.1 The minimum

in all cases.

tempering

3.2 The chemical

sile testing.

composition

classes

temperature5

limits

of bolts,

and studs

listed in Table 2 are mandatory

are mandatory

3.3 Other materials and heat treatments

between the purchaser and the supplier
are maintained.

screws

is specified
for property

for only those fasteners

in Table 2.
classes

8.8 to 12.9

which are not subject

than those listed in Table 2 may be used by special

when the latter can demonstrate
that all mechanical

to ten-

agreement
properties

4. Mechanical Properties-When
tested by the methods described in 7, the bolts, screws and studs shall
have,at room temperature,
the mechanical
properties
given in Table 3.
Two programmes
A and B of tests for mechanical
pro5. Test Programmes for Mechanical Propertiesperties of bolts, screws and studs using the methods described in 7 are given in Table 5. These programmes shall apply to mechanical
but not chemical
properties.
Table 4 shows division of bolts into two
groups according
to their dimensions
for using the test programmes.
5.1 Programme B shall be used wherever the capacity of available testing
the referee method. Otherwise
test programme
A shall be used.

equipment

permits

and shall be

5.2 Test programme A is suitable for machined test pieces and for bolts with a shank area less than the
stress area. Test programme
B is suitable for full size bolts.

230

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part 3)-1979

TABLE 2 MATERIAL AND TREATMENT

fClause 3)
Prooerty

Chemical Composition Limits

( Check Analysis ) percent

Material and Treatment

Class

Min

Tempering

TX::
oC*

Max

Max

Max

Min

4.6 t

Low or medium carbon steel

0.55

0.05

0.06

Low or medium carbon steel

0.55

0.05

0.06

4.8 t

5.8 7
6.8

Low carbon steel with additives ( for example, boron or

Mn or Cr ), quenched and tempered5
or

8.8:

Medium carbon steel, quenched and tempered

Low carbon steel with additives ( for example, boron

or Mn or Cr ), quenched and tempered5
Or
Medium carbon steel, quenched and tempered

9.8

Low carbon steel with additives ( for example, boron

or Mn or Cr ), quenched and tempereds
Of
Medium carbon steel, quenched and tempered
Or

10.91

12.&l

0.15

0.35

425
0.04

0.25

0.55

0.15

0.35

450 *

0.04
0.25

0.55

0.15

0.35

0.25

0.55

0.05

0.05

410

340

1 0.04

0.05

Medium carbon steel with additives ( for example,

boron or Mn or Cr ), quenched and tempered
Of
Alloy steel

0.20

0.55

0.20

r)55

0.035

0.035

Alloy steel

0.20

O.%

0.035

0.035

425

380

The mean of three hardness readings on a bolt tested before and after re-tempering shall not differ more than 20
Vickers points when re-tempered at a temperature 10C less than the specified minimum temperature for 30 mm.
l

7 Free-cutting steel is allowed for these classes with the following maximum sulphur, phosphorus and lead content: sulphur 0.34 percent, phosphorus 0.11 percent, lead 0.35 percent.
: For sizes above M20 the steels specified
hardenability.
OProducts made of low carbon martensitic
property class.

for class 10.9 may be necessary in order to achieve sufficient

steel shall be additionally

identified

by underlining the symbol of the

I/ For the materials of these classes it is intended that there should be sufficient hardenability to ensure a structure consisting of approximately 90 percent martensite in the core of the threaded sections of the fasteners in the as
hardened condition before tempering.
Alloy steel shall contain one or more of the alloying elements chromium, nickel, molybdenum or vanadium.
For

size M20 and larger a tempering temperature

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

of 425C may be used.

231

TABLE 3 MECHANICAL

kROpERTIES

OF BOLTs, SCREWS

( C/ac,se

AND

STUDS

4)
T

8.8
21ause
No.
4.1
&
4.2

Mechanical Property

4.6

400

Nom
strength,

Vickers

Rm

5.8

600

500

hardness,

800

800

900

1000

1200
1220

400

420

500

520

600

800

830

900

Mirr

120

130

155

160

190

230

255

280

310

372

250

300

336

360

382

434

181

219

242

266

295

353

285

319

342

362

412

20

23

27

31

38

220

La)
?-

114

124

67

71

147

152

209

i 238
79

82

Min

HRC

l
95

HRB
Max

99

HRC
HV,, ~

8d
1

HR

hardness

hardness,

HB

F = 30D

HR

Surface

12.9

Min

Max

Rockwell

10.9

HV

hardness

Brinell

4.6

9.8t
Mi6*

1040

Min

4.5

6.8

N/mm

Max

4.4

6.6

M<l 6

Tensile

4.3

4.8

I;;

Max

::0

::6

::2

::4
4

4.7

Yield

4.8

stress?;,

ReL,

Stress

4.10

Elongation

4.11

under

Strength

proof

after
under

240

320

Min

240

340

4.13

Head

strength,

480

300

420

480

fracture
wedge

640

640

720

900

1080

Min

640

660

720

940

1100

N/mm]

set

load,

Sp/ReL

0.94

0.91

0.94

0.91

0.91

0.91

0.91

0.91

0.88

0.88

N/mmz

225

310

280

380

440

580

600

650

830

970

Min

22

14

20

10

12

12

10

ASYO

loading
I

Impact

400

Nom

4.12

300

N/mm2

Stress at permanerit
limit, R@ 2

4.9

Nom

The values
values for

Min

for full size bolts and screws ( not studs)

tensile
strength
shown
in 4.2
30

25

should

30

equal

the minimum
I

25

20

15

2/3H,

3/4HI

No fracture

soundness

Minimum
height of nondecarburized
thread zone,

l/2H,

4.14
Maximum
depth
decarburization,

+
A

of complete
G

0.015

mm

.. . .
. ... .
r-or structural
b,omng + M I z.
tApplies
only to sizes up to 16 mm thread diameter.
:~ln a case where
the yield stress ReL cannot be determined,

it is permissible

to measure

the

stress

at permanent

set

limit

~P02

TABLE
Size

Bolts With Thread Diameter

dG.4 mm or Length <3d

TABLE

Mechanical

5 TEST

PROGRAMMES

Property

Test

Minimum
Rm

tensile

strength,

4.3,
4.4
and
4.5

Minimum

hardness*

Maximum

hardness

4.6

Maximum

surface

yeild stress, ReL

B FOR ACCEPTANCE

(Clause

5)

Programme

4.7

Minimum

Stress at permanent
limit, RpO.*

4.9

Stress under proof load, S,

4.10

Minimum elongation
fracture, A,

4.11

Strength under wedge

loading:
Minimum

4.13

Head soundness11

4.14

Maximum
zone

4.15

Retempering

7.1

Tensile

7.3

Hardness

7.1

Tensil test

7.1

Tensil test

PURPOSES

Test

Programme

test

testt

4-A
I

7.3

7.4

1 Hardness testi

1 Proof load test

hardness

4.8

4.12

A AND

Test Method

4.1
and
4.2

Bolts With Thread Diameters

>4 mm and Length 23d

Test decisive for acceptance

Test
Group

set

after

impact strength

I
7.1

Tensil test

7.5
7.6

Wedge
test

loading

lmpacct test8

IV

decarburized

7.8

Decarburization
test

7.8

Retempering

l
0

7.7

Head soundness
test

7.8

Decarburization
test

0
0
I

test

7.8

1Retempering test 1

4.16

Surface

integrity

7.9

Surface
test

integrity

0
0

7.9

Surface
test

integrity

___.
Mimmum hardness readmgs can replace tens.11tests also for bolts, screws and studs with thread dtameters V4 mm and length 33 c/ tor
simplifying the procedure, but for referee purposes tensile tests are decisive.
THardness may be Vickers, Brine11 or Rockwell. In case of doubt the Vickers hardness test is decisive for acceptance.
$Special head bolts and screws with configurations which are weaker than the threaded section are excluded from tensile testing requirements.
@Only for bolts, screws and studs with thread diameters >16 mm and only if required by the purchaser.
(IOnly property class 5.6.
JlOnly for bolts and screws with thread diameters < 16 mm and lengths too short to permit wedge load testing.
**If the wedge loading test is applied, the axial tensile test is not required.

IS : 1367(Part

3)-1979

6. Minimum Ultimate Tensile Loads and Proof Loads-The

minimum
IS0 metric coarse and fine threads are given in Table 6 to 9.
TABLE 6 MINIMtiM
Iitch
( of the
hread
biametei rl
i rhread

mm

0.5
0.6
0.7

5
6
7

0.8

5.03
6.78
8.78

14.2
20.1
28.9

8
10
12

1.25
1.5
1.75

36.6
58.0
84.3

14
16
18

2
z.5

LOADS-IS0

Minimum

sm;~
11 600

46000
62800
768001

245

98000)
21 0001
41000/

t:
24

27
30
33

3
3.5
3.5

459
561
694

817
976

structural

bolting

5960
8440

10000
7100

12 100

14400

48 3001
65900
80600

127 000
190 000

103000
127000
148000

343 000
410000

70 000, 95 500 and

ultimate

408 000
488 000

mm2

z.5
4

0.5
0.6
0.7

5.03
6.78
8.78

0.8
2
1

14.2
20.1
28.9

1:
12

1.25
1.5
1.75

36.6
58.0
84.3

14
16
18

;
2.5

*For

234

and proof

loads

THREAD

(A,

11350
16100
23100

19000
30 200
43 800

22000
34 800
50 600

29 000
46 400
67 400

69000
94 000
115000

I 25 000
203 000
252 000
293 000

92 000

159000

27000
58 000
84 000
275 000
337 000
416000

.25 000
808 000

490 000
586000

N
5 230
7 050
9130

6140
8 270
10700

12800
18100
26000

14800
20 900
30100

17300
24 500
36 300

32 900
52 200
75 900

38100
60 300
87 700

44 600
70 800
103000

104000
141000
-

120000
163000
200 000

140000
192 000
234 000

255 000
315000
367 000

299 000
370 000
431000

477 000
583 000
722 000

560000
684 000
847 000

850000
020000

4 530
6100
7 900

4 020
5 420
7 020

8 520
12100
17300

39000
92 000
i61000

X R,),

381000
466 000
576 000
678 000
310000

997 000
1 200 000

130 000 N. respectively.

METRIC COARSE

THREAD

4.6

5.6

5.8

6.8
Proof

load

8.8
(A,

X S,),

9.8

10.9

12.9

4180
5 630
7 290

4 880
6 580
8 520

1130
1530
1 980

1 560
2100
2 720

1410
1900
2 460

1910
2 580
3 340

2210
2 980
3 860

2 920
3 940
5100

3 270
4410
5710

3 200
4 520
6 500

4 400
6 230
8 960

3 980
5 630
8 090

5 400
7 640
11000

6 250
8 840
12700

8 230
11 600
16800

9 230
13100
18800

11800
16700
24000

13800
19500
28 000
;:E
81800

8240
13000
19000

11400
18000
26100

10200
16200
23600

13900
22 000
32 000

16100
25 500
37 100

21 200
33 700
48 900

23 800
37 700
54 800

30 400
48 100
70 000

115
157
192

25 900
35300
43 200

35 600
48700
59 500

32 200
44 000
53 800

43 700
59 700
73000

50 600
69 100
84 500

66 700
91000
115000

74 800
02 000
-

95 500
130000
159 000

2.5
2.5
3

245
303
353

55100
68200
79 400

76000
93900
109 000

68 600
84 800
98 800

93100
115000
I 34 000

08 000
33000
55000

147000
182 000
212000

203 000
252 000
293 000

459
561
694

03 000
26000
56000

142 000
174000
215000

I28 000

l.5
3.5

l57OOc
194oOc

174 000
213000
264 000

!02 000
!47 000
105 000

275 000
337 000
416OUO

381000
466 000
570 000

445000
544 000
673 000

817
976

84 000
20 000

253 000
303 000

!29 OOC
!73 OOC

310000
371000

i59 000
I29 000

490 000
586 000

678 000
810000

792 000
947 000

structural

bolting

for

Property Class

4.6
mm

load

7 380
10400
15000

57 500
78500
96000
122000
152000
176000

tensile
3 020
4 070
5 270

Pitch
INomina
Df the ,Stress
rhreal dr bea

mm

METRIC COARSE

2 620
3 530
4570

TABLE 7 PROOF LOADS-IS0

hread
biametel

tensile

Property Class

115
157
192

2.5
2.5
3

For

TENSILE

Nominal
Stress
Area

mn1

mm

3
3.5
4

UITIMATE

ultimate

I
L

50 700, 68 800 and 94 500 N, respectively.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

TABLE

NT;o;;; I
Diameter

Pitch
of the
Thread

mm

mm

1:
12

1.25
1.25

6 MINIMUM

ULTIMATE

TENSILE
LOADS-IS0
(Clause 6)

Property

Uomina II
Stress
Area

4.6

4.8

5.6

15700
24 500
36 800

16500
25 700
38 700

19600
30 600
46 000

METRIC

8.8

39.2
61.2
92.1

20400
31800
47 900

23 500
36 700
55 300

31 360
49 000
73 700

35 300
55 100
82 900

40 800
63 600
95 800

112000
150 000
-

130 000
174000
225 000

52 500
70100
90 700

62 500
83 500
108000

75 000
86 800
112000

75 000
100000
130000

100000
134000
179 000

1.5
1.5
2

272
333
384

109000
I33 000
154000

114000
140 000
161000

136 000
166 000
192 000

141000
173000
200 000

163000
200 000
230 000

226 000
276 000
319000

34

;
2

496
621
761

194000
248 000
304 000

208 000
261000
320000

248 000
310000
380000

258 000
323 000
396 000

298 000
373 000
457 000

36
39

3
3

I 030

346 000
$12000

363 000
433 000

432 000
515000

450 000
536 000

519000
618000

5:

9.8

10.9

12.9

mm2

50 000
66 800
86 400

1:

THREAD

6.8

5.8

125
167
216

20

979

Class

1.5
1.5
1.5

14

FINE

3)-l

865

283 000
346 000
399 000

412000
515000
632 000

--

516000
646 000
791000

718000
855 000

900 000

I 070000

TABLE

Nominal
Thread
Diameter

Pitch
of the
Thread

Nominal
Stress
Area

mm

1:

1.25
:.25

92.1
61.2

METRIC
6)

FINE

Property
4.8

THREAD

Class

5.8

5.6

mm2
39.2

LOADS-IS0
(Clause

.
4.6

mm

9 PROOF

Proof
8 820
20700
13800

14
16
18

1.5
1.5
1.5

125
167
216

28100
37 600
48 600

2:
24

1.5
2

272
333
384

61200
74900
86400

z:
33

t
2

496
621
761

:z

1030
865

6.8

load

(A,

8.8

9.8

10.9

12.9

25 500

32 500

38000

X Sp), N

12200

11000

14900

17 200

22 700

28
19000
600

25
17100
800

35000
23
300

40
26 900
500

53 400
35
500

39 800
59
900

55000
73 500
95000

72 500
96900
130000

81 200
109000
-

76 400
50
800

121000
162000
210000

38 800
51 800
67 000

35 000
46 800
60 500

47 500
63 500
82100

103000
84 300
119000

93200
76
200
108000

103 000
126000
146000

120000
146000
169000

200000
163000
230000

226000
276000
319000

264000000
323
372000

140000
112000
171000

154000
192000
236000

174000
139000
213000

236000
188000
289000

273000
218000
335000

373000
298000
457000

412000
515000
632 000

481000
602000
738 000

232000
195000

319000
268000

288000
242000

391000
329000

453000
381000

618000
519000

718000
855 000

999 000
838000

7. Test Methods for Mechanical

Properties

7.1 Tensile Test for Machined

Test Pieces-The
tensile test shall be conducted
in accordance
1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products (first revision ) on a test piece as shown

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

59
89 400
300

104000
139000
179000

FASTEfUERS-PART

with IS:
in Ficl 1

235

IS : 1367(Part

3)-1979

d = nominal thread diameter

d, = diameter of test piece ( do< minor diameter
b = length of thread ( b > d )
L,=
5d00r(5.651/S,)
L, = lengthof
straight portion ( L, + d, )
L, = total length of lest piece ( L, + 2R + b)
L, = length after fracture
S, = cross-sectional
area
R = Fillet radius (R > 4mm y
FIG. 1 TEST PIECE FOR TENSILE

7.1.1 The following

properties

shall

be checked

a) Tensile strength Rn,;

b) Yield stress, R,, or stress at permanent
c) Percentage elongation
after fracture:

on machined

TEST

test pieces

set limit 0.2 percent,

L -L
A, = =
L

of lhread

by tensile

tests.

R,,o,2_and

x100

When machining
the test pieces, the reduction of the shank.diameter
of the heat-treated
bolts and
screws over 16 mm thread diameter shall not exceed 25 percent of the original diameter ( about 44 percent
of the cross-sectional
area ) of the test piece.
7.2 Tensile Test for Full Size Bolts, Screws and Sfuds-The
tensile test shall be carried out on full size bolts
in conformity
with the tensile test on machined test pieces ( see 7.1 ). It is carried out for the purpose of
delermining
the tensile strength. The calculation
of Ihe lensile strength is based on the stress area, A,:
2

A, = $
where
A,
d,
d,

= stress area [see IS : 4218 (Part

= pitch diameter, and
= minor diameter.

3)19761,

7.2.1 When carrying out the test, a free threaded length of 6 pitches of thread (6P) is subjected to the tensile load. To meet the requirements
of this test, the fraclure shall occur in the shank or the thread of the bolt
and not at the junction of the head and the shank.
7.2.2 The speed of testing, as determined
wilh
Grips of testing machines should be self-aligning

a free running cross head, shall not exceed

to avoid side thrust on the specimen.

25 mmlmin.

7.3 Hardness Tests-For

routine inspection,
hardness of bolts, screws and studs may be determined
head, end or shank after removal of any plating or other coating and after suitable
preparation
specimen.

on the
of the

If the maximum hardness is exceeded, a retest shall be conducted

at the mid-radius
position, one
diameter back from the end, at which position the maximum hardness specified shall not be exceeded. In
case of doubt the Vickers hardness test is decisive for acceptance.
Hardness readings for Ihe surface hardness shall be taken on the ends or hexagon flats which shall
be prepared by slightly grinding or polishing
to ensure reproducible
readings. Vickers 300 g shall be the.
referee test for surface hardness lesting.
236

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part
7.3.1 Vickers
hardness testThe Vickers hardness test shall be carried
1501-1968 Method for Vickers hardness test for steel ( first revision 1.
7.3.2 Brine//
hardness festThe Brine11 hardness
test shall be carried
1500-1968 Method
for Brine11 hardness
test for steel ( first revision ).
7.3.3 Rockwell
hardness test1586-1968 Methods for Rockwell

3)-1979

out in accordance

out

in

accordance

The Rockwell hardness test shall be carried out in accordance

hardness test (B and C scales ) for steel ( first revision 1.

7.4 Proof Load Test for Full Size Bolls-The

proof

load test consists

a) application
of a specified tensile proof load; and
b) measurement
of permanent extension,
if any, caused
The arrangement
of the test is shown in Fig. 2.

of two operations,

by the proof

with

IS:

with

IS:

with IS :

as follows:

load.

LOAD
I
+X
REQUIREDSPHERE TO CONECONTACT
BETWEEN THE MEASURING POINTSAND
CENTRE DRILLED HOLES IN ENDS OF 8017

(ENLARGED)
X
ed

I=%
I LOAD
D according

to medium

series of IS : 1821-1967 Dimensions

FIG. 2 APPLICATION
7.4.1 The proof load shall be applied
held for 15s. The length

axially

of free thread

for cleararlce

holes for metric

bolts

( first revision )

OF PROOF LOAD TO FULL SIZE BOLT

to the bolt in a normal

above the nut should

tensile

testing

be 6 pitches

machine.

of thread

The full proof load must be

( 6P ).

7.4.2 For measurement

of permanent extetision,
the bolt shall be axially centre drilled (SO cone) at each
end. Before and after the application
of the proof load, the bolt shall be placed in a bench-mounted
measuring instrument
fitted with spherical
anvils. Gloves or tongs shall be used to ensure that the total of the
measuring equipment
inaccuracies
is less than +-5 ~1m.
The allowed

permanent

extension

is 12.5 pm.

7.4.3 The speed of testing, as determined

with a free running cross head, shall not exceed
grips of testing machine should be self-aligning
to avoid side thrust of the specimen.

3 mmlmin

and

7.4.4 Variables, such as straightness

and thread alignment
( plus measurement
error ), may result in apparent elongation
of the fasteners when the proof load is initially applied. In suqh cases, the fastener may
be retested using a 3 percent greater load, and may be considered
satisfactory
if the length after this
loading is the same as before this loading ( within the 12.5 p m tolerance for measurement
error ).
7.5 Test for Strength Under Wedge Loading of Full Size Bolts and Screws ( Not Studs )-The
distance from
the thread run-out of the bolt to the contact surface of the nut or fastening device shall be d. A hardened
wedge in accordance
with Table 10 shall be placed under the head of the bolt. A tensile test shall be continued until fracture occurs. The arrangement
of the wedge loading test is given in Fig. 3 and wedge dimensions in Table 10. The hardness of the wedge shall be HRC 45, Min.
7.5.1 To meet the requirements
of this test, the fracture shall occur in the shank or the thread of the bolt
and not between the head and the shank. The bolt shall meet the requirements
for minimum
tensile
strength, according to the values given foi the relevant property class, before fracture occurs.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

237

IS : 1367(Part

3)-1979

7.5.2 Screws threaded to the head shall pass the requirement of this test il a fracure which causes failure
originates in the free length of thread, even if it has extended or propagated into the fillet area or the head
before separation.
7.5.3 Bolts and screws shall meet the requirements for minimum tensile strength either during wedge
loading test or in a supplementary tensile test without a wedge.
Note-If

the wedge loading

test is applied,

the axial tensile

7.5.4 For product grade C, R should be according

R=

test is not required.

to:

rMax

+0.2

where
r Max _ d, Max - d, Min
2

MINIMUM WEDGE HARDNESS HRC 45

FIG. 3 WEDGE LOADING

TABLE
Nominal
Diameter of
Bolt and
Screw

10 WEDGE DIMENSIONS
( Angle OL &- 30)

R
For screws

with plain shank

>

mm

mm

mm

<6

0.5

0.7

0.8

0.8

>12<

20

1.6

1.3

.20<

39

3.2

1.6

4.6,

4.8,

5.6,

8.8,

9.8,

10,9

length

For screws

2d

Property

>6<12

OF FULL SIZE BOLTS

threaded

with plain shank

Property

Class
5.8,

6.8,

4.6,

4.8,

5.6,

12.9

8.8,

9.8,

10.9

to the head OI
length

< 2d

Class
5.8,

6.8,
12.9

10

Test for Machined

Test Pieces-The
impact test shall be carried out in accordance with IS :
1499-1959 Method of charpy impact test ( U-notch ) for steel. ihe test piece shall be taken lengthwise
located as close to the surface of the bolt or screw as possible. The non-notched side of the test piece shall
be located near the surface of the bolt. Only bolts of thread diameters216
mm and length255 mm can be
tested.
7.6 lrnpact

TABLE 11 VALUES OF ANGLE p

Property Class

Angle

238

fi

I
I

4.6

5.6

4.8

5.8

6.8

8.8

9.8

10.9

12.9

80

60

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-

PART

3)-1979

IS : 1367(Part
7.7 Head Soundness
Test-This
test is applicable
for full size bolts<Ml6
wedge load testing. The test shall be carried out as illustrated
in Fig.4.

Note -

lengths

too short

for

For C and R see Table 10.

FIG. 4 HEAD SOUNDNESS

7.7.1 When struck several
of 90--p
without showing

and with

TEST

blows with a hammer, the head of the bolt or screw should be bent to an angle
any sign of cracking at the fillet between shank and head.

7.7.2 Where screws are threaded up to the head, the test will be regarded as established
should appear in the first thread, provided that the head does not snap off.
7.7.3 This test can also be carried
obligatory.

out for longer

bolts,

but for referee

purposes

even if a crack

the wedge

load test is

7.8 Decarburization
Test-Using
the appropriate
measuring
method ( 7.8.2.1 or 7.8.2.2 as applicable),
the
cross-section
of the thread shall be examined to determine that the height of the zone of base metal ( E) and
the depth of the zone with complete decarburization
( G ) are within specified
limits ( see Fig. 5 ).
PARTlALLv

OECARBURlZCO

COHPLETELV

/
H,:EXTERNAL
MATERIAL

THREAD

BASE
HEIG~IT

OECARWRIZEO

METAL
IN THE

MAXIMUM

CONOlllON

FIG. 5 DECARBURIZATION TEST

Note-The
the thread

figure shown is only illustrative

and does not actually represent the partial and fully decarburized

zones in

section.

7.8.1 The minimum

value

7.8.2 Definitions-Base
core to outside diameter)
tion.

for E and the maximum

metal hardness-The
just before an increase

Decarburization-Generally,

the loss

value

for G shall

be as specified

in Table 3.

hardness closest to the surface ( when

or decrease occurs denoting carburization

Of carbon

at the surface

of commercial

traversing
from
or decarburiza-

ferrous

materials

(steels).
Partial decarburization-Decarburization
tempered martensite
and significantly,
lower

ferrite

with loss of carbon sufficient

to cause a lighter
hardness than that of the adjacent base metal.

Complete decarbufization-Decarburization
grains under metallographic
examination.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

with sufficient

carbon

loss to show only clearly

shade of

defined

239

IS : 1367(Part

3)-l 979

Carbon restoration-A
process of restoring
mosphere of properly controlled
carbon potential.
Carburization-A

process

7.8.2 Measurement

of increasing

surface

surface

carbon

carbon

loss by heat treating

to a content

in a furnace

at-

above that of the base metal.

Methods

7.8.2.1 Microscopic

method-This

method

allows

the delermiflation

of both Eand G.

The specimens to be used are longitudinal

sections taken through the thread axis approximately
one
nonlinal diameter from the end of the bolt, screw or stud, after all heat treatment operations
have been performed on the product. The specimen shall be mounted for grinding and polishing
in a clamp or plastic
mount. the latter being the preferred method.
After mounting,

grind and polish the surface

in accordance

with good metallographic

) solution

Etching in a 3 percent nital (concentrated

nitric acid in ethanol
changes in microstructure
caused by decarburization.
Unless otherwise

agreed between

the interested

parties,

practice.

is usually

100 x magnification

suitable

for showing

shall be used for examina-

tion.
If the microscope
is of a type with a ground glass screen, the extent of decarburization
directly with a scale. If an eyepiece is used for measurement,
it should be of an appropriate
cross-hair or a scale.
7.8.2.2 Hardness
hardness measurement

can be measured
type, containing
a

method-(
Referee method for partial decarburization
and carburization
method is applicable
only for threads with pitches of 1.25 mm and larger.

The hardness measurements

are made at three points
given in Table 3. The load shall be 300 g.

in accordance

with

Fig. 6. Values

)-The

for E are

HV2)cHVl -30
HVabHlr,+30

FIG. 6 HARDNESS MEASUREMENT METHOD FOR DECARBURIZATION TEST

Values

for E shall

be as specified

determination
determinations

in Table

12.

for point 3 shall be made on the pitch

at points 1 and 2 are made.

thread

Hardness
on which

Vickers

The Vickers hardness value of point 2 shall be equal

units. In this case the height of the non-decarburized

line of the thread

duelo

up to the maximum

Note-Careful
differentiation
must be made between
heat treatment rlr cold working of thesurface.

to the

to or greater than that at point 1 minus 30

zone E is at least as specified
in Table 3.

The Vickers hardness value at point 3 shall be equal to or less than that at point
units. An increase of more than 30 Vickers units indicates carburization.
Complete decarburization
ness measurement
method.

adjacent

specified

In Table 3 cannot

an increase

in hardness

1 pCus 30 Vickers

be detected

caused

by the hard-

by carburization

and that

7.9 Surface integrity Test-The

surface integrity test shall be carried out in accordance
with IS : 1367 ( Part
9)- 1979 Technical supply conditions
for threaded steel fasteners, Part 9 Surface discontinuties
on baits,
screws and studs ( second revision ).

240

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS

TAE?LE12VALUESFORHl

Pitch of the
Thread,

IHI

mm

iin

Property

mm,

Class

0.5

mm

0.307

II

0.368

3)--l

979

andE

0.7

0.6

: 1367(Part

0.6

0.429

0.491

[-Yq-qz-1

1 0.613 1 0.767 1 0.920 1 1.074 1

8.8,9.8

0.154

0.184

0.215

0.245

0.307

0.384

0.460

0.537

10.9

0.205

0.245

0.286

0.327

0.409

0.511

0.613

0.716

12.9

0.230

0.276

0.322

0.368

0.460

0.575

0.690

0.806

mm

2.5

3.5

mm

1.227

1.534

1.840

2.147

2.454

8.8.9.8

0.614

0.767

0.920

1.074

1.227

10.9

0.818

1.023

1.227

1.431

1.636

12.9

0.920

1.151

1.380

1.610

1.841

.
Pitch of the
Thread, P
HI

iin

Property

mrr

Class

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard was first published in 1961 and subsequently

revised in 1967. As a result of international agreements
arising from the work of lSO/TC 2, the international
committee
on fasteners, extensive
alterations
have come about which have necessitated
a thorough revision and substantial
additions to the
1967 version. For technical
and drafting
reasons alike the standard
has been divided into a number of
separate parts. The different parts are listed in Part 1.

makes

This part, which covers the mechanical

properties
and test methods
the followng
major modifications
from the 1967 version:
a) Property

classes

5.6, 5.8, 6.8 and 9.8 have been added

for bolts,

d) Mechanical
sizes<,16

hardness

for

higher

property

properties
applicable
to property
and others above M16.

e) Decarburization

limits

and studs,

and 6.6 deleted.

b) Minimum tempering temperatures

have been included for higher property
to 12.9 which are mandatory.
Retempering
test has also been added.
c) Limits of surface
carburization.

screws

classes

have

been

class 8.8 have been split

classes,

stipulated

that is, for 8.8

to eliminate

into two groups,

one for

have been modified.

In the preparation
of this standard,
considerable
assistance
has been derived from IS0 898/l
Mechanical
properties of fasteners, Part 1 Bolts, screws and studs ( Revision of ISOlR 898/l-1968)
issued
by the International
Organization
for Standardization.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

241

IS : 1367(Part

5)-1980

Indian Sfandard

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

THREADED STEEL FASTENERS
1

[s1

I
PART 5 MECHANICAL
PROPERTIES
AND TEST METHODS
SET SCREWS AND SIMILAR THREADED
FASTENERS
NOT UNDER

1. Scope-Covers
not under tensile
alloy steel.
1.1 This standard
-specified

TENSILE

FOR

STRESSES

the mechanical
properties and test methods of set screws and similar threaded fasteners
stresses in the size range M 1.6 up to and including M 39 which are made of carbon steel or

does not apply to screws

tensile

stresses

requiring

special

properties

such as:

( see IS : 1367 (Part 3)1979).

-weldability,
-corrosion
-ability

resistance,
to withstand

Note-Screws

and
temperatures

above

+ 300C or below --50C.

made from free-cutting steel should not be used above + 250C.

2. Designation
System-The
numerical part of the symbol
bol refers to hardness.

property
represents

classes are designated

by the symbols
shown in Table 1. The
1110 of the minimum Vickers hardness and the letter H in the sym-

TABLE 1 *DESIGNATION OF PROPERTY CLASSES IN RELATION TO VICKERS HARDNESS

FOR SET SCREWS
Property Class

Vickers

Hardness,

HV Min

14H

22H

33H

45H

140

220

330

450

3. Material-Set
screws shall be made of steel conforming
to the requirements
specified in Table 2. For pro)erty class 45H, other steels may be used provided that the torque test requirernents
in 5.4 are met.
!. Mechanical Properties-When
tested by the methods described in 5, the set screws shall have, at amlient temperature, the mechanical properties specified in Table 3.
5. Test Methods for Mechanical Properties

5.1 Hardness Test-Hardness

tests shall be conducted as near as practicable
to the centre position of the
loint ends of the screw. If the maximum
hardness is exceeded, a retest shall be conducted
on a crosssection 0.5 mm back from the point end. In case of doubt, the Vickers hardness test is decisive for accep:ance. Hardness readings for the surface hardness shall be taken on the end of the screw, which will be
Irepared by slightly grinding or polishing to ensure reproducible
readings.
5.1.1 Vickers hardness
test-The
Vickers hardness test shall be carried
1501-1968 Methods for Viokers hardness test for steel ( first revision ).

5.1.2 Brine/l hardness test-The

Brine11 hardness test shall be carried
1500.1968 Methods for Brine11 hardness test for steel ( fifsst revision ).

242

HANDBOOK

out in accordance

out

in accordance

ON INDUSTRIAL

with

IS :

with

IS :

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

TABLE

STEEL

SPECIFICATIONS

( Clause 3

Property

Chemical Composition, Percentage

Max

Max

0.11

0.15

I---FCarbon

Heat Treatment

Material

Class

Max

steel

5)-1980

Min

0.50

22H

Carbon

steel

:i

Quenched

and tempered

0.50

0.05

0.05

33H

Carbon

steel

Quenched

and tempered

0.50

0.05

0.05

45H

Alloy

Quenched

and tempered

0.50

0.19

0.05

0.05

Free-cutting
sulphur

steel

content

Steel

with

content

with

lead content

0 35 percent

Max, phosphorus

content

0 11 percent

Max and

Max.

is allrwed

lead

contain

may be used,

0.34 percent

Case hardening

Shall

;.,

steel

in thecaseof
0 35

square-head

Max may be used.

percent

one or more of alloying

set screws.

elements-chromium,

nickel,

TABLE 3 MECHANICAL
t Clause

molybdenum,

vanadium

or boron.

PROPERTIES

4 and Fig. 1 )
Property Class

Mechanical Properties

14H
Vickers

hardness

HV

22H

33H

45H

Min

140

220

330

450

Max

290

300

440

560

Min

133

209

314

428

Max

276

285

418

532

Min

75

95

Max

105

30

Brine11 hardness

HB

HRB
-

Rockwell

hardness

HRC
Torque

Minimum

Maximum
plete

Max

strength
height

decarburized

of nonzone

of com-

decarburization

Surface

hardness

Tempering

33

45

44

53

thread
depth

Min

HV 0.3

temperature,

E
G

C -1

see Table
112 H,

2/3 H ,

314 H,

mm

0.015

0.015

Max

320

450

580

M/n

400

350

I
No

complete

decarburization

-i The mean of three

Vickers points, when
minrrtes

permitted

in property

class

45H

hardness
readrngs on a screw tested before and after retempering
relempered
at a temperature
10C less than the specified
minimum

shall not differ more

tempering
temperature

5.1.3 Rockwell hardness test-The

rockwell hardness test shall be carried out in accordance
1586-1968 Methods for Rockwell hardness test ( B and C scales ) for steel ( first remion ).

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

than 20
for 30

with IS :

243

IS :1367(Part 5)-1980
5.2 Decarburization
Test-By
using appropriate
measurement
methods ( 5.2.2.1 or 5.2.2.2), the longitudinal
section of the thread shall be examined
to determine
that the height of the zone of base metal E, and the
depth of the zone with complete decarburization
G are within specified limits (see Fig, 1 ).
The minimum

value for E and the maximum

value

PARTIALLY

for G,shall

&SE
THREAD
CONDITION

in Table 3.

DECARBURIZED

CZO$dPLETELY

H,=ExTERNAL
MATERIAL

be as specified

DECARBURIZED

METAL

HEIGHT

IN THE

MAXIMUM

FIG. 1 DECARBURIZATION

TEST

5.2.1 Definitions
Base metal hardness-The
just
before an increase

hardness
or decrease

Decarburization-Generally,

closest
occurs

the loss of carbon

Parfiat decarburization-Decarburization
tempered martensite
and significantly

with sufficient

Carbon restoration-A
process of restoring
properly controlled
carbon potential.
process

5.2.2 Measurement

at the surface

of-commercial

ferrous

materials

with loss of carbon sufficient

to cause a lighter
lower hardness than that of the adjacent base metal.

Complete decarburization-Decarburization
grains under metallographic
examination.

Carburization-A

to the surface (when traversing from core to outside

denoting carburization
or decarburization.

of increasing

surface

surface

carbon

carbon

carbon

loss to show only clearly

loss by heat treating

to a content

above

diameter)

( steels ).
shade

defined

in a furnace

of

ferrite

atmosphere

of

that of the base metal.

methods

5.2.2.1 Microscopic
method-This
method allows the determination
of both E and G. The specimens to
be used are longitudinal
sections taken through the thread axis approximately
half a nominal diameter from
the end of the screw, after all heat treatment
operations
have been performed on the product. The specimen
shall be mounted for grinding and polishing
in a clamp or plastic mount, the latter being the preferred
method.
After

showing

mounting,

grind and polish

Etching in a 3.percent
nital
changes in microstructure

Unless
amination.

otherwise

agreed

the surface

in accordance

( concentrated
caused

between

nitric acid
by decarburization.

the interested

parties,

with a good metallographic

in ethanol

) solution

100 x magnification

is usually

shall

practice.
suitable

for

be used for ex-

If the microscope
is of a type with a ground
glass screen, the extent of decarburization
can be
measured directly with a scale. If an eyepiece is used for measurement,
it should be an appropriate
type,
containing
a cross-hair or a scale.
5.2.2.2 Hardness
hardness measurement
244

method-(
Referee method for partial .decarburization
and carburization
method is applicable
only for threads with pitches of 1.25 mm and larger.
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

)-The

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part
The hardness measurements are made at three points in accordance
given in Table 3. The load shall be 300 g.

with

5)-l

980

for E are

Fig. 2. Values

mm

HV22-HVj-30
HV3sHV,*30
FIG. 2 HARDNESS

MEASUREMENT

METHOD

Hardness determination for point 3 shall be made on the pitch line of the thread adjacent to the
thread on which determinations at points 1 and 2 are made.
The Vickers hardness value at point 2 shall be equal to or greater than that at point 1 minus 30
Vickers units. In this case the height of the non-decarburized zone E is at least as specified in Table 4.
The Vickers hardness value at point 3 shall be equal to or less than that at point 1 plus 30 Vickers
units. An increase of more than 30 Vickers units indicates carburization.
Complete decarburization
ness measurement method.

up to the maximum specified in Table 3 cannot be defected by the hard-

Note-Careful
differentiation must be made between an increase in hardness caused by carburization
due to heat treatment or cold working of the surface.

and that

TAeLE 4 VALUES FOR HI AND E

(Clauses 5.2.2.2, and Fig. 2 )

Pitch of Thread
p, mm

Ml

mm

0.5

0.307

1 0.6

0.366

0.7

0.429

0.6

0.491

0.613

1 1.25 1 1.5 1 1.75 1

0.767

0.920

1.074

1 2.5

1.227

1.534

1 3.5 1

1.840

2,147

2.454

i
I

1*22H 1 0.154 1 0.164 1 0.215 1 0.245 1 0.307 1 0.384 1 0.460110.537 1 0:614 1 0.767 1 0.920 1 1.074 1 1.227 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

E Min

mm

33l-f

0.205

0.245

0.286

0.327

0.409

0.511

0.613

0.716

0.818! 1.023

1.227

1.431

1.616

45H1

0.230

0.276

0.322

0.368

0.460

0.5.75

0.690

0.806

0.920

1.151

1.380

1.610

1.841

5.3 Surface Integrity Test-The Surface integrity test shall be carried out in accordance with provisions of
IS : 1367 ( Part 9. )-1979 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners: Part g Surface discontinuties on bolts, screws and studs ( second revision ).
5.4 Proof Torque. Test for Hexagon Socket Set Screws of Class 45H-Hexagon
45H shall conform to the torque requirements given in Table 5.

socket set screws of class

5.4.1 The set screw shall be inserted in a test block as shown in Fig. 3 until the top surface of the screw
face is flush with the test block and the point bears on a firm base, for example, a backing screw inserted
from the other side. Using a hexagon test bit with a tolerance of h9 for the widths across flats, with a
minimum widths across corners cf >1.13,.s/ Min and a hardness of 55 to 60 HRC, engaging the full depth of
the set screw socket, the screw shall withstand the test torque given in Table 5 without splitting or cracking.
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

245

IS : 1367(Part

5)-l 980
TORQUE

99

WRENCH

SCREW

UNDER

TEST

TEST BLOCK HRC 50min.

~ZRANCE
5~ FOR
THE INTERNAL
THREAD

&KING
HV -450

SCREW
TO 570

FIG. 3 DETAILS OF TORQUE TEST

TABLE 5 TORQUE REQUIREMENTS

I Clause 5.4 )

6. Marking
6.1 Marking of the Property ClassesMarking of screws with property classes as described in 2 is not
generally required. If in special cases marking is agreed between the purchaser and the supplier the symbol
of the property class should be used as the marking symbol.

246

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

EXPLANATORY

5)-l 980

NOTE

Consequent to the decision to revise IS : 1367-1967 and split it into separate parts, this standard
covers the mechanical properties and test methods for set screws also called as grub screws which are
not under tensile stresses. Since it is recognized that set screws are not tensile loaded as in the case of
bolts and screws, the property class system based on tensile test requirements is no longer applicable to
set screws. Hence a new designation system based on hardness has been evolved.
The nomenclature of grub screws has also been changed to set screws in keeping with International trends. Dimensions of slotted and hexagon socket set screws are covered in IS : 2388-1971 and IS :
6094-1971 respectively.
This standard is in conformity with ISOlDlS 898/V2 Mechanical properties of fasteners-Set
screws
and similar threaded fasteners not under tensile stresses, issued by the International Organization for
Standardization.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

247

IS : 1367(Part

6)-l

980

Indian Staridard

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

THREADED STEEL FASTENERS
PART 6 MECHANICAL
PROPERTIES AND TEST METHODS
NUTS WITH SPECIFIED PROOF LOADS

( Second
1. Scope-Covers
values.
1.1 It applies

the mechanical

properties

and methods

FOR

Revision )
of testing

for nuts with

specified

proof

load

to nuts:

a) with nominal

thread

diameters

up to and including

39 mm;

b) of IS0 metric screw threads and with diameters

and coarse pitches
1976 IS0 metric screw threads : Part 2 Diameter pitch combinations
c) with thread tolerances
6G and 4H to 7H;
d) with specific mechanical
requirements;
e) with width across flats for hexagonal products as specified
f)with nominal heights greater than or equal to 0.5 d; and
g) made of carbon steel or low alloy steel.
1.2 It does not apply
a) locking

to nuts requiring

abilities

special

properties

(see IS : 7002-1972 Specification

according
to IS : 4218 (Part 2)
(first revision).

in the product

standards;

such as:
for pervailing

torque

type steel hexagon

locknuts);

b) weldability;
c) corrosion
d) ability

resistance;

to withstand

Note 1 -Nuts

and
temperatures

made from free-cutting

above + 300C or below--50C.

steel should

not be used above + 250C.

Note 2-For
special products such as nuts for high-strength
structural
bolting
hotdipped galvanized
bolts, see the product standards
for appropriate
values.
Note S-For

assemblies

with threads

having tolerances

and overtapped

wider than 6g/6H, there is an increased

nuts for use with

risk of stripping.

Note ~--NO recommendations

are currently available for fine thread nuts. As an interim solution, for fine thread,
users may consider employrng nuts of one property class higher than that recommended
for coarse thread, for example, grade 12 nuts for grade 10.9 bolts.
2. Designation

System

2.1 Nuts with Nominal

HeightsZO.Bd
( Effective
Heights
of Thread>O.Gd
)-Nuts
with nominal
heights30.8d
(effective heights of threada0.6d)
are designated
by a number to indicate the maximum appropriate property class of bolts with which they may be mated.
2.1.1 A bolt or screw of a particular
property class assembled with the equivalent
property class of nut, in
accordance
with Table 1, is intended to provide an assembly capable of being tightened
to achieve a bolt
tension
equivalent
to the bolt proof load or yield load without
stripping.
Additionally,
geometry
and
mechanical
properties
of nuts up to property classes 12sM39
of 6H thread tolerance
are designed to provide for a high degree of resistance
to stripping (at least 10 percent bolt breakage of individual
lots even
under adverse minimum material conditions)
when inadvertently
over-torqued,
in order to warn the user that
his installation
practice is not appropriate.
2.2 Nuts
nominal
bination
parison

with Nominal Heights>OLid

and<0.8d
(Effective Heights of Thread20.4d
and<0.6d)-Nuts
with
heights>O.fid
and ( 0.8d (effective height of threadqO.4d
and<0.6d)
are designated
by a comof two numbers :(a) the first indicates that the loadability
of a bolt-nut assembly is reduced in comwith the loadability
of a hardened test mandrel and also in comparison
with a bolt-nut
assembly
described
in 2.1; and (b) the second indicates the proof load stress on a hardened test mandrel. The effective
loading capacity is not only determined
by its own hardness and the effective height of thread but also by
the tensile strength of the bolt with which the nut is assembled. Table 2 gives the designation
system and
the proof stresses of the nuts. Proof loads are shown in Table 5. A guide for minimum expected stripping
strengths of the joints when these nuts are assembled with bolts of various bolt classes is shown in Table 6.

248

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

TABLE 1 DESIGNATION

12
Note-in

general,

SYSTEM

FOR NUTS WITH NOMINAL

(Clause 2.1.1)

12.9

nuts of a higher

property

HEIGHTSy0.8d

all

class can replace

6)-l&O

nuts of a flower

property

class.

TABLE 2 DESIGNATION
SYSTEM AND PROOF STRESSES FOR NUTS WITH
NOMINAL HEIGHTS 2 0.5d and< 0.8d
(Clause 2.2)
Nominal Proof
Load Stress
N/mm*

Property Class
of Nut

Test Proof
Load Stress
N/mm*

04

400

380

05

500

500

3. Material-Nuts
Table 3.

shall be made of steel conforming

to the chemical

Table 3 LIMITS OF CHEMICAL

_ i
composition

limits

COMPOSITION

Chemical Composition Limits

(Check Analysis), Percent

C
Max

Min
Min

P
Max

s
Max

0.50

0.110

0.150

04*

0.58

0.25

0.060

0.150

lot

05 .f

0.58

0.30

0.048

0.050

12 t

0.58

0.45

0.048

0.050

4, 4*, 6
8, g

in

I
Property Class

specified

*Nuts of these property classes may be manufactured

from free-cutting
steel uniess otherwise
agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
In such cases the following maximum sulphur, phosphorus
and lead contents are permissible:
Sulphur 0.34 percent; phosphours
0.12 percent; and lead 0.35 percent.
j Alloying elements may be added if necessary to develop the mechanical
properties of the nuts.
3.1

Nuts of property

HANDBOOK

ON

classes 05, 8 (>M16),

INDUSTRIAL

10 and 12 shall be hardened and tempered.

FASTENERS-PART

249

c:

4.

Mechanical

mechanical

Properties-When
properties

given

TABLE
Nominal

tested
in Table

MECHANICAL

PROPERTIES

Size

Prod
Stress
S
N rnrn

To

05
Vlckers
Hardness
HV

Proof
Stress
S
N//mm

M7

M7

Ml0

THREAD)

M/I,

Proof
Stress
s
N mm

Max

Ml0

Ml6

Ml6

M39

Nominal

5
Proof
Hardness
HV

M/n

Proof
stress
S
N mm

Vuzkers
Hardness
HV
Mm

Max

Max

Mm

302

500

272

353

670

130

Size

Property
8
Proof
Stress
S
N m,n

Ml/J
800

1-70

Proof
Stres.
S
N ,,>,,I

Max

Pruof
Strtl~;s
s

900

170

915
940
950

188

Vlckers
Hardness
HV

Proof
Stress
s

Vlckers
Hardness
HV

Max
---I

M//l

I
302

12

10
Vtckcxrs
tiartlrls,
HV

170

Class

9,
Vlckers
Hardness
HV

720

146

630

302

Max

353

1150

295

272;

920

Note
~III!IIIU~
Nuts,
Nuts.

~~ Mlnlmum
hardness
Style
Style

hardness
IS provided

1 (for
2 (for

IS mandatory
for yoldance

sizes .&Ml61
all sizes above

3 mm)

only
only

W~WII ni~ts

cannot

302

700

610
117

150

680

302

590

510

Max

600

580
188

Vlckers
Hardness
HV

Proof
Stress
S
N mm

520

380

have the

Class

M4
M4

in 7, the nuts shall

4
Vlckers
Hardness
HV

MI/J Max

described

(COARSE

Pr0pert.y
04

Over

by the method

4.

be proof-load

tested,

or for

lleat-treated

nuts

For

all other

353

nllt2

5.

Proof

Load

Values-Proof

load

values

TABLE
Nominal
Sue

Pitch
of
the Thread

shall

PROOF

be as given

LOAD

in Table

5.

CO,iRSE

VALUES

THREAD

Property

Nominal
Stress
Area
of the
Mandrel

04

05

Class

10

12

5 03
6 78
8 78

1910
2 580
3 340

2 600
3 550
4 550

3 000
4 050
4 250

4 000
5 400
7 000

4 500
6 100
7 900

8 250
11700
16800

9 500
13 500
19400

11 500
16300
23 400

13000
18400
26 400

21600
34 200
51400

24 900
39 400
59 000

30 400
48 100
70 800

34 400
54 500
80 100

70 200

80 500

96 000

2 500
3 400
4 400

M3
M35
M4

05
:;

zz

08
1

20
14 21

5400
7 640

10000
7100

M7

28 9

11 000

14500

KO

115 25

36

1 75

::3

18300
29 000
42 200

-~

Ml2

22
13900
000
32 000

_.

115

43

700

57 500

Ml6
Ml8

z
25

157
192

59 700
73 000

78 500
96 000

97900

M20
M22
M24

25
25
3

245
303
353

93100
113 100
134 100

122500
152000
176 500

125000
154 500
180 000

154
190
222

400
900
400

176 400
218200
254 200

225 400
278800
324 800

225 400
278800
324 800

M27
M30
M33

3
3 !I
35

459
561
694

174400
213 200
263 700

229 500
280500
347 000

234
286
353

289
353
437

200
400
200

330500
403 900
499 700

422
516
638

300
100
500

422
516
G38

300
100
500

M36
M39

751
, 897

600
900

751
, 897

000
900

Ml4

817
976
1

310500
370900

408500
, 488 000

1;%%

100
100
900

416700
, 497 800

::z

514700
614 900

,
1

The Nominal

stress

area As is calculated

as follows

z::

588200
702 700

:;r,

2::

109

300

i::

;::

7 050
9150

7 800
10800

14800
20 900
30 100

16300
23 100
33 200

--I-486
594
753

500
700
600

550
673
832

800
200
Et-10

where
d, is the basic pitch diameter of threads on mandrel, and
da is the basic minor diameter of threads on mandrel.
Note-Values

for d, and d, are given in IS

: 4218 (Part 3)-1976 IS0 metric threads : Part 3 Basic dimensions

for design

profiles

(first revision)

IS

1367(Part

6)-1980

6. Failure Loads for Nuts with Nominal Height of OSd-The

values of failure loads given for guidance in
Table 6 apply to different bolt classes. Bolt stripping is the expected failure mode for lower strength bolts,
while nut stripping can be expected for bolts of higher property classes.

TABLE 6
Property Class

FAILURE

LOADS
Minimum Stress in the Core of
Bolt when Stripping Occurs
N/mm2

Proof Load Stress

of the Nut

of the Nut

for bolt with property class

6.8

(N/mm2)

I
I

0.4

380

05

500

260

300

I
290

370

12.9

10.9

8.8

1
I

330

410

350

450

I
I

7. Test Methods
7.1 Proof Load Test-The
proof load test shall be used wherever the capacity of available testing equipment
permits and shall be the referee method for sizes
M5. The nut shall be assembled on a hardened and
threaded test mandrel as shown in Fig. 1 and 2. For referee purposes, the axial tensile test is decisive.

LOAD

FIG. 1 AXIAL TENSILE

FIG.2

TEST

AXIAL

COMPRESSION

TEST

7.1.1 The proof load shall be applied against the nut in an axial direction,
and shall be held for 15 seconds.
The nut shall resist the load without failure by stripping or rupture, and shall be removable by the fingers
after the load is released. If the threads of the mandrel are damaged during the test, the test should be
discarded. (It may be necessary to use a manual wrench to start the nut in motion. Such wrenching is permissible provided that it is restricted
to one-half turn and that the nut is then removable
by the fingers.)

7.1.2 The hardness

of the test mandrel

shall

be Rockwell

C45 minimum.

7.1.3 Mandrels used shall be threaded to tolerance class 5h 6g except that the tolerance
diameter shall be the last quarter of the 6g range on the minimum material side.

75:

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

of the major

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

6)-1980

7.2 Hardness Test-For

routine inspection,
hardness tests shall be carried out on one bearing surface of
the nut and the hardness shall be taken as the mean of three values spaced 120 apart. In case of dispute,
the hardness tests shall be carried out on a longitudinal
section through the nut axis and with impressions
placed as close as possible to the nominal major diameter of the nut thread.
The Vickers

hardness

test is thereferee

test, and where practicable

a load of HV30 shall be applied.

test shall be carried out in accordance

test for steel (first revision).

with the provisions

of IS : 1501-1968

7.2.2 The Brine11 hardness test shall be carried out in accordance

Method for Brine11 hardness test for steel (firstrevision).

with the provisions

of IS : 1500-1968

7.2.1 The Vickers hardness

Method for Vickers hardness

7.2.3
The Rockwell
hardness
test shall be carried
IS : 1586-l
968 Methods
for Rockwell
hardness
test
7.3 Surface lntegfity
Test-For
the surface integrity
tions for threaded steel fasteners :Part lOSurface

out in accordance
with the provisions
(B and C scales) for steel (first revision)

of

test, see IS: 1367 (Part lo)-1979 Technical supply condidiscontinuities

on nuts (second revision).

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard was first issued in 1961 and revised in 1967. As a result of international
agreements
arising from the work of lSO/TC 2, the international
committee
on fasteners,
extensive
alterations
have
come about which have necessitated
a thorough revision and substantial
additions to the 1967 version. For
technical and drafting reasons alike the standard has been split into a number of parts. The different parts
in the revision are listed in Part I Introduction
and general information.
This part which covers the mechanical
properties
and test methods for nuts with specified
proof
loads cover the requirements
of commonly
used type of nuts, namely, standard height nuts and thin nuts.
Some of the major

changes

from the earlier

version

are as follows:

Depending on the nut heights, two styles of nuts, Style 1 and Style 2 have been developed.
Nuts of Style 1 are for property Classes 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10 and have heights
approximately
equal to 0.8d to 0.85d (d = nominal diameter). Nuts of Style 2 are for property Class 9 and compared to nuts of Style l!, nuts of Style 2 have a larger.maximum
height (around 1 d) which are
cold forged without the necessity of hardening and tempering. Nuts of property Class 12, which
are to be hardened and tempered, can be either Style 1 or Style 2. Style 1 nuts of property
Class 12 are, however, limited to sizes up to M16;

b)

Nut heights have been evolved to provide assurance

against thread stripping
of nuts. Proof
loads are, then, computed
for nuts at minimum
material
and minimum
strength conditions
when assembled
with the referee mandrel. The proof stresses corresponding
to Lhese loads
vary slightly from size to size. For simplicity
and also to account for non-standard
fasteners,
proof stresses have been fixed over certain size ranges within each property class;

(3 A new designation

system has been introduced

for thin nuts based on a ratio of 0.5d, since a
thin nut is not capable of developing the full strength of the bolt with which it is assembled.
Its
stripping strength will be inferior to the minimum tensile strength of the bolt;

d)

Minimum hardness values

be proof-load tested; and

e)

Proof load values have not been included for fine pitch threads, since it is recognized in such
cases the loadability
of nuts would be reduced and no recommendations
are yet available for
fine thread nuts (see Note 4 under 1.2).

have been specified

which are only mandatory

when the nuts cannot

The hexagon
nuts and hexagon
lock nuts (thin
nuts)
not conforming
to the dimensional
requirements
of Style 1, Style 2 and thin nuts shall be gradually
phased out of production
and use
after the Indian
Standards
covering
the former
types are revised
and implemented.
During
the

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRtAL

FASTENERS-PART

253

IS : 1367(Part

6)-l 980

transition
period designation
system,
bolt-nut
pairing,
mechanical
properties
and proof loads of the
former
types of nuts shall be as per IS : 1367-l
967
Technical
supply
conditions
for threaded
fasteners
(first revision).
Relevant
data from
IS : 1367-1967
is reproduced
below:

PREFERRED

PROPERTY

CLASSES

FOR

Property Class of Nut*

For use with bolts of property class

NUTS

12

4.6, 4.8

6.6

8.8

Proof load stress, kgf/mm?

40

60

80

120

Brine11 hardness HB, Max

302

302

302

353

30

30

30

36

Rockwell

hardness

HRC,

Max

10.9,

12.9

*Nuts of a higher strength property class may substitute the nuts of a lower strength property class.
tThe proof load is calculated by multiplying the proof load stress by the nominal stress area (AS) of the corresponding
bolt thread, where
dz = basic pitch diameter
d, = basic minor diameter

t
Nominal
Thread
Diameter
mm

PROOF

LOAD

FOR

NUTS

WITH

IS0

METRIC

COARSE

THREADS

l--

Pitch
of the
Thread
mm

Tensile Stress
Area of Test
Mandrel
mm*

Property
4

Class of Nut

12

8
Proof 1.oa d. kgf

0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
:
1.25
1.5
1.75
;
2.5
2.5
2.5
z
3.5
3.5
4
4

1.27
2.07
3.39
5.03
6.78
8.78
14.2
20.1
28.9
36.6
58.0
84.3
115
157
192
245
303
353
459
561
694
817
976

In the preparation
of the standard
Mechanical
properties of fasteners-Part
Organization
for Standardization.

254

51.5
1::
200
270
350
565
800
1 150
1 450
2 300
3 350
4600
6 250
7 650
9 800
12 100
14 100
18300
22 400
27 700
32 600
39000

76.0
120
z405
5%
850
1200
1700
2200
3 450
5 050
6900
9400
11500
14600
18100
21 100
27 500
33 600
41 600
49 000
58 500

100
165
270
400
540
1:!%
1600
2300
2900
4600
6700
9200
12500
15300
19 600
24 200
28 200
36 600
44 800
55000
65 200
78000

150
250
400
600
810
1 050
1 700
2 400
3 450
4 300
6 950
10000
13800
18800
23 000
29 400
36 300
42 300
55 000
67 200
t: ;::
107 000

considerable
assistance
has been derived from ISOlDlS 898111
II Nuts with specified proof load values, issued by International

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

7)-l

980

Indian Standard

1
m

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

THREADED STEEL FASTENERS

PART 7 MECHANICAL
PROPERTIES AND TEST METHODS
FOR NUTS WITHOUT SPECIFIED PROOF LOADS

( Second Revision )

1. Scope-Covers
the mechanical properties of nuts and similar threaded parts without specified proof load
values which are not covered by the scope of IS : 1367 ( Part 6 )-1980 Technical supply conditions for
threaded steel fasteners: Part 6 Mechanical properties and test methods for nuts with specified proof
loads ( second revision ).
1.1 This standard does not apply to nuts requiring special properties, such as:
a) Weldability,
b) Corrosion resistance, and
c) Ability
Note-Nuts

to withstand

temperature above + 3gOC or below--50C.

made from free cutting

steel should

not be used above 250C.

2. Designation System-The
property classes of such nuts are designated by a number suffixed by letter
H. The number indicates 1llOth of the minimum Vickers Hardness and the letter H refers to the hardness
(see Table 1).

TABLE

Property
Vickers

DESIGNATION

SYSTEM

OF PROPERTY

Class
Hardness

HV, Min

CLASSES

14H

17H

22H

140

170

220

3. Raw Material
3.1 Forged and Machined Nuts-The
chemical composition for forged nuts shall be as given in Table 2. This
may also be used for machined nuts if they are not made of free cutting steel.
.
TABLE 2 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF FORGED AND MACHINED
( FROM OTHER THAN FREE CUlllNG STEEL ) NUTS
Property Class

Chemical Composition Limits

( Check Analysis )
Carbon
Max percent

Manganese
Min percent

14H

0.50

17H

0.58

22H

*Nuts

0.58

of property

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

0.30

I
j

0.30

class 22H must be hardened

given in Table 4. If required,

Phosphorus
Max percent

and tempered

Sulphur
Max percent

0.110

0.150

0.060

0.150

0.048

0.058

in order to achieve

the mechanical

properties

alloy steel may also be used.

FASTENERS-PART

255

IS : 1367(Part

7)-l

980

3.2 Machined Nuts ( with Free Cutting Steel )

TABLE

3 CHEMICAL

COMPOSITION

FOR NUTS MADE OUT OF FREE CUTTING

Chemical Composition Limits (Check Analysis)

Property Class
Carbon
Max percent
14H.

STEEL

Phosphorus
Max percent

Lead
Max percent

Sulphur
Max percent

0.12

0.35

0.34

0.50

17H

I
4. Mechanical Properties
TABLE 4 MECHANICAL
Mechanical

Properties

Property Class
14H

17H

22H

Vickers Min

140

170

220

Hardness

220

250

300

HV5, Max

260 Max for cold forged

5.

PROPERTIES

nuts.

Test Method for Mechanical Properties

5.1 Hardness Test-The

1501-1968 Method

Vickers Hardness test shall be carried out in accordance

for Vickers hardness test for steel (first revision ).

EXPLANATORY

with the provisions

of IS :

NOTE

Consequent
to the decision to revise IS : 1367-1967 Technical supply conditions
for threaded steel
fasteners due to the work at international
level, separate parts have been formulated
for technical and drafting reasons alike. The different parts in the revision are listed in Part 1 Introduction
and general informatier?. The requirements
for nuts, which are not amenable to proof loading either due to their geometry or application,
are covered in this standard.
Although work is yet to be initiated at the international
level on nuts without specified proof loads,
the need for a national standard on the subject has been felt in view of a large number of nut-like threaded
and formed products which are in use. Such products cannot be classified.according
to definite test loads
or loading capacities,
but only according to their hardness values. For this reason the minimum hardness
has been adopted as the characteristic
feature. Maximum values have also been specified to guard against
a drop in the transverse toughness
due to excessive hardness.
The property
ing characteristics:
a) With
b) With
flats
c)With
d) With
e) With

classes

covered

in this standard

are applicable

for nuts with one or more of the follow-

nominal heights less than 0.5 d;

lesser across flats than those specified
in IS : 9519-1930
for hexagon head bolts and nuts.
threads other than triangular
IS0 metric threads,
nominal thread sizes above M 39; and
special configuration.

The property class designation

system
covered in the following
Indian Standards.

based on hardness

values

Dimensions

is applicable

for width

to the type of products

IS: 3468-1975Specification
for pipe nuts
IS: 5368-1969Specification
for thin slotted and castle nuts (dia range 6 to 52 mm)
IS: 67-31-1972 Specification
for locknuts, narrow series and lockwashers
with straight
rolling bearings (first revision)
modified

While the above Indian

in their revisions.

Standard

presently

specify

property

class

across

inner tab for

4, 6, 8, ate, the same

would

be

In the preparation
of the standard,
assistance
has been derived from DIN 267 sheet 4-1971
Schrauben,
Mutten Und ahuliche Gewinde-und
Formterte ( Bolts, screws, nuts and similar threaded and
formed parts-technical
supply conditions
of delivery-property
classes and test methods for nuts of
unalloyed or low alloy steels ) issued by Deutsches lnstitut fiir Normung ( DIN ).

256

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

9)-l 979

Indian Standard

1
m

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

THREADED STEEL FASTENERS

PART 9 SURFACE DlSCONTlNUlTlES

ON BOLTS, SCREWS AND STUDS
( Second Revision )

1. Scope-Covers
the manufacture

the allowable
limits for the various types of surface discontinuities
and processing of bolts, screws and studs in all property classes

Note-The

standard

may also be used for sizes outside

that may occur during

and in sizes M5 to M39.

the range specified.

2. Types of Surface Discontinuities

crack is a clean ( crystalline
) fracture passing through or across the grain boundaries and
may possibly follow inclusions of foreign elements. Cracks are normally caused by overstressing
the metal
during forging or other forming operations,
or during heat treatment.
Where parts are subjected to significant reheatings,
cracks usually are discoloured
by scale.
2.1 Crack-A

2.1.1 Quench cracks-These

may occur during heat treatment
transformation
stress. Quench cracks usually traverse an irregular
the fastener. Typical quench cracks are shown in Fig. 1.
OUENCH

CRACK

OUENCH

CRACK

NER

OF

due to excessively
and erratic course

high thermal and

surface of
on the

EXTENDING

AT

HEAD
TRANSVERSE

SECTION

AA

H CRACK
ADJACENT

GITUOINAC

QUENCH

CIRCUMFERENTIAL
TO FILLET

CRACK
CRACK

NCH

CRACK

LLV AN
IN SHANK

ACROSS

EXTENSION

OR SIDE

OF

TOP
OF

OF

ACROSS

FACE
AND TO DEPTH
ER FACE
THICKNESS

HEAD.

CRACK

HEAD

NCH
NCH

Note--Quench

CRACK,AT

cracks of any depth, any length or in any location

FIG. 1 TYPICAL

HANDBOOK

ON

INDlJSTRlAL

CRACK

ROOT

FASTENERS-PART

QUENCH

are not permissiblediscontinuities.

CRACKS

257

IS : 1367(Part

9)-1979

2.1.2Forging cracks-These
may occur during the cut-off or forging operations
of the heads of screws and bolts. Typical forging cracks are shown in Fig. 2.

FORGING

Note-Forging

cracks

are permissible

discontinuities

CRACK

if within

FIG. 2 TYPICAL

ON TOP

and are located

on the top

OF HEAD

the limits specified

in 3.4.

FORGING CRACKS

2.2 Seams (or Laps)Seams ( or laps ) are generally inherent in the raw material from which fasteners are
manufactured.
They are narrow,
generally
straight
or smooth
curved
line discontinuities
running
longitudinally
on the shank head or thread. Seams may extend into the tops of the heads of circular head
products as well as being present at the periphery of the head. Seams may also extend into the chamfer circle, washer face and wrenching flats of hexagon head products. Typical seams are shown in Fig. 3.

SEAW,LISUALLV

SlRAlGHl

OR

OTH

LINE

DlSCONflNUllV

UNNING

CURVED
LONGITUDIN

SEAM

USUALLY

STRAIGHT

+
0k
SEAM
OF

ON

HEAD

SIDE

OF

OR

HEXAGON

OF FORMED

HEAD

AN0

1OP

PRODUCI

--

Note-Seams

(or laps) are permissible discontinuities

if within the limits specified in 3.5.

FIG. 3 TYPlCAL SEAMS (OR LAPS)

258

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

9)-l 979

2.3 Burst-A

burst is an open break in the surface of the metal ( material ). Bursts may occur during forging
or circular head proon the flats or corners of the heads of bolts and screws, at the periphery of flanged
ducts, or on the raised periphery of indented head bolts and screws. Typical bursts are shown in Fig. 4.

SMEAR BURSI

BURST

SHEAR

BURST

BURST
IL-

Bursts in circular head product, with or

without recess are permissible
discontinuities
if within the limits specified in 3.6.2

Bursts in raised periphery of indented head

bolts and screws are permissible
discontinuities
if within the limits specified in 3.6.3
Note-Bursts

and shear bursts

are permissible
FIG. 4

discontinuities

TYPICAL

if within

BURSTS AND SHEAR

the limits specified

in 3.6.

BURSTS

2.4 Shear Burst-A

shear burst is an open break in the metal occurring most frequently
at the periphery of
products having circular or flanged heads, and is generally
located at approximately
45 to the product
axis. Shear bursts may also occur on the sides of hexagon head products. Typical shear bursts are shown in
Fig. 4.
2.5 Void-A
void is a shallow pocket or hollow on the surface of the bolt or the screw due to nonfilling
metal during forging or upsetting. Typical voids are shown in Fig.5.

Note-Voids

are permissible

FIG. 5
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

discontinuities

TYPICAL

FASTENERS-PART

if within

the limits

VOIDS ON BEARING
1

specified

of

in 3.7.

SURFACE
259

IS : 1367(Part

9)-l

979

2.6 Fold-A
fold is a doubling over of metal which may occur during the forging operation.
Folds may occur
at or near the intersection
of diameter
changes and are especialiy
prevalent
with noncircular
necks,
shoulders and heads. Typical folds are shown in Fig. 6.

TYPICAL

CLOVER

NON-CIRCULAR

LEAFFOLO
SHOULDER

IN
FASTENERS

FOLD

AT

EXTERIOR

CORNER

INTERIOR

Note-Folds
exterior

corners

in interior corners at or below the bearing surface are not permissible

are permissible discontinuities
if within the limits specified in 3.3.

FIG. 6 TYPICAL

CORNER

discontinuities.

Folds at

FOLDS

2.7 Tool Marks-Tool

marks are longitudinal
or circumferential
grooves of shallow depth produced by the
movement of manufacturing
tools over the surface of the bolt or the screw. Typical tool marks are shown in
Fig. 7.
7001

Note-Tool

marks are permissible

discontinuities

MARKS

if within

the limits specified

in 3.6.

FIG. 7 TYPICAL TOOL MARKS

2.8 Nick or Gouge ( Damages )-Damages
like nick or gouge is an indentation
on the surface of a bolt or
screw produced by forceful abrasion or the impact of a product coming into contact with another product or
a manufacturing
equipment
during manufacture
and transport
of bolts and screws, for example during
charging.
3. Limits For Surface

Discontinuities

3.1 Letter Definitions-Throughout

the following
requirements,
designates
the nominal size ( basic major
diameter of thread ) of bolts, screws and studs, except for bolts and screws with shoulders,
in which case
it designates
the largest shoulder diameter. d, designates
the nominal flange diameter or head diameter of
products
having circular heads. t designates
the actual key engagement
depth in the socket of socket
screws. d, d, and t are in millimetres.

260

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

3.2 Quench Crachs--Quench

and Fig. 1 ).

cracks

of any depth, any length or in any location

3.3 Folds-Folds
located in internal corners, at or below the bearing surface,
junction of the head and shank, are not permitted ( see 2.6 and Fig. 6 ).
3.4 Forging

IS : 1367(Part

9)-l 979

are not permitted

(see 2.2.1

for example,

in Ihe fillet at the

Cracks

3.4.1 Forging cracks on the top of the heads of bolts and screws, except socket
length of 1 d or a width or depth of 0.04 d (see 2.1.2, Fig. 2, and Table 1 ).

screws, shall nol exceed a

TABLE 1 LIMITS OF DISCONTINUITIES OF BOLTS, SCREWS AND STUDS

(Clauses 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.6.3 and 3.9 )

.
Pitch
of the
Thread
Pmm

Nominal
Thread
*Diameter

Forging Cracks +
Width or
Depth, mm

Length
mm

d
nun

Nicks and
Gouges
Assembly
Torque
N.nl

Max

Max

Max

Max

Max

0.8

0.20

0.15

0.30

0.30

0.24

0.18

0.35

0.36

0.42

0.42

0.48

0.48

0.28

0.21

1.25

0.32

0.24

1.5

Bursts in
Indented
Head Products
Width, mm

Seams
Depth,
mm

10

1
1

10

0.40

0.30

0.60

0.60

12

1.75

12

0.48

0.36

0.72

0.72

14

14

0.56

0.42

0.84

0.84

16

16

0.64

0.48

0.96

0.96

18

2.5

18

0.72

0.54

1.1

1.1

20

0.80

0.60

1.2

1.2

0.88

0.66

1.3

1.3

0.96

0.72

1.4

1.4

1.1

0.81

1.6
1.8

__.

I
;

2.5

20

-_

_-.

2.5

22

22
.-

24

24

27

27

30

3.5

30

1.2

0.90

33

3.5

33

1.3

1.0

36

36

1.4

1.1

39

39

1.6

1.2

Reference

to Clause

d equals nominal
case d equals

3.4.1

shoulder

2.4

3.5

size of bolt, screw

the largest

or stud, except

diameter.

All limits

3.6.3

when the product

given

2.2

in Table

3.9

has a shoulder,

1 are for products

in which
without

shoulder.
t Limits
for socket

HANDBOOK

for forging

cracks

are for all bolts,

head screws

are given in Table 2.

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

screws

and studs

except

socket

head screws.

Limits

261

IS : 1367(Part

9)-l

979

3.4.2 :orging cracks in socket screw heads which extend from the socket to the periphery of the head are
not permissible.
Cracks originating
on the periphery and with a traverse indicating
a potential
to intersect
are not permissible.
Other longitudinally
oriented cracks are permissible,
providing those located in the
bearing area, fillet, and top surface shall not have a depth exceeding
0.03 d and those located in the
periphery shall not have a depth exceeding 0.06 d or 1.6 mm, whichever is smaller ( see Fig. 8 and Table 2 ).

PERMISSIBLE
HAN

IF II

HALF

TnE

OOES

rHE

NOT

EXTEND

MORE

DISTANCE

BETWEEN

OF

ANO

PERIPHERY

HEAD

SOCKET

PERMISSIBLE
NECTS
AN0

MISSIBLE

PERMISSIBLE
INrERSECTlNG

(POTENTIAC

HEAD

IHIS

/PERMISSI~~LE

CRACKS

IN
ONLY

DIRECTION

LONGITUO~NAL

~~RwrrE0

PERMISSIELE
OR

WITHIN

O.lt

SOCKET
discontinuities

II

HEAD

AREA1

(BOTTOM

of permissible

OF

DISCONTINUITIES

PERMlSSlELE

Note-Limits

IF

SOCKET

HlSSl9LE

DISCONlINUITIES~

tt(~o

EDGE

OF

BOTTOM

BOTTOM

IN

THE

AREA

SOCKET)

OF

OF

NOT

SOCKET

SOCKEl

DlSCONTlNUlTlES

are specified

FIG. 8 DISCONTINUITIES

AT
OF

IF

in 3.4.2 for head and in 3.4.3 for socket.

IN SOCKET

HEAD SCREWS

3.4.3 Forging cracks in socket screws which are located in the socket wall within 0.1 t from the bottom of
the socket are not permissible.
Cracks located elsewhere in the socket shall not have a length exceeding
0.25 t or a depth exceeding 0.03 d or 0.10 mm ( see Fig. 8 and Table 2 ).
3.5 seams (or Laps)-Seams
(or laps ) in the shanks of bolts, screws and studs shall not exceed a depth of
0.03 d. Seams extending
into the sides of heads and flanges of fasteners which do not open beyond the
limits specified for bursts are acceptable (see 2.2., Fig. 3 and Table 1 ).
3.6 Bursts

and Shear Bursts

3.6.1 No burst in the flats of hexagon bolts and screws shall extend into the crown circle on the top of
head surface (chamfer circle ) or into the under head bearing surface. In addition, bursts occurring at the intersection
of two wrenching
flats shall not reduce the width across corners below the specified minimum
(see 2.3 and Fig. 4 ).
262

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

91-1979

3.6.2 Flanges of bolts and screws and peripheries of circular head products may have bursts or shear
bursts. For a product with only one burst, the maximum width of the burst shall not exceed 0.08 d, (see 2.3,
2.4 and Fig. 4 ).
3.6.3 Bursts in the raised periphery of indented head bolts and screws shall not exceed a width of 0.06 d,
or have a depth extending
below the indented portion ( see 2.3, 2.4 and Fig. 4 and Table 1 ).

TABLE 2 LIMITS OF FORGING CRACK DISCONTINUITIES

ON SOCKET

HEAD SCREWS

( Clauses 3.4.2 and 3.4.3

Nominal

Pitch

Longitudinal

Longitudinal

Thread

of the

in Bearing Area,

in Periphery

Depth,

Diameter

Thread

Fillet and Top

of Head Depth,

mm

mm

mmICYI
d

36

P,

0.6

Surface Depth,

Reference

to Clause

0.15

Socket Wall

mm

1 0.30

I 0.15
c

1.1

1.6

1.1

3.4.2

3.4.2

3.4.3

3.7 Voids on Bearing Surface-Voids

on the bearing surface of bolts and screws shall not exceed a depth of
0.25 mm or 0.02 dl whither is greater, and the combined area of all voids shall not exceed IO percent of the
specified minimum area of the bearing surface. The method for determining
area of voids shall be as agreed
upon by the purchaser and the manufacturer
( see 2.5 and Fig. 5 ).
3.6 Tool Marks-Tool
marks on the bearing surface shall not extend into the junction of head to shank and
shall not exceed a surface roughness measurement
4 of 3.2 ,u m determined
as the arithmetic
average
deviation from the mean surface ( see 2.7 and Fig 7 ).
3.9 Nicks and Gouges (Damages)-Dents,
nicks
ed length shall not be of size or number to prevent
plication
of a torque in Nm not exceeding
0.06
manufacture
and handling of bolts and screws to
( see 2.6 and Table 1 ).

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

and gouges located in the first three threads of the threadassembly of a GO thread gouge on the thread with the apd. The manufacturer
shall exercise due care during the
minimize the number and magnitude of nicks and gouges

263

IS : 1367(Part

9)-l

979

3.10 Thread Discontinuities-Threads

of property class 8.8, 9.8, 10.9 and 12.9 bolts, screws and studs shall
have no laps at the root. In addition, for fasteners of property classes 10.9 and 12.9 laps in the load bearing
flaks are not permissible.
Laps at the crest, which do not exceed 25 percent of the basic thread depth, and on
the flanks beyond the pitch diameter are permissible.
Slight deviation from the thread contour is permissible
at thecrest of thethreads(seeFig.9).

MAJOR

OIA

MAJOR

OIA

do_____.

PERMISSIBLE
LAPS

ANO

SEAMS

FIG. 9 THREAD

4. Inspection

Procedure for Surface

4.1 Bolts, screws

4.2 Reference

and studs

shall

DISCONTINUITIES

Discontinuities

be inspected

for surface

discont-inuities.

Inspection

4.2.1 For referee purposes, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser in the original inquiry
order, inspection
shall be in accordance
with the procedures
outlined in 4.2.2 and 4.2.3.

or purchase

4.2.2 Visual inspection-A

representative
sample with size as given in Table 3 shall be picked at random
from the lot. The sample shall be examined
visually for quench cracks, bursts and shear bursts, forging
cracks, folds, tool marks, seams, voids on the bearing surface and nicks and gouges.
4.2.2.1 If any part is found with quench
surface, the lot shall be rejected.

cracks

or with folds at internal

corners,

at or below the bearing

4.2.2.2 If any part is found with seams, bursts, shear bursts, forging cracks, tool marks, voids or nicks
and gouges which exceed the allowable
limits as specified for the applicable
type of discontinuity
under 3,
the lot shall be rejected.
TABLE 3 SAMPLE

SIZE FOR VISUAL AND SEAM INSPECTION

( Clauses

Lot Size

4.2.2 and 4.2.3

Sample Size

Sample Size

Visual and

Destructive

Non.Destructive

Inspection

Inspection
up to 1 500
1501to

15

5 000

25

5 001to 15 000

50

15 001 to 50 000

75

50 001 and over

100

10

264

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

9)-l 979

4.2.3 Inspection
for seams-A
representative
sample with a size as given in Table 3 (if acceptable
by
visual inspection ) shall then be examined for seams ( see Note 2 ) by deep ( surface ) acid etch or magnetic
inspection
techniques
( Magna-glo, Magnaflux, eddy current, etc ).

Note 1 -Other

examining procedures
of the size specified in 3.5

tinuities

may be used providing

they have an ability

to detect discon-

Note P-During

indications
sometimes

inspection for seams, attention should also be given to examining

the product for
showing transverse quench cracks, or folds in internal corners as these discontinuities
are
not readily seen in visual examination.

All parts showing indications

which could be interpreted
as seams shall be set aside. From this
group, a secondary sample with a size as given in Table 4 shall be picked at random and each part in this
sample sectioned through the shank perpendicular
to the axis and etched for microscopic
examination.
The section should be through the unthreaded
body adjacent to the thread runout. For bolts and screws
which are threaded to the head, the section should be taken where the seam indication
intersects
the
root of the thread at a distance of approximately
one d from the underside of the head. During the
microscopic
examination
if any part is found having a seam with a depth in excess of the limit specified
in 3.5, the lost shall be rejected.

TABLE 4

SAMPLE SIZE FOR MlCORSCOPlC

EXAMINATION
OF PRODUCTS WITH SEAM INDICATIONS

Sample Size

Number of
Products Showing
Seam Indications
1

2
3

3
4to

100

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

Consequent
to the decision to revise IS : 1367-1967 due to the work at the International
level,
separate parts have been formulated
for technical as well as drafting reasons. The requirements
of surface discontinuities
on bolts and nuts are being introduced
for the first time in the technical supply conditions for fasteners. The present revision is being issued in parts. The complete list of various parts is
given in Part I Introduction
and general information.
The allowable
limits
Technicai supply conditions
revision ).

for surface discontinuities

in nuts are covered in IS : 1367 ( Part lo)-1979
for threaded steel fasteners: PartlOSurface
discontinuities
of nuts (second

In the preparation
of this standard, considerable
assistance
has been derived from ISO/DIS 615711
Fasteners surface discontinuities:
Part I Bolts, screws and studs with thread sizes M5 to M9 issued by
International
Organization
for Standardization.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

266

IS : 1367(Part

10)-l

979

Indian Standard

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

THREADED STEEL FASTENERS
PART 10 SURFACE

DISCONTINUITIES

( Second

Revision

ON NUTS

1. Scope-Covers the allowable limits for the various types of surface discontinuities
that may occur during
the manufacture and processing of nuts, in all property classes and in thread sizes M5 to M39.
Note-The

standard

may also be used for sizes outside

the range specified

2. Types, Causes and Appearance of Surface Discontinuities

2.1 Cracks-A

crack is a clean and crystalline

fracture passing through or across grain boundaries and may
possible follow inclusions of foreign el,ements. Cracks are normally caused by overstressing
the metal during forming operations
or during heat treatment. After significant
reheating, cracks are usually discoloured
by scale.

2.1.1 Quench cracks-Quench

cracks may occur during heat treatment
and transformation
stresses. They usually traverse an irregular and erratic
Typical quench cracks are shown in Fig. 1
QUENCH

CRACK

due to excessively
high thermal
course on the surface of the nut.

IN THREAD

77

/QUENCH

QUENCH

CRACK

FIG. 1

2.1.2 hclusion Cracks-Inclusion

in the raw material. Typical

herent

CRACK

TYPICAL

QUENCH

CRACKS

cracks are normally caused by non-metallic

inclusion cracks are shown in Fig. 2A.

inclusions

or Stringers

in-

2.1.3 Forging cracks-Forging

cracks may occur during the cut-off or forging operations
and are located
on the top and bottom face of the nut, and at the intersection
of the face and flat. Typical forging cracks
are shown in Fig. 2A and 28.

266

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRiAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part
2.1.4 Locking element cracks-Locking
element cracks are ususally located
element of prevailing torque nuts and may be either on the external or internal
ment cracks are shown in Fig.3.

INCLlJSlON

in the vicinity of the locking

surface. Typical locking ele-

IN TOP OR

CRACKS
FACE

lo)-1979

OR IN THREADS

FORGING

CRACKS

8OTTOM

IN

TOP

INTERNAL

CRACKS

FACE

/ EXTERNAL

CRACK

2A
FIG. 2

INCLUSION

FIG. 3

AND FORGING CRACKS

LOCKING

ELEMENT

CRACKS

2.2 Seams-Seams
are generally
inherent in the raw material and, in nuts, are narrow, usually straight or
smooth-curved
line discontinuities
running generally parallel to. the nut axis. Seams in raw material used for
the manufacture
of forged or formed nuts may lead to the formation of bursts ( see 2.3 ). Typical seams are
shown in Fig. 4.

LSEAMS,

SOMETIMES

IN BURSTS
OF

FIG. 4 TYPICAL

EXAMPLES

FLANGED

AT

OPENING

PERIPHERY
NUTS

OF SEAMS

2.3 Bursts and Shear Bursts-Bursts

and shear bursts are open breaks in the surface
may occur on the flats or corners of nuts or at the periphery of the flange of flanged
2.3.1 Shear bursts are located
the periphery of flanged nuts.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

at approximately

FASTENERS-PART

of the metal.
nuts.

Bursts

45 to the axis of the nut. They occur most frequently

at

267

IS : 1367(Part
2.3.2 Typical

10)-l
examples

979
of burst and shear burst are shown

FIG.5

in Fig 5.

1YPICAL EXAMPLES OF BURST AND SHEAR BURST

2.4 Folds-A
fold is doubling over of metal which may occur during the forging operation.
Folds in nuts may
occur at or near the intersection
of diameter changes or on the top or bottom face of the nut. Typical examples of folds are shown in Fig. 6.

FOLD ON TOP OR
\ BOTTOM FACE

LFOLD

&LDS

ON SIDES

FOLD
OF

Al

PERIPHERY

BEARING

ON FLANGED

SURFACE
NUTS

FIG. 6 TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF FOLDS

2.5 Voids-A

void is a shallow pocket or hollow on the surface of a nut due to non-filling

of metal, or pressing in a chip from the shear plane into Lhe surface of a nut during forging or upsetting. Typical examples of
voids are shown in Fig. 7.
268

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

FIG. 7 TYPICAL EXAMPLES

IO)-1979

OF VOIDS )

2.6 Washer Retainer Cracks-A

washer retainer crack is an opening in a lip or hub of metal used for captivating a washer on a nut. Washer retainer cracks may occur when pressure is applied to the lip or hub during assembly of the washer. Such cracks are limited to the contour of the hub or lip used for retaining purposes. Typical washer retainer cracks are shown in Fig. 8.
WASHER

RETAINER

CRACKS

FIG. 8 TYPICAL WASHER RETAINER CRACKS

2.7 Tool Marks-Tool
marks
movement of manufacturing

are longitudinal
or circumferential
grooves of shallow depth produced by the
tools over the surface of the nut. Typical tool marks are shown in Fig. 9:
RKS ON
SURFACE

L MARKS FROM
TRJMMtNG OPERATION
FIG. 9 TYPICAL TOOL MARKS

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

269

IS : 1367(Part

IO)-1979

2.8 Nicks and Gouges (Damages)--A

nick or gouge is an indentation

on the surface of a nut produced by
of product coming into contact with other product or manufacturing
equip-

forceful abrasion or the impact

ment during manufacture.

3. Limits for Surface Discontinuities

3.1 Cracks
3.1.1 Quench cracks-Quench
Fig 1 ) shall not be permitted.

cracks

of any depth, any length

or in any location

on a nut (see 2.1.1 and

3.1.2 Inclusion and forging cracks -Inclusion

and forging cracks (see 2.1.2,2.1.3, and Fig. 2) shall be permitted provided that the nuts having such defects meet both the dimensional
requirements
and the criteria
of one of the functional
tests specified in 4.3.
Inclusion

and forging

cracks

located

in the top and bottom

faces of nuts shall be permitted

provided

that:
a)
b)
c)
d)

there are no more than two forging cracks which extend across the full width of the face;
no cracks extend into the tapped hole beyond the first full thread;
no crack in the thread exceeds a depth of 0.5 x thread height; and
the width of any forging crack does not exceed 0.3 mm or 0.02xbasic
major diameter of thread,
whichever is the greater.

3.1.3 Locking element cracks-Locking

element cracks (see 2.1.4 and Fig. 3) located on the external surface shall be permitted provided that the nuts meet all the applicable torque specifications
and the criteria of
one of the functional
tests specified in 4.3.
Locking element cracks located on the internal surface, threaded
two thread pitches in length. The width of cracks shall not exceed;
a) 0.18 mm for thread
b) 0.25 mm for thread
c) 0.40 mm for thread

a) 0.013 D for nuts of thread

provided

not exceed

nuts of thread

that the open width at the surface

is not

sizes M5 to M36, and

b) 0.02 D for nuts of thread sizes greater than M36,

where fY is the nominal size ( basic major diameter
In addition,
specified in 4.3.

shall

sizes M5 to MlO,
sizes Ml2 to M22, and
sizes over M24.

(see 2.2 and Fig. 4 ) shall be permitted

3.2 Seams-Seams
greater than:

or unthreaded,

sizes

M5 to M36 shall

of thread

).

meet the criteria

of one of the functional

tests

3.3 Bursts and Shear Bursts-Bursts

and shear bursts ( see 2.3, and Fig. 5 ) located at the intersection
of
face and flat shall be permitted provided that they do not have an open width greater than 0.25 mm + 0.025
W,, where W, is the nominal width across flats.
Bursts

and shear bursts

on the flanges

of flanged

nuts shall be permitted

a) for a product

having

only one burst, the maximum

b) for a product

having

two or more bursts,

0.04 dC and this shall be not greater

where

dc is the normal

flange

provided

that:

with of the burst does not exceed

only one burst shall

have a maximum

width

0.08 d,, and

exceeding

than 0.08 dc

diameter.

3.4 Folds-Folds
(see 2.4, and Fig. 6) located at the intersection
of the flange periphery and at the bearing
surface of flanged nuts shall be permitted provided that they do not project below the bearing surface. Other
folds shall be permitted and shall not be cause for rejection of otherwise acceptable
nuts.
3.5 Voids-Voids
( see 2.5, and Fig. 7 ) on the bearing
have a depth greater than:

270

surface

a) 0.25 mm for nuts of thread

sizes M5 to M24; and

b) 0.02 D for nuts of thread

diameter of thread).

sizes

greater

than

shall be permitted

M24, where

HANDBOOK

provided

D is the nominal

ON INDUSTRIAL

that they do not

size ( basic major

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

lo)-1979

The combined area of all voids shall not exceed:

a) 5 percent of the bearing surface for nuts of thread sizes M5 to M24; and
b) 10 percent of the bearing surface for nuts of thread sizes greater than M24.
The methods for determining
manufacturer.

the area of voids shall be as agreed upon by the purchaser and the

3.6 Washer Retainer Cracks-Washer

retainer cracks (see 2.6, and Fig.8)
be cause for rejection if limited to the contour of hub or lip.

shall be permitted and shall not

3.7 Tool Marks-Tool

marks (see 2.7, and Fig. 9) on the bearing surface of nuts shall be permitted provided
that they do not exceed a surface roughness measurement, 4, of 3.2 p m, determined as the arithmetic
deviation from the mean surface. Tool marks on other surfaces shall be permitted and shall not be cause for
rejection of otherwise acceptable nuts.
3.6 Nicks and Gouges ( Damages )--Nicks and gouges (see 2.8) shall be permitted. The manufacturer shall
exercise due care during the manufacture and handling of nuts to minimize the number and magnitude of
nicks and gouges.
4. Inspection Procedure for Surface Discontinuities
4.1 General-

Nuts shall be inspected for surface discontinuities.

4.2 Referee Inspection

4.2.1 For referee purposes, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser in the original
chaseorder, inspection shall be in accordance with the procedures outlined in 4.2.2.

inquiry or pur-

4.2.2 A representative sample with size as given in Table 1 shall be picked at random from the lot. The
sample shall be examined visually for quench cracks, forging cracks, locking element cracks, seems,
bursts, shear bursts, folds, voids on the bearing surface, and tool marks on the bearing surface.
,
TABLE 1 SAMPLE SIZE FOR VISUAL INSPECTION

Sample Size

Lot Size

15
25
50
75
100

Up to 1 500 inclusive
1 501 to 5 000
5001 to 15000
15 001 to 50 000
50 001 and over

4.2.2.1 If any nuts with quench cracks are found, the lot shall be subject to rejection.
4.2.2.2 If any nuts are found with forging cracks, locking element cracks, seams, bursts, shear bursts,
folds, voids, or tool marks, which exceed the allowable limits specified for the applicable type of discontinuity in 3, the lot shall be subject to rejection.
4.2.2.3 Nuts showing indication during the visual inspection of having significantly deep seams, forging cracks, inclusion cracks, or locking element cracks on external surfaces, shall be tested in accordance
with 4.3. If any nut fails to meet the criteria of this test, lot shall be subject to rejection.
4.3.1 Cone proof load tests
4.3.1.1 Purpose and principle-The
purpose of the test is to detect the presence of detrimental seams
or cracks. The use of a conical washer exaggerates the influence of such defects on the load-bearing ability
of the nut by introducing a simultaneous dilating and stripping action.
4.3.1.2 Apparatus
a)

HANDBOOK

The conical washer ( see Fig. 10) shall have a minimum hardness of 57 HRC. The contact point
of the cone, for nuts of thread sizes M5 to Ml2 Inclusive, shall be sharp. For nuts of thread
sizes greater than M12, the point shall be flat and shall have a width of 0.38 f 0.03 mm.

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

271

10)-l 979

IS : 1367(Part
b)

Mandrel
except

shall

be hardened

that major

diameter

( minimum
shall

hardness

45 HRC) and threaded

be the minimum

major diameter

to class 6 g tolerance

+ 0.05 mm.
0

4.3.1.3 Procedure-The
nut and cone washer shall be assembled on the mandrel as shown in Fig. 11.
The cone washer shall bear against a nut face which is flat and nominal to the nut axis. Apply the specified
cone proof load ( see 4.3.1.4) to the nut.

CONTACT
/XNT

tr!
120

I
I
I

SNORE

NOM DIA OF
MANOREL+C$05

mm

LOAD

FIG. 10 CONICAL WASHER

4.3.1.4 Calculation
the formula;

FIG. 11 TEST ASSEMBLY

of specified

cone proof load-The

specified

cone proof load, PL, is calculated

from

PL, ( 1 - 0.012 0)
where
PL, = the specified
D= the nominal
4.3.1.5. Creteria-The
4.3.1.4.
4.3.2 Widening

nut shall

axial

proof load in kilonewtons,

and

size of the nut in millimetres.

support

its specified

cone

proof

load calculated

in accordance

with

test

4.3.2.1 Purpose and principle-The

purpose of the test is to determine
the ductility
of a nut in a circumferential
direction. After removal of the thread, a tapered mandrel is pushed into the nut. The widening
is measured as a percentage of the hole diameter ( maxmium major thread diameter ).
4.3.2.2 Test mandrels-Two
test mandrels are specified for routine tests, the mandrel showq in Fig. 12
shall be used for measurement
of widening
up to 6 percent, that in Fig. 13 is intended for comparative
measurements
for referee
purposes. They shall have minimum hardness of not less than 45 HRC and the
cone shall be polished ( maximum roughness depth, /$,, 2.5 pm ),
4.3.2.3 Procedure-Prior
to the test the mandrel shall be lubricated with molybdenum
The mandrel is inserted into the nut as shown in Fig. 14 and load applied concentrically
tinuous manner. The mandrel shall be tightly clamped at the upper end.
4.3.2.4 Criteria-The

total

widening

of nuts shall

be not less than:

a) 4 percent

for nuts in property

class 04 and 05, and

b) 6 percent

for nuts in property

classes

Quench

cracks

shall

not be permitted

disulphide
M&Q )
in a low and con-

4 to 12.

even if nuts having

such defects

meet the widening

criteria.

In cases of doubt, when nuts are made from very ductile material, the influence of surface discontinuities
may be inspected by comparing
the widening of defective nuts with that of nuts free from defects
both specimens being selected from the same lot. The mean value of widening of defective parts shall be at
least half of the mean values of nuts free from defects, but individual results shall, in no case, be less than 4
percent for nuts in property groups 04 abd 05, or 6 percent for nuts in property groups 4 to 12.

272

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

101-l 979

- Q, 1.06 0 Il.0401

F
1.2 m
m

1
1.5 m

D = Nom Thread Dla

m E Nom Height of Nut

FIG. 12 TEST MANDREL

WIDENING

FOR

FIG. 13

UP TO 6% (OR 4%)

TEST MANDREL

MEASURING

FOR

TEST

LOAt9

JiAJOENEO

*D P Nom Thread

Dla

FIG. 14 TEST ASSEMBLY

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

273

IS : 1367(Part 10)-l 979

Nuts free from any obvious cracks, made from free-cutting steel and in property classes 5 and 6
shall permit at least 5 percent widening, this value being the mean obtained from three tests. No individual
value, however, shall be less than 3 percent.
Failure of a nut occurs when the wall of the nut breaks entirely before the minimum specified widening value is obtained. In cases of doubt, the fracure may be recognized when the nut is cut on the opposite
side and then falls into two single parts.
If comparison measurements are made, and the nuts are particularly
minated when a maximum widening value of 20 percent is obtained.

EXPLANATORY

ductile, the test shall be ter-

NOTE

Consequent to the decision to revise IS : 1367-1967 due to the work at international level, separate
parts have been formulated for technical and drafting reasons alike. The requirements of surface discontinuities on bolts and nuts are being introduced for the first time in the technical supply conditions. The different parts are listed in Part 1 Introduction and general information.
The allowable limits for surface discontinuities
in bolts, screws and studs are covered in IS : 1367
( Part 9 )-1979 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners: Part 9 Surface discontinuities
on
bolts, screws and studs ( second revision I.
In the preparation of the standard, considerable assistance has been derived from
6157/11-1979 Fasteners-Surface
discontinuities:
Part II Nuts with thread sizes M5 to M39.
274

ISOlDlS

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

12)-1981

Indian Standard

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

THREADED STEEL FASTENERS
PART 12 PHOSPHATE

COATINGS
( Second

ON THREADED

Revision

FASTENERS

1. Scope-Covers
threaded steel fasteners with coating consisting of zinc phosphate that is intended lo be
used in conjuction with a sealant for protection against corrosion.
2. Phosphate coating shall be sealed with suitable oil of rust-preventive

type.

3. Mass of Phosphate Coating-The mass of coating that consists of zinc phosphate shall have a coating
weight of 2.5 g/m2 to 4.5 g/m2 of treated surface.
4. Designation-The
designation of a bolt or screw with phosphate coating shall include the letter P for
phosphating. see also IS : 1367 (Part 1 e)-1979 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners :
Part 16 Designation system and symbols (second revision)

Example :
A hexagon-head bolt conforming to, for example, IS : 1364, of size M 20, length 75mm, product
grade A, property class 6.8 and with phosphate coating shall be desiganated as:

HEX BOLT M 20 X 75 IS : 1364-A-8.8-P.

5. Inspection, Sampling and Testing

5.1 Freedom from Defects-The
surface of phosphate coated fasteners shall be matt without any excessively crystalline appearance. They shall be free from untreated patches and from flaky and uneven
deposits.
5.2 Verification
Appendix A.
5.3 Dimensional

of Coating-A

chemical method for verifying the presence of a phosphate coating is given in

Accuracy

53.1 In case of unthreaded features, dimensions apply before coating.

5.3.2 For threaded features, the permissible dimensional variations will be applicable before coating.
However, after coating, the threads shall not transgress the maximum material limit for tolerance position
H or h. If required by the purchaser, fasteners may be checked at random for dimensions afler dephosphating.
5.4 Test for Mass of Coating-Test
for mass of coating shall be in accordance with IS : 618-1966 Phosphate
treatment of iron and steel for protection against corrosion.
5.5 Test for Resistance to Corrosion-The
resistance of sealed fasteners to corrosion shall be tested in the
laboratory by means of Salt Spray Test as described in Appendix 6. The tested fasteners shall be practically
rust free after the stipulated duration.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

275

I : 1367(Part

12)-1981

APPENDIX

( Clause

5.2 )

CHEMICAL TEST FOR THE PRESENCE OF A PHOSPHATE COATING

A-1. Reagent-Dissolve
8 g of ammonium
molybdate
hydrochloric
acid ( d = 1.14 ), 20 g ammonium
chloride
tion. The reagent shall be freshly prepared.

A-2, Procedure-Add
indicates

one drop of the reagent

the presence

A plain

in 80 ml of distilled
water. Add 12 ml concentrated
and 10 ml of saturated potassium
persulphate
soiu-

to the test surface.

coating.

of a phosphate

untreated

fastener

shall

The appearance

of a blue colour within

30 s

be used as control.

APPENDIX
( Clause

5.5 )

SALT SPRAY TEST

B-1. Test Equipment
B-1.1 The equipment required for Salt Spray Test consists of a fog chamber, a salt solution reservoir, a supply of suitably conditioned
compressed
air, one or more atomizing nozzles, specimen supports, provision for
heating the chamber, and necessary means of control.
The size and detailed construction
of the equipment
are optional, provided the conditions
obtained
meet the requirements
of this test. The chamber shall be insulated
to avoid temperature
gradients,
particularly with a chamber temperature
of 35C-t2C.
With small cabinets, this is conveniently
effected by
means of a double skin construction,
incorporating
a water jacket for temperature
control.
B-1.2 Drops of solution which accumulate
fall on the specimens
being tested.
B-1.3 Drops of solution
spraying.

which

on the ceiling

fall from the specimen

or cover of the chamber

shall

not be returned

shall

not be permitted

to the solution

reservoir

to

for re-

B-1.4 The spray from the atomizing

nozzle or nozzles shall be prevented from impinging directly on the test
specimen by means of suitable baffles. The solution condensing
on the baffles may be returned to the salt
solution
reservoir; this can effect a substantial
economy in rate.consumption
of the solution. Adjustable
baffles are of assistance
in obtaining
a uniform collection
rate throughout
the test zone of the chamber:

B-1.5 Materials of construction

shall be such that they will not affect
or certain plastic materials
are suitable ).

the corrosiveness

of fog (glass,

B1.6 The equipment shall be sited so as to be in diffused light and away from radiators
heat and draughts in order to facilitate
temperature
control.

rubber

or other sources

of

B-2. Test Samples

B-2.1 The number of test specimens

shall be defined in the specifications
purchaser and the supplier
B-2.2 Select

samples

to be used, as well as the criteria for the evaluation

of the product being tested or shall be mutually

of the fasteners

which

are free from accidental

damage

of the test results,

agreed upon by the

and dirt.

B-3. Position of Specimens during Test

B-3.1 The specimens shall be suspended by cotton, nylon or any suitable thread vertically. Unless otherwise
specified, the specimens shall be supported between 15 to 30from the vertical and preferably parallel to
the principal direction of horizontal flow of fog through the chamber. The test specimens shall be at least 30
mm from any other specimen and 3 mm from any wall of the chamber.
B-3.2 The specimens

shall

not contact

B-3.3 Each specimen

shall

be so placed

B-3.4 The salt solution

276

each other

from one specimen

or any metallic

as to permit
shall

material.

free settling

not be allowed

of fog on all specimens.

to drip on to any other

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

specimen.

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

12)-1981

B-4. Test Solution

B-4.1 Preparaiion of Solution-Dissolve
50 +5 g sodium chloride in each litre of distilled or deionized water
or water containing less than 100 ppm of total dissolvedisolids and substantially free from dissolved heavy
metals particularly nickel, copper and iron. The pH of the solution shall be such that, when atomized under
the test condition, the collected solution will be in the pH range of 6.5 to 7.2.
B-5. Air Supply
B-5.1 The compressed air supply to the nozzle or nozzles for atomizing the salt solution shall be free from
oil, oil vapour and dirt, and shall be maintained between 0.67 bar and 1.72 bar ( 1 bar 1 kglcrr? ).
B-5.2 The air shall be saturated with moisture by means of water wash or humidifying tower, after suitable
filtration. It is preferable to operate the tower at temperature well above the chamber temperature to ensure
wet fog to offset heat losses and to maintain
the required temperature in the chamber. The tower
temperature should be adjusted, so that both the collection rate and composition of collected fog are kept
within the specified limits. For guidance, the following table shows lower temperature at different air
pressures required to offest the cooling effect of expansion at the nozzle or nozzles to atmospheric
pressure with a chamber temperature of 35C.

Airpressure, bar

0.8

1.0

1.1

1.2

Temperature,

45.4

47.2

48.4

49.5

The nozzle or nozzles may be operated intermittently

by means of a suitable timer and relay actuating a solenoid valve in the air supply, providing that the fog is maintained continuously. This provides
means of adjusting the collection rate and it also ensure a more consistant fog distribution with minimal
directional effects.
B-6. Test Conditions
B-6.1 Temperature-The

exposure zone of the test chamber shall be maintained

at 35+-2C.

B-6.2 Atomization and Quality of Fog-At

least two clean fog collectors shall be placed in the exposure
zone in the proximity of the test specimens, one near to a nozzle and another as far as possible from nozzle.
They shall be positioned so that no test solution falling from the test specimen is collected. The fog shall be
such that for each 8000 mm2 of horizontal collecting areathesewill becollected in each collector from 1 to2
ml of solution per hour determined over an operating period of at least 16 hours. (Standard laboratory glass
funnels or dishes with 100 mm dia have horizontal area of 8000 mm2 ).Thecollected spray solution shallcontain50 *log/l
of sodiumchloride(specificgravity
1.0255 to 1.040.0at 25C)andpHshall
be6.5t07.2.
B-7. Continuity of Test
B-7.1 Unless otherwise specified in the specifications
of the product being tested, the test shall be continuous for the duration of the entire test period. Continuous operation implies that the chamber be closed
and the spray operating continuously except for the short daily interruptions necessary to inspect; rearrange, or remove test specimens, to check and replenish the solution in the reservoir, and to make
necessary recordings. Operation shall be so scheduled that these interruptions are kept at a minimum.
B-6. Period of Test
B-6.1 The period of test shall be 48 hours.
B-9. Procedure
B-9.1 The following procedure shall be carried out :
1) Expose the specimen in the cabinet for the specified period.
2) Remove the specimen, wash in cold running water and dry off.
B-9.2 There shall be no rust formation on immediate visual examination.
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

277

IS : 1367(Part 12)-l 981

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

Consequent to the decision to revise IS : 1367-1967, splitting it into separate parts, this standard on
requirements for phosphating of fasteners has been formulated. Although IS : 3618-1966 Phosphate treatment of iron and steel for protection against corrosion covers the general requirements for phosphating, a
need was felt for special requirements of fasteners.
In the preparation of this standard, assistance has been taken from BS : 3189-1973 Phosphate treatment of iron and steel, issued by the British Standards Institution.

278

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

13)-1983

Indian Standard

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

THREADED STEEL FASTENERS
m1

PART 13

HOT-DIP

GALVANIZED

THREADED
( Second

COATINGS

ON

FASTENERS

Revision

1. Scope-Covers
the requirements for-zinc coating applied by hot-dip galvanizing
having IS0 metric coarse threads, in the nominal size range Ml2 to M36.
Note-60
metric coarse threads below Ml2 and all IS0 metric
dip galvanized without difficulty
of assembly of bolt and nut.

fine pitch

on bolts, screws and nuts

theads,

generally

cannot

be hot-

2. General Requirements-The
quality of zinc, bath temperature and the process of galvanizing in general,
shall conform to IS : 2629-1966 Recommended practice for hot-dip galvanizing of iron and steel.

2.1 Galvanizing

shall be carried out by hot-dip process.

2.2 For bolts and screws of property class 10.9 and higher or nuts of property class 10 and higher, particular
care shall be exercised in acid pickling or cathodic cleaning prior to galvanizing to avoid risk of hydrogen
embrittlement.
2.3 The galvanizing process shall provide for substantial diffusion of hydrogen. Bolts of property class 10.9
or higher and nuts of property class 10 and higher shall be baked at a temperature of 200C for a period of.
30 minutes. Appendix A gives information on embrittlement phenomenon and the possibility of embrittlement occurring in fasteners due to severe cold working, over-pickling, etc.
2.4 The fasteners after galvanizing,

shall meet the physical

properties of the relevant standards.

3. Dimensions
3.1 Fasteners with lfiternal Threads-Prior
to galvanizing and subsequent tapping the dimensions of
fasteners with internal threads shall conform to the relevant standards. Internal threads shall be tapped
over-size after galvanizing and they shall be oiled for corrosion protection.

3.1.1 The oversize tapping allowance shall be as given in Table 1. These allowances are applicable to major, pitch and minor diameters, the amended diameters being subject to the same manufacturing tolerances
of the appropriate grade of threads stated in the relevant fastener standard.
TABLE 1 ALLOWANCES
FOR INTERNAL THREADS TO ACCOMMODATE
GALVANIZED
EXTERNAL THREADS

Nominal Size

Diametral

Internal Threads
Below Ml6
Ml6 to M22
Over M22 and
UD to and including

Allowance
mm

+ 0.40
+ 0.50
+ 0.65

M36

3.2 Fasteners with External Threads-Prior

to galvanizing, the dimensions
threads shall conform to the relevant standards including thread sizes.

of fasteners

with external

3.2.1 The thickness of galvanized coating on external threads shall be so controlled in the galvanizing
process that galvanized fasteners with external threads can be assembled by hand with internally threaded
fasteners complying with 3.1.
82.2 Galvanized external threads shall not be recut.
4. Coating Requirements
4.1 Mass of Coating-The
mass of coating per square metre of the surface shall comply with the minimum
average and minimum individual sample coating given in Table 2. The mass of coating shall be determined
by one of the following methods:

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

279

IS : 1367(Part

13)-l

983

a) The stripping

test described

in Appendix

B; or

b) Magnetic
or electronic
thickness
measuring
devices as covered in IS : 3203-1965
testing
local thickness
of electroplated
coatings.
The mass of coating
in g/m
multiplying
the thickness in micrometres
by 7.0.
4.1.1 In case of dispute,

the stripping
TABLE 2

test shall

( Clause 4.1

THICKNESS

OF COATING

f->-L--7

Minimum Individual
---7

r--

Mass
g/Ii+

Thickness
Pm

37

Thickness

Mass

pm
43

g/d
300

4.2 Uniformity
of Coating-The
withstand
the copper
sulphate
coating
on zinc coated articles
copper
upon the base metal

uniformity
of zinc coating
shall be such that the coating
shall
test as given in IS : 2633-1972
Methods
of testing
uniformity
of
(first revision)
without
showing
any adherent
red deposit of metallic
with
the following
exceptions:

a) A fine line of copper on the crest of the screw threads or on sharp edges of bolt/nut
adjacent to any cut or abrasion present in the original fastener shall not be considered
to cause rejection, and
b) Any deposit
galvanizing,
4.3 Adhesion

of metallic copper
is allowable.

of Coating-The

of
by

be the referee test.

MASS AND EQUIVALENT

Minimum Average

Methods
is found

coating

with threads

shall

withstand

of fasteners

which

have been rethread

the knife test as covered

or at or
a defect

rolled

after

in IS : 2629-1966.

5. Appearance and Defects-The

galvanized
coating shall be continuous
and free from defects, such as
blisters, flux stains, dross, excessive projections
or other imperfections
which would impair serviceability.
The causes for these defects, remedial measures and grounds for rejection are given in Appendix A to IS :
2629-1966 (for terminology
also see IS : 2629-1966).
6. Sampling
6.1 Selection
to be tested

of Specimens for Testing-For

testing the requirements
at 4 and 5, the number
shall be selected at random in accordance
with Table 3.

TABLE 3

NUMBER

of specimens

OF TEST SAMPLES
Number of Test

Total Number of Fasteners

In Batch

Samples

Up to and including 500

501 up to and including

35 000

Over 35 000

6.2 RetesfsShould any one of the samples selected fail to meet the requirements
at 4 and 5, twice the
number of samples first taken shall be so tested, and if any one of these fails the batch represented
by the
samples shall be rejected or the batch may be re-galvanized
and resubmitted
for testing.

A PPENDIX
( Clause 2.3 )

EMBRllTLEMENT
A-O. GeneralFor steel fasteners
to be in the embrittled
condition
after hot-dip
galvanizing
is
rare, and its occurrence
depends
on a combination
of factors.
Under certain
conditions,
some
steels may loss their ductile
properties
and become
embrittled.
The following
information
is given
as a guidance
in critical
applications.
280

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

13)-1983

A-1. Strain.Age
Embrittlement-Strain-age
embrittlement
occurs when steels of certain compositions
are
gged following cold working. Steels made by the Bessemer process are generally more susceptibleto
strainage embrittlement
than those made by the open hearth, electric or oxygen process; aluminimum
killed steels
are the least susceptible.
Embrittlement
can occur very slowly even at ambient temperatures;
the galvanizing
the least susceptible.
Embrittlement
can occur very slowly even at ambient temperatures;
the galvanizing
process, involving immersion
in a bath of molten zinc for up to 5 minutes at a temperature
of about 450C
can greatly accelerate
the process.
Manufacture
of fasteners commonly involve cold working in the form of upsetting, thread rolling, etc.
Where it is known that a steel susceptible
to strain-age embrittlement
has been used, the fasteners should
be stress relieved before glavanizing.
A.2. Hydrogen Embrittlement-Hydrogen
embrittlement
can occur in steels of high tensile strength (greater
than 1 000 MPa ) or high surface hardness due to case hardening or cold working. It results from the absorption of atomic hydrogen generated
at the steel surface by processes, such as acid pickling or cathodic
cleaning.
The galvanizing
process should itself serve to provide substantial
diffusion of hydrogen. Where additional safeguard is sought ( as for bolts of Grade 10.9 or higher, cleaned by acid pickling ), fasteners should
be baked at a temperature
of 200 klOC,
for a time found on the basis of experience
to be adequate. (For
guidance, a time of 30 minutes before galvanizing
or 4 nours immediately
after galvanizing,
might prove
satisfactory.)

APPENDIX
( Clause

STRIPPING
B.l.Solution

Required-The

following

Antimony chloride solution-20

dissolved in 1 000 ml of concentrated
Hydrc.chloric

acid-

6
4.1 )

TEST FOR MASS OF COATING

reagentsare

required:

g of antimony trioxide
hydrochloric
acid.

concentrated(spgr

1.14to

( S~Q C& ) or 329 of antimony

trichloride

( SbC13)

1.19).

B-2. Preparation
of Samples for Test-The
test samples shall preferably be full size or for larger fasteners
may be a section cut from the shank unless otherwise agreed between the manufacturer
and the purchaser.
The test sample in case of nuts shall be one complete
the nut shall exclude threaded hole.
The samples
which will not attack
solution of sulphuric
shall be finally dried

nut and the calculation

of the surface

area of

shall be cleaned by dipping them in benzene (C,H,) or other suitable organic solvent
the zinc coating, wiping dry with a clean soft cloth, and then dipping into a two percent
acid at 15.6-21.1 C for 15 seconds and thoroughly
rinsing in clear water. The samples
by wiping with a clean soft cloth.

B-3. Procedure-The
samples shall be weighed to the nearest 6.01 g. The zinc coating shall then be stripped
from each sample by completely
immersing
the sample in any convenient
volume of solution, made by adding 5 ml of antimony chloride solution to each 100 ml of concentrated
hydrochloric
acid. The temperature
of the strlpping solution shall not exceed 38C.
The same solution may be repeatedly used without
til the time for stripping become inconveniently
long.

further

addition

of antimony

chloride

solution

un-

When the evolution of hydrogen has ceased or when only a few bubbles are being evolved, the sample shall be removed from the solution, scrubbed under running water, and then dried by wiping with a clean
soft cloth and heating to about 100C and cooling.
The stripped.sample
shall then be weighed, the surface
zinc coating per unit area of the surface calculated.
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

area measured

and the average

mass of the

281

IS : 1367(Part 131-l 983

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

The requirements for hot-dip galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners were earlier covered in IS :
5358-1969 Hot-dip galvanized coatings on fasteners. Consequent to the decision to revise IS : 1367-1967
Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fastener (Nrst ravision)splitting
it into many parts, it was felt
appropriate to publish hot-dip galvanized coatings on threaded fastenersas one of its parts.
In the preparation of this standard considerable assistance has been derived from AS : 1214-1973
Hot-dip galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners Issued by Standards Association of Australia.

282

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

16)-l 979

Indian Standard

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

THREADED STEEL FASTENERS
PART 16 DESIGNATION SYSTEM
AND SYMBOLS
( Second Revision )
1. Scope-Covers

the designation

2. Designation-The

system and symbols used in designating

sequence for arranging

the designation

threaded fasteners.

shall be as follows:

Nomenclature

Type

Size

Fastener
Combination

IS : No.

Product
Grade

Property
Class

Form
Feature

Surface
Protection

Note l-It is not necessary that all the parameters given above should appear in a designation. The above parameters
shall be included in designation only when a selection is to be made from more than one for a given parameter.
Note 2-Form featuresare to be Included in designation,
product as specified in the product standard.
2.1 Examples of designation

only when such features do not already form a part of the

for various parameters are given below:

Parameters

Reference

Examples

Nomenclature

Product Standard

Hex Bolt, etc

Types *

Product Standard

A, B, C, etc

Size

Product Standard

M5 x 25, etc

Fastener combination

Table 1

N. NN. SN. etc

Indian Standard No.

Product Standard

IS : 1364, etc

Grades

See 2.3

A, B or C

see Table 2

4.6,

Form features

See Table 3

RS, SH, etc

Surface protection

See 3

GALV, P, etc

Mechanixal

properties

*It is recommended that type designation

2.1.1 Example

7-A

4.8,
a,etc

should be avoided as far as possible in product standards,

stud of Type A, having nominal thread diameter 5 mm,length 25mm as per IS: 1662,
product grade A, property class 6.6 with undercut on nut end and with phosphate
coating is to be designated as:
Stud AM5 x 25 IS : 1662-A-6.6~UC-P

Example

2-A

hexagon head bolt having a nominal thread diameter 16 mm, length 70 mm as per
IS : 1363 with a hexagon nut to be designated as:
HexBoltM16x70N-IS:1363

2.1.2 The designations

for bolts, screws and studs are given in product standards,for

Hex Bolt M20 ~75-1s

example:

: 1364-B-6.6

The standard on bolt may allow different forms of thread ends and other features to be adopted at
the discretion of the manufacturer. However, if a special form from this standard is required by the

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

283

IS : 1367(Part

16)-1979

customer the respective symbol has to be included in the designation,

bolt with a half dog point ( HDP ).
Hex Bolt M20 x 75-1s : 1364-B-8.8-HDP
2.1.3 In case more than one symbol is required in the designation,
starting from the head to the thread end of the bolt.
If required the following

for example for the above hexagon

the sequence of designation

shall be

shall be included in designatiorr:

Form of head, for example with slot ( HS )

Form of shank, for example full shank ( FS )
Form of thread end, for example half dog point (HDP)
Example : Hex Bolt M20 X75-K

: 1364-B-8.8-HS-FS-HDP

2.1.4 In case of left hand thread the symbol LH has to be added along with the thread size, for example:
Hex Bolt M20 LH x 75-lS:1364-B-8.8
2.2 The designating

symbols for standard fastener combinations

shall be as given in Table 1.

TABLE 1 FASTENER COMBINATIONS

Fastener Combinations

2.3 The designating

2.4 The designating

Symbols

Bolt/Screw

with a hexagon

nut and locknut

Nbl

Bolt/Screw

with a hexagon

nut

Bolt/Screw

with two hexagon

Bolt/Screw

with a square

nuts

NN
SN

nut

symbols for product grades shall be grade A, B.and C,

symbols for mechanical properties shall be as given in Table 2.
TABLE 2 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Fasteners

Property Class Symbols

Bolts, screws and studs with full loadability

4.6,4.8,5.6,5.8,6.8,8.8,9.8,10.9,

Nuts with full loadability

4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10 and 12

Nuts with reduced loadability

04,05

Set screws

14H, 22H, 33H, 45H

Nuts without

specified

proof loads

and 12.9

14H, 22H

,
2.5 The designating

symbols for typical form features are given in Table 3.

TABLE 3 FORM FEATURES

uo.

Features

Threaded

Typical Figure

up to the head

Designation Symbol

Full shank

(continued)

284

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

Table 3 Form Features -

Reduced
3.

shank (shank

w pitch diameter

Confd
Typical Figure

Features

40.

diameter

16)-1979

Designation
Symbol

RS

SE

4.

Sheared

5.

Chamfered

6.

Rounded

7.

Fiat point

FP

8.

Half, full dog point

HDP, FDP

9.

Cone point

TP

10.

Cup point

CP

11.

Undercut

UC

12.

Hexagon

13.

Split

14.

Scrape

end

end

CE

RE

end

slotted

HS

SH

pin hole

point

( paint removing

feature)

SP

(continued)

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

285

IS : 1367(Part

16)-1979

Table 3 Form Features (contd.)

No.

Features

15.

Wire hole in the head

16.

Without

17.

With washer

18.

Rolled thread

Note-For

washer

dimensions

3. Surface Protection-The
in designation:

Chemical

WF

face

of these

form features

following

symbols

coatings

conversion

coatings

Hot dip coatings

*Symbols

in all capitals

face

see product

are permissible

standards.

for coatings

Surface Protection

Electroplated

_.
Designation
Symbol

Typical Figure

for surface

protection

of fasteners

shall be

used

Symbol

Type

Zinc

Zn

Chromlum

Cr

Cadmium

Cd

Nickel

Ni

Phosphating

Blackening

BL

Galvanizing

GALV

Lead Plating

Pb

for use with computers.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part

EXPLANATORY

16)-1979

NOTE

Consequent
to the decision
to revise IS : 1367-1967,separate
technical and drafting reasons alike. The different parts in the revision
general information.

parts have been formulated

are listed in Part 1 Introduction

for
and

Designation
of various fasteners are also given in product standards. This standard, however, sets
out a system of sequence of designation
for standard fasteners. Such a designation
would assist in ordcring requirements
of fasteners even for those for which designations
are not already covered in product standards.
The sequencing
of various parameters
used for designation
of fasteners
has been done in such a
way that it falls in line with various Indian Standards already published on fasteners.
As covered in IS : 1367 ( Part 2 ) - Product grades and tolerances,
product grades have been modified
from precision, semi-precision
and black to product grades A, B and C respectively.

Product Grades
I

New
Symbol

Symbols in the
1967 Edition

Precision

Semi-precision

Black

1
Surface

protection

generally

applicable

for threaded

fasteners

only has been considered

in this part:

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

287

IS : 1367(Part

18)-l 979

Indian Standard

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

THREADED STEEL FASTENERS
PART 18 MARKING AND MODE OF DELIVERY
( Second Revision )

1. Scope-Covers

the marking and mode of delivery for threaded steel fasteners.

2. Marking of Bolts, Screws and Studs

2.1 The symbols for marking various property classes shall be as given in Table 1.

TABLE 1 MAR

2.2. Identification
Marking of Property Classes-Hexagon
bolts, screws and hexagon socket head cap
screws shall be marked with the designation symbol of property classes.
2.2.1 For bolts and screws the marking shall be obligatory for property classes 4.6, 5.6 and all
classes>8.8. For hexagon socket head cap screws marking is obligatory for property classes>8.8.
2.2.2 Marking shall be done preferably on the side of the head by indenting or on the top of the head by indenting or embossing ( see Fig. 1 and 2 ).
2.2.3 Marking
diametersa5mm
head.

shall be done for bolts, screws and hexagon socket head cap screws with nominal
where the shape of the product allows marking to be accomplished; preferably on the

2.2.4 Marking of trade-mark shall also be permitted on the side of the head for hexagon head cap screws.

TRADE MARK

TRADE

i
B.8

FIG. 1 MARKING FOR HEXAGON

BOLTS/SCREWS

12.9

I
FIG. 2 MARKING FOR HEXAGON SOCKET
HEAD CAP SCREWS

2.2.5The clock face marking system as given for the nuts in 3.1 may be used as an alternative
method on small hexagon socket head cap screws.

288

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

identification

FASTENERS-PART

IS : ?367(Part

18)-l 979

2.3 identification Marking for Studs -Studs shall be marked with designation symbol of the property class
as covered in 2.1. The marking shall be obligatory for property classes equal to or higher than 8.8, preferably
on the extreme end of the threaded portion by indenting (see Fig. 3). For studs with interference fit, the marking shall be at the nut end. Marking shall be done for studs with nominal diameter25
mm.

FIG. 3

MARKING FOR STUDS

2.3.1 Table 2 gives the symbols which may be used as an alternative

studs.

TABLE

2 ALTERNATIVE

PROPERTYCLASS
IDENTIFICATION MARK

IDENTIFICATION

a.8

9.8

MARKS

lW+lolnl
I

identification

method for use on

FOR STUDS

10.9

12.9

of set screws with property classes as covered in IS :

2.4 Identification Marking for Set Screws -Marking
1367 ( Part 5 )-1979 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners : Part 5 Mechanical properties
and test methods for set screw is not generaly required. If in special cases, marking is agreed between the
interested parties, the symbol of the property class shall be used as the marking symbol.
2.5 Other Types of Bolts and Screws-The
marking system as described in 2.2,2.3 and 2.3.1 shall be used for
other types of bolts and screws, by agreement between the interested parties.
2.6 Marking of Left Hand Thread-Bolts
and screws with left hand thread shall be marked with an anticlockwise arrow as shown in Fig. 4. Marking shall preferably be done on the top of the head by indenting ?r
embossing or on the end of the threaded portion (point) by indenting. Marking is required for bolts and
screws with nominal thread diameter25
mm. Alternative marking may be used for hexagon bolls and
screws as shown in Fig. 5.

/lRAOE

MARK

FIG. 4 PREFERRED MARKING FOR LEFT HAND THREADS

FIG. 5 ALTERNATIVE MARKING FOR LEFT HAND THREADS

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

289

1s : 1367(Part

18)-l

979

3. Marking of Nuts
3.1 identification
Marking, Designating
Property Classes of Nuts-Hexagon
designation
symbol of property class as given in Table 3 and Table 4.

nuts shall be marked

with the

.
TABLE 3

MARKING SYMBOLS FOR PROPERN CLASSES OF NUTS WITH NOMINAL

TABLE 4

MARKING

SYMBOLS

HEIGHTS>

0.8 d

FOR PROPERTY CLASSES OF NUTS WITH NOMINAL HEIGHTS

2 0.5 d and< 0.8 d.

PROPERTY

05

04

CLASS

NO MARKING

MARKING

3.2 The marking shall be obligatory

for property classes equal to or higher than 8 and for property class 05,
on one side or on one bearing surface of the nut by identing (see Fig. 6). The alternative
marking system for
hexagon nuts may be on one of the external chamfers of the nut by embossing or indenting or, if possible on
one bearing surface of the nut by indenting ( Fig. 7 ).
3.2.1 Marking

is required

for hexagon

nots with nominal

diameteratimm.

FIG. 7 MARKING WITH CODE SYMBOL

(CLOCK-FACE
SYSTEM )

FIG. 6 MARKING WITH DESIGNATION

SYMBOL

3.2.2 The embossed

mark shall

in no case protrude

beyond

the bearing

surface

of the nut

3.3 Marking of Left Hand Thread-Nuts

with left hand thread shall be marked with an arrow as shown in Fig.
8. Alternative
marking may be used as shown in Fig. 9. Marking shall be done on one of the bearing faces of
the nut by indenting.

290

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1367(Part
3.3.1 Marking

is required

for nuts with nominal

thread

diameter25

979

mm.

s= wt0Tt1 ACROSS FLATS

FIG. 8 PREFERRED MARKING

LEFT HAND THREADS

FOR

FIG. 9 ALTERNATIVE MARKING

LEFT HAND THREADS

3.4 Marking of Nuts Without Specified Proof Loads-Marking

in special cases marking is agreed between the interested
used as the marking symbol.

Marking-The
packages
with the ISI Certification

containing
Mark.

FOR

for this type of nut is not generally required. If

parties, the symbol of the property class shall be

4. Trade Marking-The
marking of the manufacturers
trade-mark
of name
covered by the obligatory
marking requirements
for property classes.
4.1 Certification
also be marked

18)-l

fasteners

covered

is mandatory

for all products

by an ISI certification

license

may

5. Mode of Delivery.
5.1 Packing-Packages
transit.

shall be made in such a way that they are protected

5.1.1 Grade A and B fasteners

be packed in bags.

shall be packed

in cartons

and/or

wooden

against

boxes.

mechanical

damage

Grade C fasteners

in

shall

5.1.2 Bolts, screws, studs and nuts shall be packed in cartons and/or wooden boxes in numbers of 5, 10,
20,50, 100,200,500,
1 000 and thereafter in multiples of 1 000. In addition, woodscrews
may also be packed
by weight.
5.1.3 Fastener without any specified
or boxes, to prevent corrosion.

surface

protection,

shall be oiled before

packing

into bags, cartons

5.1.4 The packings for all standard bolts, screws, nuts, etc, shall bear the appropriate
designation,
for example, Hexagon Head Screw Ml2 x 50 IS : 1363 A-8.8. In addition, the quantity, the manufacturers
mark and
where possible a pictorial
representation
of the contained
item shall be given on the container.
Note-requirements
of packaging of fasteners, notwithstanding
the provisions given in 5, shall comply with
Standards of Weights and Measures ( Packaged Commodities ) Rules, 1977, issued by Government of India.

EXPLANATORY
Consequents
to the decision
to
fasteners due to work at the international
ting reasons alike. The different
parts in
tion. Marking to distinguish
ISI Metric
necessary.
In the preparation

of this standard

NOTE

revise IS : 1367-1967 Technical

supply conditions
for threaded
level, separate parts have been formulated
for technical and drafthe revision are listed in Part I Introduction
and general informafasteners
has been deleted from this part as it is felt no longer

considerable

assistance

has been derived

ISOlDlS 898/l-Mechanical
properties
of fasteners-Part
I Bolts, screws
ISOlR 89811-1968 ). International
Organization
for Standardization.
ISOlDlS 898/ll-Mechanical
properties
of fasteners-Part
( Revision of ISOlR 898111-1969 and ISOlR 898/lV-1972
dization.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

from the following:

and studs

( Revision

of

II Nuts with specified

proof load values
). International
Organization
for Standar-

291

IS : 7178-1982

Indian Standard

1
m

TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR

TAPPING SCREWS

( First Revision )

1. Scope-Covers
general requirements,
mechanical
thread-forming
and thread-Cutting
types.
2. Terminology-For

the purpose

of this standard,

properties

and methods

the following

of test for tapping

definitions

where

large initial

stresses

in the material

of the

or desirable

to in-

are permissible

2.2 Thread-Cutting
Tapping Screws-Screws
which produce mating internal
parts or in one of them by cutting during the process of initial assembly.
2.2.1 These screws are used in materials where disruptive
cessive driving torques are encountered
with thread-forming

of

shall apply.

2.1 Thread-Forming
Tapping Screws-Screws
which produce mating internal threads
joined parts or in one of them by forming during the process of initial assembly.
2.1.1 These screws are used in materials
crease resistance
to loosening.

screws

thread

internal stresses
screws.

in the material

are undesirable

of joined

or where ex-

3. General Requirements
3.1 Workmanship
3.1.1 Screws

shall be cleanly

finished,

sound and free from defects

which may affect

/

their serviceability.

3.1.2 Screws shall have full surfaces and edges in keeping with the method of manufacture
shall be free from burrs, although
barely perceptible
thin burrs which result, for example,
operation
may be permitted.

used. These
from slotting

3.2 Finish
3.2.1 Tapping screws may have either a dull or bright finish, according to the process
They may also be supplied with plated or other protective
and/or decorative
finish.
3.2.2 Embrittlement
relief-when
plating is applied
heat treated immediately
in order to remove hydrogen

to hardened screws,
embrittlement.

3.2.3 Passivation-Corrosion
in a solution of 20 to 25 percent

shall be passivated

in accordance

with

Table

resistant

steel screws

used for hardening.

it is necessary

for them to be

after manufacture

( v/v) nitric acid ( sp gr 1.42 ) and 1.5 to 2.5 percent (m/v) sodium

by immersing
dichromate

1.

TABLE 1 PASSIVATION TREATMENT

Time in Minutes
Min

Temperature C

Type of Process
1

20 to 30

30

50 to 55

20

63 to 68

10
*

Note-For
screws made of ferritic or austenitic
stainless
steels,
parts made of martensitic
stainless steel, use passivation
treatment
*Time given is minimum.

292

Caution

should

be observed

as excessive

use passivation
types 2 or 3.
time will result

HANDBOOK

treatment

in damage

types

1, 2 or 3. For

to the screws.

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 7178-1982
3.2.3.1 Within 15 minutes after immersing
in the solution,
the screws shall be thoroughly
rinsed in
water at 60C to 70C. Within one hour after the hot water rinse, the screws shall be immersed in aqueous
solution containing
4 to 6 percent sodium dichromate
at 60C to 70C for 30 minutes.
and Tolerances

3.3 Dimensions

3.3.1 The dimensions

product standards.

and tolerances

of tapping

screws

shall conform

to those given in the respective

3.3.2 The threads of thread-forming

tapping screws shall conform to types A6 and B as covered
5957-1970 Dimensions
for screw threads for thread-forming
tapping screws.

in IS :

3.3.3 The threads

7800-1975 Dimensions

in IS:

of thread-cutting
tapping screws shall conform to types BT, Y as covered
for screw threads and ends for thread-cutting
tapping screws.

4. Raw Material
4.1 The steel used for the manufacture
of tapping screws shall be such that after suitable
the finished product shall satisfy the test requirements
as specified in 7.

heat treatment

4.2 Tapping screws may also be made from corrosion resistant steel, brass,
monel and aluminium
alloys.
Such material shall conform to the material specification
agreed upon between the supplier and the purchaser. However, screws made from these materials
are not covered by the tests specified in 7.2 and 7.3.
5. Metallurgical

Requirements

5.1 Hardness-Hardness
a) Surface
l

of thread-cutting

and thread-forming

tapping

hardness-83
HR 15 Nrsee IS : 5072-1969 Method
( N and T scales ) for steels]
OR
450HV 0.3, Min
( first revision ]

[see

IS : 1501-1968

case depth

shall

Method

for Rockwell

superficial

hardness

for steel

test ( B & C

Case Depth
mm

2 and 3

0.04

0.1

4 to 6

0.05

0.18

7 to 12

0.10

0.23

structure

test

test

SCREWS

Max

5.2 Microstructure-The

hardness

hardness

Min

12 and 16

6. Mechanical

be as follows:

TABLE 2 CASE DEPTH FOR TAPPING

for Rockwell

for Vickers

be as given in Table

Tapping Screw Size Number

( For types AB, B, BT and Y )

shall

Method

b) Core hardness28 to 43 HRC [see IS : 1586-1968

scales ) for steel ( first revision]
5.1.1 Case depth-The

screws

0.15

shall

show no band of free ferrite

0.28

between

case and core.

Requirements

6.1 Thread Cutting/Forming Capacity-A tapping screw shall cut/form the mating
its own thread when driven into test plates in accordance
with Table 3.
6.2 Torsional Strength-Tapping
screws shall have torsional
strength
cause failure, when tested in accordance
with7.3, shall equal or exceed

thread

without

deforming

such that the torque necessary to

the minimum torquevalues
given in

Table 4.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

293

IS : 7178-1982
7. Acceptance Tests
7.1 Genera/--The
manufacturer
should maintain statistical
quality control to ensure that the product conforms to accuracy,
mechanical
requirements,
finish and other requirements
specified
in this standard.
Suitable
number of samples
from each consignment
shall be selected
as specified
in IS : 2614-1969
Methods
for sampling
of fasteners
( first revision ). The number of tests for acceptance
shall be as
specified in IS : 2614-1969. The tests given under 7.2 and 7.3 shall be applied for checking the requirements
given in this standard.
7.2 Test for Metallurgical

Requirements

7.2.1 Surface hardness test-The

Rockwell hardness test shall be carried out in accordance
with IS :
5072-1969. The Vickers hardness test shall be carried out in accordance with IS : 1501-1968. The hardness indentation
shall be made on a flat face, preferably on the screw head.
7.2.2 Case depth
7.2.2.1 Microscopic
test-The
microscopic
test shall be carried out at the thread flank-mid-point
ween crest and root or in the case of small screws up to Screw Number 3 in the root of the thread.
7.2.3 Core hardness test ( Rockwell of Vickers )-The
core hardness
radius of a transverse
section through the screw, taken at a distance
screw to be through the full minor diameter.
7.2.4 Microstructure

test-This

7.3 Test for Mechanical

test shall

be carried

bet-

test shall be carried out at the midsufficiently

behind the point of the

out by metallographic

examination.

Requirements

7.3.1 Drive test-The

sample screws ( coated or uncoated as required ) shall be driven into a test plate
a thread of full diameter is completely
through the test plate. If the screws fail
specified in Table 3 until
while driving, then additional
screws from the same test shall be subjected
to the reference
test as
specified in 7.3.2.

7.3.1.1 The test plate shall be made from low carbon steel with a carbon content not exceeding 0.23 percent. Hardness of the plate shall be 70 to 85 HRB (see IS : 1586-1968). The plated thickness and hole size for
drive test are given in Table 3. The test hole shall be drilled or punched and drilled or reamed to the hole
diameter specified in Table 3 for the size of screw being tested.
Note-Where screws are plated subsequent to delivery to the purchaser (or where plating of screw is otherwise
under the control of the purchaser), the manufacturer is not responsible for failure due to plating. In such cases, the
screw manufacturer
Screws from which

can only be held responsible

the plating has been stripped

TABLE

3 THICKNESS

if it is proved that the failure is not due to any post

off, shall not be considered
as samples.

AND HOLE DIMENSIONS

treatment.

FOR TEST PLATES

Thread-Forming

10

10

10

12

12

12

14

14

14

1
205

185

323

294

16

3235

3485

3435

4-075

4025

4785

4-735

5525

5475

6935

6-885

467

HANDBOOK

2925

3285

310

505
16

2-975

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS--PART

IS :7178-1982
7.3.2Torsional strength test-The shank of the sample screw (coated or uncoated ) shall be clamoed in a
mating split blind hole die (se& Fig. 1 ) or by other means, so tl vat the clamped port ion of the screw is not
damaged, and atleast two full form theads, exclusive of point, are held within the clamping device. (A blind
hole may be used in place of the clamping device provided that the hole depth is such as to ensure that
breakage will occur beyond the point). by means oi a suitable calibrated torque measuring device, torque
shall be applied to the screw until failure occurs. The torque required to cause failure should be equal to or
exceed the values given in Table 4.
-

FIG. 1 TORSIONAL STRENGTHTEST DEVICE

TABLE 4 TORSIONAL

STRENGTH

FOR TAPPING

SCREWS

4.40

10

10

10

6.30

12

12

12

10.00

14

14

14

13.60

16

16

30.60

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

295

IS :7178-1982

8. Packing-Packages
transit.

shall be made in such a way that they are protected

8.1 Tapping shall be packed in cartons

and thereafter
in multiples
of 1 000.

and/or wooden

8.2Tapping screws without any specified

or boxes to prevent corrosron.
8.3 Packings
dards.

for all tapping

9. Marking-Packets
mation:

screws

containing

surface

shall

tapping

boxes in numbers

protection,

damage

in

of 5,10,20,50,100,200,500,1000

designation

screws shall be marked

of tapping

mechanical

shall be oiled before packing

bear the appropriate

a) Manufacturers
name or trade-mark;
b) Type, length and screw size number
c) Quantity contained
in the box.

against

as given

with a table containing

into bags, cartons

in the product

stan-

the following

infor-

screws; and

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard, first issued in 1974, covered mechanical

properties of tapping screws. In this revision,
requirements
of thread-cutting
tapping
screws have also been incorporated
and additional
supply requirements
added.
The following

product

standards

on tapping

screws have so far been published

on the thread forming

type:
IS : 7169-1974 Slotted
IS : 7170-1974 Slotted
IS : 7173-1974 Slotted
The requirements
ing screws-Mechanical

raised countersunk
( oval ) head tapping
countersunk
( flat ) head tapping screws
pen head tapping screws

of thread-forming
tapping screws
properties
issued by ISO.

For requirements
of thread
Self tapping screws and metallic
296

screws

are based on IS0 2701 Heat treated

cutting tapping screws, assistance

drive screws issued by BSI.
HANDBOOK

has been derived

ON

INDUSTRIAL

steel tapp-

from BS 4174 : 1972

FASTENERS-PART

SECTION
FEATURES

OF FASTENERS

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS * 1368-l

IS0 4753-l

987
983

Indian Standard

DIMENSIONS
m

FOR ENDS OF PARTS WITH

IS0 METRIC THREADS

( Third Revision
(IS0

National

Title : Fasteners-

Ends of Parts with

EXTERNAL

)
External

Metric

IS0

Thread)

Foreword

This Indian Standard ( Third Revision) which is identical with IS0 4753-l 983 Fasteners - Ends
of parts with external metric IS0 thread issued by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO), was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on the recommendation of the Bolts,
Nuts and Fasteners Accessories Sectional Committee and approval of the Mechanical Engineering
Division Council.
The orginal version of this standard was published in 1961 and revised in 1967 and 1980. The
present revision of the standard has been made by adoption of IS0 4753-1983
to bring it in line
with IS0 standard.
In the adopted standard certain terminology and conventions are not identical with those used in
Indian Standards; attention is specially drawn to the following:
Comma (,) has been used as a decimal marker while in Indian Standards, the current practice is
to use point (.) as the decimal marker.
Wherever the words Internatiofial
read as Indian Standard.
Cross

Standard appear referring to this standard, they should be

Reference

International
IS0

1 Scope

Corresponding

Standard

225

and field

Indian

Standard

IS : 8536-l 977 Dimensions of fasteners (Technically equivalent

with respect to designation of dimensions only)

of application

This International Standard lays down the form and dimensions of ends of parts with external
metric IS0 thread (for example, bolt and screw ends) recommended for use, unless otherwise
specified in the appropriate product standard.

2 Reference
IS0

225, Fasteners -

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

Bolts, screws, studs and nuts -

FASTENERS-PART

Symbols and designations

of dimensions.

299

IS : 1368-l
IS0 4753-l

987
983

,
_.--.

3 Dimensions.

As-rolled end

Chamfered end

/tl
\\

.-

u
I
u = 2 f incomplete thread

Flat point
=

Rounded end

Maximum diameter

Short dog point

Long dog point

45+\
.--.-.

_-.-..--

u
I----_

Cone point

=r

-LC_

Cup point

Truncated cone point

12g * p for short length screws; see product standard. e.g. ISO 4027

_d ,_

Scmpe point
,r,_

d, =d - 1,6P

-w-

dr

=0,5dzO,5mm

lk

=3PtO,5mm

=5PtO,5mm

NOTES
1 The 45
2 Other

300

angle applies only to the portion of the point below the root diameter

proprietary

of the thread

scrape forms are permissible.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1368-1987
IS0 4753-1983
Table
Dimensions

1. < M5

no flat part on the cone required;

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

the point may be slightly

FASTENERS-PART

in millimetres

rounded.

301

IS : 1369-1982

Indian Standard

DIMENSIONS FOR
SCREW THREAD RUNOUTS AND UNDERCUTS
( Second

Revision )

1. Scope-Covers
the dimensiors
for runouts and undercuts
for external and internal IS0 metric
threads with pitches 0.2 to 6 mm n accordance
with IS : 4218 (Part#2)-1976 IS0 metric screw threads:
Diameter pitch combinations
( first revision ):

screw
Part 2

2. Runouts
2.1 Runout,
quired.

2.2 Rumuts

whenever

it occurs,

shall

for External Threads-The

thread root ceases

Table 1.

to be fully formed.

include

the washout

threads

and clearance,

width of runout x shall be measured

The dimensions
for runout for external

where a clearance

is re-

from the point at which the

threads shall be as given in

2.3 Runouts for internal Threads-The

width of runout shall be measured from the point at which the thread
root ceases to be fully formed. The runout dimension
e shall be as given in Table 2. The figure in Table 2
showing runout illustrates
a blind tapped hole. The dimension
e indicates the additional
length needed for
tapping and swarf clearance.
3. Undercuts
3.1 Undercuts for External Threads-The
form of undercut is illustrated
in Table 1. Two values of width of
undercuts f, and f, are provided. Width f, is the clear width and f, is the width up to the last full from thread.
These values are given in Table 1. The diameter of undercut g shall be as given in Table 1.
3.2 Undercuts for Internal Threads-The
form of undercut is illustrated
in Table 2. Two values of width of
undercut, f, and f, are provided. Width f, is the clear width and f, is from the starting of the transition
angle.
These values are given in Table 2. The diameter of undercut g shall be as given in Table 2.
4. Guide for Application-Guidelines
Notes in Table 1 and 2.

302

for application

of thread

runout

HANDBOOK

and undercut

ON INDUSTRIAL

values

are given

in

FASTENERS-PART

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

-P-

FASTENERS-PART

I
n

IS : 1369-1982

303

pitch

I Thread

Runout

Runout

Thread

Distance
rvi:x

Normal
( see
Note 1)

Short
( see
Note 2

Normal
( see,
Note 3)

Long
( see
N $eee4 ) Note 5)
Short

0.75
0.8
1

1.25
1.5
1.75

dO.3
dO.4
dO.5

0.45
0.55
0.6

0.25
0.25
0.3

0.7
0.9
1.05

05
0.6
0.75

0.1
0.12
0.15

1.05
12
1.35

0.7
0.8
0.9

1.4
1.6
1.8

dO.6
dO.7
d0,7

0.7
0.8
1

0.4
0.5
0.5

1.2
1.4
1.6

0.9
;.1

0.17
0.2
0.22

0.7
075
0.9

15
1.8
2.1

1.1

1,2

:.4

1.4

2.8

dO.8
d1
d1. i

1.5

0.5
0.6
0.8

175
2.1
2.45

1 25
1.5
1.75

0.25
0.3
0.35

2.25
2,4
3

1.5
1.6
2

3
3.2
4

d1 .2
d1 .3
d1 .6

1.6
1.7
2.1

0.9
0.9
1.1

2.6
2.8
3.5

1.9
2
2.5

0.4
0.4
0.5

2.5
3
3.5

;
7

d2
d2.3
d2.6

2.7
3.2
3.9

1.5
1.8
2.1

4,4
5.2
6.1

3.2
3.8
4.3

0.6
0.75
0.9

d3
d3.6
d4.4

4.5
5.6
6.7

2.5
3,2
3.7

7
8.7
10.5

:.3
7.5

1
1.25
1.5

4.7

12
14
16

1.9

;.5

1
1,25

4
5
6

-E--#-E
;.5
9

5
5.5
6

12.5
14
15

Note
Note
Note

Note
Note
Note
*The

value

1:
12

1.2

:.5
6.5
7.5
8

6.3
;.5

3P

Notd

0.8
1
1.2

_LLE_liL
z

Normal

0.4
0.5
0.6

4
4.5
5.3

h13
( see
Note 6)

Max

0.6
0.75
0.9

R--l-H#
05
06
0.7

f,
/Win

Undercut

4P

2P

17.5
;?

3.5P

1:
11

1,75
2
2.25

12.5
14
15

2.5
2.75
3

2.5P

1 Runout

2.5P

x normal for all types 01 screws

in product Grades,
A, B and C [see lS: 1367
(Part 2)-1979
conditions
for threaded
steel fasteners:
Part 2 Product grades and tolerances
(second
revision)i.
2 Runout x short only in cases where
a short runout
is required
for technical
reasons.
3Distance
a normal for all types of screws
in product Grade A.
4Distance
a short for special cases in which for technical
reasons
a short distance
is necessary.
5Distance
a long for all types of screws
in product Grades
B and C.
6TolrAance
zone h12 for g for threads
uo to 3 mm nominal
diameter.
7 Undercut
short is for special
cases.
Thisshortundercut
requires
special
toolsfor thread manufacture.
of transition

+,

angle

a for the

range

between

f, and

fl shall

be 30

to 6Q

depending

on the

method

-+

Technical

of thread

supply

manufacture.

..+

Z86L-69&I,

Soc

/--21

t-l

L lldVd-SU3N31SVd

lVIHISflaNl

5
Q

NO XOOHaNVH

Blind Hole

Pitch
P

Thread

Projection

Undercut

Normal

Short

Long

0.2
0.25

1.3
1.5

0.8
1

2
2.4

0.3

1.8

1.2

2.9

0.35

2.1

1.3

3.3

0.4
0.45

2.3
26

1.5
1.6

37
4.1

05

1.8

4,5

0.6
0.7

2.1
2.4

54
6.1

I
H! 3

f,

f,

/Win

Max

Normal

!7+0. 1

0.8

d+O. 1
d+O. 1

12

Short
( see
Note )

Short
( see
Note )

0.9
1
1.25

0,1

1.9
2.2
2.4

1.4
1.6
1.7

0.17
0.2
022

2.7
33
3.8

2
2.4
2.75

0.25
03
0.35

1.8

0.9
1
11

d+O. 3
d+O.3
d+O.3

2
2.4
2.8

1.25
1.5
1.75

&_Li.dL
t
2
2.5
3

9.3
11.2
13.1

3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
Indicated
dimensions
approximately
correspond
to

Note
*Recommended

The

permissible

:.2

14.8
17.9
21

d+O.5
d+O. 5
d+O.5

8
10
12

15.2
16.8
18.4

9.5
10.5
11.5

24
26,9
29.4

d+O. 5
d+O. 5
d+O. 5

14
16
18

20.8
22.4
24

13

33.3
35.8
38.4

d+O, 5
d+O. 5
d+O. 5

20
22
24

5.8

;:

4P

6.3P

PP

undercut
tolerance

1 OP

for

IS

for

special

calculated

lThe countersunk
angle ~; will normally
be 120
runout
and for centre
holes an angle of 60 IS
counterbore
is recommended.
;.The value of transition
angle
method
of thread
manufacture.

a for the range

4P

:3P

?5P

short

-zM-lx-

0.12
015

0.4
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.75
0.9

++F---w
1.25
1.5

1.75
2
2.25

2.5
2.75
3

0.5P

cases

distance

,~, in special
recommended,

between

12
1,4
1.6

1.4

*%

to
co

0.5
0.6
0.75

d+O. 2
d+O.2
d+O. 2

1.6

Normal

to: 1,P
cases it may be 90. For studs with
while
for studs in light metal a

f, and f: shall be 30

..-.

to 60 depending

+-------

on the

--

IS : 1369-I
EXPLANATORY

982

NOTE

When a threading operation

is not performed throughout
the length of the component,
then due to
the necessary throat angle or taper lead on the screwing tool, the last few threads cannot be perfectly formed. The length of these washout threads makes the thread runout on thecomponent.
An undercut of reasonable
width allows threads to be cut on a component
up to end without the end
face of the screwing tool fouling the component.
Design requirements
are usually for a reasonable
degree
of control on the diameter at the root or crest of the undercut to avoid weakening
the section at this point,
and for sufficient
radius at the end of the undercut to avoid stress concentration.
The production
requirement is for an adequate width of undercut to allow the use of dies and taps with a reasonable throat angle or
taper lead.
It is well known that too narrow undercuts or the demand for perfect or full threads up to the shoulder
or to the bottom of blind holes add subsequently
to manufacturing
cost by necessitating
the use of special
taps and dies. This may require a second screwing operation, or resort to process, such as thread milling or
grinding. It is suggested that where recommendations
for any of the standard forms of undercut appear at
first sight to be inapplicable,
an endeavour shall be made to accommodate
them by alterations
in design,
for example, by using through tapped holes. A counterbore
or undercut on the first few threads of an internal
threads may readily be drilled when tapping a hole and is much simpler to produce than equivalent
undercut
on the mating external thread.
This standard

was first published

in 1961 and subsequently

revised

in 1975.

In the present revision thread runout values for external threads have been brought in Jine with IS0
3508-1976 Thread runouts for fasteners with threads in accordance
with IS0 261 and IS0 262; issued by the
International
Organization
for Standardization
( IS0 ).
The representations

of runouts

have been classified

according

to the thread

manufacturing

method.

The undercut width f, for external threads has been altered to 3.5P and 2.5P for normal and short
values to suit the cutting tools used. The new dimensions
f, and f, are intended.
first, to define the
minimum width of the undercut at the bottom and, second, to determine the maximum distance of the last
full thread.
For internal threads, the term runout is no longer valid but instead
jection e . This projection
takes into account the different manufacturing
quate collecting
space for the thread chips and swarf.
For threaded
blind holes with undercut, the countersink
diameter, namely, the maximum value equal to 1.05 d.
For threaded blind holes with undercut,
undercut width f, and f,.

deleted

only two values,

is incorporated
the blind hole promethods and guarantees
an ade-

is now specified

namely,

in terms

short and normal

of the thread

are specified

for

The width of runouts given for various angles for throat and taper lead in the 1975 edition have been
since they were not only redundant
but also inconsistent
with the available
taps and dies.

The standard
is in conformity
with IS0 3508-1976 in respect of thread runout and runout distance
values for external threads. For thread undercut values for external and internal threads and also for blind
hole projection values for internal threads assistance
has been derived from DIN 76 ( Part 1 J-1975 Runouts
undercuts for IS0 metric threads according
to DIN 13 issued by Deutches lnstitut
fiir Normung.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

307

IS : 1821-1987
IS0 273- 1979

Indian

DIMENSIONS

(IS0
National

Standard

FOR CLEARANCE
HOLES
BOLTS AND SCREWS
( Third Revision )

Title : Fasteners-Clearance

FOR

Holes for Bolts and Screws)

Foreword

This Indian Standard ( Third Revision) which is identical with IS0 273-l 979 Fasteners - Clearance holes for bolts and screws issued by the International Organization for Standardization (ISC ),
was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on the recommendation of the Bolts, Nuts arjd
Fasteners Accessories Sectional Committee and approval of the Mechanical Engineering Divisic n
Council.
The original version of this standard was published in 1961 and revised in 1967 and 1982. The
present revision of the standard has been made by adoption of IS0 273-1979
to bring it in lins
with IS0 standard.
In the adopted standard certain terminology and conventions are not identical with those used i;r
Indian Standards; attention is specially drawn to the following:
Comma (,) has been used as a decimal marker while in Indian Standards, the current practice is
to use point (.) as the decimal marker.
Wherever the words International
read as Indian Standard.
1 SCOPE

AND

FIELD

Standard appear referring to this standard, they should be

OF APPLICATION

This International Standard specifies clearance hole diameters for general purpose applications.
These values result from bearing area calculations in connection with IS0 bolt and nut product
standards.
NOTE -

308

Clearance

holes for special applications

should be selected on the basis of design requirements.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1821-1987
IS0 273-l 979
2 DIMENSIONS

ie----I

Dimensions

I
-

Clearance

Thread
diameter
d

hole do,

Series :

Clearance

Thread
diameter
d

in millimetres

hole dh

Series :

fine

medium

1
1.2
1.4

1.1
1.3
1.5

1.2
1.4
1.6

42
45
48

43
46
50

45
48
52

1.6
1.8
2

1.7
2
2.2

1.8
2.1
2.4

52
56
60

54
58
62

56
62
66

2.5
3
3.5

2.7
3.2
3.7

2.9
3.4
3.9

64
68
72

66
70
74

70
74
78

4
4.5
5

4.3
4.8
5.3

4.5
5
5.5

76
80
85

78
82
87

82
86
91

86
91
96

6
7
8

6.4
7.4
8.4

6.6
7.6
9

90
95
100

93
98
104

96
101
107

101
107
112

10
12
14

10.5
13
15

11
13.5
15.5

105
110
115

109
114
119

112
117
122

117
122
127

16
18
20

17
19
21

17.5
20
22

120
125
130

124
129
134

127
132
137

132
137
144

22
24
27

23
25
28

24
26
30

140
150

144
155

147
158

30
33
36
39

31
34
37
40

33
36
39
42

The following
tolerances :
fine

tolerance

fine

fields are given for information

only, for use where

it is desirable

to specify

series : HI2

medium
coarse

series : H13
series : H14

In case where it is necessary

to avoid interference
between
underhead
fillet of the bolt, a chamfer is recommanded.
HANDBOOK

medium

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

the

edge

of the

hole

and the

309

IS : 4172-1987
IS0

885- 1976

Indian

Standard

DIMENSIONS
FOR RADII
OF BOLTS AND

UNDER THE
SCREWS

HEAD

(First Revision)
(IS0

National

Title : General

Purpose Bolts and Screws-Metric

Radii under the head)

series-

Foreword

This Indian Standard (first revision), which is identical with (SO 885-1976
General purpose
bolts and screws-Metric
series-Radii
under the head issued by the International Organization
for Standardization (ISO), was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on the recommendation
of the Bolts, Nuts and Accessories Sectional Committee and approval by the Mechanical
Engineering Division Council.
The original version of this standard was published in 1967. The revision of the standard has
been made by adoption of IS0 885-1976
to bring it in line with IS0 standard.
In the adopted standard certain terminology and conventions are not identical with those used in
Indian Standards; attention is specially drawn to the following :
Comma (,) has been used as a decimal marker while in Indian Standards the current practice is
to use point (.) as the decimal marker.
Wherever the words International
read as Indian Standard.

310

Standard

appear, referring

HANDBOOK

to this standard, they should be

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4172-1987
IS0 885-l 976
1 SCOPE

AND

FIELD

OF APPUCATION

This International Standard specifies the sizes of the radii under the head of metric series general
purpose bolts and screws.
2 DIMENSIONS

Thread
diameter
d

Radius
R min.
finished
and semifinished
products

Transition

4
finished
products

Dimensions

diameter
ax.
semi-finished and
regular
products

Thread
diameter
d
-~

Radius
R min.
finished
and semifinished
products

Transition

d.
finished
products

in millimetra
diameter
ax.
semi-finished and
regular
products

1.6
2
2.2
2.5

0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1

2
2.6
2.8
3.1

39
42
45
48

1
1.2
1.2
1.6

42.4
45.6
48.6
52.6

45.4
48.6
52.6
56.6

3
3.5
4
4.5

0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2

3.6
4.1
4.7
5.2

52
56
60
64

1.6
2
2
2

56.6
:;
71

62.6
67
71
75

5
6
7
8

0.2
0.25
0.25
0.4

5.7
6.8
7.8
9.2

6.0
7.2
8.2
10.2

68
72
76
80

2
2
2
2

75
79
83
87

79
83
87
92

10
12
14
16

0.4
0.6
0.6
0.6

11.2
14.2
16.2
18.2

12.2
15.2
17.2
19.2

85
90
95
100

2
2.5
2.5
2.5

92
97
102
108

97
102
108
113

18
20
22
24

0.6
0.8
0.8
0.8

20.2
22.4
24.4
26.4

21.2
24.4
26.4
28.4

105
110
115
120

2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5

113
118
123
128

118
123
128
133

zz
33
36

1
1
1
1

30.4
33.4
36.4
39.4

32.4
35.4
38.4
42.4

125
130
140
150

2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5

133
138
148
159

138
145
156
166

IS

The transition diameter da is the diameter of the circle formed at the junction of the radius R and the bearing surface of the
head.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

311

IS : 4206-1987
888-l 976

IS0

Indian

DIMENSIONS
LENGTHS
(IS0

National

Standard

FOR NOMINAL
LENGTHS AND THREAD
FOR BOLTS, SCREWS AND STUDS
( First Revision )

Title : Bolts, Screws and Studs-Nominal

Thread Lengths for General Purpose

Lengths,
Bolts)

and

Foreword

This Indian Standard (First Revision), which is identical with IS0 8881976
Bolts, screws, and
studs - Nominal lengths, and thread lengths for general purpose bolts issued by the International
Organization
for Standardization
(ISO), was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution
on the
recommendation
of the Bolts, Nuts and Fasteners Accessories Sectional Committee and approval
of the Mechanical
Engineering
Division
Council.
The original version of this standard was published
in 1967. The revision of the standard
been made by adoption of IS0 888-1976
to bring it in line with International
Standard.
In the adopted standard certain terminology
and conventions
are not identical
Indian Standards;
attention
is specially drawn to the following:

312

Comma (,) has been used as a decimal marker while

to use point (.) as the decimal marker.

in Indian

Wherever the words International

read as Indian Standard.

referring

Standard

appear

HANDBOOK

Standards

with those used in

the current

to this standard,

ON

INDUSTRIAL

has

practice

they should

FASTENERS-PART

is
be

IS : 4206-1987
ISO 885-l 976
1 SCOPE
This
lengths

AND

FIELD

OF APPLICATION

International
Standard
for general
purpose

specifies
bolts.

nominal

lengths

for

bolts,

screws

and

studs,

and

thread

2 REFERENCE
IS0

225,

Bolts,

3 NOMINAL

screws

LENGTHS

and

studs-Dimensioning.

FOR

BOLTS,

SCREWS

AND

STUDS

The basic dimensions

shows
in Table 1 apply to the nominal
example
: hexagon
bolts, slotted
head screws, cross recess head
Lengths
For

in

brackets

dimensioning

4 THREAD

should
of

be

nominal

LENGTHS

avoided

lengths,

FOR

dimensioning

TABLE

of thread

1 BASIC

DIMENSIONS

see

GENERAL

IS0

of bolts and screws

(for
and studs of metric sizes.

as possible.
225.

PURPOSE

BOLTS

2 and 3 apply to bolts (for example

: hexagon
bolts) of metric
on which
the calculation
of the thread
lengths
indicated
in

The thread
lengths
shown
in Tables
sizes. Table 2 contains
the formulae
Table 3 was based.
For

as far

lengths
screws)

lengths,

see

IS0

IN MILLIMETRES

225.

TABLE 2 FORMULAE

DIMENSIONS

IN MILLIMETRES

I-

Nominal

length

Nominal

length

mm

I
mm

Nominal

mm

over

:iz

2
2.5
3

70

2
85

length
I

to

Formulae for
thread length
b

125

2d+

125

2ocl

2d+

12

200
d = nominal

I
diameter

2d+25

of the bolt

140
150
160
170
180
190
200
220
240
260
280
300

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

313

(/J
*

TABLE

3 ALLOCATION

OF

THE

THREAD

Dimensions

LENGTHS

TO

THE

BOLT

DIAMETERS

in millimetres

Thread

diameter

d
~:~25

Thread
length

125</<

200

1,6

2.5

10

12

14

16

I 18

29

10

11

12

14

16

18

20

22

26

30

34

38

42

46

28

32

36

40

44

48

52

57

61

65

22

24

27

30

33

36

39

42

45

48[52

50

54

60

66

72

78

84

90

96

56

60

66

72

78

84

90

96

102

69

73

79

85

91

97

103

109

115

I 72

/ 76

80

85

90

I 95

156

164

172

182

192

169

177

185

195

205

215

225

235

245

255

265

275

285

305

325

b
I> 200

,
Thread

diameter

d
/<125

Thread
length

125</<

200

[56

I 137

I 145

60

~~

b
/>200

Thread

diameter

/<125
Thread
length

125</<

200

100 [105

121

110 [115

I 129

1201125

130

1153

1161

1140 1150

b
/>200

. ..-.

.. ..=

--

IS : 4499-1968

Indian Standards

1
m

DIMENSIONS FOR
DEPTH OF HOLES FOR STUDS

0. Foreword

0.1 This Indian Standard

was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution

on 7 February
finalized
by the Engineering
Standards
Sectional
Committee
had been approved
Engineering
Division Council.

1968, after the draft

by the htechanical

0.2 A series of Indian Standards relating to screw threads and threaded fasteners based on the IS0 metric
screw thread has already been published. This standard deals with the dimensions
for depth of holes for
studs and is a necessary adjunct to IS : 1862-1967 Specificationforstuds(firstrevision).
0.3 For the dimensions
of screw thread
for screw thread runouts and undercuts.

run outs, reference

should

be made to IS : 1369-1961 Dimensions

0.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular

requirement
of this stanard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated,
expressing
the result of a test, shall be rounded off .in accordance
with IS :
2-1960 Rules for rounding off nUtTEriCal ValUeS (revised)
The number of significant
places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard

specifies

the dimensions

for depth of holes for studs conforming

to IS : 1862-1967*

2. Dimensions

2.1 The dimensions

HANDBOOK

ON

for depth

INDUSTRIAL

of holes for studs

FASTENERS-PART

shall

be as given in Table

1.

315

IS : 4499-1968
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR DEPTH OF HOLES FOR STUDS
(Clause 2.1)
All dimensions in nrillimetre

t-l-l

Nominal
Diameter

Tap Drill

Stud Type A
(According to IS:1862-l 967)

Stud Type B
(AccordingtoIS:l662-1967)
A
t

dl

M3
M3.5
M4
M4.5

2.5
2.9
3.3
3.75

3
3.5
4
4.5

M5
M6
M8
M8xl

4.2
5
6.75
7

Ml0
MlOx1.25
Ml2
M12x1.25

f-+

6
7
8
3

4.5
5
6
7

8
8
10
11

5
6
8
8

11
13
13

7.5
9
12
12

12
14
17
17

8.5
8.8
10.25
10.8

10
10
12
12

16
15
18
17

15
15
18
18

21
20
24
23

Ml4
M14x1.5
Ml6
M16x1.5

12
12.5
14
14.5

14
14
16
16

23
22

21
21
24
24

28
27
31
30

Ml8
M18x1.5
M20
M20x1.5

15.5
16.5
17.5
18.5

18
18

26
24

35
33

z:

I:

27
27
30
30

M22
M22x 1.5
M24
M24x2

19.5
20.5
21
22

22
22
24
24

30
28
33
31

33
33
36
36

41
39
45
43

M27
M27x2
M30
M30x2

24
25
26.5
28

27
27

36
34

40.5
40.5

49
47

::

37
40

45

z;

M33
M33x2
M36
M36x2

29.5
31
32
33

33
33
36
36

43
40
47
45

49.5
49.5
54
54

60
56
65
63

M39
M39x3

35
36

39
39

50
48

57.5
57.5

69
66

The values of X and a correspond

revision ) .
*Thevaluesofsareroundedofftothenext

to IS: 1369-1975. Dimensions

for screw thread runouts

ii

and undercuts ( first

highermillions

and
Note-The
values of s for studs with fine pitches not covered in the table shall be calculated by the formula
then rounded off to the next hieher miiiimetre. The dimensions 4 depending on the nominal size and type of stud corresponds to IS: 1862-1967 Specification for studs (first revision ) and dimensions x and acorresonding to the pitch are to
be taken from IS: 1369-1975 Dimensions for screw thread run outs and undercuts. ( first revision ).
316

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 9519-1980

Indian Standard

DIMENSIONS FOR
WIDTH ACROSS FLATS FOR HEXAGON
HEAD BOLTS AND NUTS

1. Scope-Covers
ed bolts, screws
2. Dimensions-As

the width across flats for hexagon head bolts, screws,

and nuts in the diameter range 1.6 to 150 mm.
given in Table

hexagon

nuts and hexagon

flang-

1.

TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS

FOR WIDTH ACROSS

FLANGED

FLATS FOR HEXAGON

BOLTS, SCREWS

AND HEXAGON

AND NUTS

l-4S
d,

Thread
Diameter
d

Width Across
Hexagon

Normal
3.2
4
5
5.5
7
8
10
11
13
16
18
21
24
27
30
34
38
41
46
50
55
60

Ml.6
M2
M2.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
Ml0
Ml2
Ml4
Ml6
Ml8
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
M33
M36
M39

HANDBOOK

ON

= bearing diameter

INDUSTRIAL

Products

rI

( see Appendix

Flats.

Hexapon Flanged

PiOd 3s -

Large

Bolts

Nuts

7
8
-

8
10
-

10
13
15
18
21
-

13
15
18
21
24
-

27
-

30
-

21
24
27
30
34
36
41
46
50
55
60
65

FASTENERS-PART

A)

Thread
Diameter,
d

With Across
Normal

Flats, s

Hexagon

Products

M42
M45
M48
M52
M56
M60
M64
M68
M72
M76
M80
M85
M90
M95
Ml00
Ml05
Ml10
Ml15
Ml20
Ml25
Ml30
Ml40
Ml50

65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
130
135
145
150
155
165
170
180
185
200
210

317

IS : 9519-1980
EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This slandard
specifies
the width across flats for hekagon products. Although
these dimensions
have already been covered in the relevant product standards, a need for a separate standard on the dimensions for width across flats has been felt as it would serve as a reference standard for all sizes of hexagon
products from Ml.6 to Ml50 and also since changes have been made for certain sizes from the previous
metric practice. Width across flat dimensions
for sizes MlO, M12, Ml4 and M22 have been modified. The
new and old dimensions
are given below:
Width Across Flats, s
Size
y
-_---^_-----New
Old
Ml0

16

17

Ml2

18

19

Ml4

21

22

M22

34

32

The objective has been to develop a coordinated

hexagon drive system covering all the commonly
used hexagon bolt, screw and nut products as well as hexagon flange products. It, therefore, incorporates
four hexagon series-normal
series and a large series for regular hexagon products, and two series for hexagon
flange products. These have been coordinated
with each other to the maximum possible extent in order to
achieve a high degree of standardization
of wrench openings.
The changes, which have been kept to a minimum, have been made to achieve international
agreement and to improve product design and material utilization.
Attention
was particularly
directed to the size
range from M6 to M39 as being the range covering the vast majority of fastening
applications
where high
strength and reliability
are determining
factors.
A primary technical objective in the review was to achieve a logical ratio between underhead (or nut )
bearing area (which determines
the magnitude of the compressive
stress on the bolted members relative to
the clamping force applied by the fastener) and the tensile stress area of the screw thread
which governs
the clamping force which can be developed by tightening
the fastener for any particular
strength class of
fastener. This calcuation
technique
was applied to each of the hexagon series so that a proper grading of
bearing area/stress
area ratios would be available
to engineering
designers. The following
table gives the
ratios for certain sizes:
Width Across

NOt?litX3/

Flats

Size

mm

M5
M6
M8
Ml0
Ml0
Ml2
Ml2
Ml4
Ml4
Ml6
M20
M24
M30
M36

8
10
13
16
17 ( old size )
18
19 ( old size )
21
22 ( old size )
24
30
36
46
55

Annular

Bearing

Area

Thread Size Area

1.08
1.44
1.23
1.30
1.73
0.91
1.16
0.96
1.24
1.02
0.95
0.86
1.02
1.04

Appendix
A shows the ratios for the normal, large and hexagon flange ( hexagon flange bolts and nuts
have common flange diameters
), series, in each case the across flats figure being shown against the appropriate point on each curve. Old hexagon sizes have also been included to indicate the changes which the
IS0 committee,
TC 2 found necessary in the interests of international
standardization
and optimization.
It is recognized that some transition
period would be essential during which the new sizes would be
introduced
and the old sizes phased out. During this transitional
period, to assist designers and manufacturers, and in particular
to give needed information
for maintenance
and repair purposes, dimensional
details on the old sizes would be given as additional
information
in product standards.

flats

This standard
is in conformity
with ISOlDlS 272 Fasteners-Hexagon
issued by international
Organization
for Standardization.

Calculation
318

based on clearance

holes medium

series,

according

to IS0 273

HANDBOOK

products-Widths

across

( revised 1.

ON INDUSTRlAL

FASTENERS-PART

Is : 9519-l 980

APPENDIX
A
RATIO OF BEARING AREA TO STRESS AREA

LExAGoN*L

FLANGE SERlES

s3
2

4
u-l

3
F

2 -

k?

LARGE

SERIES

2
z
1 -

L 8
M6

Note-The
calculated

I
,
I
1
M8 Ml0 Ml2 Ml.4 Ml6 Ml8 M20 M22 M24

values given in the graph are width across

from the minimum

bearing

diameter

d,,

NORMAL

SERIES

t
M27

flat dimensions.

M30

The bearing

M33

M36

area for hexagon

flange

products

is

as given below:

Size

Bearing Diameter
d,, Min
mm

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

M5

9.8

M6

12.2

M8

15.8

Ml0

19.6

Ml2

23.8

Ml4

27.6

Ml6

31.9

M20

39.9

FASTENERS-PART

319

IS : 9549-1980

Indian Standard

1I .
[s1

DIMENSIONS FOR SPLIT PIN HOLES, WIRE HOLES

AND HEAD SLOTS FOR BOLTS

1. Scope-Covers
the dimensions
for split pin holes and wire holes for bolts, screws
and square head bolts and screws.
Note-The
respective

symbol

product

2. Dimensions

for wire holes

standards

and head slots

may be included

and slots for hexagon

in the designation

of the fasteners

in the

when required.

and Tolerances

2.1 The dimensions

for location and diameter of split pin holes shall be as given in Table 1, dimensions
wire holes as in Table 2, and dimensions
of slots in hexagon and square heads as in Table 3.

TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS

FOR SPLIT PIN HOLES

( Clause 2.1
All dimensions

Nominal

Size

of

in millimetres

M4

M5

M6

M6

Ml0

Ml2

Ml4

Ml6

Ml6

M20

1.2

1.6

2.5

3.2

3.2

2.3

2.6

3.3

3.9

4.9

5.9

6.5

7.7

7.7

7.7

M26

M30

M33

M36

M39

M42

M45

M46

M52

d
dl

H14

le

Min

Nominal

Size

M22

M24

dl

H14

6.3

6.3

6.3

6.3

le

Min

8.7

10

10

11.2

11.2

12.5

12.5

14.7

14.7

16

16

Note-The
fastener

value for lh must be calculated

for each application,

but the hole should

than /,, Min, after taking into account the adverse tolerances

for lh is practicable

320

not be nearer the end of the

on /h and 1. In general a tolerance

of + lT14

in production.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 9549-1980

FOR WIRE HOLES

TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS

( Symbol WH )

(Clause 2.1 )
All dimensions

in millimetres.

-++--0.5k

Nominal Size

H14

d,

M4

MS

1.2

M6

M6

1.6

1.2

1 Ml0

1 Ml2

1 Ml4

1 Ml6

Ml8

1 1~20 1 M22 1

t
Nominal Size
d

d,

H14

M24

M27

M30

M33

M36

M39

M42

M45

M46

M52

,
Note-For

values of K, see

relevant product standards.

TABLE 3

DIMENSIONS

FOR HEAD SLOTS

( Symbol HS )

( Clause

2.1 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

4-&--w
Nominal Size

M3

M3.5

M4

1
1.06
1.2 ,

Nom

0.8

0.8

Min

0.86

0.86

Max

Min

Min

t--i+++

M5

M6

1.2
1.26
1.51

1.6
1.66
1.91

Ml0

2.5

2.06

2.56

3.06

3.06

4.07

2.31

2.81

3.31

3.31

4.37

Ml2

Ml4

Ml6

M6

0.4 k Nom

0.45

k Nom

Note-For

HANDBOOK

ON

values of K, see

INDUSTRIAL

relevant product standards.

FASTENERS-PART

321

IS : 9549-1980

EXPLANATORY
In the preparation
publications:

heads.

of this standard,

ISO/TC 2-N688-1978 Bolts

International
Organization

322

considerable

and screws-Split
for Standardization.

DIN/962-1975 Schrauben
und Mutter
MaBe ( Screws, studs and nuts; types with
( DIN ).

NOTE
assistance

pin holes,

has been derived

wire holes,

slots

for hexagon

Nzusatzlich
Formen und Ausfuhrungen
additional
delivery details ). Deutsches

HANDBOOK

ON

from the following

INDUSTRIAL

and square

Bestellangaben
und
lnstitut fur Normung

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 11362-1985
IS0 7721-1983

Indian

HEAD

CONFIGURAT!ON
COUNTERSUNK
(IS0

National

Standard

AND GAUGING
HEAD SCREWS

OF

Title : Countersunk
Head Screws-Head
Configuration
and Gauging)

Foreword

This Indian Standard, which is identical with IS0 7721-l

983 Countersunk
head screws - Head
configuration
and gauging, issued by the International
Organization
for Standardization
(ISO), was
adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on the recommendation
of the Bolts, Nuts and Fastener
Accessories
Sectional
Committee
and approved
by the Engineering
Division
Council.
In the adopted standard certain terminology
and conventions
are not identical
Indian Standards;
attention
is specially
drawn to the following:
Comma (,) has been used as a decimal marker
to use point (.) as the decimal
marker.
Wherever
the words International
read as Indian Standard.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Standard

while
appear,

in Indian
referring

Standards

with those used in

the current

to this standard.

practice

is

they should

be

323

IS : 11362-l
986
IS0 772? -1983
1 SCOPE

AND

FIELD

OF APPLICATION

This international
Standard
recessed
countersunk
head
laid down
in the respective

2 HEAD

specifies
the characteristics
of head configurations
screws,
and recommends
a gauging
method for the
product
standards.

of slotted
and
head dimensions

CONFIGURATION

dk
theoretical max.
_~~~_~L_~_~
._.
..~
dk theoretical min.

w----,

.._

---

Table

CI

Dimensions

in millimetres
9

metric
Thread
size, d

M
1.6

M2

M
2.5

M3

M
3.5

M4

::9

3;

::2

ST
4.8

M6

M8

M
10

!#2
-

!?4
-

M
16

78
-

FO

::5

6s:

ST
8

ST
9.5

1 10.4

11.5

12.6

17.3

20

24

28

32

36

40

8.9

9.8

10.9

11.9

16.5

19.2

23.1

27

,30.8

34.7

38.5

8.4

9.3

10.3

11.3

15.8

18.3

22

25.5

29

32.5

36

ST
2.2

max.

3.6

4.4

5.5

6.3

8.2

9.4

min.

3.3

4.1

5.1

5.9

7.7

max.

3.8

4.7

5.5

7.3

tapping

M5

theoretical
di
actual

-._
min.

2.7

3.5

4.4

5 2

6.9

8.9

9.9

10.9

15.4

17.8

max.

0.15

0.15

0.2

0.2

0.25

0.25

0.3

0.3

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.45

0.5

0.6

)1

1.2

1.5

1 1.65

2.35

2.7

2.7

3.3

4.65

1.1

2.35

2.6

2.8

3.15

4.65

5.25

metric

21.5

25

28.5

31.9.
0.65

35.4
0.75

k max. (ref.)
tapping

1.7

324

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 11362-l
985
IS0 7721-1983
3 Gauging

method

Flushness

gauge

Ring gauge

For the head height

No go gauge for d, actual

-_--

.___.__.

dh

___

min.

--A

The top surface of the screw head must

lie between gauge surfaces A and 8.

TABLE

2
Dimensions

NOTE-Diameters

HANDBOOK

& mm. are based on fillet radius r = 0.25

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

d for metric screws and 0.4

in millimetres

d for tapping screws.

325

IS : 11362-l 986
IS0 7721-1983
ANNEX
L

Calculation

basis for the maximum

head diameter of countersunk

heads

for screws

dk theoreticel mex.

--p_-__

dk actual mex.

----~_. s

F = Fluehnesstolerance

Basic

assumptions

1 When
minimum

heads are being formed with

values
C as follows
:
metric

Thread
size, dj

M 1.6

tapping

min.

0.2

M 2

M 2.5

ST 2.2
0.22

minimum

M 3

0.28

the

diagram

M3.5

the clearance

M4

between

M5

punch and die will have

M6

M8

ST 2.9

ST 3.5

ST 4.2

ST 4.8

ST 5.5

ST 6.3

ST 8

0.3

0.32

0.35

0.38

0.4

0.42

0.5

2 When heads are being formed with maximum

contour of the head and the clearance
between
From

heights,

M 10
0.63

heights and maximum

actual diameters,
the peripheral
punch and die will be as shown in the above diagram.

s=p-r
butp=
LM =(F+C)
set 45
and r = LM tan 2230 = (F + C) set
S

= (F +

=(I=+
dA actual

where

326

2230

C) set 45 - (F + C) set 45 X tan

C) (set 45) (1 -tan
2230) ~0.83

2230
(F+

max. = dk theoretical

It is also assumed
dk actual

45 X tan

max. - 2s = d, theoretical

that the relationship

min. =

dk theorecticaf

dl theoretical

C)

between

theoretical

min. - (dk theoretical

min. = dk theoretical

max. -

and actual

1.66

(F + C)

diameters

max. - dk actual

is roughly

constant

max.)

max. - 2 F.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

SECTION
RAW

MATERIALS

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS : 740-1977

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
WROUGHT ALUMINIUM AND
ALUMINIUM ALLOY RIVET STOCK FOR
GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
(Second

Revision)

0. Foreword

0.1 This Indian Standard ( Second Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards institution on 24 June
1977, after the draft finalized by the Light Metals and Their Alloys Sectional Committee had been approved
by the Structural and Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard was first issued in 1956 and subsequently revised in 1966. Further revision became
necessary as the chemical composition and the mechanical properties of a number of alloys had to be
reviewed and modified. The main modifications which have been made in this revision are as follows:
a) Heat-treatable

aluminium

alloy 65032 ( HR 20) has been added.

b) Chemical composition limits of alloys 53000 ( NR 5 ), 55000 ( NR 6 ) and 64430 ( HR 30 ) have been
modified. The mechanical properties of different alloys have been reviewed and modified
wherever necessary.
c)Code designations
given in IS : 6051-1970 Codefordesignationofalumlniumanditsallows.
have been adopted in this standard; the old designations being included in parentheses
ready reference.
0.3 Somecharacteristics
A.

and typical uses of thealloys

specified in thestandard

for

have been listed in Appendix

0.4 For the purpose of deciding whetheia particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised) The number of significant places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope

1.1 This standard covers requirements

engineering purposes.

for wrought aluminium

and aluminium

alloys rivet stock for general

2. Terminology
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following
2.1 Rivet Stock-

Round bar or wire suitable

definitions

shall apply.

for the manufacture

of rivets.

2.2 Heat Treatment Batch-A quantity of material of one alloy of the same dimensions and produced in the
same way, solution-trealed
in one furnace load, or such material as solution-treated
and subsequently
precipitation-treated
in one furnace load. More than one heat-lreatment batch may comprise a furnace load.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

329

IS : 740-1977

3. Condition
3.1 The material
tion,the temper
shall

shall be supplied in the condition as specified by the purchaser.

designations
as laid down in IS : 5052-1969Temperdesignationsof

While specifying thecondialuminium and itsalloys.

be followed.

4. Chemical Composition and Mechanical Properties

4.1 The chemical composition

and mechanical
quirements
of Table 1 and Table 2 respectively.

properties

of the rivet

stock

4.2 The chemical analysis of the material shall be carried out in accordance
chemical analysisof
aiuminiumanditsallOys(revised).
or by spectrochemical

shall

comply

with

the re-

Methodsof

with IS: 504-1963

method.

5. supply of Material

5.1 General
forthesupplyof

requirements
for the supply of material
metalIurgicalmaterials(firstrevision)

shall conform

to IS : 1387-1967

General

requirements

6. Freedom from Defects

6.1 The material

shall

be sound arid free from harmful

defects.

7. Dimensions and Tolerances

7.1 The diameters of the rivet stock and their tolerances shall be as given in IS : 3577-1967
wroughtaluminium
and aluminium alloys, rivet, bolt and screw stock.

Diametersof

6. Selection of Test Samples

8.1 Rivet stocks of the same diameter,

lots weighing

produced in the same way and of the same grade shall be grouped in
up to 250 kg, and one test sample shall be cut from a coil or length selected from each lot.

6.2 In the case of heat-treatable

alloys

6.2.1 Before any of the test samples

treatment
batch they represent.

one test sample

shall

be taken

are cut off, they shall be marked

from each heat-treatment

to identify

batch.

them with the lot or heat-

6.3 In the case of aluminium

and nonheat-treatable
aluminium
alloys, the test samples shall be taken from
the material as supplied and shall not be annealed or mechanically
worked ( except for straightening
and
machining
to the shape of the test piece ) before they are tested.
6.3.1 In the case of heat-treatable
aluminium
alloys for materials supplied in the M or 0 condition, the test
samples shall be heat-treated
and tested in the W or WP condition,
as specified
by the purchaser except
that in case of alloy 24345 ( HR 15 ) the head-forming
test shall be made on test sample not more than 2
hours after solution treatement.
The test samples after heat treatment
shall not be mechanically
worked
(except forstraighteningandmachining
totheshapeof
thetest piece)beforetheyaretested.
6.3.2 Material supplied in the OD condition
may be expected
W or WP conditions
on appropriate
heat treatment.

to develop

the mechanical

properties

of the

6.3.3 For material supplied in the W condition,

the test samples shall be tested in the condition
as supplied, unless the purchaser has specified that herequires
the test sample to be tested in the WP condition.
The test samples shall not be mechanically
worked (except by straightening
and machining to the shape of
the test piece ) before they are tested.
9. Mechanical Test

9.1 Tensile Test-The

tensile

test shall

be carried

out in accordance

with

IS : 1816-1961

Methodforten-

sile test in light metals and than alloys.

9.2 HeadLForming Test ( Applicable

only to Rivet Stock of 1.6 mm DiameterandAbove)-For

rivet stock of
1.6 mm to 6.5 mm diameter, a length of rivet stock equal to the diameter shall be flattened cold in an axial
direction
until the diameter
of the flattened
part is equal to twice the original diameter.
For diameters
greater than 6.5 mm, the diameter of the flattened
part shall be equal to 1.8 times the original diameter.

330

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART 1

IS : 740-197Y
TABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM
RIVET STOCK FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING
PURPOSES

( Clause 4.1

( Composition
Designation

Alumlnlum

Copper

limits

are in percent

Magnesium

Silicon

maximum

Iron

unless

Manganese

shown

Zinc

otherwise

Titanium

Chro mlum

(
NEW

19000

Remarks

%!::
Grain
Refinina
Elements

OLD

(1)

ALLOY

(3)

(2)

MC

99.0 Min

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

0.1

0.2

0.5

0.7

0.1

0.1

0.5-1.2
0.6
0.6
0.6-I .3
0.4-0.8

0.5
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.6

0.3-l .2
0.5
0.5
0.4-l .o
0.2-0.8

0.2
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.2

(11)

(12)

Cu+Mg+Si+Fe
+ Mn + Zn = 1.0

24345
53000
55000
64430
65032

HR 15

Remainder

NR 5
NR 6
HR 30
HR 20

Remainder
Remainder

3.6-5.0
0.1
0.1

Remainder
Remainder

0.1
0.15-0.4

0.2-0.8
2.8-4.0
4.5-5.5
0.4-1.2
0.7-l .2

0.3
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.15-0.35

0.3
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2

Cr+Mn=0.5
Cr+Mn=0.5
Either Mn or Cr
shall be present

NOTE-H
is the responsibility
of the supplier to ensure that any element not specifically
limited is not present in an
amount such as is generally accepted as having an adverse effect on the product. If the purchasers
requirements
necessitate
limits for any element not specified these should be agreed between the supplier and the purchaser

*Titanium and/or other grain refining elements

the total content does not exceed 0.3 percent.

and/or chromium

may be present

at the option

of the supplier

provided

TABLE 2 MECHANICAL
PROPERTIES OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM
AND ALUMINIUM ALLOY RIVET STOCK FOR
GENERAL ENGINEERING
PURPOSES
( Clause 4.1
Designation

Size

Condition

)
TENSILE

( Diameter )

STRENGTH

of Material

Mn

(4)

(3)
19000
24345
53000

RIC
HR 15
NR 5

55000

NR 6

64439
65032

HR 30
HR 20

H2
W*
0 or M
OD
0 or M
OD
W*
W

Up to any%cluding
11
1,
(1
71
I,
I,
I,

12.0
12.0
25.0.
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0

Nlmrr? ((5k$f,mms
110 ( 11.0)
390 ( 39.5 )
215 ( 22.0 )
245 ( 25.0 )
245 (25.0 )
280 ( 28.5 )
200 ( 20.5 )
185 ( 19.0 )

(newton per square millimetre)

=0.102 kgflmd.
Wire supplied in OD condition but tested in W condition.
tl0 to 20 percent reduction in cross-sectional
area after drawing.
NOTE-N/m&

10.

Retests

10.1 Should any one of the test pieces first selected fail to conform to the mechanical
tests, two further
samples from the same lot shall be selected for testing, one of which shall be from the rivet stock from
which the original test sample was taken unless that rivet stock has been withdrawn
by the supplier.
10.1.1 For heat-treatable
alloys, the supplier shall
material before the two further samples are selected.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

have the rignt

if he so desires,

to reheat-treat

the

331

IS :740-1977
10.2 Should the test pieces from both these additional samples conform to values prescribed, the lot
represented by the test samples shall be deemed to comply with the requirements of mechanical properties.
Should the test pieces from either of these additional samples fail, the lot represented by the test samples
shall be liable to rejection.
11. Marking
11.1 Rivet stock shall be suitably marked for identification
with the name of the manufacturer, material
designation, and condition of the material. If required by the purchaser, the supplier shall furnish a certificate that the material supplied complies with the requirements of this specification.

11.1.1 The material may also be marked with the ISI Certification Mark. The suppliers
11.1 ) shall be implied if the material is certified under the ISI Certification Mark.

certification

( see

NOTE-The
use of the ISI Certification
Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution
(Certification
Marks ) Act and the Rules and Regulations
made thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the requirements
of that standard
under a well-defined
system of inspection,
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised
by ISI and
operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously
checked by ISI for conformity
to that standard as
a further safeguard.
Details of conditions
under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification
Mark may be
granted to manufacturers
or processors may be obrained from the Indian Standards
Institution.

APPENDIX
( Clause
CHARACTERISTICS
Designation

A
0.3 )

AND TYPICAL USES OF RIVET STOCK

Characterlstlcs

Available
Forms

Typical Uses

KJOOO RIG

Commercially
pure aluminium,
Very
ductile
in annealed
or extruded
condition.
Excellent*
resistant
to
corrosion

Sheet, plate, extrusion,

wire
and
tube,
forgings

Rivets used in equipments

for food,
chemical
brewing
and processing,
cooking utensils, architectural
and
builders hardwares
and in aircraft
manufacture

24345 HR 15

Combines high strength with fair ductility in the solution-treated condition

when forming can be done and parts
subsequently aged

Sheet, plate, extrusion,

tube,
wire
and
forgings

Rivets used in structures where high

mechanical properties are of utmost
importance, aircraft structures

53000 NR 5

Ductile
in soft condition
but work
hardens rapidly becoming extremely
tough.
Has high
resistance
to
corrosion in marine atmosphere

Sheet, plate, extrusion,

wire
tube,
and
forgings

Rivets used in ship building, pressure

vessels and other processing tanks
and in aircraft manufacture

55oOONR6

do

do

Rivets used in ship building, aircraft

manufacture
and other applications
demanding moderately high strength
with good corrosion resistsance

Sheet, plate, extrusion,

wire
tube,
and
forgings

Rivets used in structures of all kinds,

such as road and rail transport vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses,
cargo containers, flooring

Sheet, plate, extrusion,

wire
tube,
and
forgings

Structural
applications
of all kinds
such as road and rail transport vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses,
rivets, etc. Cargo containers,
milk
containers,
deep drawn containers
and flooring

G%7

64430 HA 30

Medium
strength
alloy
mechanical
properties,
resistance and weldability

65032 HR 20

Medium strength,
characteristics
condition. Good

332

with
good
corrosion

very good forming

in the 0 and W
corrosion resistance

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1148-1982

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
HOT=ROLLED STEEL RIVET BARS
( UP TO 40 mm DIAMETER ) FOR
STRUCTURAL PURPOSES
( Third Revision

0. Foreword

0.1 This Indian Standard (Third Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 25 November
1982, after the draft finalized by the Wrought Steel Products Sectional Committee had been approved by the
Structural and Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard was first published in 1957 and was revised in 1964 and 1973. In view of the experience
gained during subsequent vears it was decided to revise this Indian Standard incorporating the following
main modifications:
a) Amendments

No. 1, 2 and 3 have been incorporated;

b) Strengths have been specified

nationally and internationally;

in terms of MPa, in alignment

with adoption

of SI units both

c) Requirements for shear strength have been specified; and

d) Clause on retest has been deleted, since it is duly covered in is: 8910-1978 General
delivery requirements for steel and steel products.

technical

0.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960 Rules for sounding off nUtneriCal ValUeS (revised). The number of significant places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirements for hot-rolled steel rivet bars in size up to 40 mm diameter used
for the manufacture of hot forged rivets for structural purposes,

2. Supply of Material
2.1 General requirements
891 O-l 978 .

relating

to supply of rivet bars for structural

purposes shall conform to IS :

3. Manufacture
3.1 Rivet bars shall be made from the steel manufactured by open-hearth, electric, duplex, basic oxygen or a
combination of these processes. In case any other process is employed by the manufacturer, prior approval
of the purchaser shall be obtained.
3.1.1 Steel shall be semi-killed or killed.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

333

IS : 1148-1982
4. Chemical Composition
4.1 Lad/e Analysis-Ladle
analysis of the steel, when carried out either by the method specified in the relevant parts of IS : 228
or any other established instrumental/chemical
method shall be as given below. In
case of dispute the procedure given in the relevant part of IS : 228
shall be the referee method:
Percent, Max
0.23
0.050
0.050

Constifuent
Carbon
Sulphur
Phosphorus
42Product Analysis-Permissible
shall be as follows:

variation in case of product analysis, from the limits specified under 4.1,

Constituent

Variation Over Specified

Limits, Percent, Max

Carbon
Sulphur
Phosphorus

0.02
0.005
0.005

4.3 When steel is required in copper bearing quality, copper content shall be between 0.20 to 0.35 percent. In
case of product analysis, permissible variation shall not exceedf0.03
percent.
4.4 When the steel is supplied silicon-killed, silicon content on product analysis shall not be less than 0.1
percent. When the steel is silicon-aluminium-killed
or aluminium-killed, the requirement regarding minimum
silicon content shall not apply.
5. Freedom from Defects
5.1 Rivet bars shall be well and cleanly rolled to the dimensions and tolerances specified. The finished
material shall be free from such surface and internal flaws as would be detrimental to the end use of the
material.
6. Lengths
6.1 Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer,
ly in multiples of 250 mm length.

rivet bars shall be supplied on-

7. Dimenslonal Tolerance
7.1 The bars shall comply with the following

dimensional

tolerances:
Total Tolerances
mm

Diameter of Bar
mm
Below 20
20
22 to 24
Over 24

0.40
0.45
0.50
2 percent of diameter

7.1.1 All the tolerances specified shall be minus tolerances. When special plus and minus tolerances are
required by the purchaser the sum of such tolerances shall not be specified as less than the above total
tolerances.
6. Selection of Test Samples
6.1 Test samples may be selected by the purchaser from the cuttings

of the bars.

6.2 Test samples shall not be cut from the bars except in the presence or with the approval of the purchasers.
6.3 Before the test samples are selected, full particulars regarding cast number, size, weight, or number of
bars in each cast shall be furnished by the manufacturer to the purchaser.

334

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :1148-1982
8.4 The test samples shall not be annealed or otherwise subjected to heat treatment unless the material
from which they are cut is similarly treated, in which case, the test samples shall be similarly and
simultaneously treated with the material before testing. Any slight straightening of test samples which may
be required shall be done cold.
9. Tensile Test
9.1 One tensile test shall be made from the finished steel for every 10 tonnes of a cast or part thereof. When
more than one diameter of the bar is specified, one additional test shall be made for each variation in
diameter.
9.2 The tensile properties of steel when determined in accordance with IS : 1608-1972 Methodfortensile
testing of steel products (firstrevision).
shall be as given below:
Characteristic

Requirement

Tensile strength, MPa

Yield stress, Min, MPa:
a) 6 mm up to and including 12 mm
b) Over 12 mm up to and including 20 mm
c) Over 20 mm up to and including 40 mm
Elongation percent, Min,
gauge length 5.65 So
1 MPa = 1 Nlmn-? = I MN/n? =0.1020 kg. f/mm.

41O-530
260
250
240
23

9.3 No tensile test shall be carried out on bars below 6 mm.

10. Dump Test
10.1 One dump test shall be made from the finished steel for every 10 tonnes of a cast or part thereof. One
additional test shall be made for each variation in diameter.
10.2 A test piece, having a length equal to twice its diameier, cut from the rivet bar, shall not fracture or
reveal any crack while being compressed to half its length at room temperature.
Note- For bars above 30 mm in diameter, co-axial hole may be drilled on the dump test specimens to suit the
capacity of the testing machine, provided no cave-in is found after testing.
10.2.1 Minor surface flaws which do not tend to open out wider than 0.4 mm + 0.04 times the diameter of
the rivet bar shall not be the cause for rejection. For special applications, the limit for minor surface defects
shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.

10.3 Dump test shall not be applicable

to bars below 6 mm.

11. Bend Test

11.1 One bend test shall be carried out for every 10 tonnes of a cast or part thereof. One additional
be made for each variation in diameter.
11.2 The bend test shall be carried out in accordance with IS : 1599-1974 Method
PrOdUCtSotherthansheet,strip,wireandtube(firstrevision).

test shall

for bendtest forsteel

11.2.1 In the case of bars over 25 mm in diameter the test piece, when cold shall,withstand,
without fracture, being doubled over, either by pressure or by slow and steady blows from a hammer, till the internal
diameter is not greater than three times the diameter of the test piece, and the sides are parallel.
11.2.2 For bars 25 mm in diameter

of the bend shall be not greater

than

12.1 One shear test shall be carried out for every 10 tonnes of a cast or part thereof. One additional
shall be made for each variation in diameter.

test

twice

the diameter

and under, the internal

diameter

of the bar.

12. Shear Test

12.2 The ultimate shear strength of the bars as rolled shall be not less than 330 MPa. The shear test shall be
carried out in accordance with IS : 5242-1979 Method ot test for determining shear strength Of metals
(first revision 1
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

335

IS : 1148-1982

13. Packing and Marking

13.1 Rivet bars shall be securely bundled and a metal tag attached to each bundle shall be marked with the
following:
a) Manufacturers

name or trade-mark; and

b) Cast number or identification

made.

mark by which the steel can be traced to the cast from which it was

13.2 Rivet bars, when not secured in bundles, shall each be legibly marked as specified
13.2.1 The material may also be marked .with the ISI Certification

in 13.1.

Mark.

Note-The
use of the ISI Certification
Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards
Institution
( Certification
Marks) Act and the Rules and Regulations
made thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the requirements
of that standard
under at well-defined
system of inspection,
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised
by ISI and
operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously
checked by ISI for conformity
to that standard as
a further safeguard.
Details of conditions
under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification
mark may be
granted to manufacturers
or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.

336

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1149-1982

Indian Standard

1
m

SPECIFICATION FOR
HIGH TENSILE STEEL RIVET BARS FOR
STRUCTURALPURPOSES

( Third Revision )

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard (Third Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards institution on 25 November
1982, after the draft finalized by the Wrought Steel Products Sectional Committee had been approved by the
Structural and Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard was first published in 1957 and was revised in 1964 and 1973. In view of the experience
gained during the subsequent years the committee has decided to revise this Indian Standard incorporating
the following main modifications;
a) Strengths have been specified in term of MPa, in alignment
nationally and internationally;
and

with adoption

of SI units both

b) Clause on retest has been deleted as it is duly covered in IS : 8910-1978. General technical
delivery requirements for steel and steel products.
0.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960. Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised).
The number of significant places retained
in te rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. scope
1.1This standard covers the requirements
structural purposes.

for high tensile steel rivet bars in sizes up to 40 mm diameter for

2. Supply of Material
2.1 General requirements
8910-1978*.

relating

to the supply of high tensile

steel rivet bars shall conform

to IS :

3. Manufacture
3.1 Rivet bars shall be made from the steel manufactured by open-hearth, electric, duplex, basis oxygen or a
combination of these processes. In case any other process is employed by the manufacturer, prior approval
of the purchaser should be obtained.
3.1.1 Steel shall be supplied

semi-killed or killed.

3.1.2 Unless specified otherwise,

bars shall be supplied in hot-rolled condition.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

337

IS : 1149-1982
4. Chemical

Composition

4.1 Ladle Analysis-Ladle

analysis of the steel, when carried out either by the method specified in the relevant parts of IS : 228 + or any other established
instrumental/chemical
method shall be as given below. In
case of dispute the procedure given in the relevant part of IS : 228+ shall be the referee method:

Constifuent

Percent, Max

Carbon
Sulphur
Phosphorus

0.23
0.050
0.050

4.2 Product Analysis-Permissible

4.1 shall

variation

in the case of product

analysis,

from the limits

specified

under

be as follows:

Variations Over the Specified

Constituent

Maximum Limit,Percent
0.02
0.005
0.005

Carbon
Sulphur
Phosphours

4.3 When steel is required

case of product

analysis,

in copper bearing quality, copper content shall be between

permissible
variation
shall not exceed zlzO.03 percent.

0.20 to 0.35 percent.

In

4.4 When the steel is silicon-killed,

silicon content in the product analysis
shall not be less than 0.10 percent. When the steel is silicon-aluminium-killed
or aluminium-killed
the requirement
regarding
minimum
silicon content shall not apply.
5. Freedom

from Defects

5.1 Rivet bars shall be well and cleanly

material shall be free from such surface
material.

rolled to the dimensions

and tolerances
specified.
The finished
and internal flaws as would be detrimental
to the end use of the

6. Lengths
6.1 Unless agreed to otherwise between
in multiples
of 250 mm length.
7. Dimensional

the purchaser

and the manufacturer,

rivet bars shall be ordered

only

Tolerances

7.1 The bars shall

comply

with the following

dimensional

tolerances:

Total Tolerance

Diameter of Bar
mm
Below

mm
0.40
0.45
0.50
2 percent of
diameter

20
20
22 and 24
Over 24

7.1.1 All the tolerances

specified
under 7.1 shall be minus tolerances.
When special
tolerances
are requirec.i by the purchaser, the sum of such tolerances shall not be specified
above total tolerances.

plus and minus

as less than the

6. Selection of Test Samples

6.1 Test samples

8.2

may be selected

The test samples

purchaser.

338

shall

by the purchaser

not be cut from

from the cuttings

the bars except

of the bars.

in the presence

HANDBOOK

ON

or with

INDUSTRIAL

the approval

FASTENERS-PART

of the

IS : 1149-l 982
8.3 Before the test samples are selected full particulars
regarding cast number,
bars in each cast shall be furnished by the manufacturer
to the purchaser.

size, weight

and number

of

8.4 The test samples shall not be annealed or otherwise

subjected
to heat treatment
unless the material
from which they are cut is similarly
treated,
in which case the test samples
shall be similarly
and
simultaneously
treated, with the material
before testing. Any slight straightening
of test samples, which
may be required, shall be done cold.
Test

9. Tensile

9.1 One tensile test shall be made from the finished steel for every 10 tonnes of a cast or part thereof. When
more than one diameter of the bar is specified,
one additional
test shall be made for each variation
in
diameter.
9.2 The tensile properties of steel bar when determined
in accordance
with
tensile testing of steels products (fifsf revision). shall be as given below:

Characteristic

9.3 No tensile

test shall

for

310
300
280

percent, Min, gauge length 5.65r

MPa= lN/mm*

Methods

460

a) 6 mm up to and including
12 mm
b) Over 12 mm up to and including 20 mm
c) Over 20 mm up to and including 40 mm

Note-l

1608-1972

Requirement

strength, Min, MPa

Min Yield stress, MPa

Tensile

Elongation

IS :

= lMN/m*

be carried

=0.102

22

0 kgflmd

out on bars below

6 mm.

10. BendTest
10.1One bend test shall be carried out for every 10 tonnes
be made for each variation
in diameter.
10.2 The bend test shall be carried out in accordance
productsotherthansheet,strip,wireandtube(firstrevision).

of a cast or part thereof.

with

IS : 1599-1974

One additional

Method

for bend test for steel

10.2.1 In case of bars over 25 mm in diameter, the test piece, when cold, snail withstand,
without
being doubled over, either by pressure or by slow and steady blows from a hammer, till the internal
is not greater than three times the diameter of the test piece and the sides are parallel.
10.2.2 For bars 25 mm in diameter
twice the diameter of the bar.

and under, the internal

diameter

of the bend shall

test shall

fracture,
diameter

be not greater

than

One additional

test

ll.ShearTest
11.1 One shear test shall be carried out for every 10 tonnes
shall be made for each variation
in diameter.

of a cast or part thereof.

11.2The ultimate shear strength of the bars as rolled shall be not less than 370 MPa. The shear test shall be
carried out in accordance
with IS : 5242-1979 Methodof
testfordeterminingshearstrength
of mild steel

(firstrevision).

12. Hot Compression

Test

12.1 One hot compression

test shall be made for every 10 tonnes
shall be made for each variation
in diameter.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

of cast or part thereof.

One additional

test

339

IS : 1149-l 982
12.2 A test piece, having a length equal to twice its diameter, shall be cut from a bar and shall, without
cracking or showing signs of fracture withstand being heated to a forging temperature and hammered or
compressed on the end till its length has been reduced to its original diameter.

13. Packing and Marking

13.1 Rivet bars shall be securely bundled, and a metal tag attached to each bundle shall be marked with the
following:
a) Manufacturers names or trade-mark, and
b) Cast number or identification
mark by which the steel can be traced to the cast from which it
was made.
13.2 Rivet bars, when not secured in bundles, shall each be legibly marked as specified
13.3 The material may also be marked with the ISI Certification

in 13.1.

Mark.

Note-The use of the ISI Certification

Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards
Institution
(Certification
Marks) Act and the Rules and Regulations
made thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the requirements
of that standard
under a well-defined
system of inspection,
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised
by ISI and
operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously
checked by ISI for conformity
to that standard as a
further safeguard. Details of conditions
under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification
Mark may be granted
to manufacturers
or processors, may beobtained
from the Indian Standards Institution.

340

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1284-l

975

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
WROUGHT ALUMINIUM ALLOY BOLT AND
SCREW STOCK ( FOR GENERAL
ENGINEERING PURPOSES )
( Second Revision )

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard ( Second Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution
on 26
September 1975, after the draft finalized by the Light Metals and Their Alloys Sectional Committee had been
approved by the Structural and Metals Division Council.

0.2 This standard was first issued in 1956 and subsequently revised in 1966. Further revision became
necessary as a number of new alloys which have found wide applications in engineering industries were required to be included. Tables on requirements for mechanical properties were reviewed and modified
wherever necessary. The main modifications which have been made in this revision are as follows:
a)

Four alloys 24534 ( H14 ), 53000 ( N5 ), 64423 and 65032 (H20) have been added.

b)

Heat-treatable

c)

Code designations given in IS : 6051-1970 Code for designation of aluminium and its alloys have
been adopted in this standard! However, the relevant old Indian Standard designations have also
been included for ready reference.

d)

alloy 65400 ( HB19 ) which has a limited use has been excluded.

Metric units of System International dllnites ( SI ) have been used. These have been adopted
by the International
Organization for Standardization
( IS0 ) and the International
Electrotechnical Commission ( IEC ). It is expected that they will become the generally accepted
metric units throughout the world. However, during the transition period, equivalent figures in
kgflmrr? have also been given along with the SI units to facilitate smooth change over.

0.3 Some characteristics

and typical uses of the alloys have been listed in Appendix A.

0.4 The major alloying elements have been printed in bold face in the chemical composition

( see Table 1 ).

0.5 In the formulation of this standard due weightage has been given to international co-ordination among
the standards and practices prevailing in different countries in addition to relating it to the practices in the
field in this country. This has been met by deriving assistance from BS 1473: 1972 Wrought aluminium and
aluminium alloys, rivet, bolt and screw stock issued by the British Standards Institution.
0.6 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960. Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard
tempers.

covers the requirements

of wrought aluminium

alloy, bolt and screw stock in various

2. Terminology
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

definitions

shall apply.

341

IS : 1284-1975
2.1 60/t

Stock-Round

bar or wire suitable

2.2 Screw Stock-Round

for the manufacture

bar or wire suitable

of bolts.

for the manufacture

of screws

by machining.

2.3 Heat Treatment Batch-A

quantity of material of one alloy, of the nearly same dimensions
and produced
in the same way, solution-treated
in one furnace load, or such material so solution-treated
and subsequently precipitation-treated
in one furnace load. More than one heat treatment
batch may comprise a furnace
load.
3. Supply of Material
3.1 General requirements
for the supply of aluminium
and aluminium
alloy products
1387-1967 General requirementsforthesupplyof
metallurgical
materials(firstrevision).

shall

to IS :

conform

4. Freedom from Defects

4.1 Bolt and screw stock

shall

5. Chemical

and Mechanical

Composition

be sound

and free from harmful

Properties

5.1 The chemical composition

and mechanical
quirements
of Table 1 and Table 2 respectively.

properties

of bolt and screw stock

5.1.1 The chemical analysis of the material shall be carried

of chemical analysisof
aluminiumand
its alloy(revised).
5.1.2 Mechanical
8. Dimensions

tests shall

be carried

out as specified

out in ac.cordance

shall complywith

the re-

IS : 504-1963Methods

with

in 8.

and Tolerances

8.1 The diameters of bolt and screw stock and the tolerances
: 3577-1967 Diameters of wrought aluminium and aluminium
7. Selection

defects.

permissible
on them shall be as laid down in IS
alloys, rivet, bolt and screw stock.

of Test Samples

7.0 The test samples shall be selected as specified in 7.1. Beforethe

marked to identify them with the lot they represent.

test samples

are cut off, they shall be

7.1 Bolt and Screw Stock of Nonheat-Treatable

Aluminium
AlloysBolt and screw stock of the same
diameter, of the same grade and manufactured
under similar conditions
shall be grouped into lots weighing
up to 250 kg and one test sample shall be cut from a coil or length selected.
7.2 Bolt and Screw Stock of Heat-Treatable
Aluminium
Alloys-Bolt
and screwstock
of the same diameter,
of the same grade and manufactured
under similar conditions
shall be grouped into lots weighing up to 250
kg and one test sample shall be cut from a coil or length selected from each lot. The test sample shall be
tested in the W or WP condition as specified by the purchaser, except that for alloy 24534 ( HB14) and 24345
( HB15) the head-forming
test shall be made on the test sample not more than two hours after solution treatment. The test samples shall not be machanically
worked or further heat-treated
before they are tested.
8. Mechanical
8.0 The following

Tests
tests shall be made on the test pieces prepared

from test samples

selected

as specified

in 7.
8.1 Tensile Test-The
tensile
dance with IS: 1816-1961.

test shall

be carried

out and the proof

stress

determined

thereby

in accor-

8.2 Head Forming Test (Applicable

Only to Bolt and Screw Stock 1.60 mm Diameter and Above)For bolt
and screw stock 1.60 to 6.50 mm diameter, a length of bolt and screw stock equal to the diameter shall be
flattened
cold in an axial direction
until the diameter of the flattened
part shall be equal to 1.8 times the
original diameter.

342

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1284-l

975

TABLE 1 CHEMICAL
COMPOSITION
OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM
ALLOY BOLT
AND SCREW STOCK ( FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING
PURPOSES )
( Clause

( Composition
Alloy Designation
,

Copper

Magnesium

limits

are in percent

Silicon

iron

5.1 )

maximum,

Manganese

unless

Zinc

,
New

Old

(1)

(4

(3)

(4)

(6)

(5)

shown

as a range

Titanium
and/or
Other
Grain
Refining
Elements

Chromium

(10)

(7)

(8)

(3
*0.3

)
Aluminium

Remarks

(11)

l0.3

(12)

24345

HB15

3.8-5.0

0.2-0.8

0.5-l .2

0.7

0.3-l .2

0.2

24534

HB14

3.5-4.7

0.4-l .2

0.2-0.7

0.7

0.4-l .o

0.2

0.3

Remainder

53000

NB5

0.1

2.8-4.0

0.6

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.2

0.25

Remainder

Cr + Mn = 0.5

55000

NB6

0.1

4.5-5.5

0.6

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.2

0.25

Remainder

Cr + Mn = 0.5

64423

64430

HB30

65032

HB20

0.5-l .o

0.5-l .3

0.7-l .3

0.8

1.0

0.1

0.4-l .2

0.6-l .3

0.6

0.4-l .o

0.1

0.2

0.7-l .2

0.4-0.8

0.7

0.2-0.8

0.2

0.2

0.15-0.4

Remainder

_
_

Remainder

0.25

Remainder

0.15-0.35

Remainder

Either Mn or Cr
shall be present

NoteIt is the responsibility

of the supplier to ensure that any element not specifically
limited is not present in an
amount such as is generally
accepted
as having an adverse effect on the product.
If a purchasers
requirements
necessitate
limits for any element not specified, these should be agreed to between the supplier and the purchaser.
*Titanium and/or other grain refining elements
ed the total content does not exceed 0.3 percent.

and/or chromium

may be present

at the option

of the supplier

provid-

TABLE 2 MECHANICAL
PROPERTIES OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM
ALLOY, BOLT AND
SCREW STOCK ( FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING
PURPOSES )

( Clause 5.1 )
( Single figures indicate
Alloy
r
New

Designation
A

Condition
\

Test

Old

(2)

(1)

Dimeter

of

minimum
0.2

f-A-

value
Percent

Proof

Tensile
Strength

Stress

Over

Up to and
Including

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

mm

mm

N/m&

Nlmn-?
kgflmrr?

(3)

( kgf/m&

24345

HB15

WP

12.5

345

( 35.0 )

430

( 44.0 )

24534

HB14

12.5

220

( 22.5 )

375

( 38.0 )

53000

NB5

H2

12.5

220

( 22.5 )

270-320

( 27.5-32.5 )
NB6

55000

H2

12.5

240

( 24.5 )

310-355

( 31.5-36.0 )
64423

WP

64430

HB30

WP

HB20

65032

WP

12.5

265

( 27.0 )

330 (33.5

( 26.0 )
( 27.5 )

295 ( 30.0

6.3

255

6.3

12.5

270

6.3

6.3
12.5

225 ( 23.0
235(240)

Note-N/m&
(newton per square millimetre)
= 0.102/kgflmm2~
For temper designation,
refer to IS : !jO52-1g69
Temper designations

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

of alUminiUm

310(31.5)
265
280

( 27.0 )
( 28.5 )

and its alloys.

343

IS:1284-1975
9. Retests
9.1 Should any one of the test pieces first selected fail to conform to the mechanical
tests, two further
samples from the same lot shall be selected for testing, one of which shall be from the bolt and screw stock
from which the original test sample was taken, unless that has been withdrawn
by the supplier.
9.1.1 For heat-treatable
alloys, the supplier shall
material before two further samples are selected.

have the right,

if he so desires,

to reheat-treat

the

9.2 Should the test pieces from both these additional

samples conform to the values prescribed,
the lot
represented
by the test samples shall be deemed to comply with the requirbments
of mechancial
properties.
Should the test piece from either of these additional
samples fail, the Ii)t rep;es@nted by the test sarrlpl~s
shall be liable to rejection.
10. Marking
10.1 If required, bolt and screw stock may by suitably
marked for identification,
manufacturers,
grade and condition
of the material.
The supplier shall furnish
material

supplied

complies

with

the requirements

with the name of the

a certificate
that
the

of this specification.

10.1.1 The material may also be marked with the ISI Certification
Mark. The suppliers
10.1 ) shall be implied if the material is certified under the ISI Certification
Mark.

certification

(see

Note- The use of the ISI Certification

Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards
Institution
( Certification
Marks ) Act and the Rules and Regulations
made thereunder. The ISI mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance
that they have been produced to comply with the requirements
of that standard
under a well-defined
system of inspection,
testlng and quality control which is devised and supervised
by ISI and
operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously
checked by ISI for conformity
to that standard as
a further safeguard.
Details of conditions
under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification
Mark may be
granted to manufacturers
or processors,
may be obtained from the Indian Standards
Institution.

344

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1284-I

975

APPENDIX
A
( Clause 0.3 )
CHARACTERISTICS AND TYPICAL USES OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS
Alloy
Designation
New

,
24345

24534

Old
A

Available
Forms

Characteristics

Typical

HB15

HB14

Combines
high
strength
with
fair
ductility
in the solution-treated
condition,
when
forming
can
be done and parts
subsequently
aged

Sheet,

A strong

Extrusion,
Tube, Wire,
Rolled Rod, and Forgings

Stressed
parts
in aircraft
structures
where
high
of primaryconsideration

Sheet, Extrusion,
Tube,
Wire. and Rolled Rod

Shipbuilding;
rivets,
pressure
vessels
and other
processing
tanks;
cryogenics, and welded structures

Sheet, Plate,
Forgings

Shipbuilding
and
other
applications
demanding
moderately
hfgh strength
with good corrosion
resistance;
rivets,
zippers, welding wire,etc.

alloy

at room
tion
ductilitv

that

is aged

temperature

treatment
in

and

naturally

after
has

solufair

Plate,

Extrusion,

Tube, Wire. and Forgings

Duc!ire

in
soft
but
condition,
work hardens
rapidly
becoming
extremely
tough.
Has high resistarce
to!corrosive
attack,
especially
in marineatmosphere

NB5

55000

NE36

64423

Stronger
than
64430
(H30)
has superior machinability

64430

HB30

Mediumstrength
alloy
with
good
mechanical
properties,
corrosion
resistance and weldability

Sheet, Plate,
Tube, Wire,

Medium-strength
to 64430

Sheet, Plate, Extrusion,

Tube, Forgings,
and
Wire

do

HB20

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

Heavy duty forgings,

structures
where
high
mechanical
properties
are of
utmost
importance,
aircraft
application
nf clad
sheets,
extrusions
and armaments

and otfier
strength
is

thiscondition

53000

65032

Uses

alloy

and

similar

FASTENERS-PART

Wire,

and

Applications
requiring good strength and
machinability
such as textile machinery
components

Extrusions

Extrusion,
and Forg-

ings

Structural applications
of all kinds, such as
road and rail transport vehicles, bridges,
cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo
containers,
milk containers,
deep drawn
containers and flooring

Similar to 64430

345

IS : 1673-l

984

Indian

1
Is1

MILD

Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
STEEL WIRE, COLD HEADING
( Second Revision )

QUALITY
4

0 Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard (Second Revision) was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 30
January
1984, after the draft finalized by the Wrought
Steel Products Sectional
Committee
had
been approved
by the Structural
and Metals
Division Council.
0.2 This
following

standard
was first
main modifications

a) Title has been modified

than machine
screws.

published
in 1960
have been made:
since wires

and

was

revised

to this specification

in 1973.

In this

revision,

are also used for applications

the
other

b) Size of the wires covered in the specification

has been changed to 12.5 mm dia maximum
to bring it in line with the maximum
size specified for wire in IS : 1956 (Part 5)-l 976
Specification
for bright steel bar and steel wire (first revision).
c) Provisions

for

reverse

torsion

test

d) Reference
has been given to
for steel and steel products,for

and

crushing

test

have

IS : 8910-1978
General
supply conditions.

been

technical

made.
delivery

requirements

0.3 For the purpose of deciding whether

a particular
requirement
of this standard is complied
with, the final value, observed or calculated,
expressing
the result of a test or analysis, shall be
rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-l 960 Rules for rounding off numeral values (revised).
The
number of significant
places retained in the rounded off.value
should be the same as that of the
specified
value in this standard.

1 Scope
1 .I This standard covers the requirements
for two grades of cold drawn
from 1.60 to 12.50 mm diameter,
suitable for the manufacture
of machine
and thread rolling process.
2 Supply

2.1
laid

mild steel wire ranging

screws by cold heading

of Material

General requirements
relating
down in IS : 8910-1978.

to the supply of mild steel wire cold heading

quality

shall be as

3 Terminology
3.0

For the

purpose

of this

standard,

the

3.1 Wire Road-A

semi-finished
hot rolled
great length produced
in coil form for cold

following
product
drawing.

definitions

shall

of relatively

apply.

small

cross-section

and

very

3.2 Wire -The

product
of a wire
rod whose
sectional
area has been reduced
at normal
temperatures
either by drawing
through a specially prepared
orificeor
passing under pressure
between
suitably driven rolls.
3.3

Coil-One

continuous

length

of rod as drawn

or rolled

in the

form

of a coil.

4 Manufacture

4.1 The
otherwise
4.2

manufacturing
process
of steel shall be determined
agreed to between
the contracting
parties.

Steel

5 Chemical

shall

be supplied

either

in semi-killed

or killed

by the

manufacturer,

unless

condition.

Composition

5.1

Analysis of wire when analyzed either by the method specified in the relevant parts of IS : 228
Method for chemical analysis of steel (second revision) (issued in parts) or any other established

346

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1673-I
instrumental/chemical
method shall be as given below. In case of dispute,
IS : 228 and its relevant
parts shall be the referee
method.
Constituent

0.20
0.30 to 0.60
0.055
0.055

Note-When
the steel is silicon killed, the
the steel is aluminium
killed, the requirement

from

product analysis shall

regarding
minimum

show a minimum
of 0.10
silicon content does not

silicon.

When

The material shall be practically free from external and internal

holes and blisters,
laps, grooves, cracks or flaws, shrink holes

defects such as pits, pores, pin

and slag inclusions.

Properties

7.1

steel wire, when tested in accordance

with IS : 1521-I 972
wire (first revision),
shall have the following
properties:

Tensile Properties-The
for tensile testing of steei
Grade

Ultimate

1 MPa = 1 N/mm

Tensile
MPa
440
590

Note -

percent
apply.

Defects

6.1

7 Mechanical

given in

Percent

Carbon, Max
Manganese
Sulphur,
Max
Phosphorus,
Max

6 Freedom

the procedure

984

= 0.102

Method

Strength,

to 590
to 780

kgf/mm.

7.2 Reverse
Torsion Test-When
a sample specimen
(length
equivalent
to 30 times of the
diameter
of the wire) twisted four times around 360 in one direction and four times back to its
original position shall withstand
twist without
showing
surface cracks.
7.3 Crushing
length, shall

Test - A specimen
of length 1.5 times
not show any cracks in its flanks.

when

upset cold to l/3

of its

The wire shall be supplied to the sizes and tolerances

as specified
tolerance
is specified
the following
limits shall be applicable:

by the purchaser.

If no

8 Dimensions

its diameter,

and Tolerances

8.1

Diameter
From

1.60

in mm
up to and

Permissible
Variation
in mm
including

3.00

Above

3.00

up to and

including

6.00

Above

6.00

up to and

including

10.00

Above

10.00

up to and

including

+o
- 0.060
+o
- 0.075
$0
- 0.090
+o
- 0.110

12.50

9 Packing

9.1
shall

Each coil of wire shall be bound and fastened compactly.

be agreed to between
the contracting
parties.

The maximum

weight

of each

coil

10 Marking
10.1 Each coil of wire shall be legibly marked
and trade-mark
or name of the manufacturer.
10.1 .I

The

material

rnay also

with

be marked

with

the grade,
the

size of wire,

ISI Certification

date of manufacture,

Mark.

Note-The
use of the ISI Certification
Mark
is governed
by the provisions
of the Indian Standards
Institution
(Certification
Marks) Act and the Rules and Regulations
made thereunder.
The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance
that they have been produced to comply with the requirements
of that standard under a
well-defined
system of Inspection,
testing and quality control which is devised and supervlsed
by ISI and operated by the
producer, ISI marked products are also continuously
checked by ISI for conformity to that standard as a further safeguard.
Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification Mark may be granted to manufacturers
or
may be obtained
from the Indian Standards
Institution.
processors,

11 Sampling
11 .I
shall

and Criteria

Sampling of wire
be in accordance

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

for Conformity

and criteria for conformity for mechanical

properties and chemical
with IS : 10206-1982
Methods
of sampling
of steel wire
FASTENERS-PART

analysis

347

IS :1812-1982

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
CARBON STEEL WIRE FOR THE
MANUFACTURE OF WOOD SCREWS
( Second

Revision )

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard
( Second Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards
Institution
on 25
November 1982, after the draft finalized by the Wrought Steel Products Sectional Committee
had been approved by the Structural
and Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard was first published
light of the experience
gained during
making following
main modifications:

in 1961 and was revised in 1973. While reviewing the standard, in the
subsequent
years, the Committee
has decided to revise the standard

a) Amendment
No. 1 has been deleted in view of the publication
of IS : 8053-1976
billets for the production of steel wire for the manufacture
of wood screws.
b) Amendment

No. 2 has been incorporated;

c) Strenght has been specified

and internationally;
and
d) Appendix

Steel ingots and

in MPa, in alignment

A has been modified

with

in line with the existing

the adoption

Indian

of SI units

Standards

both nationally

On the subject.

0.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular

requirement
of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated,
expressing
the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS :
2-1960 Rulesforroundingoff
numericalvalues(revised).
The number of significant
places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirements
for cold drawn carbon
for the manufacture
of wood screws by cold heading process.

steel wire up to 12.5 mm diameter,

suitable

2. Supply of Material

2.1 The general

8glo_lg78

requirements

General

technical

relating
delivery

to the supply

reqUirementS

of carbon

steel

wire

shall

be as

laid

down

in IS

for Steel and Steel products.

3. Terminology

3.1 For the purpose

relating

of this standard,
the definitions
given in IS : 1956
to iron andsteel: Part 5 Bright steel barand steel wire(firstrevision).

( Part 5)1976
shall

Glossary of terms

apply.

4. Manufacture

4.1 The wire shall be drawn from steel manufactured

by open hearth, electric, duplex, basic oxygen or a combination of these processes. In case any other process is employed by the manufacturer,
prior approval of
the purchaser should be obtained.

348

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1812-1982

4.2 Sufficient

discard

shall

be taken

to ensure

freedom

from injurious

pipe and segregation.

5. Chemical Composition
of wire, when carried out either by the methud specified in the relevant parts of IS : 228
Methods of chemical analysis of steels (issuedin severa/parrs)( secondrevision ). or any other established
given in the
instrumental/chemical
method,
shall be as given in Table 1. In case of dispute the procedure
relevant part of IS : 228 shall be the referee method.

5.1 The analysis

6. Mechanical Tests

6.1 Tensile Test-The

(Firstrevision).
shall

steel when tested in accordance

have a minimum tensile strength

with IS : 1521-1972s
of 460 MPa.

Tensile

testing

of steel wire

6.2 Bend Test-Wire

of 5 mm diameter and above shall be subjected
to bend test. The wire when bent
the test without breaking
through an angle of 90 round a radius equal to its own diameter shall withstand
or splitting.

---

--.

TABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

( Clause 5.1 )
GRADE

G~wJE

Designation

IS : 1762
( PARTI )-iQi4*J

[see

Constitutent,
A
f

(2)

(1)
1
2
3

Carbon
Max

Percent

Sulphur

Manganese

Phosphorus 7
Max
(6)

(5)

(3)

(4)

12c5

0.17

0.30-0.65

0.055 Max

17c 5
12C 8 S12

0.22
0.17

0.30-0.65
q.60-0.95

0.055 Max
0.08-0.15

0.055
0.055
0.065

NoTE-When the steel is silicon-killed, the product analysis shall show a minimum of 0.10 percent silicon. When the
steel is aluminium-killed or kil!ed with a combination of aluminium and silicon, the r.equirements regarding minimum
silicon content do not apply.
*Code for designation

of steel :Part 1 Based on letter symbols ( first revision ).

6.3 Wrapping Test- Wire below 5 mm diameter shall be subjected to wrapping test in accordance
with IS :
wlthout bre&ing
or splitting,
being
The wire shall withstsnd.
1755-1962 Methodforwrapping
test of wire.
wrapped eight times round its own diameter and subsequently
straightened.
7. Size Tolerance

7.1 The wire shall

Table 2.

be supplied

to the sizes specified

by the purchaser

subject

to the tolerance

given

in

6. Freedom from Defects

6.1 Steel wire shall be well and cleanly drawn to the dimensions
specified.
It shall be sound and free from
splits; surface flaws; rough, jagged and imperfect edges; and other harmful surface defects.
9. Finish
9.1 If required by the purchaser,
and cold-forming
machines.

the wire shall be suitably

coated

for use in high speed, automatic,

close-die

10. Packing
10.1 Each coil of wire shall be bound and fastened

compactly.

11. Sampling and Crlterla for Conformlty

11.1 Sampling of carbon steel wire for the manufacture
as given in Appendix A.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

of wood screws

and criteria

for conformity

shall be

349

IS: 1812-1982

TABLE 2 TOLERANCE ON DIAMETER OF WIRE

( Clause 7.1 )
Permissible Out
of Round

Permissible
Deviation
mm

mm

(1)
1.00 to 1.60

(4

(3)

1.60 to 3.00

- 0.060

Diameter
mm

- 0.050

0.025

+o
Above

0.03

+o
- 0.06

Above 3.00 to 6.00

{

0.04

+o

Above 6.00 to 10.00

- 0.090

Above

-0.110

0.045

+o
10.00 to 12.50

0.055

+O

12. Marking

12.1 Each coil of wire shall be legibly marked with the grade, size, date of manufacture
name of the manufacturer.
12.1.1 The material

may also be marked

with the ISI Certification

and trade-mark or the

Mark.

bbTE--The
use of the ISI Certification
Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards
Institution
(Certification
Marks ) Act and the Rules and Regulations
made thereunder. The.lSI Mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance
that they have been produced to comply with the requirements
of that standard
under a well-defined
system of inspection,
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised
by ISI and
operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously
checked by ISI for conformity
to that standard as
a further safeguard.
Details
of conditions
under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification
Mark may be
granted to manufacturers
or processors,
may be obtained from the Indian Standards
Institution.

APPENDIX
( Clause

A
11.1 )

SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY

A-l. Lot
A-l.1 In any consignment, all the coils of wire of the same grade and diameter, manufactured
tially similar conditions of manufacture, shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.
A-1.1.1 Samples shall be taken from each lot and tested for conformity

under essen-

to the standard.

A-2. Sampling
A-2.1 The number of coils to be taken from a lot shall be in accordance with cot 1 and 2 of Table 3. These
samples shall be taken at random by using number tables (see IS : 49051968 ).
A-3. Preparation of Samples and Number of Tests
A-3.1 Tesfs forPhysica/RequirementsFrom the coils selected from cot 1 and 2 of Table 3, adequate length
of test piece shall be cut from each end and subjected to physical tests, namely, size, surface condition, tensile, bend, wrapping and coating tests. A test piece failing to meet any one of the requirements, shall be
called a defective. If the number of defectives found is less than or equal to the permissible number of
defecitves specified in col 3 of Table 3, the lot shall be considered to have conformed to physical requirements.

350

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS:1812-1982

TABLE 3 SCALE OF SAMPLING AND PERMISSIBLE

NUMBER OF DEFECTIVES
( Cleuses

A-2.1, A-3.1 -end A-3.2 )

No of Coils
in a Lot

No of Coils
for Physical
Requirements

Permissible No.
of Defective
Coils

(1)

(2)
2
3
5
8
13

(3)

(4)

0
0
0
1
1

1
1
2
2
2

up to 25
26 to 50
51 to 150
151 to 300
301 and above

A-3.2
TestforChemicalRequirements--UUnless
ed for chemical requirements:

otherwise

agreed,

the following

No. of Tests
for Chemical
Requirements

procedure

shall be follow-

From those test pieces which have conformed

to physical requirements,
further test pieces shall be
selected at random according to col 4 of Table.3. These samples shall be tested for all the chemical requirements.
If a test piece fails to meet the respective chemical requirement,
it shall be called a defective. The lot shall be considered
to have conformed
to the chemical requirements
if all the indiv idual test
pieces tested for chemical requirements
pass the test.
A-4. Criteria for Conformity
A-4.1 A lot shall be considered to have conformed to the requirements
are satisfied.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

of the specification

if A-3.1 and A-3.2

351

IS : 1990-1973

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
STEEL RIVET AND STAY BARS FOR BOILERS
( First

Revision

0. Foreword

0.1 This Indian Standard ( First Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards
1973, after the draft finalized by the Wrought Steel Products Sectional Committee
Structural
and Metals Division Council.
0.2This standard was first published in 1962. As
been decided to revise this standard to cover the
quirements
for rivet and stay bars as specified
made in this revision relate to the inclusion of a
perties of rivet and stay bars for boilers.
0.3 This standard

is based on the manufacturing

institution
on 15
had been approved

March
by the

a result of the experience gained during these years, it has

requirements
of Indian Railways as also align it with the rein the Indian Boiler Regulations.
The main modifications
new grade of material and changes in the mechanical
pro-

and trade

practices

0.4 This standard contains clauses 3.1,3.1-l, 7.2 and 13.1, which permit
agree with the manufacturer
for selection
to suit his requirements.

followed

in the country

the purchaser

in this field.

to use his option

or to

0.5 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular

requirement
of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated,
expressing
the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960Rulesforroundingoff
numericalValUes(revised).The
number of significant
places retained
the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirements
BR and St 42 BR.

for steel rivet and stay bars for use in boilers,

designated

as St 37

2. General Requirements
2.1 General requirements
relating
General requirementsforthesupplyof

to the supply of steel rivet and stay bars shall conform

metallurgical
materiaIs(firstrevision).

to IS : 1387-1967

3. Manufacture
3.1 Rivet and stay bars for boilers shall be made from the steel manufactured
by open hearth, electric,
duplex, basic oxygen or a combination
of these processes. In case any other process is employed by the
manufacturer,
prior approval of the purchaser shall be obtained.
3.1.1 Steel shall be supplied in killed condition.
Subject to mutual agreement
the manufacturer,
semi-killed
steel may also be used for service temperatures

352

HANDBOOK

between the purchaser

up to 400C.

ON INDUSTRIAL

and

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1990-I
4. Chemical

Composition

4.1 LxUe Analysis-The

ladle analysis of steel when made in accordance
analysis of steels (second revision) shall be as follows:

with IS : 228. Methods

Constituent

Percen 1, Max

Sulphur
Phosphorus

0.045
0.045

4.2 Product Analysis-Permissible

4.1 shall be as follows:

variation

in the case of product

analysis

from the limits

Sulphur
Phosphorus
4.3 Residual

copper

shall

of chemical

specified

under

Variation Over the Specified

Maximum Limit, Percent

Constituent

0.005
0.005
not exceed

0.10 percent

4.4 When the steel is silicon killed, silicon

cent. When the steel is silicon-aluminium
silicon content shall not apply.
5. Freedom

973

in product

analysis.

content in the product analysis shall not be less than 0.10 perkilled or aluminium
killed, the requirement
regarding minimum

from Defects

5.1 The material shall be well and cleanly rolled to the dimensions
and tolerances
specified. The finished
material shall be free from such surface and internal flaws as would be detrimental
to the end use of the
material.
6. Sulphur Print Test
6.1 A sulphur print test shall be made on a sample from each cast used for rivet and stay bars for the purpose of ensuring that sulphur segregates
are not concentrated
in the core. The stage in manufacture
at
which this test is made shall be at the option of the steel manufacturer.
7. Dimensional

Tolerances

7.1 The bars shall

comply

with the following

Size

dimensional

Tolerance

Total

I
0.2 mm
1 percent
diameter

20 mm and under
Over 20 mm

Tolerance

1
Plus

Minus

0.2 mm
1 percent
diameter

of

7.2 When special plus and minus tolerances

are required,
not less than the total tolerance given in 7.1.
8. Selection

tolerances:

of

0.40 mm
2 percent of
diameter

the sum of such tolerances

of Test Samples

8.1 Test samples

shall

be selected

by the purchaser

from either

INDUSTRIAL

as

of the following:

sizes.

6.2 In case test samples are selected in accordance

with 8.1 (b) and if the test results
purchaser
shall consider the bar from which the test sample has been cut as good
deliveryof
the same as though the test sample has not been cut from it.

ON

be specified

a) Cuttings of the bars, and

b) Bars after they have been cut to the specified

HANDBOOK

shall

FASTENERS-PART

are satisfactory,
the
material and accept

353

IS : 1990-I 973

8.3 In neither of the cases mentioned

under 8.1 shall
presence or with the prior approval of the purchaser.

the test samples

be cut from the bars except

8.4 Before the test samples are selected,

full particulars
regarding
the cast number,
number of bars in each cast shall be furnished by the supplier to the purchaser.

size, weight

in the

and

8.5 Test samples shall not be heat treated unless the material from which they are cut is similarly
heat
treated in which case the test samples shall be heat treated with the material before testing except in the
case of material used for cold forged rivets when the test samples only shall be heat treated before testing.
8.6 Any slight
9. Tensile

straightening

of test sample

which

may be required

shall

be done cold.

Test

9.1 Two tensile tests shall be made from the finished

steel for every 10 tonnes of a cast or part thereof.
When more than one diameter of the bar is specified, one additional
test shall be made for each variation in
diameter.

9.2 The tensile

testingofsteel

properties
of steel when determined
in accordance
productsotherthansheet,strip,wireandtube(firstrevision).

TABLE 1 MECHANICAL

SI No.

PROPERTIES

Characteristic

(1)

Requirement
A

i) Tensile strength, N/mm* ( kgf/m&

ii) Yield stress, Min, N/m&
( kgflmm*):
a) Up to and including 20 mm
b) Over 20 mm
iii) Elongation
percent, Min, gauge
length 5.65 so

10. Dump

= 1 MN/m*

= 0.102

Grade St 37 BR

Grade St 42 BR

(3)

(4)

(2)

NOTE- 1 N/mm*

with IS : 1608-1972 Method for tensile

shall be as given in Table 1.

360-440
220
200

( 37-45 )

41 O-500

( 22.0 )
( 20.0 )

250
240

( 42-50 )

( 26.0 )
( 24.0 )
23

26

0 kgflmm.

Test

10.1 One dump

test shall

be made for each tensile

test.

10.2 A test piece, having a length equal to twice its diameter, taken from bars or cuttings (see 8.1 ), shall, at
room temperature,
withstand
without fracture or shall not reveal any crack while being compressed
to half
its length.
11. Bend Test
11.1 Two bend tests

shall

shall be carried out for every 10 tonnes

be made for each variation
in diameter.

11.2 The bend test shall be carried out in accordance

products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube.

11.2.1 The test pieces

shall

be cut lengthwise

with

of a cast or part thereof.

IS : 1599-1960

Method

from bars and the full section

One additional

for

test

bend test forsteel

as rolled.

11.2.2 The test pieces when cold shall withstand

without fracture while being bent close in the case of
Grade St 37 BR either by pressure or by slow and steady blows by a hammer. In the case of Grade St 42 BR,
the internal diameter of the bend shall be not greater than twice the diameter for bars of size up to 25 mm.
For bars of diameter over 25 mm, the internal diameter of the bend shall be three times the bar diameter.

354

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1990-I 973
12. Retest
12.1 Should any one of the test pieces first selected fail to pass any of the tests specified in this standard,
two further samples shall be selected for testing in respect of each failure. Should the test pieces from both
these additional
samples pass the retest, the material represented
by the test samples shall be deemed to
comply with the requirement
of that particular
test. Should either of these additional
samples fail, the
material represented
by the test sample shall be deemed as not complying
with this standard.
13. Rust Protection
13.1 After inspection
and approval, if so desired by the purchaser, the bars shall be painted with one coat of
boiled linseed or a suitable rust preventive as mutually agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
14. Marking
14.1 Rivet and stay bars from the same cast shall be securely bundled together
metal tag attached to each bundle and marked with the following
information:
a) Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
if any;
b) Number or other identification
mark by which
they were made; and

they can be traced

as per trade practice,

and a

to the cast of steel from which

c) Grade of material.
14.2 Bars, when not secured
14.3 The material

in bundles,

may also be marked

shall each be legibly

with the ISI Certification

marked

as specified

in 14.1.

Mark.

NATE-The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the indian Standards Institution ( Certification Marks ) Act and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard,
under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and qualiiy control which is devised and supervised by ISI and
operated by the producer. The ISI marked products are also continuously checked by ISI for conformity to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification Mark may
be granted to manufacturers or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

355

IS : 2255-1977

Indian

1I
E3

Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
MILD STEEL WIRE ROD FOR THE MANUFACTURE
OF MACHINE SCREWS
( BY COLD HEADING PROCESS)
(Second

Revision)

0. Foreword

0.1 This Indian Standard

( Second Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution
on 25 October 1977, after the draft finalized by the Wrought Steel Products Sectional Committee
had been approved
by the Structural
and Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard was prepared on the recommendation
of the Tariff Commission
continuance
of protection
to the machine screw industry ( 1957 ).

contained

in its report on

0.3 This standard was first published in 1962 and was revised in 1969. On the basis of the experience gained
during these years, it has now been found necessary to revise this standard to align it with IS : 1673-1973
Specification
for mild steel wire for the manufacture
of machine screws (by cold heading process) ( first revision ).
6.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular
requirement
of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated
expressing
the result of a test analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant
places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 The standard covers that requirements
for mild steel wire rod for the manufacture
IS : 1673-1973
for manufacture
of machine screws or threaded fasteners.

of wire conforming

to

2. Terminology
2.1 For the purpose of this standard. definitions
given in IS : 1956 (Part 5) 1976 Glossary
to iron and steel: Part 5 Bright steel bar and steel wire( first revision).
shall apply.

3. Supply

of terms relating

of Material

3.1 General requirements

requirementsforthesupplyof

relating to the supply of material shall

metallurgical
materiaIs(firstrevision).

be as laid down

in IS : 1387-1967 General

4. Manufacture
4.1 The steel for wire rod shall be manufactured
by open-hearth,
electric, basic oxygen or a combination
of
these processes.
In case any other process is employed
by the manufacturer,
prior approval of the purchaser should be obtained.
If basic oxygen process is employed for manufacture,
the nitrogen content of
steel shall not exceed 0.007 percent.
bbTE-The

nitrogen content shall be ensured by the manufacturer

4.2 Steel may be supplied

order.
356

in semi-killed,

killed

or rimming

by occasional
condition

product analysis.

as specified

HANDBOOK

at the time of enquiry

ON INDUSTRIAL

and

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2255-1977
5. Chemical Composition
5.1 The ladle analysis of the material when analyzed in accordance with the relevant part of IS : 228 Methods
for chemical analysis of steels (secondfeevision). shall be as given below:
Constituent

Percent

0.20
0.30 to 0.60
0.055
0.055

Carbon, Max
Manganese
Phosphorus, Max
Sulphur, Max
5.2 Product Analysis-The
shall be as follows:

permissible

variation

in case of product analysis from the limit specified

Constituent

Permissible

Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulphur
Note-Variations

shall

in 5.1

Variation

+ 0.02
+0.04
+ 0.005
+ 0.005

not be applicable

both over and under the specified

limits

in several

determinations

in a

heat.

6. Condition of Material on Delivery

6.1 Wire rod shall be delivered in straight lengths or in coils.
6.1.1 Wire rod shall be delivered in as-rolled or annealed condition

as specified

by the purchaser.

by the purchaser,

with the following

7. Sizes and Tolerances

7.1 Wire rod shall be supplied
tolerances:

to the nominal

Diameter

sizes specified

Size Tolerance

mm
5.5 to 14.0
Over 14.0 to 20.0
Over 20.0

Out of Roundness,

mm

mm

_t 0.50
+ 0.60
_+ 0.80

0.65
0.80
1.20

Max

6. Freedom from Defects

6.1 The finished wire rod shall be cleanly rolled to the dimensions specified. It shall be sound and free from
splits, surface flaws, rougl::agged and imperfect edges, and other harmful surface defects.
9. Sampling
9.1 Unless agreed otherwise, the method of drawing representative
conformity shall be as prescribed in Appendix A.

samples of material and the criteria for

10. Packing
10.1 Each coil or bundle of wire rods shall be bound or fastened compactly.
11. Marking
11.1 Each coil or bundle of wire rods shall be legibly marked with the following:
a) Size of the wire rod,
b) Mass of the coil or bundle,
c) Date of manufacture, and
d) Trade-mark or name of the manufacturer.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

357

IS : 2255-1977
11.1.1 The material

may also be marked

with the ISI Certification

Mark.

Note-The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution ( Certification Marks ) Act and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The ISI mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard
under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by ISI and
operated by the producer. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification Mark may be
granted to manufacturers or processors, may beobtained from the Indian Standards Institution.

APPENDIX
(Clause

A
9.1 )

SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY

A-l. Lot
A-l.1 In any consignment,
all the bundles
tured under essentially
similar conditions

A-1.1.1 Samples

or coils of wire rods of the same grade and diameter manufacof manufacture,
shall be grouped together to constitute
a lot.

shall be taken from each lot and tested

for conformity

to the standard

A-2. Sampling

A-2.1 The number of bundles

or coils to be taken from a lot shall be according to col 1 and 2 of Table 1. These
samples shall be taken at random by using random number tables
(see IS: 49051968
Methods for random
sampling.

TABLE 1
NO. of Bundles
or Coils in
a Lot

SCALE OF SAMPLING

AND PERMISSIBLE

26 ,,50
51 ,,150
151 ,,300
301 and above

No. of Tests
for Chemical
Requirements
(4)
2
3
5
6
8

(3)
0
1
2
3
5

(2)
6
13
20
32
50

up to 25

OF DEFECTIVES

Pwmissible No.
of Defectives

No. of Bundles of
Coils for Physical
Requirements

(1)

NUMBER

A-3. Preparation of Samples and Number of Tests

A-3.1 Tests for Physical

Requirements-From
the bundles or coils selected according to col 1 and 2 of Table
1, adequate length of test piece shall be cut from the each end and subjected to physical tests, namely, size
and surface condition. A test piece failing to meet any one of the requirements,
shall be called a defective. If
the number of defectives found is less than the number of permissible
number of defectives specified in col
3 of Table 1, the lot shall be considered
to have conformed
to physical requirements
otherwise
not.
A-3.2 Tests for Chemical Requirementfor chemical requirements:

Unless otherwise

agreed

the following

procedure

shall be followed

From those test pieces which have conformed to physical requirements,

further test pieces shall be
selected at random according to col 4 of Table 1. These samples shall be tested for all the chemical requirements.
If a test piece fails to meet the respective chemical requirement,
it shall be called a defective. The lot shall be considered to have conformed to the chemical requirements
if all the individual test
pieces tested for chemical requirements
pass the test, otherwise
not.
A-4. Criteria for Conformity

A-4.1 A lot shall be considered

to have conformed

to the requirements

of the specification

if A-3.1 and

A-3.2 are satisfied.

358

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2591-l

Indian

982

Standard

DIMENSIONS FOR
HOT ROLLED STEEL BARS FOR
THREADED COMPONENTS
(Second

Revision)

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard
( Second Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards
Institution
on 25
November 1982, after the draft finalized by the Wrought Steel Products Sectional
Committee
had been approved by the Structural
and Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard was first published in 1964 and was revised in 1969. While reviewing the standard in the
light of the experience gained during these years, thecommittee
has felt it necessary to revise the standard
to bring it in line with the existing practices being followed in the country in this field.
0.3 While special consideration
has been given to cover round and hexagonal hot rolled bars required for the
threaded fastener industry, the requirements
regarding square bars have not been included in this standard
as they are not used in the threaded fastener industry in any appreciable
quantities,
but these may be
available,
if so required by the purchaser.
0.4 For the benefit of the purchaser an informative
Appendix ( see Appendix A ) giving
specified by the purchaser while ordering for hot rolled bars has been included.

particulars

to be

0.5 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular

requirement
of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated,
expressing
the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960Rules for rounding off numerical values(revisedY.
The number of significant
places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard
components.

2. Supply

prescribes

the sizes and tolerances

of hot rolled

bars for the manufacture

of threaded

of material

2.1 General requirements

relating to the supply of hot rolled bars for threaded components
IS : 8910-1978 General technical delivery requirements
for steel and steel products.
2.2 If agreed

to between

the purchaser

and the manufacturer,

the material

shall conform

may be supplied

to

on coils.

3. Material
3.1 The material

4. Freedom

shall conform

specified

in the relevant

Indian Standard

specifications.

from Defects

4.1 The finished material

surface defects.

HANDBOOK

to the requirements

ON INDUSTRIAL

shall be reasonably

FASTENERS-PART

free from cracks, surface

flaws, laminations

and other harmful

359

Is : 2591-l 982
magna-flux tests, etC,

4.2 If required, bars may be tested for non-destructive tests, such as dye-penetrant,
subject to mutual agreement between the supplier and the purchaser.
5. Dimensions and Tolerances
5.1 The dimensions

and tolerances of round and hexagonal bars shall be as given in Table 1.

5.2 Unless specified otherwise, the bars shall be supplied in lengths of not less than 2.5 m.
5.3 Ovalify and Out-of hexagon--The
permissible ovality for round bars measured as the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters, and the out-of-hexagon for hexagonal bars measured as the
distance between parallel faces across any cross section shall be as given in Table 1.
5.4 Straightness Tolerance-The
bars shall appear straight
missible deviation shall not exceed 3 mm per metre.
Note-These

tolerances

are not applicable

to eye. Unless otherwise

agreed to the per-

to bars supplied in coils.

6. Marking
6.1 Bars of sizes 50 mm and below shall
turer. The metal tag attached to each
i) Cast number,
ii) Manufacturers name or trade-mark,
iii) Any other information required by

be bundled as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacbundle shall be marked with the following:
and
the purchaser.

6.2 The colour schemes specified in IS : 2049.1978 Colour codefortheidentification

of wrought Steel for
general engineering purposes( firstrevision).
or as required by the purchaser may be adopted to mark
the Qrade of material_

TABLE 1 DIAMENSIONS

Round

AND TOLERANCES
( Clauses 5.1 arid 5.3

OF HOT ROLLED BARS

)
Hexagonal
A

Bars
I

rDiameter
(Nominal

)!$d;h

Bars
1
Tolerance

Across

)
(Nominal)

Note l-

Out-of-roundness

Note 2-Out-of-Hexagon

360

mm

mm

kO.2

+ 0.00
-0.70

kO.3

+o.oo
- 3.0 percent
of width
across flat

for round bars shall be not more than 75 percent of total tolerance
for hexagonal

bars shall be not more than 75 percent of tolerance

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

on

diameter.

on width

across flat.

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2591-1982

APPENDIX
( Clause

A
0.4 )

BASIS FOR ORDER

A-l. While placing
following:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)

an order for the steels covered

Steel grade;
Surface quality;
Size;
Tests and test reports required; and
Special requirements
in regard to testing,

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

by this standard,

packing,

the purchaser

should

specify

clearly

the

despatching,etc.

361

IS : 3298-1981

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
MILD STEEL RIVET BARS FOR
SHIP BUILDING
( First

Revision

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard

( First Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards

1981, after the draft finalized by the Wrought Steel Products Sectional Committee
Structural
and Metals Division Council.

Institution
on 28 October
had been approved by the

0.2 This standard was first published in 1965, taking assistance

from the Rules and Requirementsol
Lloyds
Register of Shipping,
London. While reviewing the standard
in the light of the experience
gained during
these years, the committee
felt it necessary
to revise this standard,
to incorporate
the following
main
modifications:
a) Chemical composition
has been modified.
b) Tensile strength has been specified in MPa ( N/m&
c) Dump test and the tolerances
have been modified.

) to conform

to SI units, and

0.3The requirements
of rivet bars for ship building specified in this standard are more or less based on the
rules and requirements
of Lloyss Register of Shipping, because in the large majority of cases the merchantshipping being built in India and the abroad for India follow these rules.
0.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular
requirement
of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated,
expressing
the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised).The
number of significant
places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirements
be used for ship building.

for mild steel rivet bars of 16 mm diameter

and over intended

to

2. Terminology

2.0 For the purpose

2.1 inspecting

of this standard,

Authority-An

2.2 Inspector-A
2.3 Manufacturer-

the following

organization

representative

or person

of the inspecting

Manufacturer

approved

definitions

shall apply.

nominated

by the purchaser.

authority.

by the inspecting

authority.

2.4 Piece-Rolled
product from a single slab or from a single ingot if this is rolled directly
term test piece where it occurs, means the sample of material which is actually test.

into a bar. The

3. Supply of Material

3.1 Genegral

requirements

relating

to the supply

of material

shall conform

to IS : 89-1978*.

4. Manufacture

4.1 Rivet bars shall be made from steel manufactured

by open-hearth,
electric, duplex, basic oxygen or combination of these processes. If any other process is employed by the manufacturer,
prior approval of the purchaser shall be obtained.

362

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3298-1981

4.1.1 Steel shall be of semi-killed

or killed type.

5. Chemical Analysis
5.1 Ladle Analysis-The
ladle analysis of steel, when made in accordance with the relevant part of IS :
228 Methods of chemical analysis of steels (secondrevision).
shall be as follows:
Percent, Max

Constituent

0.23
0.055
0.055

Carbon
Sulphur
Phosphorus
5.2 Product Analysis-Permissible
shall be as follows:

variation

in case of product analysis from the limits specified under 5.1

Constituent

Variation Over Specified Limits

Percent, Max

Carbon
Sulphur
Phosphorus

0.02
0.005
0.005

15.3 When steel is required in copper-bearing quality, the copper content shall be between 0.20 to 0.35 percent. In case of product analysis, permissible variation shall not exceed & 0.03 percent.
5.4 When the steel supplied is silicon-killed, the silicon content on product analysis shall not be less than
0.10 percent. When the steel is silicon-aluminimum-killed
or aluminium-killed,
the requirement regarding
minimum silicon content shall not apply.
6. Sulphur Print Test
6.1 The core of rivet bars shall be free from harmful concentration of sulphur segregates and other nonmetallic substances, To ensure this, a sulphur print test shall be made on the material from each cast and,
where the weight of bars as rolled from one cast exceeds 10 000 kg, additional sulphur prints shall be taken
at the rate of one per 10 000 kg or part thereof.
7. Freedom from Defects
7.1 Rivet bars shall be well and cleanly rolled to the dimensions and tolerances specified. The finished
material shall be free from such surface and internal flaws as may be detrimental to the end use of the
meterial.
6. Dimensional Tolerances
8.1 The bars shall comply with the following

dimensional

tolerances:
Total Tolerances

Diameter of Bar
mm
Below 20
20
22 and 24
Over 24

Z
0.45
0.50
2 percent of diameter

8.1.1 All the tolerances specified shall be minus tolerances, when special plus and minus tolerances are
required by the purchaser the sum of such tolerances shall not be specified as less than the above total
tolerances.
9. Selection of Test Samples
9.1 Test samples may be sleeted by the purchaser from the cuttings

of the bars.

9.2 Test samples shall not be cut from the bars except in the presence or with the approval of the purchaser.
9.3 Before the test samples are selected, full particulars regarding cast number, size, mass, or number of
bars in each cast shall be furnished by the manufacturer to the purchaser.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

363

IS : 3298-1981
9.4 The test samples shall not be annealed or otherwise
subjected to heat treatment
unless the material
from which they are cut is similarly
treated,
in which case the test samples
shall be similarly
and
simultaneously
treated with the material
before testing. Any slight straightening
of test samples, which
may be required, shall be done cold.
IO. Tensile Test

10.1 One tensile test piece shall be taken from each cast and size of rivet bars, but where the mass of bars
as rolled from one cast and size exceeds 10 tonnes, an additional
tensile test shall be made from each additional 10 tonnes or part thereof.
10.2 Bars may be tested full size as rolled, or they may be turned down symmetrically
less than 16 mm diameter.
10.3 The tensile strength and percentage
elongation
of steel,
1608-1972 Method fortensiletestingof
steel products(firstrevision).
Tensile

when

to a convenient

determined
in accordance
shall be as given below:

size not

with

IS :

Elongation
Percent, Min

Strength

MPa
400 - 460

Gauge
30

Length

= 5.65 F

Il. Dump Test

11.1 One dump test shall be made from the finished steel for every 10 tonnes
additional
test shall be made for each variation
in diameter.

of a cast or part thereof.

11.2 A test
temperature,
length.

the rivet bar, shall, at room

being compressed
to half its

piece, having a length equal to twice its diameter,

cut from
withstand
without fracture or shall not reveal any crack while

Note-For
capacity

bars above 30 mm in diameter,

of the testing

machine,

co-axial holes may be drilled

no cavein is found after testing.

provided

on the dump

test specimens

One

to suit the

11.2.1 Minor surface flaws which do not tend to open out wider than 0.4 mm + 0.04 times the diameter of
the rivet bar shall not be the cause for rejection. For special applications,
the limit for minor surface defects
shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
11.3 Dump test shall

not be applicable

to bars below

6 mm.

12. Retest

12.1 If any one of the test pieces first selected fail to pass any of the tests specified in the standard, two further samples shall be selected for testing in respect of each failure. If the test pieces from both these additional samples pass, the material represented
by the test samples shall be deemed to comply with the requirement of that particular test. If the test pieces from either of these additional
samples fail, the material
represented
by the test samples shall be considered
as having not complied with the requirements
of this
standard.
13. Calculation of Mass
13.1 The mass of bars shall be calculated

on the basis that the steel weighs

7.85 g/cm3.

14. Rustroofing
14.1 Each bundle of rivet bars shall be dipped
15. Identification

oil for rust prevention

during

storage.

of Materials

15.1 The manufacturer

shall adopt
material to be traced to its original
material when required.

364

in a suitable

a system for the identification

of rivet bars which shall enable
heat, and the inspector shall be given full facilities
for so tracing

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

the
the

16. Mill Sheets

16.1 The inspector shall be supplied with at least two copies of the mill sheet or shipping
accepted material. The material documents
shall contain, in additional
to the description,
of the material, Ihe following
particulars:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Purchasers idenlification
rl!arks, if any;
Identification
of Ihe cast and piece;
Identification
of Ihe steel works or manufacturer;
Ladle analysis ( elements controlled
by the specification
Order of ship number for which intended.

statements
of all
dimensions,
etc,

only ); and

17. Marking
17.1 Rivet bars shall be securely
bear the following
particulars:

fastened

together

in bundles

and a metal tag attached

a) Brand of inspecting
authority;
b) Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
if any; and
c) Cast number or identification
mark by which the material
was made.
17.2 Rivet bars, when not secured
17.2.1 The material

in bundles,

may also be marked

shall each be legibly

with the ISI Certification

can be traced

marked

to each bundle shalt

to the cast from which

as specified

it

in 17.1.

Mark.

Note-The
use of the ISI Certification
Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards
Institution
( Certification
Marks ) Act and the Rules and Regulations
made thereunder. The ISI Mark on product covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance
that they have been produced to comply with the requirements
of that standard
under a weill-defined
system of inspection,
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised
by I.9 and
operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously
checked by ISI for conformity
to that standard as
a further safeguard.
Details of conditions
under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification
Mark may be
granted to manufacturers
or processors,
may be obtained from the Indian Standards
Institution.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

366

IS : 3577-1967

Indian

Standard

DIAMETERS OF WROUGHT ALUMINIUM

AND ALUMINIUM ALLOYS, RIVET,
BOLT AND SCREW STOCK

0. Foreword

0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards

Institution
on 20 February 1967, after the
draft finalized by the Light Metals and Their Alloys Sectional
Committee
had been approved by the Structural and Metals Division Council.
0.2 The decision of the Government
of India to adopt the metric system of weights and measures makes it
essential
that the sizes of metal products should be standardized
in metric units. Uptil now, in trade and
technology
the diameters of rivet, bolt and screw stock were expressed in terms of various wire gauges used in the countries
following
fps system of weights and measures, for example, BG ( Birmingham
Gauge )
and SWG ( Standard Wire Gauge ). The necessity for evolving a series of diameters
of rivet, bolt and screw
stock has been felt by all concerned. Accordingly
the Sectional Committee
concerned decided to base it on
which lays down the basic diameters of wire in
IS : 1137-1959 Thicknesses of sheet and diameters of wire.
millimetres
and which is now accepted in the trade.
0.3 While preparing this standard, the views of producers and consumers relating to the manufacturing
and
trade practices
followed
in the country in this field were taken into account. Also, assistance
has been
derived from B.S. 1473 : 1963 Specification
for wrought aluminium
and aluminium
alloys rivet, bolt and
screw stock for forging, issued by the British Standards
Institution,
London.
0.4 This standard
aluminium
alloys.

is one of a series of Indian Standards

on dimensions
Other standards
published so far in the series are:

aluminium

IS : 2525-1963

Diameters

IS : 2673-1964

Dimensions

IS : 2676-1964

Dimensions

for wrought

aluminium

and aluminium

alloys,

sheet and strip

IS : 2677-1964

Dimensions

for wrought

aluminium

and aluminium

alloys,

plate

IS : 2678-1963 Dimensions

for wrought

aluminium

for wrought

for wrought

aluminium

aluminium

0.5 For the purpose of deciding whether a

value, observed or calculated,
expressing
dance with IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding
retained in the rounded off value should

366

of wrought

and aluminium

alloys,

and aluminium

and aluminium

wire

alloys,

alloys,

and

extruded

tube ( round )

drawn tube

particular
requirement
of this standard is complied with, the final
the result
of a test
or analysis, shall be rounded off in accorThe number of significant
places
of numerical values (revised).
be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3577-1967
1. Scope
1.1 This
aluminium

standard
lays down diameters
and tolerances
on the diameters
alloys in the form of rivet, bolt and screw stock.

for wrought

aluminium

and

2. Terminology
2.0 For the purpose

of this standard,

2.1 Rivet Stock--Round

2.2 Bolt Stock--Round
2.3 Screw Stock-

the following

bar or wire suitable

definitions

shall

for the manufacture

bar or wire suitable

of rivets.

for the manufacture

Round bar or wire suitable

apply.

of bolts

for the manufacture

by cold heading.

of screws

by cold heading.

3. Diameters
3.1 The diameters

of rivet * , bolt and screw stock

mm
1.25
1.40

1.60

1.80
2.00
2.24
2.50
2.80
3.15

shall

be as follows:

T5

mm

4.00
4.50
5.00
5.60
6.30
7.10
8.00
9.00

11.20

10.00
12.50
14.00
16.00
18.00
20.00
22.40
25.00

4. Tolerance
4.1 The tolerances

on diameters

TABLE 1

of rivet,

bolt and screw stock

TOLERANCES ON DIAMETERS
AND SCREW STOCK

shall

be as specified

OF RIVET, BOLT

=
=
=
=

1.25 Up to and including 5.60

6.30 Up to and including 9.00
10.00 Up to and including 12.50
12.50 Up to and including 25.00

Sizes up to and including 12.50 mm have been covered in IS : 1284-1975 Wrought

and screw stock ( for general engineering
purposes) (secondrevision )
l

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

1.

Tolerance, mm

Diameter. mm

HANDBOOK

in Table

0.03
0.04
0.05
0.08

aluminium

and aluminium

alloys, btili

367

IS : 4882-1979

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
LOW CARBON STEEL WIRE FOR RIVETS FOR
USE IN BEARING INDUSTRY
( First

Revision

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard ( First Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 12 November
1979, after the draft finalized by the Alloy Steels and Special Steels Sectional Committee had been approved by the Structural and Metals Division Council.
0.2This standard was first published in 1968. On the basis of experience gained in the production and use of
this steel, it has been decided to undertake revision of this standard.
0.3 The major modifications made in this revision relate to addition of cold upsetting test, and wrapping test
for wire. Hardness test has been deleted as it has been found very difficult to conduct the same of such
small diameter wires. Further hardness is related to tensile strength for which limits have been laid down.
0.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirements

for low carbon steel wire for rivets for use in bearing industry.

2. Terminology
2.1 For the purpose of this standard, the definitions
relating to iron and steels ( Parts 1 to 8). shall apply.

given in relevant parts of IS : 1956 Glossaryof terms

-

3. Supplyof Material
3.1 General requirements relating to supply of steel wire for rivets shall be as laid down in IS : 1387-1967
General requirements for thesuppfyand metallurgical materials( firstrevision).
4. Manufacture
4.1 Steel shall be manuf,::tured by open hearth, electric, acid bessemer, duplex, basic oxygen or a combination of these processes. In case any other process is employed by the manufacturer, prior approval of the
purchaser should be obtained. If basic oxygen process is employed for manufacture, the nitrogen content
shall not exceed 0.007 percent.
Note-The nitrogen content should be ensured by the manufacturer by product analysis.
4.1.1 Steel shall be fully killed. Steel may be ordered as aluminium
killed steel, the minimum silicon content shall be 0.10 percent.

killed or silicon killed. In case of silicon

4.2 Sufficient reduction and discard shall be made from each ingot to ensure freedom from piping, segregation and other harmful defects.
4.3 The ingots, blooms or billets shall be rough machined, chipped, ground or otherwise prepared to remove
all surface imperfections likely to produce defects in the finished wire.

366

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4882-1979

5. Chemical Composition
5.1 Product Analysis -The
product analysis of wire shall be as given below. The analysis of steel
shall be carried out either by the method specified in IS : 228 and its relevant parts or any other
established
instrumental/chemical
method. In case of dispute the procedure given in IS : 228 and
its relevant parts shall be referee method. However, where the method is not given in IS : 228
and its relevant parts, the referee method shall be agree to between the purchaser
and the
manufacturer:
Constituent

Percent

Carbon
Manganese
Sulphur
Phosphorous

0.10 Max
0.30 to 0.50
0.040 Max
0.040 Max

6. Freedom from Defects

6.1 Finished wire shall be well and cleanly drawn to the required dimensions.
from splits and surface flaws.

The wire shall be sound, free

7. Tolerances
7.1 Tolerances permitted on the diameter of the wire shall be as follows:
Size, mm

Tolerance, mm
Max

up to 5

+o
- 0.015

Over 5 up to and including 8

7.1.1 The tolerances

turer.
8. Physical

I t.020

for wire over 8 mm shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufac-

Tests

6.1 Steel wire shall conform to tensile strength requirements

given in 6.1.1.

6.1.1 Tensile test-The

tensile strength of the steel wire when determined in accordance wits IS :
1521-1912. Method for tensile testing $rf steel wire4 first revision 7 shall be not less than 440 N/mm ( 45
kgflmm ) and not more than 540 N/mm (55 kgflmm ).
6.2 The steel wire shall also, wherever applicable,
wrapping test as given in 6.2.1 and 8.2.2.
6.2.1 Cold upsetting

test-This

conform to the requirement

of cold upsetting

test and

test shall be conducted only one wires of diameter greater than 5 mm.

6.2.1.1 A test piece, having a length equal to twice its diameter, cut from the wire, shall, at room
temperature withstand without ,fracture or shall not reveal any crack while being compressed to half its
length.
6.2.2 Wire smaller than 5 mm diameter shall be subjected to wrapping test in accordance with IS :
1755-1961. Method for wrapping test of wire (first revision 7. The wire shall withstand without breaking or
splitting being wrapped eight times round its owndiameterand
subsequently straightened.
9. Grain Size
9.1 The grain size of the as received finished wire when measured in accordance
Methods for estimating average grain size of metals shall be 5 and above.
10. Condition

with IS: 4748-1968

of Delivery

10.1 The wire shall be supplied in the form of coils. The weight of coils, the eye dimensions and other forms
of supply shall be mutually agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
11. Packing and Marking
11.1 The packing of the material shall be done in such a way that corrosion does not attack the material during transit. The suitable mode of packing shall be mutually agreed to between the purchaser and the
manufacturer.
HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART 1

369

IS : 4882-1979
11.2 Each coil shall be legibly marked with the nominal
ture and trade-mark
or the name of the manufacturer.
11.2.1 Each coil may also be marked

size of the wire weight

with the I.9 Certification

of the coil, date of manufac-

Mark.

Note- The use of the ISI Certification

Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards
Institution
( Certification
Marks) Act and the Rules and Regulations
made thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the requirements
of that standard
under a well-defined
system of inspection,
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised
by ISI and
operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously
checked by ISI for conformity
to that standard as
a further safeguard.
Details of conditions
under which a licenee for the use of the ISI Certification
Mark may be
granted to manufacturers
or processors,
may be obtained from the Indian Standards
Institution.
12. Sampling

12.1 Unless otherwise

criterial for conformity

agreed to, the method of drawing representative

shall be as given in Appendix A.

APPENDIX

samples

of the material

and the

( Clause 12.1 )
SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY
A-l. Lot
A-l.1 In any consignment,
all the coils of wires of the same diameter
manufactured
similar conditions
of manufacture
shall be grouped together to constitute
a lot.
A-2.

Sampling

for Sizes

A-2.1 The number

the corresponding
turer.

370

under essentially

and Freedom from Defects

of coils to be examined
criteria for conformity

from each lot for checking sizes and freedom from defects and
shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufac-

HANDBOOk

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4882-1979
A-3.

Sampling

for Other Characteristics

A-3.1 From each lot, the number

shall

be selected

of coils

specified

below(

depending

upon the number

of coils

in the lot )

at random:

No. of Coils in the Lot

No. of Coils

up to 25
26 65
66 180
181 ,, 300
301 and above

3
4
5
6
7

A-3.2 A test piece cut from each end of each coil so selected

shall be subjected

to be SElected

to chemical

analysis

(see

composition

laid

5.1 ).
A-3.2.1 The lot shall be considered
as conforming
to the requirements
of the chemical
down in this specification
if every test result complies with the limits specified
in 5.1.
A-3.3
From each of
tensile
test (see 8.1
cast or part thereof.
One additional
test

the coils selected,

one test piece shall be cut from each end and subjected
to
.l ). For cold upsetting
test one sample shall be tested for each 10 tonnes of a
One additional
test shall be made for each 10 tonnes of a cast or part thereof.
shall be made for each variation
in diameter.

A-3.3.1
The lot shall be considered
as conforming
to the requirements
plies with the relevant requirement
specified in the standard.

of the tests if each test result com-

A-3.3.2 Retest-Should
any of the test pieces first selected fail to pass any of the tests specified in this
standard, two further samples shall be selected for testing in respect or each failure. Should the test pieces
from both these additional
samples pass, the material represented
by the test samples shall be deemed to
comply with the requirement
of that particular
test. Should the test pieces from either of these additional
samples fail, the material represented
by the test samples shall be considered
as not having complied with
this standard,
except that the manufacturer
may reheat-treat
( not more than twice ) the material
represented
and resubmit
it for testing.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

371

IS : 5053-1969

Indian Standard

DIMENSIONS FOR WROUGHT COPPER AND

COPPER ALLOY RODS FOR FASTENERS

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 15 April 1959, after the draft
finalized by the Copper and Copper Alloys Sectional Committee had been approved by the Structural and
Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard forms one of a series of Indian Standards on dimensions
alloys. Other standards in this series are:
IS : 2826-1964 Dimensions
IS : 3051-1965 Dimensions
IS : 3052-1964 Dimensions

for wrought copper and copper

for wrought copper and copper alloy rods and bars

for wrought copper and copper alloys plate
for wrought copper and copper alloys, sheet, strip and foil.

0.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places
retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard specifies dimensions
non-threaded ).

for copper and copper alloy rods for fasteners ( both threaded and

2. Terminology
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following

definition

shall apply.

2.1 Rod-A slender solid product, of uniform, circular, square or ploygonal cross-sectlon, with transverse
dimension up to and including 150 mm supplied in straight lengths and manufactured by rolling, forging or
extrusion. Drawing may bea final finishing operation.

3. Dimensions
3.1 Dimensions

372

and tolerances for round, square and hexagonal

rods shall be as given in Table 1.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

IS : 5053-1969

TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS

OF ROUND, SQUARE

AND HEXAGONAL

RODS

( Clause 3.1 )
Round Rod
A

Diameter
(1)

Tolerance*

Side Width
(3)

(2)

mm
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
27
30
33
36
39
42
45
48
50
52
56
60
64
68
72
76
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
140
145
150

Square Rod
A

-YG5
-0.05
-0.05
-0.05
-0.05
-0.05
-0.05
-0.05
-0.05
-0.05
-0.08
-0.08
-0.08
-0.08
-0.08
-0.08
-0.10
-0.10
-0.10
-0.10
-0.10
-0.10
-0.28
-0.31
-0.31
-0.35
-0.35
-0.35
-0.54
-0.54
-0.54
-0.54
-0.54
-0.54
-0.54
-0.54
-0.54
-0.63
-0.83
-0.63
-0.63
-0.63

Tolerance"
(4)

mm
6
8
10
11
13
17
19
22
24
27
30
32
36
41
46
50
55
60
85
70
75
80

:?I8
-0.08
-0.08
-0.08
-0.10
-0.10
-0.10
-0.10
-0.10
-0.12
-0.12
-0.12
-0.15
-0.15
-0.34
-0.38
-0.42
-0.47
-0.47
-0.53
-0.53
-0.74

Hexagonal
h

Width Across
Flat
(5)
mm
5.5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
17
19
22
24
27
30
32
36
41
46
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
130
135
i45
150

Rod
3
Tolerance*
(6)
mm
-0.02
-0.02
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.05
-0.05
-0.05
-0.05
-0.05
-0.06
-0.08
-0.08
-0.08
-0.08
-0.08
-0.08
-0.12
-0.12
-0.12
-0.53
-0.53
-0.53
-0.87
-0.87
-0.87
-0.87
-0.87
-0.87
-0.87
-0.87
-1.00
-1.00
-1.00
-1.00

'Plus tolerance shall be 0.00 mm.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

373

IS :7557-1982

Indian

Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
STEEL WIRE (UP TO 20 mm ) FOR
THE MANUFACTURE OF COLD-FORGED RIVETS
(First

Revision)

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard

( First Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution

on 25 November
1982, after the draft finalized by the Wrought Steel Products Sectional Committee
had been approved by the
Structural and Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard was first published in 1974. In the light of experience gained during
Committee
decided to revise this standard making the following
main modifications:
a)

Strengths
have been specified
tionally and internationally.
requirements

in terms

have been specified

of MPa, in alignment

subsequent

with adoption

of SI units

both na-

b)

Strength

c)

Requirements

d)

Retest clause has been deleted as it is duly covered in IS : 8910-1978 General

technical
delivery
Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised).
requirements
for steel and steel products.

for shear strength

for wires in annealed

years, the

as well as drawn condition.

have been specified.

0.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular

requirement
of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated,
expressing
the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960 Rulesforroundingoff
numericalvalues(revised).The
number of significant
places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirements
forged rivets for structural
purposes.

for steel wire up to 20 mm diameter

for the manufacture

of cold-

2. Supply of Material
2.1 General

requirements

relating

to the supply of steel wires shall conform

2.2 Unless otherwise

agreed to between the purchaser
plied in coils weighing not more than 600 kg each.

to IS : 8910-1978

and the manufacturer,

the steel wire shall

be sup-

3. Manufacture
3.1 Wire shall be made from steel manufactured
by open-hearth,
electric, duplex, basic oxygen or a combination of these processes. In case any other process is employed by the manufacturer,
prior approval of the
purchaser should be obtained.
3.1.1 Steel shall be supplied semi-killed
or killed.
ment between the purchaser and the manufacturer.

4. Chemical

Rimming

steel may also be permitted

subject

Composition

4.1 Ladle Analysis-Ladle

analysis of the steel, when carried out either by the method specified
vant parts of IS: 228
Methods
for chemical
analysis
of steels or any other established
tal/chemical
method shall be as given below. In case of dispute the procedure given in relevant
228 shall be the referee method:

374

to agree.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

in the releinstrumenparts of IS:

FASTENERS--PART

IS : 7557-1982
Percent, Max

Constituent

0.23
0.050
0.050

Carbon
Sulphur
Phosphorus

Note-If
required, lower limit of carbon may be specified as mutually agreed to between the purchaser and the
manufacturer.
4.2 Product Analysis-Permissible
shall be as follows:

variation, in case of product analysis, over the iimits specified under 4.1,

Constituent

Variation Over the

Specified
Maximum Limit, Percent

Carbon
Sulphur
Phosphorus

0.02
0.005
0.005

4.3 When steel is required in copper bearing quality, copper content shall be between 0.20 to 0.35 percent. In
case of product analysis, the permissible variation shall not exceed +, 0.03 percent.
4.4 When the steel is silicon-killed, silicon content in the product analysis shall not be less than 0.10 percent. When the steel is silicon-aluminium
killed or aluminium-killed,
the requirement regarding minimum
silicon content shall not apply.
5. Freedom from Defects
5.1 Steel wire shall be well and cleanly drawn to the dimensions and tolerances specified. The finished
material shall be free from such surface and internal flaws, as would be detrimental to the end use of the
material.
6. Dimensional

Tolerances

6.1 The wires shall comply with the following

dimensional

Diameter of Wire
mm
Upto 2
Over 2 up to 3
Over 3 up to 6
Over 6 up to 10
Over 10 up to 20

tol&rances:
Tolerance
225
0.06
0.075
0.09
0.12

6.1.1 All the tolerances specified shall be minus tolerances. When special plus and minus tolerances are
required by the purchaser the sum of such tolerances shall not be specified as less than the above total
tolerances.
7. Heat Treatment
7.1 The steel wire shall be supplied in annealed and/or as-drawn condition.
6. Selection of Test Samples
6.1 Test samples shall be selected by the purchaser from the coils, supplied in the annealed and/or as-drawn
condition.
6.2 Test samples shall not be cut from the coils except in the presence, or with the approval, of the purchaser.
6.3 Before the test samples are selected, full particulars regarding the cast number, size, mass or number of
coils in each cast shall be furnished by the manufacturer to the purchaser.
9. Tensile Test
9.1 One tensile test shall be made from the finished steel wire for every 10 tonnes of a cast or part thereof.
When more than one diameter of wire is specified, one additional test shall be made for each variation in
diameter.
9.1.1 No tensile test shall be carried out for wire below 6 mm diameter.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

375

IS : 7557-1982

9.2 The tensile properties of steel wire when determined in accordance with IS: 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products ( first revision ) or IS: 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire ( first
revision)shall
beas given below:

Characteristic

Requirement
t

Annealed Condition
(2)
Tensil strength, MPa
Yield stress, Min, MPa
Elongation, Min, percent
(on Qauge length 5.65s
Note-l

As-Drawn Condition
(3)

330-410
160

410-490
190

30

20

MPa= 1 N/m& = lMN/n? =0.1020 kgf/mm2.

9.3 Tensile properties other than those specified at 9.2 may be mutually agreed to between the purchaser
and the supplier.
10. Shear Strength
10.1 One shear strength test shall be carried out for every 10 tonnes of a cast and part thereof. One additional test shall be made for each variation in diameter.
10.2 Shear strength for wire conforming to this standard shall not be less than 270 MPa for annealed condition and 300 MPa for drawn condition. The shear strength test shall be carried out in accordance with IS :
5242-1979 Method of test for determination of shear strength of mild steel (first revision).
11. Dump Test

11.1 One dump test shall be made from the furnished steel for every 10 tonnes of a cast or part thereof. One
additional test shall be made for each variation in diameter.
11.2 The test piece having a length equal to twice its diameter, cut from the wire shall, at room temperature,
withstand without fracture and shall not reveal any harmful cracks while being compressed to half its
length.
11.3 Minor surface flaws which do not tend to open out wider than 0.4 mm + 0.04 times the diameter of the
steel wire shall not be the cause for rejection. For special applications, the limit for minor surface defects
shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
11.4 No dump test shall be carried out on wire below 6 mm in diameter.
12. Bend Test
12.1 One bend test shall be carried out for every 10 tonnes of a cast or part thereof. One additional
be made for each variation in diameter.
12.2 The test piece, when cold, shall withstand
radius not greater than half of its diameter.

test shall

without fracture, being bent through an angle of 180 round a

13. Packing and Marking

13.1 Each coil of wire shall be bound and fastened compactly
shall be attached to each coil:
a)
b)
c)

and a metal tag marked with the following

Manufacturers name or trade-mark,

Cast number or identification mark by which the steel can be traced to the cast from which it was
made, and
Diameter, mass and condition of the wire.

13.2The material may also be marked with the ISI Certification

Mark.

Note-The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution (Certification Marks) Act and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an !ndian
Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard
under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and qualify control which is devised and supervised by ISI and
operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously checked by ISI for conformity to that standard
as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification Mark may be
granted to manufacturers or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.

376

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

SECTION

RAW MATERIALS
AND
REQUIREMENTS
FOR RIVETS

GENERAL
FOR AIRCRAFTS

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS : 8513-l 977

Indian Standard

1
m

SPECIFICATION FOR
ALUMINIUM ALLOY WIRE FOR
COLD FORGED RIVETS FOR AIRCRAFT
PURPOSES ( ALLOY 55000 )

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards
Institution
on 27 July 1977, after the draft
finalized by the Light Metals and Their Alloys Sectional Committee
had been approved by the Structural and
Metals Division Council.
0.2 RiVetS
of aluminium
5 percent magnesium
alloy, which has excellent weldability
characteristics,
are used in the aircraft industry. This standard has been prepared to cover the requirements
of wires, used in
manufacturing
rivets, with a view to facilitating
mutual understanding
between the supplier and the purchaser of rivet stock.
0.3 In the preparation
of this standard, due weightage
has been given to international
co-ordination
standards and practices prevailing in different countries by deriving assistance
from the following
tions:
BS 3L 58 Wire for solid cold-forged
Institution.
AMTY 498-4-63 Aluminium

alloy

rivets of aluminium--5

percent

wire. State

of Aviation

MIL-W-7986-57 Wire and rod, aluminium

Committee

and aluminium

magnesium

alloy.

Technoloy

alloy, for die heading.

British

among
publica-

Standards

of USSR.
U.S. Federal

Specifica-

tion.
0.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular
requirement
of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated,
expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
The number of significant
places retained in
with IS: 2-1960 Rules for rounding numerical values(reVised).
the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirements
of rivets for aircraft purposes.

of drawn

aluminium

magnesium

alloy

wire used for cold forging

2. Material
2.1 The material shall be made from aluminium
and alloying constituents
with or without approved scrap at
the discretion
of the manufacturer
and shall conform to the chemical composition
specified in 5.1. The wire
shall be drawn out of extruded or rolled stock.

3. Inspection

and Testing

Procedures

3.1 This standard shall be used in conjunction

with IS: 8474-1977 Procedure
aluminium and aluminium alloy wires (for rivets)for
aircraft purposes.
4. Freedom

and testir$j

1f

from Defects

4.1 The drawn wire shall be free from harmful

transverse surface cracks, blisters, etc.

HANDBOOK

for inspection

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

defects,

such as deep die marks,

scratches,

seams,

ovality,

379

IS : 8513-l

977

5. Chemical Composition
5.1 Chemical composition of each cast, when analyzed in accordance
chemical analysis of aluminium and its alloys (revised). shall be as

with IS: 504-1963

Element

Percent

Copper
Magnesium
Silicon
Iron
Manganese
Chromium
Zinc
Aluminium

0.10 Max
4.5-5.5
0.3 Max
0.5 Max
0.5 Max
0.25 Max
0.20 Max

Methodsof

Remainder

5.1.1 Titanium and other grain refining elements may be present in the material at option of the supplier,
provided the total content does not exceed 0.2 percent.
6. Condition
6.1 The wire shall be supplied in annealed condition.
7. Mechanical

Properties

7.1 Tensile
Strength-Tensile
strength obtained on test specimens selected and prepared in accordance
with IS : 8474-1977 shall be not less than 265 N/m& (27.0 kgflmn-? ).
Note- For the guidance of the designer, it may be mentioned here that shear strength is expected to be 160 N/mm*
( 16.5 kgf/mm2 ).
7.2 Upsefting Test- Upsetting test shall be carried out on one wire specimen from each coil in accordance
with IS : 8474-1977 and the test piece shall not reveal any defect on completion of the test. The height of
projecting portion of the wire shall be 1.5 times the diameter.
6. Tolerances on Diameter
6.1 Tolerances on diameter of the wire shall be in accordance with IS : 8474-1977
9. Corrosion Prevention
9.1 All coils shall be adequately protected against corrosion by any suitable temporary protective coating,
such as neutral grease or oil, and packed in waterproof paper and secured properly.
10. Identification
10.1 Each coil, passed by the inspector, shall be tagged with a metal label bearing the mark of the inspector
and such other marking as shall ensure full identification
of the material.
10.2 Each coil of wire shall be colour-coded in accordance with IS : 2479-1969 Colour code for the identification of aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes (first revision).
to the satisfaction
of the In specting Authority.
11. Certification
11.1 All supplies shall be accompanied by certificate for freedom from defects, chemical composition, condition and mechanical properties as laid down in 4,5,6, and 7 respectively or as required by the Inspecting
Authority.
11.2 The manufacturer shall, when required, supply free of charge a copy of the works analysis of the
material. Works analysis is defined as the routine analysis conducted by the manufacturer in order to control the quality of the materials.

380

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8514-1977

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
ALUMINIUM ALLOY WIRE FOR COLD
FORGED RIVETS FOR AIRCRAFT
PURPOSES ( ALLOY 24530 )

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard

was adopted by the Indian Standards

Institution
on 27 July 1977 after the draft
finalized by the Light Metals and Their Alloys Sectional Committee
had been approved by the Structural and
Metals Division Council.

0.2 As rivets of various head shapes and sizes of strong aluminium-copper-magnesium-manganese

alloy
material are extensively
used in assembly of structural
aircraft components,
this standard
has been formulated for the wires from which such rivets are cold forged. On a rationalized
basis this rivet material
should replace all the other aluminium-copper
alloy series in use at present.
0.3 In the formulation

of this standard,

assistance

has been derived

from the following

publications:

QQ-A-22516 Aluminium
alloy bar, rod, and wire; rolled, drawn, or cold finished,
2024. U.S. Federal
Sepecification.
AMTY 498-6-63 Aluminium
alloy wire. State Committee
of Aviation Technology
of USSR.
0.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular
requirement
of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated,
expressing
the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-196ORules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant
places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirements
forging of rivets for aircraft purposes.

of drawn

aluminium-copper-magnesium

alloy

wire used for cold

2. Material
2.1 The material shall be made from aluminium
and alloying constitutents
with or without approved scrap at
the discretion
of the manufacturer
and shall confrom to the chemical composition
specified in 5.1. The wire
shall be drawn out of extruded or rolled stock.
3. inspection and Testing Procedure
3.1 This standard shall be used in conjunction
with IS : 8474-1977
of aluminium
and aluminium
alloy wires ( for rivets) for aircraft

Procedure
purposes.

for inspection

and testing

4. Freedom from Defects

4.1 The drawn wire shall be free from harmful

ty, transverse

HANDBOOK

ON

surface

cracks,

INDUSTRIAL

corrosion

defects, such as deep die marks and scratches,

patches and pits, coarse grained surface etc.

FASTENERS-PART

seams, ovali-

381

IS : 8514-1977

5. Chemical

COmPOSitiOn

5.1 The chemical composition

chemical analysis of aluminium

of each cast, when analysed in accordance

with IS : 504-1963
and its alloys (revised).
shall be as follows:

Element

Percent

Copper
Magnesium
Manganese
Iron
Silicon
Nickel
*Zinc
* Lead
Tin
l Titanium
Zirconium
l Chromium
Aluminium

3.8.4.9
1.2.1.8
0.3.0.9
0.5
0.5 Max
0.20 Max
0.25 Max
0.05 Max
0.05 Max

Methods

for

0.2 Max
0.10 Max
Remainder

6. Condition
6.1 The wire shall be supplied
annealed
sectional
are of not less than 20 percent

and subsequently
cold drawn
not more than 40 percent.

to secure

a reduction

of cross-

7. Heat Treatment
7.1 Tensile

test samples

shall

a) Solution-treat
exceeding 40C.

be heat-treated

by heating

b) Age at room temperature

6. Mechanical

as follows:

at a temperature

of 495 f5C

and quench

in water

at a temperature

not

for not less than 96 hours.

Properties

6.1 Tensile Strength-Tensile

strength
of test specimen
selected and prepared in accordance
with Is :
8474-1977 Procedure for inspection and testing of aluminium
and aluminium
alloy wires ( for rivets ) for
aircraft Purposes. shall be nut less than 390 N/mm ( 40 kgflmm
).
Note-For

the guidance of the designer it may be mentioned here that shear strength is expected to be 265 N/mm

(27 kgf/mm*)
6.2 Upsetting Test-_Upsetting
test shall be carried out in accordance
with IS : 8474-1,977 on one Wire
test specimen from each coil within 20 minutes of quenching subsequent
to solution treatment,
and the
test-piece shall not reveal any defect on completion
of the test.
6.2.1 The height

of the projecting

portion

of the wire for upsetting

test shall

be as follows:

Diameter
d(mm)

In As-Supplied
Condition

In Heat-Treated

1.6 up to and including

4.5 Over 4.5 up to and
including 9.0

1.5 d

1.4 d

1.5 d

1.3 d

Condition

9. Tolerances on Diameter

9.1 Tolerances on diameter of the wire shall be in accordance

10. Corrosion

grease

protected against corrosion

or oil, and packed

in waterproof

by any suitable temporary protective coating

paper and secured

+ Subject to thediscretion of the Inspecting Authority, determination

tion only of the samples analysed.

382

IS : 8474-1977

Prevention

10.1 All coil shall be adequately

such as neutral

with

properly.

of these elements need be madeon a small propor-

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8514-1977
11. Identification
11.1 Each coil, passed by the inspector, shall be tagged with a metal label bearing the mark of the inspector
and such other marking as shall ensure full identification
of the material.
11.2 Each coil of wire shall be colour coded in accordance with IS : 2479-l 969 colour
identification
of aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposestothe
of the Inspecting Authority.

code for the

satisfaction

12. Certification
12.1 All supplies shall be accompanied by certificates for freedom from defects, chemical composition, condition and mechanical properties, as laid down in 4,5,6 and 6 respectively or as required by the Inspecting
Authority.
12.2 The manufacturer shall, when required, supply free of charge a copy of the works analysis of the
material. Works analysis is defined as the routine analysis conducted by the manufacturer in order to control the quality of the material.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

383

IS : 8515-1977

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
ALUMINIUM WIRE FOR COLD FORGED
RIVETS FOR AIRCRAFT PURPOSES
( ALLOY 19500 )

0. Foreword

0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards

Institution
on 27 July 1977, after the draft
finalized by the Light Metals and Their Alloys Sectional Committee
had been approved by the Structural and
Metals Division Council.
0.2 Rivets of 99.5 percent purity aluminium
are used for aircraft manufacture
and hence the necessity
felt for formulation
of this standard to cover the requirements
of wires for manufacturing
rivets.
0.3 In the formulation

of this standard

assistance

BS 4L36 Wire for solid, cold-forged

DIN 1747 Bar, rod and wire
wrought aluminium
alloys) strength

has been derived

rivets of 99.5 percent

from the following

aluminium.

British

of aluminium
( highest grade aluminium,
properties.
Deutschess Normenausschusses.

was

publications:

Standards

Institution.

high grade

aluminium

and

0.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular

requirement
of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated,
expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant
places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1. scope
1.1 This standard
poses.

covers the requirements

of drawn aluminium

wire for manufacturing

rivets for aircraft

pur.

2. Inspection and Testing Procedure

2.1 This standard

aluminium

shall be used in conjunction

with IS : 8474-1977
and aluminium
alloy wires ( for rivels ) for aircraft

Procedure

for Inspection

and testing

of

Purposes.

3. Material

3.1 The material shall be made

manufacturer
and shall conform
extruded or rolled stock.

from aluminium
to the chemical

with or without approved scrap at the discretion

of the
composition
specified in 5. The wire shall be drawn out of

4. Freedom from Defects

4.1 The drawn wires shall be free from harmful defects,

ovality and transverse surface cracks, tears, etc.

384

such as deep die marks,

HANDBOOK

ON

seams,

INDUSTRIAL

deep scratches,

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8515-1977

5. Chemical Composition
5.1 The chemical
chemical analysis

composition
of aluminium

when analysed in accordance

of each cast,
and its alloys (revised).
shall be as follows:

with

Element

Percent

Aluminium
Copper
Silicon
Iron
Manganese
Zinc
Total of copper,
iron, manganese
zinc

99.5 Min
0.05 Max
0.3 Max
0.4 Max
0.05 Max
0.10 Max
0.5 Max

silicon,
and

IS : 504-1963

Methodof

6. Condition
6.1 The wires shall be supplied

7. Mechanical
7.1 Tensile
8474-1977

in half hard temper to achieve

the tensile

strength

specified

in 7.1

Properties

Strength-Tensile
strength of test specimens
shall be not less than 110 N/mm* ( 11 kgf/mm*

selected
).

and prepared

in accordance

with

IS :

Note-For guidance of the designer, it may be mentioned here that shear strength of the material may be 60 N/mm* ),
(6 kgf/mm* )
7.2 Upsetting
Test-Upsetting
test shall be carried out in &cordance
with IS: 8474-1977
specimen trom each coil and the test piece shall not reveal any defect on completion
of the test.
7.2.1 The height of the projecting
times the diameter of the wire.

portion

of the sample

of wire, subjected

to upsetting

on one wire

test, shall be 1.5

6. Tolerances on Diameter
6.1 Tolerances

on diameter

of the wire shall be in accordance

with

IS : 8474-1977

9. Corrosion Prevention
9.1 All coils shall be adequately
protected against corrosion
byanysuitable
such as neutral grease or oil, and packed in water-proof
paper and secured

temporary
properly.

protective

coating

10. Identification
10.1 Each coil, passed by the inspector, shall be tagged with a metal label bearing
and such other marking as shall ensure full identification
of the material.
10.2 Each coil of wire shall be colour coded in accordance
of aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering
of the Inspecting Authority.

the mark of the inspector

with IS : 2479-1969 Colour

purpnscs (secririd
revision)

code for identification

lo the satisfaction

11. Certification
11.1 All supplies shall be accompanied by certificates for freedom from defects, chemical composition, con.
dition and mechanical properties as laid down in 4,5,6 and 7 respeclively
or as required by the Inspecting
Authority.
11.2 The manufacturer
shall, when required, supply free of charge
material. Works analysis is defined as the routine analysis conducled
the quality of the material.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

a copy of Ihe works analysis

of Ihe
by Lhe manufacturer
in order to control

385

IS : 8936-1978

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR ALUMINIUM ALLOY

WIRE FOR COLD FORGED RIVETS
FOR AIRCRAFT PURPOSES
(ALLOY 24350)

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 25 September 1978, after the
draft finalized by the Light Metals and Their Alloys Sectional Committee had been approved by the Structural and Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard has been prepared to cover the requirements of aluminium-copper-magnesiummanganese alloy wire, used for manufacturing rivets for aircraft purposes. In the preparation of this standard assistance has been derived from AMTY 498-9-83 Aluminium alloy wire issued by the State Committee
of Aviation Technology of USSR.
0.3 This standard is one of a series of Indian standards on aluminium and aluminium
forged rivets for aircraft purposes. Other standards in this series are the following:
IS:
IS:
IS:
IS:
IS:

8513-1977
8514-1977
8515-1977
8937-1978
8938-1978

Aluminium alloy
Aluminium alloy
Aluminium wire
Aluminium-alloy
Aluminium-alloy

wire for cold forged

wire for cold forged
for cold forged solid
wire for cold forged
wire for cold forged

rivets
rivets
rivets
rivets
rivets

for
for
for
for
for

aircraft
aircraft
aircraft
aircraft
aircraft

purposes
purposes
purposes
purposes
purposes

alloy wires for cold

(alloy
(alloy
(alloy
(alloy
(alloy

55000)
24530)
19500)
22500 )
24345)

0.4 With the publication of separate standards for individual alloy wires for manufacturing cold forged
rivets, IS : 5902-1970 Aluminium and aluminium alloy rivet stock for cold forged rivets for aircraft purposes.
will be withdrawn.
0.5 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
i . Scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirements of aluminium-copper-magnesium-manganese
cold forging of rivets for aircraft purposes.

alloy wire used for

2. hWectlon and Testing Procedures

2.1 This standard shall be used in conjunction with IS : 8474-1977 Procedure for inspection
aluminium and aluminium alloy wires ( for rivets ) for aircraft purposes.

and testing of

3. Material
3.1 The material shall be made from aluminium and alloying constituents with or without approved scrap at
the discretion of the manufacturer and conforming to the chemical composition specified in 5.1. The wire
shall be drawn from extruded or hot rolled stock.

4. Freedom from Defects

4.1 The drawn wire shall be free from harmful defects, such as deep die marks and scratches, seams, ovality, transverse surface cracks, corrosion patches and pits, blisters and coarse grained surface, etc.

386

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART 1

IS : 8936-1978

5. Chemical Composition
5.1 Chemical composition
of the material,
when analyzed in accordance
with
shall be as follows:
chemical analysis of aluminium and its alloys (revised).
Element

Percent

Copper
Magnesium
Manganese
Iron
Silicon
Zinc
Titanium
Others, each
Total others
Aluminium

3.9 to 4.5
0.15 to 0.3
0.3 to 0.5
0.2 Max
0.25 Max
0.1 Max
0.1 Max
0.05 Max
0.1 Max

IS: 504-1963

Methodsof

Remainder

6. Condition
6.1 The wire shall be supplied annealed and subsequently
cold drawn
sectional area of not less than 20 percent nor more than 40 percent.

to secure

a reduction

on cross-

7. Heat Treatment
7.1 Test samples
a)
b)

shall be heat-treated
as follows:
Solutionize
at 515-520C and quench in water below 4OC, and
Age at temperature
of 752 5C for 24 hours.

8. Mechanical Properties
8.1 Tensile Strength-Tensile
8474-1977

strength of test specimen

shall be not less than 355 N/mm* (36kgf/mm*).

NOTE -For the guidance of the designer

N/mm* (25 kgf/mm* ).

selected

and prepared

in accordance

IS :

it may be mentioned here that the minimum shear strength is expected to be 245
in one wire test

8.2 Upsefting Tesf-Upsetting

test shall be carried out in accordance
with IS : 8474-1977
specimen condition. Test pieces shall not reveal any defect on completion
of the test.
8.2.1 The height of the projecting

with

portion

of the wire for upsetting

Diameter, d
mm

(1)
1.6 up to and

test shall be as follows

In As Supplied
Condition
(2)

In Heat-Treated
Condition
(3)

1.5d

1.5d

1.5d

1.4d

1.5d

1.3d

including 4.5
Over 4.5 up to and
including 8
Over 8 up to and
including 9

9. Tolerances on Diameter
9.1 Tolerances

on diameter

of the wire shall be in accordance

with IS : 8474-1977.

10. Corrosion Prevention

10.1 All coils shall be adequately
protected against corrosion
by any suitable
neutral grease or oil and packed in waterproof
paper and secured properly.

temporary

coating,

such as

11. Identification
11.1 Each coil, passed by the inspector, shall be tagged
and such other marking as shall ensure full identification

with a metal label bearing

of the material.

the mark of the inspector

11.2 Each coil of wire shall be colour coded in accordance

with IS : 2479.1969Colourcodefortheidentifica
tion of aluminium
alloys for general
engineering
purposes
(secondrevision)
to the satisfaction
Inspecting
Authority.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

of the

387

IS : 8936-1978

12. Certification
12.1 All supplies shall be accompanied
by certificates
for freedom from defects, chemical composition,
condition and mechanical
properties,
as laid down in 4,5,6 and 6 respectively
or as required by the Inspecting
Authority.
12.2 The manufacturer
shall, when required, supply free of charge a copy of the works
material. Works analysis is defined as the routine analysis conducted
by the manufacturer
trol the quality of the material.

388

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

analysis of the
in order to con-

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8937-1978

lndian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR ALUMINIUM ALLOY

WIRE FOR COLD FORGED RIVETS
FOR AIRCRAFT PURPOSES
( ALLOY 22500 )

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards
Institution
draft finalized by the Light Metals and Their Alloys Sectional Committee
tural and Metals Division Council.

on 25 September 1978, after the

had been approved by the Struc-

0.2 This standard has been prepared to cover the requirements

of aluminium-copper-magnesium
used for manufacturing
rivets for aircraft purpose. In the preparation
of this standard, assistance
derived from the following
publication:
BS : 6L37 Specification
for wire for solid cold-forged
British Standards
Institution.
MIL-W-7986 Wire and rod, alumuminium

rivets

and aluminium

alloy wire
has been

of aluminium-copper-magnesium

alloy

for die heading,

US Federal

alloy.

Specifica-

tion.
AMTY 498-7-63 Aluminium

wire. State

Committee

of Aviation

Technology

of USSR.

0.3 This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards on aluminium

and aluminium
forged rivets for aircraft purposes, other standards
in this series are :

alloy

wires for cold

IS : 8513-1977

Aluminium

alloy

wire for cold forged

rivets

for aircraft

purposes

( alloy 55000 )

wire for cold forged

rivets

for aircraft

purposes

( alloy 24530 )

solid

rivets

for aircraft

purposes

( alloy

wire for cold forged

rivets

for aircraft

purposes

( alloy 24350 )

IS : 8514-1977

Aluminium

alloy

IS : 8515-1977

Aluminium

wire for cold forged

IS : 8936-1978

Aluminium

alloy

IS : 8938-1978

*Aluminium

alloy

wire for cold forged

rivets

for aircraft

purposes

19500 )

( alloy

0.4 With the publication

of separate standards
for individual
alloy wires for manufacturing
rivets, lS : 5902-1970 Aluminiumandaluminiumalloyrivet
stockforcoldforgedrivetsforaircraft
will be withdrawn.

22500 )

cold forged
purposes

0.5 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular

requirement
of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated,
expressing
the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-l 960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number
Places
retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified
value in this standard.

ofsignificant

1. Scope
1.1 This standard
covers
wire used for cold forging

the requirements
of aIuminium-copper-magnesium-silicon_manganese
of rivets for aircraft
purposes.

2. Inspection and Testing Procedures

2.1 This standard

shall be used in conjunction

with IS: 8474-1977
alloy wires (for rivets) for aircraft purposes.

aluminium

Procedure

for inspection

and testing

of

3. Material

3.1 The material shall be made from aluminium and alloying constituents
with or without approvea scrap at
the discretion
of the manufacturer
and shall conform to the chemical composiiion
specified in 5.1. The wire
shall be drawn from extruded or hot rolled stock.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

389

IS : 8937-1978
4. Freedm from Defects
4.1 The drawn,wire shall be free from harmful defects, such as deep die marks and scratches, seams, ovality, transverse surface cracks, corrosion patches and pits, blisters and coarse grained surface.
5. Chemical Composition
5.1 Chemical composition of each cast, when analyzed in accordance with IS : 504-1963 Methodsof
chemical analysisof aluminiumand itsalloys(fevised).
shall be as follows :
Element

Percent
2.0 to 3.0
0.2 to 0.5
0.7 Max
0.5 ,I
0.2 1,
b.05 ((
0.2 II
0.05 ),
0.05 ,,
0.2 ,,
0.1
Remiinder

Copper
Magnesium
Silicpn
Iron
Manganese
Nickel
*Zinc
Lead
Tin
Titanium + Zirconium
*Chromium
Aluminium
l

6. Condition
6.1 The wire shall be supplied annealed and subsequently cold drawn to secure a reduction
sectional area of not less than20 percent nor more than 40 percent.

in cross-

7. Heat Treatment
7.1 Test samples shall be heat-treated as follows

a) Solutionise at 495 k 5C and quench in cold water below 40C.

b) Age at room temperature for not less than 96 hours.
6. Mechanical Properties
6.1 Tensile StrengthTensile strength of test specimen sleeted and prepared in accordance
8474-1977
shall be not less than 290 MPa (29.6 kg/mm* ).
Note- For the guidance of the designer
be 185 MPa ( 19 kgflmm* ).

it may be mentioned

here that the minimum

shear strength

with IS :

is expected

to

6.2 Upsetting Test

6.2.1 Upsetting test shall be carried out in accordance with IS : 8474-1977 on one wire test specimen
from each coil in the lot in the as-supplied condition, and also solutionifed
condition within 20 minutes of
solution treatment. The test pieces shall not reveal any defect on completion of the test.
6.2.2 The height of projecting

portion of the sample, subjected to upsetting

:I
1.4 up to and including 4.5
Over 4.5 up to and including
9.0

In Heat-Treated
Condition
(3)
1.5 d
1.4 d

In As Supplied
Condition
(2)
1.5 d
1.5 d

Diameter, mm

test shall be as follows

9. Tolerances on Diameter
9.1 Tolerances on diameter of the wire shall be in accordance with IS : 8474-1977 .

Subject to the discretion of the inspecting

portion only of the samples analysed.

390

authority,

determination

of these elements

HANDBOOK

ON

need be made on a small pro-

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8937-1978
10. Corrosion Prevention
10.1 All coils shall be adequately
neutral

grease

or oil, and packed

protected against corrosion

by any suitable
in waterproof
paper and secured properly.

temporary

coating,

such as

11. Identification
11.1 Each coil, passed by the inspector, shall be tagged with a metal label bearing
and such other marking as shall ensure full identification
of the material.

the mark of the inspector

11.2 Each coil of wire shall be colour coded in accordance with IS: 2479-1969 Colour code for the identification of aluminium
and aluminium
alloys for general engineering
purposes to the satisfaction
of the Inspecting Authority.
12. Certification

12.1 All supplies shall be accompanied

by certificates
for freedom from defects, chemical composition,
condition and mechanical
properties,
as laid down in 4,5,6 and 8 respectively
or as required by the Inspecting
Authority.
12.2 The manufacturer
shall, when required, supply free of charge a copy of the works
material. Works analysis is defined as the routine analysis conducted
by the manufacturer
trol the quality of the material.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

analysis
of the
in order to con-

391

IS : 8938-1978

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR ALUMINIUM=ALLOY

WIRE FOR COLD FORGED RIVETS
FOR AIRCRAFT PURPOSES
(ALLOY 24345)

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 25 September 1978, after the
draft finalized by the Light Metals and Their Alloys Sectional Committee had been approved by the Structural and Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard has been prepared to cover the requirements of aluminium-copper-magnesium-siliconmanganese alloy wire, for manufacturing rivets for aircraft purposes. In the preparation of this standard,
assistance has been derived from following publications:
BS: 6L37 Specification for wire for solid, cold-forged rivets of aluminium-copper-magnesium-siliconmanganese alloy. British Standards Institution.
AMTY 498563 Aluml~nium wire. State Committee of Aviation Technology of USSR.
IGC 04-32-101 MIL-W-7986 French Sud Aviation ( Inspection ) Standard. Wire and rod, aluminium and
aluminium alloy for die heading. US Federal Specification.
0.3 This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards on aluminium and aluminium alloy wires for cold
forged rivets for aircraft purposes. Other standards in this series are:
IS: 8513-1977 Aluminium alloy wire for cold forged rivets for aircraft purposes (alloy 55000)
IS:
IS:
IS:
IS:

8514-1977
8515-1977
8936-1978
8937-1978

Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium

alloy wire for cold forged

wire for cold forged solid
alloy wire for cold forged
alloy wire for cold forged

rivets
rivets
rivets
rivets

for
for
for
for

aircraft
aircraft
aircraft
aircraft

purposes
purposes
purposes
purposes

(alloy
(alloy
(alloy
(alloy

24530)
19500)
24350)
22500)

0.4 With the publication of separate standards for individual alloy wires for manufacturing cold forged
rivets,
Specification foraluminium and aluminium alloy rivet stock for cold forged rivets for
IS: 5902-l 970
aircraft purposes. shall be withdrawn.
0.5 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with lS:2-1960 RUleSforroundingoff
numericalvalues(revised).The
number of significant places retained
in the rounded Off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirements of aluminium-copper-magnesium-silicon-manganese
for cold forging of rivetsfor aircraft purposes.

wire used

2. inspection and Testing Procedures

2.1 This standard shall be used in conjunction with IS: 8474-1977 Procedure for inspection
aluminium allov wires (for rivets) for aircraft purposes.

and testing of

3. Material
3.1 The material shall be made from aluminium and alloying constituents with or without approved scrap at
the discretion of the manufacturer and shall conform to the chemical composition specified in 5.1.The wire
shall be drawn from extruded or hot rolled stock.
4. Freedom from Defects
4.1 The drawn wire shall be free from harmful defects, such as deep die marks and scratches, seams, ovality, transverse surface cracks, corrosion patches and pits, blisters and coarse grained surface.
392

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8938-1978

5. Chemical Composition
5.1 Chemical
follows:

composition

of each cast, when analysed

in accordance

with IS : 504-1963 , shall be as

Percent

Element
Copper
Magnesium
Silicon
Manganese
Iron
+ Nickel
+ Zinc
* Lead
*Tin
* Titanium + Zirconium
+ Chromium
Aluminium

3.8 to 5.0
0.2 to 0.8
0.5 to 0.9
0.4 to 1.2
0.5 Max
0.2 ,,
0.2 I,
0.05 ,,
0.05 ,,
0.2 I,
0.1
Remiinder

6. Condition
6.1 The wire shall be supplied annealed and subsequently cold drawn to secure a reduction
sectional area of not less than 20 percent nor more than 40 percent.

in cross-

7. Heat Treatment
7.1 Test samples shall be heat-treated as follows:
a) Solutionize at 495 f5C and quenching in water at a temperature below 4OC, and
b) Age at room temperature for not less than 48 hours.
6. Mechanical

Properties

6.1 Tensile Strength-Tensile

strength of test specimen
8474-1977 shall be not less than 400 MPa (40.8 kgf/mm* ).

selected

and prepared in accordace

Note- For the guidance of the designer it may be mentioned here that the minimum shear strength
be 235 MPa (24 kgflmm

with IS:

is expected

to

).

8.1.1 Elongation--Theelongation

of the test specimen shall be not less than 14 percent.

8.2 Upsetting Test

8.2.1 Upsetting test shall be carried out in accordance with IS : 8474-1977 on one wire test specimen
from each coil in the lot in the as-supplied condition, and also in the solutionized condition within 30
minutes of quenching. The test pieces shall not reveal any defect on completion of the test.
8.2.2The height of the projecting portion of the sample, subjected to upsetting test shall be as follows:
Diameter, d
mm
(1)
From 1.6 up to and including 4.5
Over 4.5 up to and including 9.0

In As Supplied
Condition

In Heat-Treated
Condition

(2)
1.5 d
1.5 d

(3)
1.5 d
1.4 d

9. Tolerances on Diameter
9.1 Tolerances on diameter of the wire shall be in accordance with IS : 8474-1977 .
10. Corrosion Prevention
10.1 All coils shall be adequately protected against corrosion by any suitable temporary coating, such as
neutral grease or oil and packed in waterproof paper and secured properly.
11. Identification
11.1 Each coil, passed by the inspector, shall be tagged with a metal label bearing the mark of the inspector
and such other marking as shall ensure full identification of the material.
11.2 Each coil of wire shall be colour coded in accordance with IS: 2479-1969 Colour code for the identification of aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes to the satisfaction of the Inspecting Authority.
*Subject to the discretion
only of the samples.
HANDBOOK

ON

of the Inspection

INDUSTRIAL

Authority,

FASTENERS-PART

determination

of these elements

need be made on a small proportion

393

IS : 8938-1978

12. Certification
12.1 All supplies shall be accompanied by certificates for freedom from defects, chemical composition, condition and mechanical properties, as laid down in 4, 5,6 and 6 respectively or as required by the Inspecting
Authority.

12.2 The manufacturer shall, when required, supply free of charge a copy of the works analysis of the
material. Works analysis is defined as the routine analysis conducted by the manufacturer in order to control the quality of the material.

394

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 9089-l

Indian

979

Standard

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RIVETS OF

ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM WROUGHT ALLOYS
FOR AIRCRAFT

I. Scope-Specifies
on aircraft.

the general

requirements

for rivets of aluminium

and aluminium

wrought

alloys

for use

2. Terminology
2.1 Batch
2.1.1 Rivet wires-A
batch consists
of rivet wires weighing
up to 250 kg of the same diameter
and
material manufactured
in the same manner and heat treated together, if required, and presented complete
for testing and inspection.
2.1.2 Rivets-A
batch consists of rivets of the same nominal dimensions,
same form and manufactured
in
the same manner from rivet wires of the same cast and, if heat treated, that have been heat treated together
and is presented for testing and inspection at the same time.
2.2 Certification-Confirmation
quirements
of Ihe relevant
2.3 Crack or Burst-A
separation
of metal.

by the manufacturer
or supplier
specification,
drawing or order.

crack or burst

2.4 Dud-h

is an incomplete,

2.5 Harmful

Defect-Any

mutilated

defect

is an abrupt

or foreign

prejudicial

interruption

that

of the periphery

to subsequent

manufacture,

and aged at room

specification.

2.7 Inspecting
tification.

for authorising

2.6

Inspector-The

P.O.Manufacturer-The

body responsible

individual

responsible

firm that produces

conforms

to the re-

of a rivet head caused

by

part.

2.6 Heat Treated-Annealed,

solution
treated,
precipitation
treated as stipulated
in the material
Authority-The

the material

for

the material

fabrication

or use of a material.

temperature,

or solutron

the manufacturer

or supplier

executing

inspection

and

release

in the form in which it is consigned

treated

and

to issue cer-

of

material.

to the purchaser.

2.10 River-h
is a headed unthreaded
mechanical
device formed from rod, wire, or tubing, used to assemble
two or more components
by an applied force which generally deforms the plain rivet end to develop a completed mechanical
joint.
2.11 Rivet Length-h
is measured between the largest diameter
the extreme end in a line parallel with the axis of the rivet.
2.12 Supplier-The
2.13 Wire-A

firm that consigns

the material

of the bearing

surface

of the rivet head to

to the purchaser.

round, of not more than 10.0 mm diameter

finished

by drawing.

3. Dimensions and Tolerances

3.1 The length of the rivet as defined
relevant specification.

in 2.11 and its diameter

shall be within

the tolerances

mentioned

3.2 Unless otherwise specified, rivets shall have plain shear ends. The ends shall be at right angles
of theaxis of the rivet and reasonably
flat.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

in the

within

395

IS : 9089-1979
3.3The fillet

radii under the head of the rivet shall not exceed 0.8 mm.

4. Material
4.1 The chemical composition,
condition
of supply, heat treatment,
mechanical
properties,
etc, for the rivet
wire shall, unless specified
otherwise,
conform
to IS : 5902-1970 Specification
for aluminium
and
aluminium
alloy rivet stock for cold forged rivets for aircraft purposes.
4.2 The dimensions
and dimensional
of wrought aluminium
and aluminium
dard.

tolerances
for the rivet wire shall conform to IS : 3577-1967 Diameters
alloy rivet, bolt and screw stock, if not specified in the relevant stan-

4.3 The elements not specified in the relevant specification

of the material
purposeotherthanfluxing,degassing,grain
refinementandthelike.

shall not have been added for any

4.4 Grain Size-The

rivet wire of Grades 55000, 22500, 24530 and 24435 shall show a uniform
fine
microstructure.
Under 100 x magnification
the number of grains contained
entirely within circle of 80 mm
diameter, and not cut by this circle, shall be at least 28.
4.5 Workability-The
wires should be so made that the original head and closing head can be properly formed. When up-setting, there should be a minimum ratio of 4 : 1 between diameter and head height of the head
made for testing
purposes.
Individual
skin-cracks
are allowed
but shear cracks are not permitted.
5. Finish
5.1 The finish of the rivets shall be in accordance
with the relevant
between the manufacturer
or the supplier and the purchaser.
5.2 The surface of the wire shall not have any defects
materials
inclusion.
Minor defects may be removed
thereby affected.

like furrow,
by suitable

specification

unless

metal separation,
means provided

agreed

otherwise

burrs, scales or foreign

the dimensions
are not

5.3 Rivets with cracks as defined in 2.3 having a width of opening in excess of 0.002 D + 0.05 mm (where D
is nominal diameter of the rivet head in mm) as measured at the periphery of the rivet head shall be rejected.
6. Identification
6.1 The rivets shall be identified
the relevant specification.
6.2 Additionally

each typeof

by the marking

these shall be colour

rivets shall be mentioned

on the head or tail by embossing

marked as required by the relevant

in the individual specification.

or indenting

specification.

as specified

The designation

by
for

7. Tests
7.1 General
7.1.1 It is obligatory
for the manufacturer
to ensure that all the input materials are of the required quality
and are certified
to that effect by the suppliers inspector. The manufacturer
shall also install a system of
evaluating
and controlling
the quality levels for the production
processes and semi-finished
product at the
stages considered
suitable. The records of all such quality control activities
and the test results of all
stages shall be maintained.
7.1.2 The test samples
material they represent.

shall be marked

as directed

7.2 For the purpose of testing of various attributes,

plans ( AQL ) are given with respective
attributes
Methods for sampling non-threaded
fasteners.

by the inspector,

before these are separated

from the

samples shall be drawn at random. The required sample

and the charts to be used are as per IS : 6821-1973

7.3 Any quality requirements

additional
to those mentioned in this standard shall be as agreed between the
purchaser and the supplier/the
manufacturer
or as specified by the Inspecting Authority
or specified in the
individual specification.
7.4 Dimensions-The
samples
usual measuring instruments.
396

shall

be drawn

for AQL 4.0 and the accuracy

HANDBOOK

ON

shall

INDUSTRIAL

be determined

by using

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 9089-1979

7.5 MafeHal-The
pieces from the destructive
tests may be used if a chemical examination
is desired. If ihe
chemical
composition
is at variance with those agreed between the purchaser and the supplier or with
those specified by the Inspecting Authority even thpugh it is within acceptable
limit, Ihe acLual composition
of the material should be stated for each batch of production.
7.6 Shear Strength
7.6.1 The rivets are mostly
plan AQL 2.5 shall be used.

called

upon to resist shear forces. The test requirements

being s[ringenL,

lest

7.6.2 The rivets of material Grade 24435 should be kept for 24 hours at 50C before this tesl and after ,he
heat treatment. The rivets of material Grade 24530 would need to be kept for 24 hours at 50C or for 4 days
at 20C before this test and after the heat treatment.
7.6.3 The test is carried out with usual rivet shearing instrument
and results are referred LO [he rivet
diameter before the test, at a distance of one diameter from the head of the rivet. In case of rivets whose
shank is shorter than twice the rivet diameter, a specimen of rivet wire of sufficient
length is supplied along
with for the purpose of testing. This rivet wire essentially
is to be of the material of the rivets and also heal
treated together with the rivets under test.
7.6.4 Rivets that were heat treated for shear strength test and whose strength
quirements,
may be heat treated again provided no excess heating is found.
7.6.5 In the case of non-heat treated
shall be carried out as given in 7.11.
7.7 Grain Size-At
in 4.4.

rivets, whose strength

least three mocrosections

do not mee[ wilh

does no1 meet with the requirements,

per batch of rivets shall be examined

Ihe re-

Ihe test

for conformity

as given

7.8 Workability
7.8.1 For testing of this attribute of rivets, a test AQL plan 0.65 of IS : 682111973 shall be used while selecting test samples and testing shall be as specified in 4.5 after the requirements
of 7.8.2 are met. The testing
is carried out with a hydraulic, continuously
acting press.
7.8.2 For upsetting the corresponding
head height, a spacing ring of the thickness of the head lo be upset
is placed between the upsetting place and the pressing die. Rivets of material Grade 24435 should be kept
for 24 hours at 50C before this test and after the heat treatment.
Rivets of the material Grade 24530 would
need to be kept for 1 112 hours after the solution
treatment
and quenching
and before the Lest. If [he
workability
of the test specimen is not satisfactory,
the entire batch is to be rejected.
7.9 Flatness Test-For
this test the plan AQL2.5 shall be used. From the selected samples a length equal \o
the full diameter of the rivet shall be cut from the shank. It is then cold flattened in the axial direction, until
the diameter is equal to twice the original diameter. It shall not crack as a result of this IesL. The rivets of
material Grades 24435 and 24530 shall be kept for the periods given in 7.6.2 before this lesl and after the required heat treatment.
7.10 Surface
in5.

finish-The

samples

are drawn for this test as per AQL 4.0 and Lesling requiremenis

are given

7.11 Retest-If
a test sample fails to satisfy the requirements
of the relevant test plan, the inspector may
further select sample twice as large and reconduct
the test. The entire batch shall be rejected if on this
retest the sample does not satisfy the requirements.
8. Certification
8.1 The rivets of the same batch should

be offered

together

8.2 The manufacturer

shall supply to the purchaser
governed by the relevant Indian Standards.

for inspection

the necessary

certification

8.3 Except as provided in 8.4 if any certification

is issued by a supplier
su,3plier shall hold the equivalent certification
issued by the manufacturer
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

and testing.
in respect

of all materials

other than the manufacturer,

of the material.

such

397

IS : 9089-1979

8.4 If a batch of material consigned

by the manufacturer
is sub-divided
by an approved ( by the inspecting
authority ) non-manufacturer
before reconsigning,
the non-manufacturer
shall carry out any requisite additional dimensional
inspection and the identification
marking shall certify accordingly.
8.5 A specimen

of the certificate

which shall be packed with the material

is given in Appendix

A.

9. Packing
9.1 The rivets
shall contain:

shall

be packed

as agreed

to between

a) the rivets of only one form, size manufactured

inspected together; and
b) the necessary
9.2 The packing
means.

certification

shall

10. Marking-Each

be capable

packed

as specified
of protecting

unit shall be marked

a) Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
b) Designation;
c) Quantity; and
d) Inspectors stamp.
10.1 ISI Certification

398

Marking-Details

the purchaser

and the supplier.

from one batch

of material

Each unit of packing

and,asfaraspossible,

in 8.
the rivets from damage

during

transit

and storage

by usual

with:

if any;

available

with the Indian Standards

HANDBOOK

ON

Institution.

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 9089-1976

APPENDIX

( Clause
FACTORY

ACCEPTANCE

CERTIFICATE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date of manufacture.

Manufacturer.
ISNo.

8.5 )

...

......................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Typeofsupply.................................

Size..........................................Heattreatment

No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Material......................................Batch
Number

of the melt..

No.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batch

....................................

size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Results:

. . . . . . . . . . . Yes/No*
Material:

/IS:

agree with IS :

The dimensions

Al

/IS:

Mg

Cu

Si

Zn

Cr

Mn

Ti

Fe

Nominal:
Actual:
Tensile

strength:

Shear strength:

Nominal......N/rr?

Nominal ..........N/r-r?

Grain size:
Workability:
Surface condition:
Flatening test:

Nominal:

Specimen
Specimen
Etc

l............. N/d
2.. ........... N/d

Nominal:

Specimen

l.........,. . N/n-?

Coarse grain present.... ....._,. . .._ Yes/No*

Shear cracks present ......... . . . . ..Yes/No*
Surface defects exist ........ . . . . . . . .Yes/No*

The supply was manufactured,

controlled

and accepted

as per the requirements

of

IS:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Place.

........

. .

Signatureof

thetester

Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*Strike off what does not apply.

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard is the first of the series of the Indian Standards for rivets to be used for aircraft. Since
the rivets for aircraft are normally used in highly stressed applications,
these need be produced under closely controlled
and in most cases by special and restricted methods of manufacture
and inspection.
In the preparation
publications:

of this

standard

BS : 3L 100 Procedure for inspection

Standards Institution.

considera.ble

and testing

assistance

of wrought

LN 65020 Rivet wires and rivets of aluminium

and aluminium
(Standard
Department
for Aviation of West German ).
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS--PART

has been derived

aluminium

wrought

from

and aluminium

alloys.

Norman

the following

alloys.

Stelle

British

Luft fahrt

399

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

SECTION
SAMPLING,

INSPECTION

H
AND

SUPPLY

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS : 1387-?967

Indian Standard

GENEREAL REQUIREMENTS FOR

THE SUPPLY OF METALLURGICAL MATERIALS
( First Revision )

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard ( First Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards
Institution
on 28 August
1967, after the draft finalized by the Metal Standards Sectional Committee
had been approved by the Structural and Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard
was first published
in 1959 in order to unify certain clauses covering the general requirements
for the supply of material as given in Indian Standard specifications
on metals and metal products. Since the publication
of this standard it has been a general practice to make reference to this standard
in the material specifications
where the provision of this standard would be applicable. This practice has considerably simplified
the presentation
of specifications
for metals and metal products. It has also been possible for individual purchasers and inspecting authorities
toestablish
such provisions as may suit their special
needs and to use them instead of, or as supplement to, this standard.
0.3 It was felt that the original title of the specification
made reference only to metals and metal products
and as such doubts were expressed while making reference to this standard specifications
relating to raw
materials,
such as refractory
materials,
ferro-alloys,
metallurgical
coke and foundry
raw materials.
Therefore, it was decided to change the title and scope of this standard to cover metallurgical
materials
including raw materials
and finished products.

1.

Scope

1.1 This standard covers the general requirements

for the supply of metallurgical
materials
including raw
materials for metallurgical
industries and finished metal products conforming
to Indian Standard specifications. If considered acceptable
by the parties concerned, this standard may be used in part or full for the supplyof other materials or products.
1.2 This standard does not cover all the other
agreed between the contracting
parties.

provisions

relating

to a contract

which

should

be separately

2. Terminology
2.0 For the purpose

of this standard,

the following

definitions

shall

apply.

2.1 Supplier-The
party supplying the material. The supplier may or may not be the actual manufacturer
of
the material. The term supplier shall also cover any party with whom the supplier places order for partial
compliance.
2.2 Purchaser-The
party purchasing
the material. The term purchaser shall also cover person or persons
expressly authorized
in writing by the purchaser to act on his behalf for inspection
of the material.
2.3 MateriaISpecification-Unless
otherwise
stated, this term shall have reference
specification
which forms the basis of the contract for the supply of material.
3. Certificateof

to the Indian Standard

Compliance

3.1 Notwithstanding
supplied complies

the provisions
contained
in 4, the supplier shall furnish
with the requirements
of the material specification.

a certificate

that the material

.
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

403

IS : 1387-1967
3.2 The suppliers certification

shall be implied, if the material

is certified under the IS1 Certification

Mark.

Note-The
use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution ( Certification Marks ) Act, and the RUleS and Regulations made thereunder. Presence of this mark on products covered by
an Indian Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that
standard, under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality control durmg production. This system,
which is devised and supervised by ISI and operated by the producer, has the further safeguard that the products as
actually marketed are continuously checked by ISI for conformity to the standard. Details of conditions, under which
a licence for the use of the ISI Certification Mark may be granted to manufactures or processors, may ba obtained
from the Indian Standards Institution.
4. Supply

4.0 As agreed to between the supplier and the purchaser, the material may be supplied:
a) after works inspection and testing by the supplier, or
b) after inspection and testing by the purchaser.
4.0.1 The purchaser shall specify at the time of enquiry and order, as to which of the two conditions
indicatesin4.0shall
beapplicable.

of supply

4.0.2 Before the finalization of the contract for supplying the material, it shall be the responsibility of
both, the supplier and the purchaser, to obtain and supply prior clarification on optional requirements contained in this standard and the material specification.
4.1 Supply After Works Inspection and Testing by the SupplierWhen supply is to be made after works inspection and testing by the supplier [see 4.0 (a)], the supplier shall carry out the various tests in accordance
with the material specification and shall furnish, if required by the purchaser, a test certificate giving the
results of such tests. The purchaser shall indicate at the time of enquiry and order that a test certificate
shall be required. The test certificate shall indicate the identification marks of the lot, such as cast number,
heat treatment, batch number, etc, to which they apply in order to identify the material.
When supply is to be made after inspection and
4.2 Supply After Inspection and Testing by the Purchasertesting by the purchaser [see 4.0 (b], unless otherwise agreed to between the supplier and the purchaser,
facilities for inspection and testing as indicated in 4.2.1 shall be afforded by the supplier to the purchaser.
4.2.1 Inspection and testing facilitiesThe purchaser shall have all reasonable facilities for safisfying
himself that the material is being or has been manufactured fully in accordance
with the requirements
of
the material specification
and for this purpose,he shall be furnished with test certificates
giving the results
of tests specified in the material specification
and he shall have free access to the relevant parts of the suppliers works at all reasonable times as agreed to mutually. He shall be at liberty to inspect the manufacture

without interfering in any way with the normal production the material
material which does not conform to the material specification.

at any stage and to reject any

4.2.1.1 If so required by the purchaser, he shall be informed by the supplier when the material relating to
the order is under manufacture.
4.2.1.2 The supplier shall supply, free of charge, the material required for testing and shall, at his own
cost, furnish and prepare the necessary test pieces and supply labour and appliances for such testing as
may be carried out at his premises. If facilities are not available at his own works, the supplier shall bear the
cost of the tests carried out in a laboratory selected by the purchaser.
6. Sampling, Chemical Analysis and Physical Tests
5.1 The material shall be sampled, analyzed and tested in accordance
with the methods specified
in appropriate Indian Standards on sampling, analysis and testing. Where no appropriate standards exist and
the material specification does not specify the methods, sampling, analysis and testing shall be carried out
in accordance with the accepted trade and technological practice and shall be mutually agreed to between
the supplier and the purchaser.
6. Independent Test
6.1 Should there be a dispute about the compliance of the material with the material specification, the supplier and the purchaser each shall have the right to get the material tested by a mutually acceptable independent testing authority unless such disputes are with the terms of any other agreement for reference or submission to arbitration.
6.2 The results obtained by the independent testing authority shall be accepted as final. If the material does
not comply with the material specification, the cost of independent testing shall be borne by the suppiier; if
the material complies with the material specification, the cost shall be borne by the purchaser.
404

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2614-1969

Indian

1
Is1

Standard

METHODS FOR
SAMPLING OF FASTENERS

( First Revision )

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard ( First Revision ) was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 3 October
1969, after the draft finalized by the Bolts, Nuts and Fasteners Sectional Committee had been approved by
the Mechanical Engineering Division Council.
0.2 This standard was originaily issued in 1964. During the process of implementing the standard, certain
difficulties
were encountered. In the present revision, an appendix has been included indicating the
classification of defects for various types of fasteners and also the AQL values for the various defects have
been relaxed on the basis of experience gained in the implementation of the standard. Opportunity has also
been taken to specify the sample sizes for smaller lot sizes and aligning the standard with IS : 1367-1967
Technical supplyconditionsforthreadedfasteners(fifsstrevision).
9.3 The sampling procedures as laid down in the standard are specifically intended for the inspection of a
zonsignment of finished fasteners by the consumers with a view to ascertaining its conformity to the requirements of relevant specification. However, fasteners may also be inspected by the manufacturers durng production with a view to ensuring uniformity and reducing quality fluctuation to the minimum, thereby
>roviding greater quality assurance. For production control, the use of statistical quality control techniques
s recommended and helpful guidance may be obtained in this respect from IS : 397-1952 Methodforsati:ticat quality control during production bytheuse of control chart.
1.4 This standard is a necessary adjunct to the Indian Standard specifications

on fasteners.

I.5 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, exoressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS :
t-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the
ounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
I. Scope
I.1
This standard prescribes the methods of sampling under normal inspection and the criteria for conformiy for fasteners. It also provides for changeover to tightened and reduced inspection.
2. Terminology
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following

definitions

shall apply.

2.1 Lot-All
the fasteners in a consignment belonging to the same size, grade, material, manufactured
Jnder similar processes of production and submitted for inspection at one instance.
!.2 Sample-Collection

of items selected for inspection

from a lot.

,3Sampling-Selection
of a portion of a lot with a view to taking a decision about the quality of the lot on
re basis of results obtained by inspecting the selected portion.
,4 defect-

Failure to meet the requirement

imposed on an item with respect to a single characteristic.

2.4.1 Major Defect-A

defect that could result-in failure or materially
)r its intended purpose.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART 1

reduce the usability

of the product

405

IS : 2614-1969
2.4.2 Minor defect-A
product for its intended
2.4.3 Duds-An
Note-The

2.5 Defective-

incomplete,
classification

given in Appendix

defect other than major defect

purpose.
mutilated

of defects

or foreign

for various

that does not materially

reduce the usability

of the

part.

types

of fasteners

for which

Indian

Standard

has been issued,

is

for acceptance

of

A.

A fastener

2.6 AccepfanceNumber-The
a lot ( denoted by AC ).
2.7 ReiectionNumber-The
(denoted by Re)

which has one or more defects.

maximum

minimum

permissible

number

number of defectives

of defectives

in the samples

in the samples

for the rejection

of the

lot

2.6 Acceptable Quality Level(AQL)A designated value of maximum percent defectives

in a lot that will be
accepted most of the times ( approximately
95 times out of 100 ) by operation
of this sampling
plan.
Note-The
producers

risk (chance)

of rejecting

lots of quality

better than or equal to AQL is 5 percent

which

is known

as the

risk.

Lot Tolerance
Percent Defective(LTPD)render it liable for rejection most of the times
sampling
plan.
2.9

Note-The
as consumers

risk (chance

) of acceptance

The percentage
of defective
fasteners
in a lot that will
90 times out of 100 ) by the operation
of this

( approximately

of lots of quality

worse than or equal to LTPD is 10 percent

which is known

risk.

3. Scale of Sampling

3.1 Fasteners

shall beselected
and examined for each lot separately
for ascertaining
their conformity
to the
requirements
of the relevant specification.
Only one set of samples as indicated in 3.2 shall be drawn from a
lot for all the characteristics
of the product to be inspected.

3.2The number of fasteners to be selected from a lot shall depend upon the size of the lot and shall be in accordance with col 1 to 3 of Table 1 for normal inspection,
and col 1 and 2 of Table 2 for inspection of physical properties.
3.3 All these fasteners
shall be taken at random from the lot. To
49051968 Methods for random sampling.
shall be used.

4. Criteria

ensure

randomness

of selection

IS :

for Conformity

4.1 Visual CharacteristicsAll the fasteners

drawn
under 3.2 shall be first examined
for visual
chracteristics
like type, finish, workmanship,
duds and identification
mark. To ascertain
the conformity
of
the lot to the requireme&
of all visual characterstics
except duds, the procedure given in 4.1.1 shall be
followed and for duds the procedure given in 4.1.2 shall be followed.
4.1.1 Visual CharSCteriStiCS
other
than dudsIf in the first sample the number of defective fasteners
with respect to all visual characteristics
except duds is less than or equal to the corresponding
acceptance
number given in col 5 of Table 1, the lot shall be declared as conforming
to the requirements
for these
characteristics.
If the number of defectives
is greater than or equal to the correspondirrg
rejection number
given in col 6 of Table 1, the lot shall be deemed as not meeting the requirements
for these characteristics.
If the number of defectives
is greater than the acceptance
number but less than the rejection number, a second sample of the same number of fasteners selected as the first sample shall be taken to determine the
conformity
or otherwise
of the lot. The number of defectives
found in the first and second sample shall be
combined and if the combined number of defectives
is less than or equal to the corresponding
acceptance
number, the lot shall be declared as conforming
to the requirements,
otherwise
not.
4.1.2 If the number of defective fasteners with respect to duds is less than or equal to the corresponding
acceptance number given in col 7 of Table 1, the lot shall be declared as conforming
to the requirements
for
duds. If the number of defective fasteners is greater than or equal to the rejection number in co18 of Table 1,
the lot shall be declared as not conforming
to the requirements
for duds. If number of defective fasteners is
greater than the acceptance
number but less than the rejection
number, a second sample of the same

406

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2614-1969
number of fasteners selected as the first sample shall be taken to deternime conformity or otherwise of the
lot. The number of defective fasteners found in the first and second samples shall be combined and if the
combined number of defective fasteners is less than or equal to the corresponding acceptance number, the
lot shall be declared as conforming to the requirements for duds, otherwise not.
4.2 DimensionaICharacteristics.The lot, which has been found satisfactory
in respect of visual
characteristics
( see 4.1 ) shall next be tested for dimensional characteristics
like diameter, length and
pitch. The fasteners for this purpose shall be taken at at random in accordance with co19 and 10 of Table 1,
from those already drawn for inspection of visual characteristics ( see 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 ) and tested for the
dimensional characteristics.
If the number of fasteners failing to satisfy the requirements for these
characteristics is less than or equal to the corresponding acceptance number given in col 12,14,16 or 16 of
Table 1, the lot shall be declared to have met the requirements of the specification in respect of these
characteristics.
If the number of defectives is greater than or equal to the corresponding rejection number
given in col 13, 15,17 or 19 of Table 1, the lot shall be deemed as not conforming to these characteristics. In
case the number of defectives lies in between the acceptance and rejection numbers, a second sample of
the same size shall be taken and inspected for the dimensional characteristics and inference drawn accordingly.
4.3 PhysicalPropertiesIn case proper quality control of the raw material to the satisfaction of the purchaser or the inspecting officer had been maintained by the manufacturers and the quality was found to be
satisfactory as evidenced by suitable certificates accompanying the lot, no test may be required for the
determination of physical properties like hardness and tensile strength. If, however, such a control did not
exist, or if the purchaser so desires, fasteners may be drawn at random in accordance with col 1 and 2 of
Table 2 from those already selected according to 3.2 and tested for physical properties. If the number of
defectives found in the sample is less than or equal to the corresponding acqeptance number in ~013, the lot
shall be deemed as meeting the requirements for physical properties, otherwise not.
4.4 A lot shall be declared as conforming to this specification
and dimensional characteristics
and physical properties.

if it satisfies

the requirements

for the visual

5. Tightened and Reduced Inspection

5.1 In case the quality of the submitted lots varies considerably, it may be desirable to make appropriate
changes in the sampling plan. If the quality of the submitted lots is consistently bad, it may be desirable to
tighten the inspection; on the other hand, if the quality of the submitted lots is consistently good, it may be
desirable to relax the inspection. The following procedure may be helpful in deciding on tightened or reduced inspection:
a)

Shift to tightened inspection if 2 of the last 5 ( or less ) lots under normal inspection were rejected; reinstate normal inspection when three successive lots are accepted under tightened
inspection; and

b)

Shift to reduced inspection if the preceding 10 lots under normal inspection have all been accepted; reinstate normal inspection if on reduced inspection a lot is rejected and if at the same
time the rejected lot is preceded by less than IO lots accepted on reduced inspection.

5.1.1 Tighenedinspection-Inspection
shall be tightened by using a sampling plan as given in Table 3 for
the corresponding lot size and drawing appropriate inference on the same lines as given in 4.1,4.2 and 4.3
for determining the conformity of the lot.
5.1.1.1 Tightening of inspection has been achieved by retaining the same sample size as in the normal inspection but reducing the acceptable quality levels by way of reduction in the acceptance and rejection
numbers wherever possible.
5.1.2 Reduced inspection-Inspection
shall be relaxed by using a sampling plan as given in Table 4 for
the corresponding lot size and drawing appropriate inference as before
5.1.2.1 Relaxation of inspection has been achieved by reducing the sample size as recommended for
normal inspection and retainingapproximatelythesameacceptablequalitylevelsasfaras
possible.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

407

IS :2614-1969

TABLE 1 SCALE OF SAMPLING

AND CRITERIA
(Clauses

Lot Size
Sample

Visual Characteristics
ISample
CumuAC
Size

FOR CONFORMITY

FOR NORMAL

3.2, 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.2)

Duds

Dimenslonal

Characteristics

:
f+e

AC

Re

Sample

lative

Sample

Cumu-

Size

lative
Sample
Size

Sample
Size

Black Fasteners
yeyrctt
AC

6.5

AQL

(1)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

First
Second

20
20

20
40

2
6

5
7

0
1

2
2

First
Second

32
32

32
64

:
;

0
1

500

First
Second

50
50

50
100

5
12

9
13

50119 1000

First
Second

86
80

80
160

7
16

1001~~ 3000

First
Second

125
125

125
250

3001~~10000

First
Second

200
200

0001 G5000

First
Second

Over 35000

First
Second

up

to

100

lOl)I 300

301

Note-For

AC

First
Second

8
8

6
16

02030202
1
2
3

2
2

First
Second

13
13

13
26

0
3

3
4

0
3

3
4

First
Second

20
20

20
40

1
4

4
5

11
19

1
4

4
5

First
Second

32
32

::

5371425
;7894567

ll
26

16
27

2
6

5
7

First
Second

::

50
100

3
6

7
9

200
400

11
26

16
27

3
8

7
9

Second
Second

80.
80

80
160

5
12

315
315

315
630

11
26

16
27

5
12

9
13

First
Second

125
125

125
250

500
500

ll

16

1000

7
18

11
lg

First
Second

200
200

200
400

500

most of the sampling

26 27

AC

Minor
defect

Re

Ac

2.5

6.5

(11)

Precision or
Semi-Precision
Fasteners
Major
defect

Re

(10)

( Clauses

(12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19:

I 1

4
5

0
1

2
2

0
3

3
4

2
6

5
7

0
3

3
4

1
4

4
5

5
12

9
13

2
6

5
7

3
8

7
9

9
13

7
18

11
19

3
8

7
9

5
12

9
13

7
18

11
19

ll
26

16
27

5
12

9
13

7
18

11
19

11
26

16
27

11
26

16
27

7
18

11
19

11
26

16
27

AND CONFORMITY
PROPERTIES

3.2 and 4.3 1

Lot Size

Sample Size

(1)

(2)

(3)

up to 1 000
1 OOl,, 3 000
3 001 ,,lO 000
1000135000
Over 35 000

5
6
13
20
32

0
0
0
0
1

HANDBOOK

Acceptance

ON

Re
4.0

plans given in this table the LTPD values are less than 20 percent.

TABLE 2 SCALE OF SAMPLING

CRITERIA FOR PHYSICAL

408

Re

Minor
defect

4.0

1.0

(3)

(2)

INSPECTION

Number

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :2614-1969

TABLE 3 SCALE OF SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY FOR TIGHTENED INSPECTION
(Clause 51.1)
Lot Size

Visual Characteristics
Dimensional Characteristics
Duds
r~
Sample Sample Cumula- AC Re AC Re Sample Sample Cumula- Black Fasteners
t ive
Size
tive
Size
Major
Minor
Sample
trtnIte
defect
defect
Size
AC Re AC Re
AQL

(1)

4.0

0.65

(2)

(3)

14)

(5) ,(6) :7)

First
Second

9:

20
40

lOl,, 3 00

First
Second

32
32

32
64

301,, 5 00

First
Second

50
50

50
100

501,, 1000

First
Second

::

80
160

lool,,

3 000

First
Second

125
125

3001 ,,l 0000

First
Second

up to 100

4
5

(8)

(9)

2.5

(10)

(11)

Precision or
Semi.Preclsion
Fasteners
Major
defect

Minor
defect

AC Re

AC ffc

1.5

2.5

4.0

(12) (13) (14) (15) .(16) (17) (18),(19

0
1

2 First
2 Second

8
8

8
16

02020202
1 2
1

5
7

0
1

2 First
2 Second

13
13

13
26

0
1

3
4

0
1

2
2

0
1

2
2

0
1

2 First
2 Second

20
20

20
40

3140203
:4451234

5
12

9
13

0
3

3 First
4 Second

32
32

32
64

1
4

4
5

2
6

5
7

0
3

3
4

1
4

4
5

125
250

7
18

11
19

1
4

4 First
5 Second

z:

50
100

2
6

5
7

3
8

7
9

1
4

4
5

2
6

5
7

200
200

200
400

11
26

16
27

2
6

5 Second
7 Second

80.
80

80
100

7
9

592537
12 13

First
Second

315
315

315
630

!l
26

16
27

3
8

7 First
9 Second

125
125

125
250

5
12

9
13

7 ,ll
18 19

3
8

7
9

5
12

9
13

First
Second

500
500

500
1000

11
26

16
27

5
12

9 First
13 Second

200
200

200
400

7
18

11
19

11
26

5
12

9
13

7
18

11
19

2
2

0
3

10001,,35 000
Over 35 000

Note-Formostof

HANDBOOK

thesamplingplansgiven

ON INDUSTRIAL

16
27

inthistable,theLTPDvaluesarelessthan20percent.

FASTENERS-PART

409

:2614-1969

?
I
IT

TABLE 4 SCALE OF SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY FOR REDUCED INSPECTION
( Clause 51.2 )

Lot Size

Sample

Sample
Size

Cumulative
Sample
Size

AQL

(1)
up to 100

lOl,, 3 00

301,, 5 00

T Duds T

Visual Characteristics

AC Rf

6.5

lOOl,, 3 000

3001 ,,I 0000

10001,,3500c

Over 35 000

Note-For

410

Re Sample

(5)

(6) :7)

(4)

First

13
13

::

1
4

4
5

0
1

2
2

I8

20
40

2
6

5
7

0
1

First

4.0

4C

I Re

AC

Minor
defect

1Re
4.0

2.5

6.5

14)

15)

161

17)

181 191

First
Second

5
10

0
1

2
2

0
1

2
2

2
2

First
Second

6
16

0
1

2
2

3
4

0
1

2
2

0
1

2
2

0
1

First
Second

13
26

0
3

3
4

1
4

0
1

2
2

0
3

3
4

20
40

1
4

4
5

2
6

5
7

0
3

3
4

1
4

2
6

75

3:

1
4

4
5

2
6

5
7

50
100

5
7

First
Second

60
160

5
12

11
193 187 19

5
97 12

9
I3

First

125
250

1;

11
19

11
26

:67

5
12

9
13

7
18

11
I9

50
100

5
I2

9
13

0
3

3
4

First
Second

First
Second

80
80

60
160

7
8

11
19

1
4

First
Second

First
Second

125
125

125
250

I1
!6

:;

5
7

First

200
200

200
400

I1
!6

:;

315
315

315
630

I1
!6

:;

5
I2

9
13

given

Major
defect

Minor
defect

13:

50
50.

plans

Major
defect

(11)

First
Second

most of the sampling

Black Fasteners

Acl

II81 (9)

(3)

First
Second

Zumula
tive
Sample
Size

1.0

(2)

First
Second

Sample
Size

- t -

Second
501,, 1 000

AC

Precision or
Seml.Preclslon
Fasteners

Dimensional Characterlstlca

in this

table,

Second

the LTPD values

are less than

HANDBOOK

125 1:

97

20 percent.

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2614-1969

APPENDIX
( Clause

2.4.3 )

CLASSIFICATION OF DEFECTS
SI
No.

Major Defects

Typeof Fasteners

Minor Defects

1.

Coach screws with gimlet points

( is : 1120-1957 )

Width across flats

Shank diameter,
height
length, thread length

2.

Hexagon socket head cap screws

( IS : 2269-1967 )

Width across flats, thread pitch

diameter, thread major diameter

Thread length, screw length, shank

diameter, height of head, end of
screws, concentricity, fillet radius,
depth of socket, perpendicularity of
head to shank

3.

Grub screws ( socket head )

(IS : 2368-1963 )

do

do

4.

Precision and semi-precision

hexagon bolts and screws (IS :
1364-l 967 )

Thread major diameter, thread

pitch diameter oversize, width
across flats

Thread pitch diameter

undersize,
thread length, bolt length, shank
diameter, height of head, neck
diameter, end of screw perpendicularity of head to shank

5.

Hexagon bolts and screws

( IS : 2389-1968 )

do

do

6.

Hexagon bolts
( IS : 3138-1966 )

do

do

7.

Black hexagon bolts

( IS : 1363-1967 )

do

do

8.

Black square bolts

( IS : 2585-1968 )

do

do

9.

Coach bolts
( IS : 2609-1964 )

Thread major diameter, thread

pitch diameter oversize, width
of square neck

Thread pitch diameter

undersize,
thread length, bolt length, shank
diameter, diameter of square neck,
height of head, head diameter, end
of screw, perpendicularity of head
to shank

10.

Slotted countersunk
machine screws
( IS : 13651968 )

Thread major diameter,

pitch diameter oversize

thread

Head diameter, slot width, slot depth,

screw length, thread length, thread
pitch diameter undersize, end of
screw, perpendicularity
of head
to shank

11.

Slotted cheese head screws

( IS : 1366-1968 )

Thread major diameter,

pitch diameter oversize

thread

Head diameter, slot width, slot depth,

screw length, thread length, thread
pitch diameter undersize, end of
screw, perpendicularity
of head
to shank.

12.

Grub screws ( slotted head )

( IS : 2388-1963 )

HANDBOOK

head

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

do

of

head,

do

411

IS : 2614-1969

13.

Knurled thumb screws

( IS : 3726-1966 )

Head diameter,
slot width, slot
depth, screw length, thread length,

Thread major diameter, thread

pitch diameter oversize

thread pitch diameter undersize,

head thickness, knuriing pitch, end
of screw, perpendicularity of head
to shank

Head diameter,
head thickness,
thread pitch diameter undersize.

do

14.

Wing screws
( IS : 3737-1966 )

15

Plain washers
( IS : 2016-1967 )

16.

Spring washers for bolts,

nuts and screws
( IS : 3063-1965 )

do

Inside diameter,
bend

17.

Wood screws
( IS : 6760-1972,
IS : 6736-1972 and
IS : 6739-1972 )

do

Head height, head diameter,

width, slot depth, length

16.

Precision and semi-preclslon

hexagon nuts
( IS : 1364-1967 )

19.

Slotted and castle nuts

( IS : 2232-1967 )

do

Thickness, width of slot, slot head

diameter, thread pitch diameter
oversize, thread minor diameter
oversize

20.

Hexagon nuts and lock nuts

( IS : 2369-1966 )

do

Thread pitch diameter

over-size,
thread minor diameter oversize,
thickness

21.

Cap nuts and doomed cap

nuts ( IS : 2687-1984 )

do

Depth,
thickness,
thread
dlameter oversize, thread
diameter oversize

22.

Hexagon nuts
( IS : 3138-1966 I

Width across fiats, thread pitch

diameter
undersize,
thread
minor dlameter undersize

Thread pitch diameter

thread minor diameter
thickness

23.

Knurled nuts
( IS : 3460-1966 )

Thread pitch diameter undersize,

thread minor diameter undersize

Knurled diameter,
knuriing
pitch,
thickness, thread pitch diameter
oversize, thread minor diameter
oversize

24.

Pipe nuts
( IS : 3468-1966 )

Width across flats, thread pitch

diameter
undersize,
thread
minor diameter undersize

Thread pitch diameter

thread minor diameter
thickness

25.

Black hexagon nuts

( IS : 1363-1967 )

do

28.

Black square nuts

( IS : 2585-1968 )

27.

Wing nuts
( IS : 2638-1964 )

Thread pitch diameter

28.

Rivets for general purposes

( IS : 21551962 )

Shank
diameter,
eccentricity
and IncHnation of head

29.

Non-ferrous rivets
(IS : 2907-1964)

412

Outside diameter thickness

Diameter of hole

Width across fiats, thread pitch

thread
minor
undersize,
dlameter undersize

thickness,

Thread pitch diameter

thread minor diameter
thickness

width,

slot

oversize,
undersize,

pitch
minor

oversize,
oversize,

oversize,
oversize,

do

undersize

Ail other dimensional

characteristics

Head diameter, head height,

radius, length, fillet

head

do

do

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2614-1969

Shankdiameter,eccentricityand
inclination of head

Headdiameter_, head height,

head radius, length,fiHet

30.

Cold forged steel rivets for

cold closing
( IS : 29961965 )

31.

Tinmens rivets
( IS : 666-1957 )

do

do

32.

Rivets for general purposes

(IS: 1929-1961 )

do

do

33.

Split cotter pins

( IS : 549-1961 )

Shank dlameter

34.

Studs
( IS : 1662-1967 )

Thread major diameter,

pitch diameter oversize

35.

Cylindrical and taper pins

( IS : 2393-1963 )

Dlameter

do

36

Flat split totters

( IS : 2636-1964 )

Wldth and thickness

do

37.

Threaded taper pins

( IS : 3524-1966 )

Thread major diameter,

pitch dlameter oversize

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Outside eye diameter, length and

other dimensional characteristics
thread

thread

All other dimensional

characteristics

Thread pitch dlameter undersize

413

IS : 6821-l

973

Indian

Standard

METHODS FOR
SAMPLING NON-THREADED FASTENERS

1. Scope-Prescribes
methods of sampling
under normal inspection
and criteria for conformity
for nonthreaded
fasteners,
such as pins totters,
nails and washers.
It also provides for changeover
to tightened and reduced inspection.
The classification
of defects in the categories
of major and minor defect
for various
types of fasteners
for which Indian Standards
have been issued, is given in Appendix
A.
2. Terminology-For
the purpose of this standard. rhe definitions
given in IS:2500 ( Part 1 )-I963 Sampling
spection tables: Part 1 Inspection
by attributes
and by count of defects, shall be applicable
in addition
those given below.
2.1 Lof-All
the fasteners
in a consignment
belonging
to the same size, grader
under similar processes of production
and submitted
for inspection
at one time.
2.2 Sampling-Selection
of a portion of a lot with a view to taking
the basis of resulls oblained
by inspecting
the selected portion.
2.3 Duds-An

incomplete,

2.4 Defecfive-A

fastener

mutilated
which

or foreign

a decision

material,

in-

to

manufactured

about the quality

of the lot on

part.

has one or more defects.

3. Scale of Sampling
3.1 Fasteners
requirements

shall be selected and examined

of the relevant specification.

for each lot separately

for ascertaining

3.2 The number of fasteners to be selected from a lot shall depend

drawing samples and conducting
tests shall be as follows:
Sequence
a)

Conducting
i)

to the

upon the size of the lot. Sequence

of Sampling

Drawing of samples
for visual characlerislics
in accordance
with col 2,
3 and 4 of Tables 2, 3 or 4.

their conformity

of Test

Tests for visual

characteristics
thanduds
in accordance
with

other
col 5

and 6 of Tables 2,3 or 4 and clause

ii)

of

4.1.

Testsfordudsinaccordancewithcol7
and8ofTables2,3orandclause4.1

b)

Drawing
of samples
for dimensional
characteristics
in accordance
with col
9, IO and 11 of Tables 2, 3 or 4.

Tests for dimensional

characteristics
in
accordance
with col 12, 13, 14 and 15
of Tables 2, 3 or 4 and clause 4.1.

c)

Drawing of samples for determining

physical properties in accordance
withcol2ofTablel.

Testsfordeterminingphysical
inaccordancewithcol3ofTablel
clause4.2.

properties
and

3.3 Tl-,e required number of fasterners

for dimensional
characteristics
shall be chosen at random from the
fasteners already drawn at the first stage for visual inspection.
The required number of fasteners for determining physical properties shall be chosen at random from the fasteners already drawn at the first stage for
dimensional
LesLing.
Note-Care
shall be taken not to include wsually defective fasteners
sionallydefective
fasteners for tests todetermine
the physical properties.

3.4 All these fasleners

shall be Laker1 al random from ihe
lS:4905-1968 Methods for random sampling,shall
be used.

414

to carry out dimensional

101. To ensure

HANDBOOK

ON

tests

randomness

INDUSTRIAL

and dimen.

of selection

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6821-l

973

4. Criteria for Conformity

4.1 For Visual Characteristics,

Duds and Dimensional

Characteristics:

Inspect First Sample

If this dontains

1
I

Between corresponding
number of ( AC and Re)
defectives

Less than or equal to

corresponding number
of defectives (AC)

Inspect Se+nd

Greater than or equal to

corresponding number
of def :tives ( Re )

Sample

If the first and Second sample contains

Less than or equal to

corresponding number
of defectives ( AC )
c
ficcept the lot

Rejec the lot

4.2 for Physical Properties-In

case proper quality control of the raw material to the satisfaction the purchaser or the inspecting officer had been maintained by the manufacturers and the quality was found to be satisfactory as evidenced by
suitable certificates accompanying the lot, no test may be required for the determination of physical properties like hardness and tensile strength. If, however, such a control did not exist, or it the purchaser so desires, fasteners may be drawn
at random in accordance with col 1 and 2 of Table 1 from those already selected according to 3.2 and tested for physical
properties. If the number of defecttves found in the sample is less than or equal to the corresponding acceptance number
in col 3, the lot shall be deemed as meeting the requirements for physical properties, otherwise not.

TABLE 1 SCALE OF SAMPLING AND CONFORMITY CRITERIA FOR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

( Clauses 3.2 and 4.2 )
Acceptance Number

Lot Size

Sample Sire

(1)

(2)

(3)

5
8
13
20
32

0
0
0
0
1

up to 1 000
1 001 ,, 3 000
3 001 ,, 10 000
10 001 ,, 35 000
Over 35 000

4.3 A lot shall be declared as conforming

to this specification
if it satisfies
the visual and dimensional characteristics
and physical properties.

the requirements

for the duds,

5. Tightened and Reduced inspection

5.1 In case the quality of the submitted lots varies considerably, it may be desirable to make appropriate
changes in the sampling plan. If the quality of the submitted lots is consistently bad, it may be desirable to
tighten the inspection; on the other hand, if the quality of the submitted lots is consistently good, it may be
desirable to relax the inspection.The following procedure may be helpful in deciding on tightened or reduced
inspection:
a) Shift to tightened inspection if 2 of the last 5 (or less ) lots under normal inspection were rejected;
reinstate normal inspection when three successive lots are accepted under tightened inspection;
and
b) Shift to reduced inspection if the preceding 10 lots under normal inspection have all been accepted; reinstate normal inspection if on reduced inspection a lot is rejected and if at the same
time the rejected lot is preceded by less than 10 lots accepted on reduced inspection.
5.1.1 Tightened inspection-Inspection
shall be tightened by using a sampling plan as given in Table 3
for the corresponding lot size and drawing appropriate inference on the same lines as given in 4.1
for determining the conformity of the lot.
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

415

TABLE

2 SCALE

OF SAMPLING

AND

CRITERIA

FOR

( C/ause

Lot

Visual

Size

CSample

Characteristics
Ses~~le

Ac

(2)

(4)

(5)

up to
101 to
301 to
501 to
loolto

100

300
500
1000
3000

0
z

(3)

INSPECTION

Characteristics
A

Sample

Sample
Size

Cumulative
Sample
size

Major

(7)

(8)

Ac

First
Second

First
Second

0
3

3
4

80
160

125
125

125
250

First
Second

32
32

32
64

First
Second

50
50

50
100

First
Second

80
80

First
Second

5
7

11)

(lo)

2
2

20
20

Rel

(12)

(13)

2
2

1:

13
13

13
26

3
4

First
Second

20
20

20
40

4
5

First
Second

32
32

2
6

5
7

First
Second

50

3
8

7
9

First
Second

80
80

1
2

50
100

50

to 10000

First
Second

200
200

200
400

10001

to 35000

First
Second

315
315

315
630

1:

9
13

First
Second

125
125

125
250

Ii

11
19

First
Second

500
500

500
1000

7
18

11
19

First
Second

200
200

200
400

;;

35000

Note For most of the sampling

Indicates

the

Acceptable

Quality

plans giveh
Level

in this table, the lot tolerance

(AQL)

for

the

sampling

percent

defective

values

are

less

than

20

AC

percent.

plan.

2
n
+

Defect i
A

3001

Over

Minor

(4.0*)
(9)

8
8

First
Second

Defect
A

(1.0)
(6)

2
6

NORMAL

Dimensional

Re>

(6,5*)

(1)

FOR

3.2 )

Duds

Other than
Duds

Cumulative
Sample
Size

CONFORhrllTY

Re )

..
U)

61
11

81
L

(cl)

(Vi)

(~1)

z
z

z
z

9
z

L
s

Z1
s

&l
6

81
L

61
11

9Z
L1

LZ
91

&1
6
6
L

21
5
8
E

(Zl)

Oob
Ooz

Ooz

Ooz

O3Z
Sz 1

puooas
lSJI+

puooas
lSJlj

puooas
is~!j

091
08

001
0s

puo3aS
]SJ14

LZ
91
LZ
91
Lz
91
61
~1

9Z
lL
9Z
11
9Z
11
81

V
1

9
z

L
s

puo3aS
WJlj

8
&

puo~as
JSJ!j

Z1
s

&l
6

puo~as
]SJ!~

puooas
lSJ!q

91
8

9Z
El

(11)

(6)

(9)

(+!2Z)
Jou 1W

,-.

. .

0001
005
0s9
sitz
Ooti
Ooz

Ooii
003
$ils
~1:

000

JaAO

puo3aS
lSJ1+

Ooz
Ooz

Osiz

000s7s01 1000L
Ocdol

01 100C

puo3aS

SZ 1

]SJIj

091
08

001

ooo&
0001

Ollodl
Q lo!i

puo3aS

z&
z&
Oz
Oz

t79
z&

oEi

(&)

(3)

USJ!j

01 Lot

oo&

01 ~o&

005

puo3aS
lSJl~

01 dfl

001

(z)

(1)

(*ob)
azls
apdwes

loa}aa-

afmemwm
.-

azt$
aldwe~
.-

azrs
aldwes

afdhes

aAqe{num~

az!s
aldwes

aldwes

~
ueqa Jaqlo

NOllC13dSNl

...

..-

C13N31HSllL

lJ~4 A11WU04NO0

HO+ ~k1311U3

.,

------

QNV

!lNlldWVS

40

31V3S

k 318V1
,,,

..

*
+
m

TABLE

4 SCALE

OF SAMPLING

AND

CRITERIA

Visual

Characteristics

Other

C(3NFORMITY

FOR REDUCED

INSPECTION

3.2 and 5.1 .2)

(&ause

Lot Size

FOR

Duds

then

Dimensional

A
~Sample

Sample
Size

Cumulative
Sample
Size

(6.5*)

(1)

(2)

101

to

301 to
z
D

501

to

loolto

3001
10001

:
OY
+
n
F
r-

(6)

(7)

(8)

(lo)

(9)
First
Second

300

First
Second

20
20

First
Second

500

First
Second

1000

3000
toloooo

Over 35000

*indicates

. ..

the

(11)

Defect

Ac

(12)

0
1

First
Second

13
13,26

Re

First

20
20

13.

(13)

(15)
2
2

2
2

0
3

1
4

4
5

1;

1:

1:

11
19

;;

;;

80
160

Second

32
32

32
64

Second

125
125

125
250

First
Second

50
50

50
100

First
Second

First

;:

400

;:

80
80

80
160

12

1;

First
Second

315
315

315
630

;:

;;

125
125

125
250

1:

19

First-

Second
First

1;

1:

Acceptable

Quality

Level

(AQL)

for

the

sampling

plan.

+-

are

less

than

20

~ercent.

2
6

Re

o
1

First
Second

3
8

Ac

0
3

Defect

(14)

Second

200

Minor

(6.5*)

50
100

Note For most of the sampling plans given in this table, the lot tolerahce Percent defective values

%
Major

First
Second

First

to 35000

Cumulative
Samde
Size

(4.0)

13
13

(5)

Sample
Size

(1.0)

First
Second

5
~
g

(3)

~samp,e

100

up to

Characteristics
A

5
7

11

IS : 6821-1973
5.1.1.1 Tightening of inspection has been achieved by retaining the same sample size as in the normal
inspection but reducing the acceptable quality levels by way of reduction in the acceptance and rejection
numbers wherever possible.
5.1.2 Reduced inspection-Inspection
shall be relaxed by using a sampling plan as given in Table 4 for
the corresponding lot size and drawing appropriate inference as before.
5.1.2.1 Relaxation of inspection has been achieved by reducing the sample size as recommended for
normal inspection and retaining approximately the same acceptable quality levels as far as possible.
APPENDIX

CLASSIFICATION OF MAJOR AND MINOR DEFECTS FOR

NON-THREADED FASTENERS
( Clause 1 )
SI

Type

of Fasteners

Major

Defects

Minor

Defects

No.
Washers

( IS : 2016-1987 )

Inside diameter

1.

Plain washers

2.

Plain washers ( outside dia = Bxinside

dia )
( IS : 5370-1969 )
Heavy washers for steel structures
( IS : 6610-1972 )
Taper washers for channels ( ISMS )
( IS : 5372-1969 )
Taper washers
1beams ( ISMB )
( IS : 5374-1969 )
Square washers for wood fastenings
( IS : 5573-1969 )
Spring washers for bolts, nuts and screws

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

do
do
do
do

do

Outside diameter,
thickness,
width, bent
do
do
do
Outside diameter,
thickness
width, bent

do
do
do
Inside diameter

Spring washers for screws with cylindrical

Double coil helical spring washers
Multi-tooth
dock washer ( IS : 5371-1969 )
Lock washers with lug ( IS : 5554-1970 )

12.

Fan disc washers

13.

Pins
Cylindrical

14.
15.
16.
17.

Taper pins
Hardened cylindrical
pins
Clevis pins
Clevis pins with head

Diameter at small end

Diameter
do
do

18.

Cotter9
Flat split totters

Width and thickness

19.

Split cotter

20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.

pins

pins

do

( IS :2393-1973 )

Diameter

( IS : 2638-1964)
( IS : 549-1961 )

Nails
Steel countersunk
head wire nails
( IS : 723-1972 )
Double point nails
Cut lath and lath nails
Felt nails
Wall and roofing nails
Panel pins and lost head nails
Copper wire nails ( IS :725-1961 )
Worm drive hose clips for general engineering
purposes ( IS : 4762-1968 )

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Shank

diameter

Shank

diameter
do
do
do
do
do
do
do

All other dimensional

characteristics
do
do

8.
9.
10.
11.

( IS : 5556-1973 )

do

do

( IS : 3063-1965 )
head

Outside diameter
thickness
do

do

All other dimensional

characteristics
do
do
do
do

All other dimensional

characteristics
Outside eye diameter,
length and other
dimensional
characteristics
All other dimensional
characteristics
do
do
do
do
do
do
do

419

IS : 6821-1973

EXPLANATORY

NOT6

Double sampling
plan for visual and dimensional characteristics
and single sampling plan for determining physical properties has been prescribed for non-threaded fasteners. The sampling and inspection
relating to threaded fasteners is covered in IS : 2614-1969 Method tor sampling of fasteners (first revision).

420

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8474-1977

Indian

Standard

PROCEDURE FOR INSPECTION

AND TESTING OF ALUMINIUM AND
ALLUMINIUM ALLOY WIRES ( FOR RIVETS )
FOR AIRCRAFT PURPOSES

0.1This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 23 May 1977, after the draft
finalized by the Light Metals and Their Alloys Sectional Committee had been approved by the Structural and
Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard has been prepared to cover inspection and testing requirements
and aluminium alloy wires for manufacture of rivets used for aircraft purposes.

for wrought aluminium

Cl.3In the formulation of this standard, due weightage has also been given to international co-ordination
among standards and practices prevailing in different countries in addition to the practices followed in this
field in the country. This has been met by deriving assistance from the following overseas specifications:
BS 3L 100

Procedure for inspection and testing of wrought aluminium

British Standards Institution.

MIC-W-7988

Wire and rod, aluminium

Specification.

AMTY 498

Aluminium
USSR.

and aluminium

alloy,

and aluminium

for die heading,

alloys.

U.S. Federal

alloy wires for cold drawing. State Committee of Aviation Technology of

0.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement o! this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be round off in accordance
The number of significant places retained in the
with IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding of numerical values.
rounded off value should be the same as that of specified value in this standard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers procedures for inspection and testing of aluminium
used for manufacture of rivets for aircraft purposes.

and aluminimum

alloy wires

2. Terminology
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following
2.1 ApprovedScrap-

definitions

shall apply.

Scrap which is:

a) derived form material the composition of which has been established with regard to the complete
range of both the alloying elements and impurity elements appropriate to the class of alloy being
made, and
b) segregated and identifiable to the satisfaction of the Inspecting Authority.
22 Certification-Confirmatton
by the manufacturer or supplier that the material
quirements of the relevant specification, drawing, order or Inspection Schedule.
2.3 Harmful
material.

HANDBOOK

ON

Defect-

Any defect prejudicial

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

to the subsequent

manufacture,

conforms

fabrication

to the re-

or use of the

421

IS : 8474-1977
2.4 /nspectingAuthority-The
tification.

body responsible

2.5 /nspectionSchedu/e-A
the purchaser.
2.6/nspector-The
2.7 Wire-Solid
mm.

schedule

individual
circular

of any special

responsible

section

for authorizing

the manufacturer

test requirements

for the executive,

that has been reduced

agreed

inspection

or supplier

to between

and release

by cold drawing

to issue cer-

the supplier

and

of material.

to a diameter

up to and including

3. Condition

3.1 The material shall be delivered in the condition required by the material specification
agreed to between the manufacturer
and purchaser and stated in the order.

unless otherwise

4. Certification

4.1 The manufacturer

governed

by this Indian

shall supply to the purchaser the necessary certification

Standard and relevant material specification.

4.2 Except as provided in 4.3 if any certification

is issued by a supplier
plier shall hc d the equivalent
certification
issued by the manufacturer

in respect

of all material

other than manufacturer,

of the material.

such sup-

4.3 If a batch of material consigned

by the manufacturer
is subdivided
by an approved non-manufacturer
before re-consignement,
the non-manufacturer
shall carry out any consequent
additional
dimensional
inspection and identification
marking and shall certify accordingly.
5. Manufacture

5.1 Material

shall

be made in accordance

with the requirements

of this Indian

Standard

and the material

specification.
5.2 Wires drawn

from each melt shall

5.3 Cold working/drawing

treatment.

shall

be made intc coils

be so adjusted

and identified

serially

as not to lead to grain

from first to the last.

coarsening

on subsequent

heat-

6. Freedom from Defects

6.1 The material

blisters,

cracks,

shall be free from harmful defects, such as deep die marks, scratches,
dents, transverse
surfacing cracking, coarse grained structure, etc.

6.2 Any material

and mechanical

may be rejected for faults

property requirements.

in manufacture

although

they conform

SC <res, exfoliation,

to chemical

composition

7. Dimensional Tolerances

7.1 The tolerances

Nominal

on the diameter
Diameter

of wire, used for manufacturing

of Wire

Tolerances

mm
From 1.40 up to and including
Over 5.00 up to and including

rivets,

5.00
9.00

shall

be as follows:

on Wire Diameter
mm
+_ 0.025
? 0.035

6. Chemical Composition

6.1 The chemical composition

of the material shall comply with the requirements
of the material specification. The values stipulated
in the specification
shall be applied in accordance
with the instructions
of the Inspecting Authority.
Elements not quoted in the specification
shall not be added for any purpose other than
fluxing, degassing, grain refinement
and the like.
6.2 Overall control of the chemical composition
and the regulation
method of analytical
control adopted for each particular
material
pliance with the requirements
of 6.1.

422

of the use of scrap shall be such that the

shall enable the inspector to certify com-

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8474-1977

g. Selection of Mechanical Test Samples

9.1 Coils of wires of the same nominal
heat-treatment
charge shall be grouped

diameter, from the same cast and, if heat-treated,

in batches, not exceeding
1 000 kg.

from the same

9.2 The Inspector shall select one sample for each test required by the material specification,
from one end
of the first, last and an intermediate
coil of each batch. When this procedure is not possible, the sample
shall be selected from at least IO percent of the coils and in any case not less than 2 coils in each batch.
IO. Preparationof

MechanicalTest

Specimens

10.1 Test specimens are used unmachined

in accordance
with IS : 1816-1961 l the percentage elongation
is
not to be determined,
the length of test specimen is not important
provided there is a length of at least 10
cm between the grips of the testing machine and failure does not occur at the grips. Test results obtained
when the failure occurs at the grips shall be discarded.
10.2 Test samples selected in accordance
with 9 shall not be subjected
for straightening
after having been separated from the batch material.
10.3 If appropriate,
the test samples
specification
before being tested.
11.

Mechanical Test

shall

be subjected

to any mechanical

to heat-treatment

working,

in accordance

with

except

material

11.1 Torsion Test-Test

specimens
prepared in accordance
with the requirements
of 10 from test samples
selected in accordance
with 9 shall satisfy the tensile test requirements
of the material specification,
when
tested in accordance
with IS : 1816-1961 Methodfortensiletest
forlight metalsandtheiralloys.
11.2 Tensile Test-The
selected in accordance
tested as follows:

specimens
prepared
with 9 shall satisfy

in accordance
with the requirements
of 10 from test samples
the torsion test requirements
of material specification,
when

A length of wire shall be gripped in two jaws 150 mm apart, one of which shall be free to rotate; the
other end shall not rotate but may be free to move longitudinally
during the test. The free end shall be
turned 6 times through 360 and then shall be turned the same number of turns, through 360 in the opposite direction.
No defect deterimental
to cold forging shall be visible in the wire after the test.
11.3 Retest
11.3.1 If any test specimen fails to satisfy the mechanical
test requirements,
one or both of the following
procedures
as requested by the manufacturer:

the inspector

a) Select for test from the same batch two further samples one of which shall
originally
selected and from a position adjacent to that occupied by the original
that wire has been withdrawn
by the manufacturer.
Test specimens
prepared
further samples shall satisfy the relevant test requirements.
b) If appropriate,
allow the batch to be re-heat-treated
and retested in accordance
with the requirements

in accordance
of 9 and 10.

shall

adopt

be from the wire

sample , unless
from both these

with the material

specification

11.3.2 First and last coils #of a batch -,lf any of the retest specimens from first or last coil in a batch fails
to satisfy the requirements
of the material specification,
the particular coils shall be rejected and retest carried out (on the subsequent coil in the case of failure from first coil and previous coil in the cases of last coil).
If both retest specimens from thecoil fails, theentire
batch shall be rejected.
11.3.3 Retest specimens
from intermediate
coil-If
both
quirements
of the material specification,
the entire batch shall

retest specimens
be rejected.

fail

to satisfy

the

re-

12. Upsetting Test

12.1 Samples

for upsetting

12.2 Upsetting

test shall

* The particular

HANDBOOK

ON

test

test shall
be carried

( s ) stipulated

INDUSTRIAL

be selected

and prepared

out in the following

in the material

FASTENERS-PART

with 9 and 10.

conditions:

specifications

in accordance

only need be carried

out.

423

Is : 84744977
a) In as supplied

condition,

and

b) After solution
heat treatable

treatment
alloys.

within

12.3 The upsetting

test shall

Diameter of the Wire

Over
Over
Over
Over

1.4
3.0
6.0
8.0

be carried

a sp cified

time

limit

as given

out under press in a riveting

in the material

fixture

with the following

mm
to 3.0 (including)
,, 6.0 (including)
,, 8.0 (including)
,, 9 (including)

for

set up:

Permissible
Gap Bet ween
the Specimen
and the Hole

Height of the
Projecting
Portion of
Test Specimen

Length of the
TeSt Specimen
Held in the
Fixture

specification

As given in
the material
specification

0.10
0.15
0.15

12.3.1 Upsetting shall be done under a press till a flat head of height not more than half the diameter of
the wire is obtained. The formed head should have circular or slightly oval shape, concentric with the shank.
The sides shall be smoth and free from cracks. If the cracks appear on the formed head before the height is
compressed
to half the diameter of the wire, the piece shall be discarded and the test repeated.
12.4 If the upsetting test fails*, it shall be repeated on two further test specimens from the same end of the
coils from which original samples were seleced. If any of the retest fails the coil represented
by it shall be
rejected and upsetting test carried out on all the remaining coils of the batch.
13. Identification
13.1 Wires in straight lengths, of the same diameter from the same cast and if appropriate,
heat-treatment
batch, passed by the Inspector shall have attached a durable label bearing
Inspector and such other markings as shall ensure full identification
of the material.
13.2 Each coil marked by the Inspector shall have attached
and such other markings as shall ensure full identification
13.3 Each bundle and each coil of wire shall be colour
to the satisfaction
of the Inspecting Authority.

If the failure is suspected

out on a fresh specimen.
424

to be due to any defect

a durable label bearing

of the material.

coded in accordance

in testing

method,

HANDBOOK

specimen

ON

from the same

the mark of the

the mark of the Inspector

with the material

shall be discrded

INDUSTRIAL

specification,

and testing

FASTENERS-PART

carried

IS : 9141-1979

( Indian Standard

CODE OF PRACTICE FOR

PACKAGING OF FASTENERS

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards
Institution
on 30 March 1979, after the draft
finalized by the Packaging of Engineering
Goods Sectional Committee
had been approved by the Marine,
Cargo Movement and Packaging
Division Council.
0.2 The packaging
function has to fulfil a variety of objectives
including
against transport,
handling and storage hazards. Fasteners,
particularly,
screws and studs, have some special features which must be protected
ultimate destination.

the protection
of the contents
threaded ones, like bolts, nuts,
to keep them fit for use at the

O.S.Packaging has also to be designed in such a way as to ensure the availability

of fasteners in packs to
meet the general demand. Since the requirement
of quantity may vary with the type of customer and the
availability
of facilities
for storage with him, packaging
has to meet these variations.
0.4 Some of the standards

on fasteners,

to which

this code of practice

IS : 1363-1967 Black hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts ( diameter

screws ( diameter 6 to 24 mm ) ( first revision )
IS : 1364:1967 Prevision and semi- precision
range 6 to 39 mm ) ( first revision )

hexagon

IS : 13651968 Slotted counter sunk head and slotted

to 20 mm ) ( second revision )
IS : 1366-1968

Slotted

cheese

IS : 1862-1975 Studs ( second

IS : 2389-1968
Precision
(first revision )

head screws
revision

hexagon

( dia

bolts,

Hexagonal

IS : 6760-1972 Slotted
IS : 6761-1972

Countersunk

screws,

hexagon

nuts and lock nuts ( diameter

head screws (dia

range 1.6 to 20 mm ) ( first revision

r.ange 1.6

bolts,

screw,

nuts and lock nuts ( diameter

range

1.6 to 5 mm )

range 6 to 39 mm ) and black square

bolts and nuts ( M42 to Ml50

countersunk

are as follows:

6 to 39 mm) and black

raised countersunk

IS : 2585-1968 Black square bolts and nuts ( diameter

(diameterrange6to24mm)(firstrevlsion)
IS : 3138-1966

applies,

screws

head wood screws

head screws

IS : 7169-1974 Slotted

raised

IS : 7170-1974 Slotted

countersunk

IS : 7173-1974 Slotted

pan head tapping

with hexagon

socket

( oval ) head tapping

countersunk

( flat ) head tapping

screws

screws

screws

0.5 In the preparation

of this standard,
assistance
has been derived frgm MSZ 229/13-71 Screws and
nuts-Technical
requirements-Packaging
issued by the Magyar Szabvanyugyi
Hivatal ( MSZH ), Hungary,
and UNI 3740-74 : Part 9 Steel fasteners-Technical
requirements-Packaging,
issued by the Ente Nazionale Italian0 di Unificazione
( UNI ), Italy.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

425

IS : 9141-1979

I. Scope

1.1 This standard

sets out-a procedure-for

packaging

of threaded

fasteners

and for identification

marking

of

the packages.

2. General
2.1 The fasteners

should

be marketed

2.2 The fasteners

being packed.

without

any surface

2.3 For identification,

2.4 In a single
characteristics

the packages

packing unit, only

shall be packed.

in the packed

condition

only.

protection

shall be covered

shall always

carry suitable

fasteners

with a suitable

anticorrosive

agent before

tags or labels.

of the same designation,

mechanical

properties

and quality

2.5 Collective packages may be used for a number of unit packs in a common bigger container provided
separately
packed fastener products can be identified
easily by means of their labels or tags.
2.6 Packages

shall

be made in such a way that they are protected

against

mechanical

damage

the

in transit.

Dimensions
2.7 The external dimensions
of the unit package shall conform to IS : 8470-1977
to permit unitization
for easy handling in transportation.
rectangular transport packages.

of

rigid

3. Types of Packaging

3.1 Generally,
be as under:

the fasteners
Specification

are supplied in boxes, crates, cartons

for greaseproof paper.

Material
for Primary Packing-Greaoeproof
lowdensltypolyethylenefilms,
or plastic

or bags. The packing

materials

used shall

paper conforming
to IS : 6622-1972
Specification
bags made of LDPE conforming
to IS : 2508-1973

for

6oXeS, CfatSS and Cartons-wooden

box or crate, cc;nforming to IS : 15031967
'Specification for
wooden packing cases (firstrevision).
plastic box or crate.
fibreboard
box conforming
to lS2771
Part 1 Corrugated fibreooard boxes I firsf revision).
( Part 1 )-1977 Specification
forfibreboard
boxes;

metal

crate.

Bags-Jute
3.2 Bags shall

or plastic

bags.

be used only for Grade C fasteners

3.2.1 The number

of items

in a bag shall

( see IS : 7367 ( Part 2 )-I979

).

be such that the net mass of the bag does not exceed

50 kg.

3.3 Grades A and B fasteners (see IS : 1367 ( Part 2 )-1979 Technical supplyconditionsforthreadedsteel
fasteners: Part 2 Product grades and tolerances.
1shall be packed in cartons/boxes
in numbers selected
from the following
values:
10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 and, if required
3.4 The mass of a smgle

pack

shall

not exceed

in larger

quantities,multiples

of 500.

the following:
Mass in kg
3
5
40
50 ( net )

Paper of plastic bag

Plastic box or carton
Plastic or metal crate or carton
Wooden crate or box
4. Package Marking
4.1 The packages

shall

be marked

a) The product designation;

b) A pictorial
representation

426

clearly

and legibly

of the product,

with the following

where

information:

possible;

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 9141-1979

c) Total number of pieces in the package;

d) Net mass of the package; and
e) Name or identification
sylnbol of the manufacturer.
4.1.1 The label or tag shall be placed on the package in such a way that the package can be identified
easily during transportation
and storage. It should be fixed on the package as is customary
and shall be
removable with difficultYonlY.
4.2 Distinctive

colour
Property

markings

shall

Class gee

be used for the packages

as under:

IS : 1367 ( Part 3 )-19791

Nuts
5
8
10
12

Bolts and screws

up to 6.6
8.8
10.9
12.9

Co/our of the Label

Green ( optional )
Red
Blue
Yellow

5. Tolerances on the Number of Pieces in a Package

5.1 The following

deviations

shall

be permitted

in respect

of the nominal

number

of pieces

declared

in a

package:
Permissible
For packages containing
up to 100 pieces:
a) For fasteners with d>12 mm
b) For fasteners with d<12 mm
For packages

0
_+l

with more than 100 pieces:

a) For fasteners
b) For fasteners

with d>12
with d<12

tl
percent
+2 percent

mm
mm

*Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners: Part 3 Mechanical

screws

and studs

HANDBOOK

Deviation

properties

and test methods

for bolts,

with full loadability.

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

427

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

.,

Sf103NV7733SllAl
r

NO1133S

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS : 4072-1975

Indian

Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
STEEL FOR SPRING WASHERS

(First

Revision)

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard ( First Revision ) was adopted by the lnidan Standards
1975, after the draft finalized by the Wrought Steel Products Sectional Committee
Structural
and Metals Division Council.
0.2 This standard
two more grades

was first published in 1967. While reviewing this standard

of steel, C55 and C60, for spring washers
in this revision.

institution
on 15 January
had been approved by the

it was decided

to incorporate

0.3 Steel spring washers are widely used in railway rolling stock, automobile
and other engineering
tions where locking action is required against rotation of the screwed or bolted assembly.

applica-

0.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular

requirement
of this standard is complied with, ihe final
value, observed or calculated,
expressing
the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant
places retaineo in
theroundedoffvalueshouldbethesameasthatofthespecifiedvalueinthisstandard.

1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirements
ed in the manufacture
of spring washers.
1.2 This standard
also
manufacture
of spring

covers the
washers.

for steel in the form of plate, sheet, wire or rod intended

requirements

for

ingot

and

billets

intended

to be us-

to be used

for the

2. Grades
2.1 Steel for spring

washers

shall

be of six grades

as specified

to the supply

material

in Table

1.

3. Supply of Material
3.1 General requirements
requirementsforthesupplyof

relating

metallurgical

of

shall

conform

to

IS :

1387-1967

General

materials(firstrevision).

4. Manufacture
4.1 Steel shall be made by open-hearth,
cess is employed by the manufacturer,

electric or a combination
of these processes. In case any other proprior approval of the purchaser shall be obtained.

4.1.1 A sufficienl
discard shall be made from each ingot to ensure
segregation
and other harmful defects.

5. Chemical

ON

from injurious

piping,

undue

Composition

5.1 The ladle analysis

HANDBOOK

freedom

of steel, when analyzed

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

in accordance

with IS : 228-1959

, shall be as given in Table 1

431

IS : 4072-1975
TABLE

1 CHEMICAL
(Clauses

Grade

Carbon

(2)

(3)
0.50

(4)
0.10

(5)
0.50

o::o

0?5

OTE5

0.60

0.10

0.50

0:700

otz5

oY800

0.65

0.10

0.50

0%

0?5

oY800

0.75

0.10

0.50

ot:5

0!305

or:0

0.35

1.50

0.60

0::2

1::0

orgo

0.45

1.50

0.50

0!5

2t:o

o?o

55Si7

0.50

1.50

0.70

ot:o

2t:o

llZ0

6OSi7

0.55

1.50

0.70

0?5

2t:o

l%O

0.47

0.15

0.80

ot505

ot305

lY0

55C6

6506

7OC6

8OC6

38817

5OSi7

50CrV4

5.2 P~oductAnalysis-Check
not exceed

2.1, 5.1 and

the limits

specified

5.2)

Constituent,
A
Sulphur,
Manganese

Designation

COMPOSITION

Percent
Chromium

Phosphorus,

Vanadium

Max

Max
(6)

0.050

(7)
0.050

0.050

0.050

0.050

0.050

0.050

0.050

0.040

0.040

0.050

0.050

0.050

0.050

0.050

0.050

0.035

0.035

analysis carried out on the finished product

in Table 1 by more than the following:

Constituent

(9)
-

(8)

0.90

0.07

$0

0?2

from the standard

position

shall

Variation Over the Maximum or

Under the Minimum Specified
Limit, Percent
0.02

Carbon
Manganese:
Up to 0.9 percent
Over 0 9 percent
Silicon:
Up to 0.35 percent
Over 0.35 percent
Sulphur
Phosphorus

0.03
0.04
0.02
0.05
0.005
0.005

6. Freedom from Defects

6.1 The material

shall

have reasonably

smooth

surface,

free from harmful

defects.

6.1 .I Ingots and billets shall be sound and cleanly

cast to the specified
dimenSions.
They Shall
be free from harmful
defects,
such as cracks;
laminations;
rough,
jagged
and imperfect
edges;
exposed
piping
and heavy
refractory
inclusions.
6.2 Decarburization
ween the purchaser

shall be kept at a minimum.

and the supplier.

A limit of decarburization

may be fixed

by agreement

bet-

7. Rolling Tolerances_
7.1 The material
following
limits:

shall

be supplied

to the dimensions

specified

by the purchaser

432

be rolled

to the

Percent
+ 2.0
1.5
{
0.6

On thickness
On width

and shall

( see Note )
HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4072-1975

NOTE-h
case of material supplied
ween the supplier and the purchaser.

in the form of plate or sheet the width

tolerances

may be mutually

agreed

to bet-

7.2 The tolerances

for cast billet
ingots
and billets
shall be as given
in IS : 6914-1973
and
IS : 2830-19757
respectively,
the tolerances
for ingots of other sizes shall be subject
to mutual
agreement
between
the purchaser
and the manufacturer.
8. Calculationof
8.1 The weight

Weight
of steel shall be calculated

on the basis that steel weighs

7.85 g/cm3.

9. Delivery
9.1 The material shall be supplied in any one of the following
ween the purchaser and the manufacturer:

conditions

subject

to mutual

agreement

bet-

a) As-rolled,
b) As-rolled and annealed, and
c) Hardened and tempered.
In the

case

of ingots

and

billets

the

material

may

be

supplied

in the

as-cast

condition.

10. Rust Prevention

10.1 The surface of the material may be coated with a thin layer of anti-rust
agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.

oil or anti-rust

compound

when

11. Retest 11.1 Should a test piece first selected fail to pass any of the tests specified in this standard, two further
samples shall be selected for testing in respect of each failure. Should the test pieces from both these additional sample pass, the material represented
by the test samples shall be deemed to comply with the requirements
of that particular
test. Should the test piece from either of these additional
samples fail, the
material represented
by the test samples shall be deemed not to comply with this standard.
12. Marking

and Packing

12.1 The material shall be suitably identified

with the name or trade-mark of the manufacturer,
grade and
cast number or by such identification
marks by which the steel can be traced to the cast from which it has
been made.
12.1 .I
the name
12.1.2The

Each ingot and billet shall be legibly

or trade-mark
of the manufacturer.
material shall be packed

12.2 The material

may also be marked

and delivered

stamped

or painted

as agreed

to between

with the ISI Certification

with

cast

number,

the purchaser

grade

and

and the supplier.

Mark.

Note- The use of the ISI Certification

Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards
Institution
( Certification
Marks ) Act and the Rules and Regulations
made thereunder. The ISI mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance
that they have been produced to comply with the requirement5
of that standard
under a well-defined
system of inspection,
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised
by ISI and
operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously
checked by ISI for conformity
to that standard as
a further safeguard.
Detatils of conditions
under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification
Mark may be
granted to manufacturers
or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards
Institution.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

433

IS : 5369-1975

Indian Standard

GENEREAL REQUIREMENTS FOR

PLAIN WASHERS AND LOCK WASHERS
( First Revision )

1. Scope-Covers
similar parts.

the general

2. Grades-Two

grades

3. Dimensional

Accuracy

requirements

of washers

and permissible

are specified,

namely,

deviations

Precision

for plain washers,

lock washers

and Ordinary.

3.1 The permissible

deviations
side diameter of the precision

on the main dimensions

and concentricity of the hole with respect
grade washers shall be as specified in Tables 1 and 2.

to the out-

3.2 The permissible

deviations
side diameter of the ordinary

on the main dimensions

and concentricity
of the hole with respect
grade washers shall be as specified in Tables 3 and 4.

to the out-

TABLE 1 PERMISSIBLE

DEVIATIONS
( Clause

All dimensions

Reference
Dimension

Permissible

FOR PRECISION

3.1 )
In millimetres.

Deviation

f Tolerance

Permissible
Deviation on
Concentricity I

Zone )
r

d,

6,

3
6

3
6
10

h14
h14

H13
H13
H13

h14
h14
h14

h13
h13
h13

21T12
21T12
21T12

10
18

18
30

30

50

h14
h14
h14

H14
H14
H14

h14
h14
h14

h13
h13
h13

21T12
21T12
21T12

50
80
120

80
120
180

H14
H14
Ii14

h15
h15
h15

21T13
21T13
21T13

180

256

h15

21T13

d2

Lockfwidth

In case of punched holes the tolerance zones H13 and H14 for the hole diameter

do not apply to the punch

exit side of the washers.

-\ For calculating

the magnitude

WASHERS

up to

Over

434

and

of the concentricity

tolerance,

the reference

HANDBOOK

dimension

shall be d,.

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 5369-1975

TABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE
DEVIATIONS FOR THICKNESS, PARALLELISM
FLATNESS FOR PRECISION WASHER
( Clause 3.1 )
All dimensions

Washer Thickness
Over

up to

AND

in millimetres.

Permissible
Deviation for
Thickness

Permissible Deviation in Parallelism

of Beariyg Faces

Flatness
Tolerance
e

1
2.5

1
2.5
4

+ 0.1
+ 0.2
Ik 0.3

0.1
0.15

0.1
0.2
0.3

4
6
10

6
10
18

+ 0.6
+1
_+ 1.2

0.2
0.3
0.4

0.4
0.6
1

TABLE

3 PERMISSIBLE

0.05

DEVIATIONS FOR ORDINARY

( Clause 3.2 )

All dimensions

WASHERS

in millimetres.

PERMISSIBLE ANQLE VARAT DNS FOR SQUARE HOLE

AND EXTERNAL SQUARE f #

PERMISSIBLE VAMATION
ON TAPER$f

,
Reference
Dimension

Permissible

up to

a,

3
6
10

6
10
18

H15
H15
H15

+1

18
30
50

30
50
80

H15
-

+2
k 2.5

80
120
180

120
180
250

In case of punched
the washers.
t For calculating

HANDBOOK

ON

holes the tolerance

the magnitude

INDUSTRIAL

Zone )

d, *

Permissible
Deviation
on Concentricity x t

H14
H14
H14

h16
h16

2lT16
2lT16
2lT16

H14
H15
H15

h16
h16
h16

2lT16
2lT16
2lT17

H15
H15
-

h16
h16
h16

2lT17
2lT17
2lT17

a2

Over

Deviation (Tolerance
62
-

f3
4
+5
-

js.16
js16
js16
-

zones H14 and H15 for the hole diameter

of the concentricity

FASTENERS-PART

tolerance,

the reference

do not apply to the punch exit side of

dimension

shall be d,.

435

IS : 5369-1975

TABLE 4 PERMISSIBLE
DEVIATIONS FOR THICKNESS, PARALLELISM
CONVEXITY FOR ORDINARY WASHERS
( Clause 3.2 )
All dimensions

Washer Thickness
up to

Over

Permissible Deviation in Parallelism

of Bearing Faces

Flatness
Tolerance
e

1
2.5

2.5
4

kO.2
2 0.3
+_O.S

0.2
0.2
0.3

0.2
0.4
0.6

4
6
10

6
10
16

+1
* 1.2
k1.5

0.5
0.6
1.0

0.8
1.2
2.0

4.Material-The
standard.

in millimetres.

Permissible
Deviation for
Thickness

AND

material

of plain washers

and lock washers

shall be according

to the respective

product

5. Finish-The
plain washers
and lock washers shall be supplied
in natural finish unless otherwise
specified by the purchaser.
At the request of the purchaser,
washers may be phosphate-coated,
nickelplated, tinned, galvanized, copper-plated
or cadmium-coated.
In such cases, the dimensions
of the washers
shall apply before coating. The properties
of the washers shall not, however, be impaired by the protective
coating specified by the purchaser.
6. Other Requirements
6.1 The washers shall be free from cracks,
particular,
precision grade washers shall
6.2 The supply requirements
quirements
for the supply

burrs, pits and other defects.

not have any tool marks.

All sharp edges shall be removed.

in the case of metallic

washers shall conform
of metallurgical
materials
( first revision ),

to IS : 1387-1967

7. Sampling and Acceptance-The

sampling procedure for the testing and inspection
cordance with IS : 6821-1973 Methods for sampling non-threaded
fasteners.

of washers

General

In

re-

shall in ac-

8. Testing of Material and Coating-The

material
constituting
the washers and lock washers has to be
tested only if special requirements
are specified for the material; similarly
it applies to testing of coating.
9. Packing-Unless
otherwise specified the precision grade washers shall be packed
and 1000 or multiples thereof. The ordinary grade washers shall be packed in cartons
of 50 kg. Each carton or bag shall contain washers of one size only.
10. Marking-The
label on the carton or bag shall carry the size, number
mark or trade-mark.
10.1 IS/ Certification

436

Marking-Details

available

with the Indian

of pieces

Standards

HANDBOOK

ON

in cartons of 100,500
of 2.5 kg, 5 kg or bags

and the manufactures

Institution

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 5369-1975
EXPLANATORY
This standard was first published
are enumerated
below:

a)

NOTE

in 1969. In the present

revision

the changes

and additions

made

Bright and Black washers have been re-designated

as Precision
and Ordinary
washers
respectively.
The new designations
correspond
more closely to the practical
situation.
The old terms brightand
black no longer have any justification,
since depending
on the
manufacturing
method and intermediate
material like coating, a washer described as bright
or black need not be so in appearance.

c) The permissible

dimensional,
positional
and form variations
specified
in the earlier version
have been altered and conform to IS0 tolerances,
and the method of representation
also
follows the international
system.

A clause is also included on testing of material and coating. It may be added that testing of
material in the case of washer is rarely necessary unless in exceptional
circumstances,
for example, when special requirements
are to be met by the material.

e) The clause of packing

precision

has been revised

making

a distinction

between

packing

ordinary

and

washers.

In the preparation
of this standard,
considerable
assistance
has been derived from DIN 522
Scheiben; Technische
Lieferbedingungen
( Washers, technical
conditions
of delivery ), 1974 issued by
Deutsches lnstitut fur Normung ( DIN ).

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

437

IS : 5957-1970

Indian

Standard

DIMENSIONS FOR SCREW THREADS

FOR THREAD FORMING TAPPING SCREWS

1. Scope-This
standard covers the dimensions
for screw threads
diameter range 1.5 to 8 mm ( size range 0 to 16 ).

for thread

forming

tapping

screws

in the

2. Thread Profile and Dimensions-The

thread profile and the dimensions
shall be as given in Table 1. No extrusion of excess metal beyond the apex of the point resulting from thread rolling should be permissible,
a
slight rounding or truncation
of the point of cone end is desirable.
3. Designation-The
screw threads
number given in Table 1.

for thread

forming

tapping

screws shall be designated

by the screw size

TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR SCREW THREADS FOR THREAD FORMING TAPPING SCREWS
All dimensions

in millimetres

CONE END
(TYPE AB)

Screw
Size
Number

d,

d,
Short Screws

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

4 Lona Screws
Max

Min

(0)

1.52

1.45

0.91

0.84

0.53

0.1

0.79

0.69

1.07

0.79

1.32

1.07

(1)

1.90

1.83

1.24

1.17

0.61

0.1

1.12

1.02

1.22

0.91

1.52

1.22

(16)

1 8.00

7.82-

Note-Sizes

tional

438

Max

(TYPE B)

1 6.207

given in parenthesis

5.99

are of second

1 2.
preference.

This standard is based on Dot : lSO/TC 2 (WG5-7) 318 Tapping

Organization
for Standardization,

HANDBOOK

screw threads

issued by the interna-

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6293-1981

Indian

Standard

NOMENCLATURE OF THE ASSEMBLY TOOLS

FOR NUTS AND SCREWS
(First

1. Scope-Gives

nomenclature

2. Hand Operated
2.1 Spanners

relating

to assembly

tools

Revision)

for nuts and screws.

Tools for Nuts and Screws

and Wrenches

2.1.1 Definition-Spanners
and wrenches are tools designed for operating
a turning force either externally
or internally
according
to type of fastener.

screwed

fasteners

by applying

2.1.2 Nomenclature

No.

Application

Nomenclature

Tool

Indian
Standard

a)

Single ended open jaw

spanners

b)

( Engineers

wrench,

IS : 2028

single head )

open end)

3
Open end )
_

a)

Single ended ring spanner

b)

Box
single

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

( ring )

IS : 6379

wrench

end

439

IS :6293-1981

No.

Indian

Application

Tool

Nomenclature

a)

Cranked
single
ring spanner

B)

[Box ( ring ) wrench,

single end, deep offseg

a)

Shortened single ended

ring spanner

b)

CSlugging

6
--.----

+$zJ

Standard

ended

wrench,

box

IS : 4509

( ring )I

a)

Straight
double
ring spanner

b)

[Box ( ring ) wrench,

double head, flat3

a)

Angled
double
ring spanner

b)

[Box ( ring
doublehead,
offset]

@&-_;_Q

10

1::

+=p

11

ended
IS : 2029

ended

) wrench,

IS : 2029

15

;)g!g;;w,

ls:2o29

a)

Double
ended
ring spanner

a)

[Box
double

offset

( ring ) wrench,
end,

IS : 2029

modified

offset)
Flare nut wrench,

double

end, flat

Combination

wrench

Combination

wrench,

IS : 6389

IS : 6389

440

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :6293-1981

No<

Application

Tool

Single ended soild box

spanner

b)

( Tee wrench, socket,

single end )

Single ended
box spanner

b)

Tee
wrench, socket,
tubular single end )

a)

Double ended solid box

spanner

b)

( Tee wrench, socket,

double end )

a)

Double ended
box spanner

b)

( Tee wrench, socket,

tubular double end )

18

Standard

a)

16

19

lndlan

Nomenclature

Socket wrench, double end,

90 offset one end

socket wrench, four way

jacket wrench, double end,

!2

HANDBOOK

flex head

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2030

IS : 2030

tubular

90 offset

21

: 2030

tubular

Socket wrench, single end,

20

IS

IS : 2030

Socket

wrench,

spin type

Socket

wrench,

square

Socket

shank for use with

ratchet screw-

a)

Square

b)

( Box ( ring ) wrench,

single end, square )

quare
b)

box

drive,

tee

wrench

wrenc

( Tee wrench,
single square )

Tee wrench,

socket

triangular

Pin wrench

F=i

Adjustable

Wrench

442

HANDBOOK

ON

pin wrench

male cruciform

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :6293-1981
2.2

Screwdrivers

2.2.1 Definition-Screwdrives
are tools intended for turning screwed fasteners. They operate
to a slot or recess in the head of the fastener which passes-through
its centre of roiation.

by filling

in-

2.2.2 Nomenclature
No.

Application

Tool

Nomenclature

Screwdriver
for
head screws

slotted

Screwdriver
for
head screws,
offset

slotted
double

Indian
Standard

IS : 844

IS : 844

Screwdriver bit for slotted

head screws, hexagon
shenk

Screwdriver bit for slotted

head screws, ratchet
drivers

Screwdriver
for
head screws,
drive

slotted
square

108

Screwdriver for recessed

head screws

107

Screwdriver for recessed

head screws, double
offset

Screwdriver bit for recessed head screws, hexa(

gon shank

108
B

Screwdriver bit for recessed head screws, ratchet drivers

IS : 844

Screwdriver for recessed

head screws, square
drive

110

HANDBOOK

IS : 844

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

443

IS :6293-1981

No.

Nomenclature

Application

Key with handle for hexagor

socket screws

a)

Hexagon
keys
fol
socket head screws

b)

( Key, hexagon
screws )

Indian
Standard

IS : 3082

113

socke

Key,
hexagon
socket
screws, with pilot

Key,
hexagon
socket
screws for spiral ratchet

Bit,
hexagon
socket
screws hexagon
shank

Bit,
hexagon
socket
screws,
square
drive

Tee wrench,

square

male

t--+

114

0
116

117

male

118

Tee

wrench,
triangular

444

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6293-1981

Screwdriver
for
screws
with internal serrations

Bit

for

screws

rews

Key, spline

Bit, spllne

Slotted

Face

sockel

socket

with

with

screws

screws,

screwdriver

wrench

for

slotted

Adjustable
face
wrench
for slotted lock rings

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

445

IS:6293-1981

No.

Indian

Nomenclature

Tool

Application

Pin type face wrench

Adjustable
wrench

131

Standard

pin

type

face

2.3 Connecting
Parts
2.3.1 Nomenclature
Tool

No.

kizsit
0

Indian
Standard

Nomenclature

Square

a--

coupler

External
adapter

Adapter

square

socket

Extension

bar

Universal
drive

joint,

drive

IS : 7991

wrench

square

Square drive bit for use

with
spiral
ratchet
drivers

Square
drive socket
hexagon inset bits

IS

: 7991

IS

: 7991

IS : 7991

for

Adapter for hexagon Inset

bits for use with spiral
ratchet driver

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6293-1981
2.4 Driving

Parts and Accessories

2.4.1 Nemencla
No.

ture

Handle,

251

Indian

Nomenclature

Tool

Application

spin

type,

Standard

male

IS : 7975

square

252

253

254

Nut spinner, flex head

IS : 7975

Tee handle, square drive

1s : 7975

Offset
drive

IS : 7975

handle,

square

Ratchest handle

Ratchest

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

handle,

reversible

a)

Torque wrench deflecting beam type

b)

Torque
case

wrench rigid
with indicator

447

IS : 6293-1981

Nomenclature

a)

Torque

Screwdriver

wrench,

for

click

hexagon

Spiral ratchest screwdriver

Hand impact screwdriver

reduced diameters )

2. Machine Operated Tools for Nuts and Screws

3.1 Socket Wrenches and Socket Drivers
3.1 .l Nomenclature
Nomenclature

Socket

wrench,

hexagon,

Socket
joint

wrench, universal
ball type, square

Socket wrench, hexagon

drive extension

Socket wrench, hexagon

drive extension, universal joint ball type

448

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6293-1981

No.

Indian

Tool

Application

Standard

Bit

for
slotted
screws, hexagon

head
insert

Bit

for
recessed
screws, hexagon

head
insert

Bit

for hexagon
screws, hexagon

socket
insert

305

306

307

Bit for screws with Internal serrations,

hexagon
insert

308

Hexagon
insert
bit
multispline
screws

3.2 Connecting

for

Parts

3.2.1 Nomenclature

No.

Tool

Indian
Standard

Nomenclature

Square
joint

drive
universal
ball type extension

Square drive extension

hexagon insert

402

for

Hexagon
drive extension
for hexagon insert bits

Square
drive
socket
hexagon insert bits

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

for

449

IS : 6293-1981

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard was first published in 1971. In this revision the Indian Standards available on the
various tools indicated in the last column of the tables have been updated so as to give up-to-date information to the users of the standard.
This standard is based on IS0 1703-1975 Assembly tools for screws and nuts, nomenclature
by International Organization for Standardization ( IS0 ).

issued

Wherever two nomenclatures have been given, the first one is according to Indian Standard on the
subject and latter one ( given in brackets ) is according to ISO.

450

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 7479-190s

Indian

DIMENSIONS

FOR CROSS
(First

1. Scope-Covers
2. Dimensions
Table
1
3. Method
penetration

revision).
Penetration

the

dimensions

of cross

and Tolerances -The

recesses

dimensions

This standard
was
dimensions
of cross

HANDBOOK

and

RECESSES

Re vision )

for

screws.

tolerances

of cross

recesses

are given

in

of Checking -The
recess
dimensions
shall
be checked
using
the cross recess
gauge according
to IS : 7479-l
985 Specification
for recess penetration
gauges (first
The depth of penetration
is given in the respective
product
standard.
The method
of
gauging
of cross recesses
is also given
in IS : 7479-1985.

EXPLANATORY

The
Cross

Standard

originally
recesses,

published
with
the

in 1974.
agreement

NOTE
The revision
has been taken up to align
reached
at International
level (ISO).

cross recesses
covered
in this standard
are in conformity
with
recesses
for screws
issued by the international
Organization

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

the

type H of IS0 4757-1983

for Standardization
(ISO).

451

IS : 7478-1985

TABLE

1 DIMENSIONS

FOR

CROSS

(Clause
All dimensions

SECTION

SECTION

ZZ

RECESS

TYPE

2)
In millimetres.

YY

SEClION

*This

will
NOTE

452

be replaced
-

DimelIsions

by r Min
shown

0.25
are

mm;

r Max

theoretical

0.36

XX

mm.

values.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 7479-1985

Indian

Is)

Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
RECESS PENETRATION
GAUGES

(First

1. Sco e - Covers the requirements

of recess
IS : 74 4 8-1985
Dimensions
for cross recesses
cross recesses
is given
in Appendix
A.

-Shall

2. Terminology

be as given

in

Revision)

penetration
gauges for checking
cross
(first revision).
Method
of penetration

Fig.

CONTROL POSITION

FIG. 1 METHOD

Dimensions-The

OF PENETRATION

GAUGING

of gauge

are

dimensions

point

OF CROSS RECESSES

given

in Table

1.

4. Finish-The
gauge point shall be hardened
to 750 HV minimum
[see IS : 1501-l
of Vickers
hardness
test for steel (first revision)]
and ground
to obtain
a good
5.

Material-The

6.

General

6.1
1983
7.

gauge

point

shall

be

made

of gauge

969 Method
finish.

steel.

Requirements

Dial Gauge-The
Specification

Designation

to
of

1.

ZERO POSITION

3.

recesses
gauging

for
Shall

dial gauge used with recess

plunger
type dial gauges.
be designated

by the

name,

penetration

gauge

shall

recess

No. and the

conform

number

to IS : 2092-

of this

standard.

Example.
A recess

penetration

gauge

of

Recess

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

recess

size

Penetration

FASTENERS-PART

No.2
Gauge

shall

be

designated

as:

2 IS : 7479

453

IS : 7479-1985

TABLE

1 GAUGE

DIMENSIONS
(Clause

All dimensions

FOR

RECESS

TYPE

3)

in milllmetres

MINIMUM

LENGTH

OF TRUE FORM

XX

SECTION

0.64

1 .OOl

1.530

2.497

3.574

0.813

1.27

2.286

3.91

5.08

0.25

0.38

0.38

0.38

0.38

0.315

0.513

1.102

2.098

2.738

f - z.06

0.31

0.51

0.64

0.97

1.12

3.17

4.71

7.14

8.74

Gauge
b

No.

- 0.025

0.025
0

(j+0.13
0
e

O
- 0.025

Min

3.16

+ 15
a
0

138

140

146

153

P - :5,

70

70

5 45

5 45

70

*This

will

be replaced

by r 0.025 5 0.025

8. Packing - Gauges shall

damage
during
transit.

9.

Marking-Gauge
a) Recess

No,

b) manufacturers
9.1

454

IS/

Certification

bodies

mm [see

be coated

and

with

gauge

IS

: 7478-1985

a suitable

points

shall

Dimensions

rust

be

for cross

preventive

marked

recesses

and packed

legibly

with

(first

revision).]

so as to prevent

the

following:

and
name
Marking-

or trade-mark.
Details

available

with

the

HANDBOOK

Indian

ON

Standards

INDUSTRIAL

Institution.

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 7479-1985

APPENDIX
(Clause
METHOD
A-l.
The penetration
products
standards.

OF

PENETRATION

A
1)

GAUGING

OF

CROSS

RECESSES

depth of the depth gauge (minimum

dimensions)
is indicated
in the different
It is the test dimension
for the usability
of the cross recess.

A-2.
The point of the gauge is identical
with the point of the respective
screwdriver.
A sleeve
serves to guide the gauge and fix the reference
plane. This plane passes through
the point of
intersection
of the recess wings and the top surface of the screw head. It corresponds
thus to the
surface
of a screw with flat head. In the case of crowned
screw heads, it lies below the crown
in
the transition
area from the recess wings to the surface
of the head. For these screw heads, the
reference
plane
is fixed with the help of the bearing
surfaces
of the gauge
sleeve.
A-3. The penetration
gauge.
The zero and

depth of the gauge is measured

control
positions
of the depth

from
gauge

the reference
can be found

A-4.
Due to the permissible
error for the core thickness
b of the gauge
to 0.13 mm can arise when
measuring
penetration
depth.
A-5.

A typical

example

of the

method

of application

of recess

EXPLANATORY

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

an inaccuracy

gauge

is given

of up

in Fig. 1.

NOTE

This standard
was originally
published
in 1974. The revision
standard
in line with
the agreement
reached
at international
This standard
is in full conformity
with IS0 4757-l
983
International
Organization
for Standardization
(ISO).

penetration

point,

plane by using a dial

on a flat surface.

Cross

has been taken

level (ISO).
recesses

up to align

for screws

issued

this

by the

455

IS : 7800-1975

Indian Standard

1
Is7

DIMENSIONS FOR
SCREW THREADS AND ENDS FOR
THREAD CUTTING TAPPING SCREWS

1. Scope--Covers
the dimensions
for screw threads and ends for thread cutting tapping
range 2 to 16 for Type BT, 4 to 14 for Type Y and 4 to 10 for r-ype D and Type T.
2. Types-Screw

thread

cutting

tapping

screws

are of the following

screws

in the size

four types:

a)

Type BT-This
form of screw thread conforms to Type B of IS : 5957-1970 Dimensions
for
screw threads for thread forming tapping screws expect that the thread has one cutting flute
extending for a short distance from the point of screw.

b)

Type y-This
form of screw thread has widely spaced threads,
cutting flutes which extend from the point to the head.

c)

Type D-This
form of screw thread has thread approximating
to the 60 thread proflie, having
blunt, slightly tapered point and one slot to form a cutting edge extending for a short distance
from the point of the screw. The crest of the thread has a truncation
of P/8 and radius at the
root of 0.144 P.

d)

Type T-This
form of screw thread has threads approximating
to the 60 thread profile, having
blunt, slightly tapered point and one or more cutting flutes extending for a short distance from
the point of the screw. The crest of the thread has a truncation
of P/8 and radius at the root of
0.144 P.

3. Thread

Profile

3.1 The thread

blunt, slightly

tapered

point and

and Dimensions

profile

and dimensions

shall be as stated

below:

For Type BT as given in Table 1,

For Type Y as given in Table 2, and
For Type D and Type T as given in Table
Note-Details

3.

of taper point, slot and flute design are left to the discretion

meet the performance

3.2 No protrusion
missioble.
4. Designation-Shall

required.

of excess

The threads

metal

be designated

are not to be gauged

beyond

of the manufacturer,

but should

the apex of the point resulting

by type and screw size number

provided

meet the performance

from

thread

the screws

required.

rolling

shall be per-

( see Table 1,2 and 3 ).

Examples:

456

a)

A tapping

screw of Type BT and screw size number 6 shall be designated

Tapping Screw BT 6

b)

A tapping

screw of Type Y and screw size number 8 shall be designated

Taooubg Screw Screw Y 8

c)

A tapping

screw of Type T and screw size number 6F shall

Tapping Screw T 6F

be designated

as:

d)

A tapping

screw of Type D and screw size number 8C shall

Tapping Screw D 8C

be designated

as:

HANDBOOK

ON

as:

as:

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 7800-1975

TABLE

1 DIMENSIONS

FOR SCREW THREADS FOR TYPE BT THREAD

( Clauses 3.1 and 4 )
All dimensions
in millimetles.

CUTTING TAPPING

SCREWS

NOTE 2)

HT
IUS

FLUTE TO EXTEND PAST

FIRST FULL THR

THREAD

PROFILE
d

d,

1.37
1.88
2.26

0.1
0.1
0.1

0.79
1.05
1.27

2.84
3.30
3.86

2.70
3.12
3.68

0.1
0.15
0.15

1.41
1.59
1.81

4.55
5.84

4.34
5.64

0.15
0.15

1.81
2.12

Screw
Sze
Number

Max

Min

Max

Min

Max

Min

2
4
6

2.24
2.90
3.53

2.13
2.79
3.43

1.63
2.18
2.64

1.52
2.08
2.51

1.47
2.01
2.41

8
10
12

4.22
4.80
5.46

4.09
4.65
5.31

3.10
3.58
4.17

2.95
3.43
3.99

14
16

6.25
8.00

6.10
7.82

4.88
6.20

4.70
5.99

d*

Note l-The
above dlmensions
are for uncoated screw threads and may be exceeded after coating.
Note 2-The
lengnt of taper point Y = 1 112 to threads for short screws and 2 to 2 112 threads for long screws
details of short and long screws, see individual product standards.

TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS

FOR SCREW THREADS FOR TYPE Y THREAD

( Clauses 3.1 and 4 )
All dimensions
in millimetres.

CUTTING TAPPING

For

SCREWS

10 EXTENO

THREAD

PROFILE

Screw
Size
Number

Max

d,

Min

Max

Min

Max

d,
Min

2.95

2.84

2.29

2.18

2.10

1.88

0.127

1.05

6
8

3.58
4.27

3.48
4.14

2.74
3.20

2.82
3.05

2.41
2.84

2.28
2.70

0.152
0.203

1.27
1.41

10
12
14

4.88
5.54
8.35

4.72
5.38
8.20

3.88
4.27
4.98

3.53
4.09
4.80

3.30
3.86
4.54

3.12
3.68
4.34

0.203
0.203
0.203

1.59
1.81
1.81

Note l-The
above dimensions are for uncoated screw threads and may be exceeded after coating.
Note P-The
length of taper point Y = 1 to 2 thread for short screws and 2 to 2
threads for long screws.
details of short and long screws, see individual product standards.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

For

457

IS : 7800-1975

TABLE 3 DIMENSIONS
FOR SCREW THREADS FOR TYPES D AND T THREAD
CUTTING TAPPlliG SCREWS ( 60 THREAD PROFILE )
( Clauses 3.1 and 4 )
All dimensions
in millimetres.

NOTE 2)

NOTE II

SLOT 10 EXTENO PAST

FIRST FULL THR

TYPE D

Screw Size
Number

Note l-The
Note 2-Length

TYPE T

d,

Max

Min

Max

Min

4c
4F
8C

2.84
2.84
3.51

2.72
2.73
3.37

2.18
2.29
2.89

1.96
2.11
2.41

0.64
0.53
0.79

6F
8C
8F

3.51
4.17
4.17

3.38
4.03
4.04

2.84
3.35
3.43

2.62
3.07
3.18

0.64
0.79
0.71

1oc
1OF

4.83
4.83

4.66
4.69

3.73
4101

3.38
3.73

1.06
0.79

above dimensions
or Taper Point,

are for uncoated

screw threads

and may be exceeded

after coating.

l/2
to 3 l/2 threads for screw having a thread length equal to 8 threads or less;
=3112to4112threadsforscrewhavingathreadlengthgreaterthan8points.

Y=2

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

Thread cutting tapping screws are generally

for application
in materials
where disruptive
internal
stressesare
undesirable
because of low plastic deformation
capability
of the materials or where excessive
driving torques are encountered
with thread forming tapping screws. These screws may also be used in applications
where thread forming tapping screws are used, with the advantage
of a lower driving torque.
Types BTand Y-These
screws are intended for use in materials,
die castings, steel sheets and shapes, cast iron, brass, plastics,etc.
Types D and T-These
screws are intended for use in materials,
castings, steel sheets and shapes, cast iron, brass, plastics, etc.

such as aluminium,

such as aluminium,

zinc and lead

zinc and lead die

In the preparation
of this standard, considerable
assistance
has been derived from BS 4174-1972
Specification
for self-tapping
screws and metallic drive screws, issued by the British Standards Institution.
London.

458

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8563-1977

SPECIFICATION FOR
HALF ROUND MILD STEEL WIRE FOR THE
MANUFACTURE OF SPLIT PINS

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards
institution
on 15 September
1977, after Ihe
draft finalize by the Wrought Steel Products Sectional
Committee
had been approved
by the Structural
and
Metals
Division
Council.
0.2 Round

wire is rolled

fabrication

into split

0.3 An annealing
of the rolling

treatment

or drawing

ed in process,

on drawn,

or formed

by a combination

of both

processes

into a half round

wire for

pins.

depending

is required

of the round

either
wire

on the annealing

in the

.oduction

into the half round

facilities

of the round wire, or at an intermediate

wire, so that

of the producer

slage

the split

of the half

pins may have sullable

rne roe, or annealround wire.

0.4 The most important

property of half round mild steel wire, as far as size and shape are concerned
is thal
when doubled on its flat side, it slips easily through
a round hole of the size for which it is intended.
0.5 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular
value, observed or calculated,
expressing
the result
with IS : 2-l 960 rules for rounding
off numerical
retained

in the

rounded

1.1 This standard

covers

off value

should

requirement
of this standard
is complled
with, the final
of a test or analysis,
shall be rounded off in accordance
values (revised).
The number
of significant
places

be the same

as that

of the specified

value

in this

standard.

1. Scope
the requirements

for half

round

mild steel

wire

for the manufacture

of split

pins.

2. Terminology
2.1 For the purpose
of this
relating
to iron and steel

standard,

the definitions
given in IS : 1956(
steel wire,
shall apply.

Part V)-1976

Glossary

of terms

: Part 5 Bright

3. Supply of Material
3.1 General
1967

4.

General

requirements
requirements

relating
to the supply
of mild steel wire shall be as laid down
for the supply of metallingical
material
(first revision).

in lS

: 1367

Manufacture

4.1 The wire shall be drawn from mild steel manufactured

by open hearth, electric, duplex, basic-oxygen
or a
combination
of these processes.
In case any other process is employed
by the manufacturer,
prior approval
of the purchaser
should be obtained.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

459

rS :8563-1977

5. Chemical

Composition

5.1 The ladle analysis of wire when analysed in accordance

with the relevant part of IS : 228
chemical analysis of steels (Secondrevision
)( being issued in parts). shall be as follow:
Consituent

Percent
0.10
0.30 to 0.50
0.04
0.04

Carbon, Max
Mananese
Sulphur, Max
Phosphorus, Max
5.2 Product Analysis-The
shall be as given below:

analysis

from the limits

Constituent

Permissible

Variation,

Carbon
Manganese
Sulphur
Phosphorus

+ 0.02
kO.03
- 0.005
+ 0.005

Note-Variations

Methodsof

permissible

variation

in case of product

shall not be applicable both over and under the specified limits in several

specified

in 5.1

Percent

determinations

in a heat.

6. Sizes
6.1 The nominal
intended.

sizes of these

6.2 Sizes and dimensions

wires

refer to the diameter

of half round mild steel wires

shall

of hole for which

a given

size of split pin is

be as given in Table 1.

TABLE 1 SIZES AND DIMENSIONS OF WIRES FOR SPLIT PINS

( Clause

6.2 )

( All dimension in millimeters )

Size

Thickness

Width

Nominal
m

Width

Thickness

f---J-Y-

(1)
0.6

(2)
0.5

(3)
0.4

Max
(4)
0.25

Min
(5)
0.20

(1)
4

Max
(2)
3.7

Min
(3)
3.5

Max
(4)

Min
(5)

1.85

0.8
1.0
1.2
1.6
2.0
2.5
3.2

0.7
0.9
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.3
2.9

0.6
0.8
0.9
1.3
1.7
2.1
2.7

0.35
0.45
0.50
0.70
0.90
1.15
1.45

0.30
0.40
0.45
0.65
0.85
1.05
1.35

5
6.3
8
10
13
16
20

4.6
5.9
7.5
9.5
12.4
15.4
19.3

4.4
5.7
7.3
9.3
12.1
15.1
19.0

2.30
2.95
3.75
4.75
6.20
7.70
9.65

1.75
2.20
2.85
3.65
4.65
6.05
7.55
9.50

7.1 Tensile Test--The

tensiletestingofsteel

tensile properties
wire(firstrevision).

of wire when tested in accordance

shall conform to the requirement

TABLE 2 TENSILE
Nominal

Nominal
Size

Size

Gauge Length
mm

with IS : 1521-1972 Method for

specified in Table 2.

PROPERTIES
Tensile Strebgtg
N/mm,

Max

Elongation
Percent, Min

(1)
Up to 1.6

(2)

(5)

125

450

10

Over 1.6 up to 4

250

450

10

8 times

450

20

Over 4

(4)

nominal size
Note-IN/mm

460

= 1 MN/m*

= 0.0102

kgf/mm*
-

= 1 MPa.

HANDBOOK

ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8563-1977

7.2 Wrapping Test-Wire

smaller than 5 mm diameter shall be subjected to wrapping test in accordance
With I5 : 1755-l 961 Method
for wrapping
test of wire. Ther wire shall withstand
without
breaking or
splitting or splitting being wraped eight times round its own diameter and subsequently straightened.
7.88end Test-Wire
of 5 mm diameter and over shall be subjected to this test. The wire shall withstand
being bent through an angle of 180 round a former of diameter equal to the nominal diameter without showing cracks, breaks or splits.

8. Finish
8.1ThewireshalI

a)
b)
c)

haveoneof

thefollowingfinishesasspecifiedbythepurchaser:

Annealed;
Annealed, cleaned and limed;
Dull grey ( dry drawn ).

9. Freedom

and

from Defects

9.1 All finishedwires

shall be well and cleanly drawn to the dimensions
specified.The
free from splits, surface flaws, rough/jagged
and imperfect edges, and other harmful
lo.

wire shall be sound,

surface defects.

Packing

10.1 Each coil of wire shalt be suitably

shall be protected by suitable wrapping.

bound and fastened

correctly.

If required

by the purchaser,

each coil

11. Marking
11.1 Each coil of wire shall be legibly
name of the manufacturer.
11.1.1 The material

marked

may also marked

with finish,

size of the wire, lot number

with the ISI Certification

and trade-mark

or the

Mark.

Note- The use of ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards tnstituion ( Certification Marks ) Act and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard under a welldefined system of inspection, testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by ISI and operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously
checked by ISI for conformity
to that standardas
a further safeguard.
Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of ISI Certification
Mark may be granted tdmanufacturers
or pro-
cessors, may beobtained
from the Indian Standards Institution.

12. Sampling and Criteria for Conformity

12.1 The method of drawing
prescribed
in Appendix A.

HANDBOOK

representative

ON INDUSTRIAL

samples

FASTENERS-PART

of the material

and the criteria

for conformity

shall

be as

401

IS : 8563-1977

APPENDIX

( Clause 12.1 )
SAMPLING

AND

CRITERIA

FOR

CONFORMITY

Lot

A-l.

A-l.1 In any consignment,

all the coils of wire of the same grade and diameter manufactured
tially similar conditions
of manufacture,
shall be grouped together to constitute
a lot.
A-1.1.1 Samples
A-2.

Sampling

shall

be taked

from each lot and tested

for conformity

be taken

to the standard.

A-2.1 The number

shall

under essen-

of coils to be taken from a lot shall be according

at random by using number table (see IS : 4905-l

TABLE 3 SCALE

OF SAMPLING

No. of Coils
in a Lot

AND

PERMISSIBLE

to col 1 and 2 of Table 3. These samples

968 Methods
for random sampling 1.
NUMBER

OF DEFECTIVES
No. of Tests
for Chemical
Requirements

No. of Coils
Physical
Requirements

Permissible
No. of
Defectives

(2)
8

(3)
0

(4)
2

(1)
up to 25
26 to 50
51 to 150
151 to 300

13

20

32

301and above

50

A-3.

Preparation

of Samplesand

Number

of Tests

Tests forphysica/Requirements-From
the coils selected from col 1 and co12 of Table 3, adequate
length of test piece shall be cut from each end and subjected to physical tests, namely, size, surface condition, tensile, bend and wrapping tests. A test piece failing to meet any one of the requirements,
shall be called a defective. If the number of defectives
found, is less than the number of permissible
number of defectives specified in co13 of Table 3, the lot shall be considered to have conformed to physical requirements
A-3.1

otherwise

not.

A-3.2
Test for Chemical
Requirements-Unless
followed for chemical
requirements:

otherwise

agreed

the following

procedure

shall be

From those test pieces which have conformed

to physical requirements,
furthers test pieces shall be
selected at random according to col 4 of Table 3. These samples shall be tested for all the chemical requirements.
If test piece fails to meet the respective chemical requirement,
it shall be called a defective.
The lot shall be considered
to have conformed
to the chemical
requirements
if all the individual
test
pieces tested for chemical requirements
pass the test, otherwise not.

A-4. Criteria for Conformity.

A-4.1 A lot shall be considered
andA.3.2aresatisfied.

462

to have conformed

to the requirements

HANDBOOK

ON

of the specifications

INDUSTRIAL

if A-3.1

FASTENERS-PART

SP : 29-1985

INDEX
Allowable

deviations

Aluminium,

for dimensions

aluminium

without

specified

tolerances

2102

alloy

Bolt and screw stock 1284

Rivet, bolt and screw stock
Rivet stock 740
Rivets for aircraft

3577

General requirements
9089
Wire 8513,8514,8515,8936,8937,8938
Bars for threaded components
2591
Bolt
Dimensions
for radii under the head 4172
Dimensions
for split pin holes, wire holes and head slots 9549
Dimensions
of ends 1368
Hexagon head, width across flats 9519
Metric, dimensions
for clearance holes 1821
Nominal and threaded lengths 4206
Stock, aluminium
and aluminium
alloy ( see under aluminium
and aluminium
Chamfers for general engineering
purposes 3457
Clearance holes for metric bolts, dimensions
1821
Countersinks
and counterbores,
dimensions
for 3406
Countersunk
head screws,
head configuration
and
Cross recesses, dimensions
7478

gauging

Dimensions,
general tolerances
2102
Dimensions
without specified tolerances,
allowable
deviations
Drawing, engineering,
tolerances
of form and position 8000

alloy

11362

2102

Fasteners
Code for packaging
9141
Dimensioning
8536
Dimensions
for copper rods for 5053
Features of 8535
Non-threaded,
sampling 6821
Packaging 9141
Sampling 2614
Terminology
8535, 8537
Threaded, technical
supply conditions

1367

Form and position

General tolerances
2102
Tolerances
for engineering
Galvanized
Knurls,

coatings

dimensions

on fasteners

drawings
5358

for 3403

Nomenclature
And terminology
of fasteners 8537
Assembly tools for nuts and screws
Numerical
value, rounding off 2
Recess penetration
Rivet
Bars

gauges

ON

INDUSTRIAL

6293

7479

High tensile steel 1149

Hot rolled steel 1148
Mild steel, shipbuilding
3298
Steel, for boilers 1990
Cold forged, steel wire 7557
Low carbon steel wire for 4882
Stock, wrought aluminiumlalloy
HANDBOOK

8000

FASTENERS-PART

740, 5477
1

463

SP :29-1985

Rivets, aircraft
Aluminium
alloy wire, 8513, 8514, 8515, 8936, 8937, 8938
9069
General requirements
Screw thread
And ends for thread cutting tapping screws, dimensions
Dimensions
for external inference 2186
Dimensions
of, run-outs and undercuts 1369
For tapping screws 5957
Gauging practice 2334
IS0 metric 4216
Studs
Depth of hole for 4499
Length, nominal and threaded 4206
Supply of metallurgical
materials
1387

7800

Tapping screws
Dimensions
for screws thread 5957
Mechanical
properties
7178
Thread cutting, dimensions
for screws threads and ends for 7800
Thread
Cutting tapping screws, dimensions
of screw threads and ends 7800
Fit, external interference,
dimensions
2186
Threads, screw
Aeronautics,
tolerances
for 8141
For thread forming tapping screws, dimensions
5957
Gauging practice 2334
IS0 matric 4218
Run-outs and undercuts 1369
Threaded components,
hot rolled bars for 2591
Threaded fasteners, technical
supply conditions
1387
Washers
General requirements
5369
Spring, steel for 4072
Wire
Aluminium/alloy,
for rivets, aircrafts,
inspection
Aluminium
alloy, for cold forged rivets, aircraft
Mild steel, half round for split pins 8563
Rod, mild steel, for machine screws 2255
Steel
For machme screws 1673
For rivet 4882
Cold forged 7557
For wood screw 1812
Wood screws, technical supply conditions
for 451

464

and testing 8474

8513, 8514, 8515, 8936, 8937, 8938

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

NUMERICAL
1. IS : 2-1960
2. IS :451-1972
3. IS : 740-1977
4. IS: 1148-1982
5. IS :1149-1982
6. IS :1284-1975
7. IS : 1367 (Part I)-1980
8. IS : 1367 (Part 2)-1979
9. IS : 1367 (Part 3)-1979
10. IS : 1367 (Part 5)-1980
11. IS: 1367 (Part 6)-1980
12. IS : 1367 (Part 7)-1980
13. IS : 1367 (Part 9)-1979
14. IS : 1367 (Part IO)-1979
15. IS : 1367 (Part 12)-1981
16. IS : 1367 (Part 13)-1983
17. IS : 1367 (Part l6)-1979
18. IS : 1367 (Part 18)-1979
19. IS. 1368-1987
20. IS : 1369-1982
21. IS : 1387-1967
22. IS : 1673-1984
23. IS : 1812-1982
24. IS:l821-1987
25. IS : 1990-1973
26. IS : 2102 (Part l)-1980
27. IS :2186-1967
28. IS : 2255-1977
29. IS : 2334-1975
30. IS:2591-1982
31. IS : 2614-1969
32. IS : 3298-1981
33. IS : 3403-1981
34. IS : 3406 (Part I)-1986
35. IS : 3406 (Part 2)-1986
36. IS : 3457-1987
37. IS : 3577-1967
38. IS : 4072-1972
39. IS :4172-1987

3
205
329
333
337
341
207
210
229
242
248
255
257
266
275
279
283
288
299
302
403
346
348
308
352
9
123
356
128
359
405
362
11
18
23
27
366
431
310

INDEX
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
6!.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.

IS : 4206-1987
IS:4218 (Part l)-1976
IS :4218 (Part 2)-1976
IS :4218 (Part 3)-1976
IS :4218 (Part 4)-1976
IS :4218 (Part 5)-1979
IS :4218 (Part 6)-1978
IS : 4499-1968
IS : 4882-1979
IS : 5053-1969
IS : 5369-1975
IS : 5957-1970
IS : 6293-1981
IS : 7178-1982
IS : 7478-1985
IS :7+79-1985
IS;7557-1982
IS : 7800-1975
IS : 8000 (Part I)-1985
IS : 8000 (Part 2)-1976
IS : 8000 (Part 3)-1985
IS : 8000 (Part 4)-1976
IS:8141-1976
IS : 8474-1977
IS :8513-1977
IS :8514-1977
IS :8515-1977
IS : 8535-1977
IS : 8536-1977
IS : 8537-1977
IS : 8563-1977
IS : 8936-1978
IS : 8937-1978
IS : 8938-1978
IS :9089-1979
IS:9141-1979
IS : 9519-1980
IS :9549-1980
IS : 11362-1985

312
147
153
157
165
180
192
315
368
372
434
438
439
292
451
453
373
456
29
54
60
65
200
421
379
381
384
75
85
96
459
386
389
392
395
425
317
320
323

SP:

29-1985

IS0

STANDARDS

ON BASIC

FEATURES

OF FASTENERS

IS0
68

1973

IS0

225

1983

Fasteners-Bolts,
dimensions

261

1973

IS0

general

purpose

metric

screw

threads-General

plan

262

1973

IS0
and

general
nuts

purpose

metric

screw

threads-Selected

sizes

Title
general

purpose

screw

threads-Basic

screws,

studs

profile

and

nuts-Symbols

and

272

1982

Fasteners-Hexagon

273
724

1979

Fasteners-Clearance

1978

IS0

885
888

1976

General

1976

Bolts, screws
purpose
bolts

898/l
898/2

1978

Mechanical

properties

of fasteners-Part

1: Bolts

screws

1980

Mechanical
values

properties

of fasteners-Part

2: Nuts

with

898/5

1980

Mechanical
fasteners

965/l

1980

IS0 general
basic data

purpose

metric

965/2

1980

IS0 general
for general

purpose
purpose

metric screw threads-Tolerances-Part

bolt and nut threads-Medium
quality

965/3

1980

IS0 general
constructional

purpose
metric
threads

1478
1502
1891
2702
2770

1983

Tapping

1978

IS0

metric

products-Width
holes

screw

bolts

and

and

and

screws

general

flats

series-Radii

lengths,

screw

and

thread

under

the

lengths

for

and

screw

proof

and similar

threads-Tolerances-Part

Bolts,

Heat-treated

1974

Tapping
lengths

3269

1984

Fasteners-Acceptance

3508

1976

Thread
run-out
IS0 262

1977

Threaded

1983

Fasteners-Ends

metric

nuts
steel

screws

screw

accessories-Terminology
screws-Mechanical

according

to ISO/R

3: Deviations

and nomenclature

1478

to 1483-Minimum

thread

in accordance

and

with

load

fatigue

with

external

testing-Part
metric

with

1: Test
IS0

Fasteners-Thread

Tolerances
for fasteners-Part
1: Bolts, screws
between
1.6 ( inclusive)
and 150 mm ( inclusive)

4759/2

197:

Tolerances
for fasteners-Part
2: Bolts, screws and nuts with thread
from 1 up to 3 mm and product
grade F, for fine machines

4759/3

1977

Tolerances
for fasteners-Part
with thread
diameters
from
A and C

7378
7721

1983

Fasteners-Bolts,

1983

Countersunk

8749
8839

1986

Pins

1986

Mechanical
non-ferrous

properties
metals
system

466

screws
head

grooved

for

external

3: Washers
1 up to and

and

metric

pin

configuration

pins-Shear

IS0

threads

and nuts with thread

and product grades

diameters
A, B and C
diameters

for materic
bolts, screws
including
150 mm-Product

studs-Split

screws-Head

holes
and

and

methods

undercuts

261

thread

Designation

maximum

IS0

1978

Fasteners-General

for

properties

1983

of sizes

inspection
fasteners

of parts

and

threads-Gauging

and

fasteners-Axil

1986

threaded

2: Limits

threads-Tolerance-Part

tapping

for

1986

load

1: Principles

4755
4759/l

8991
8992

general

studs

specified

5: Set screws

head

thread

and

bolts

dimensions

studs-Nominal

purpose

screws,

for screws,

of

screws

screws-Metric

properties
of fasteners-Part
not under tensile
stresses

1974

across

bolts

threads-Basic

purpose

1979

3800/
4753

for

designations

and

wire

and

nuts
grade

holes

gauging

test

of fasteners-Bolts,

screws,

studs

and

nuts

made

of

for fasteners
requirements

for

bolts,

HANDBOOK

ON

screws,

studs

INDUSTRIAL

and

nuts

FASTENERS-PART